·BOMBAY.
IRINEI
TIL
f. AND
11:1

·पौरजानपदशिक्षणाधिक्री SWAMI
नियुक्तस्य गजपुरुषाज्ञया
1149.
TIRUVADI
संस्कृतमन्दियन्त प्रवेशिका
H
नाम पाठावलिः
मुम्बापुरम्य गुगंपायपण्डितपरिषरत्नमारनेर आर आरतिशमण्यदेशीयगोत्रा
गणपवित्परिपहनफिलामगि सनर एन आशिउम्
माजिम्नेरेत्युपपदद्वयंभारणा hirt
दन्दनगजधानीवतिपारम्त्यदेशवृत्तान्वेषणपग्पण्डितसदमा स्वसदस्यपदं
प्रापिनन दक्षिणापथनिविद्यालयम्धप्रधानमंस्कृताध्यापकेन
Advygi
भाण्डारकरोपाभिधेन गोपालसूनुना रामकृष्णेन
विचिना।
तन्मनुना माम्नर आर आत्युपपधारिणा
श्रीधरेण च
ननिर्दिष्टदिशा प्रपञ्चिता मंशाधिता च ।
सा च मम्बापुरवर्तिराजकीयग्रन्थशालाधिकारिणा प्रकाशिता
सप्तमीयमकनावृत्तिः ।
शकनृपममाः १८१० !
मूल्यमों रूपकः ।

·मुम्बापुर्या निर्णयसागरास्थ्यमुद्रायन्त्रालयेऽक्षरमुद्राभिर्गतम् ·1749 PREFINE TO THE SLYTII EDITION. The follow me the principal changes wid iuditions made in the prene'nt adition (1) The first lesson in the piros ponts mituns treated Dot De Potential mood of the first lass of conjugations. But that moond having now beci Pan-terred to the Fut pork the lesson has been taken out. The first lonel Boots treats ont !! bugulanties of the 1st, Ith, bith and 10th conjugation in which wo attached Sanhuit and English spontaneros irroin with Sanskrit and Englihi wabulares (3) T. I, omnes on the Futures and ther conditionniotomilles writtoihin. ption trrating of the laali. Le novca tion per atteny the Aorist and polla vitor then Perfect, 11 :). Borges with the practice in our Hili Siloul of in:aching !! 1,pouleatoly after the latte). .:3) UI tho Sinkut int. Erelinli vebularies occurring in bon bouls of the book bindi ..! colecciod together into it "Opera Cibo--121 of the end of all the English into San- Loom whicoull be casily atbosnad to the kinuhun vi, Bhattkurva, im Haláyil- Thai Kunala-va lave bore }) debeat to the mercises here ullare It is all that the video of the last two works 1}" pelaj lihely tud 09-21milies and insel words not eommon US in the stau Sarkiis lit.atu OD 11. Or uscal It lonk wir be born in mind that the turut lund probably in the 7maseutiliy as Bana and before Bhubbûts, both of whom are per 2012. - standard authores, and the wond buttorin osattomthat there must luise brenda git dial 100proof Sien-dunt literaturo portant in Wrir time than these is at present, and that their objeet being the same as that of this would ther. Fir-t Book, viz., to) tach the language, they probably del 2009 r. words withont having met with installer of!10: litlir literatury piting in their time. S. R. B. Pursen 31** A 1857 ܐܙܢ ܐܐ ܐܐܐ ·PREFACE TO THE FIRST- ENTION. This second Book of fuskait has been prepared coming in a -Auctions from Sir A. Citant, Director of Public Instruction. Its plan is nearly the same in that of the l'irt Bouk, which the student is supposed to have sex and masterul. Each bermacol consists of four putns-1-t, (irammar, 2nd, Sanskrit sentences for translatwn into Engli-li, lr, Finlialı soutine's for translation into Sanskrit ---the intended to excicin the student in thin rules of Camariven at the top of':') LA on; and tth. a Vocabulary. This and the First Boule tengother contain as much anmar as is needed for a partial purpos, perhaps more. I have adopted the terminology of the English (irummarians of Sanskrit, but have strictly followed l'únini, as explained by Bhatti Diksluita in his Sulalautakumdî Most of the Jules are inere translations of this Sutris. Besides the torms Cina, Vriddhi, and a few others, which have been a lopted rom Native Grammarians by ucarly all European writers on the subject, I have found it necessary to appropriate two morin viz, Set and Anit. The prejudice against mero Vatro • terms, in referenc. to which Professor Benfey seems in his maller (irammar to have liscarılıd even the worils Ginna und Vriddhi, without substituting any others, is in my luble pinion very measunable, ulien it is difficult to frame new work to designate the things which they signify. It is very inconvenient to have to de-cribe the same thing again and ngain whenever one has occasion to speak of it. It will at the same time be sumewhat difficult for the learner to make out, when a thing is so described in a variety of cases, that it is the same. Words adapted to express a particular incaning are in necessary here as in other affairs of human life. What ·VIII PREFACE, an anigunt of inconvenience would it, for instance, enta whenever we had to speak of the human race, we were stead of being allowed to use the word “man, " made to scribe man's physical and rational natáres? But I mus Berate an ordinary truisin to the rank of a newly-discov ruth. The smeral rule of Grammar, nd such exceptions an important, have been given in this book; those of thel importance only being omitted. Such an omission is apt renler a book liable to the charge of inaccuracy. But i unavoidable in an elementary work, and after all it will ] sluco little or if prictical iironvenience. Pist, !! 'Phere is one point in Sanskrit Grammar, in my explanat of which I liave departed from orilinary usage, though I thi I do agree with Pánini in lus ('ominentators It is the sei to be attached to the so-called Aorist. The inost laboric wment of a deal language is not alive to all the nice shac of meaning, which are plain even to the uninstructed whici !anguae in living. Even to a Maha-Pandita in these da the sound of fat is not at all so disagreeable as that of the s to the genuine Marathî peasant. We know of the distiu *ion lwtween the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada only theory, but that between the sands of the Marathî habitu the and go of the Future we feel. We mus boerfore, to determine this question about the Aorist, il peal to suche Sanskrit works its we have reason to suppos musta haie been written when Sanskrit was a spoken lau unga The Kavyas, the Váțakas, and most of the Purana will not alo for onr purpose. Such books as the Sanilitás a the Vedas, the Bráhmanas, oi tren tliose portions of the twe great Epies which do not bear indications of having beer subsequently tampered withi, nust be referred to. To insti. ute sich a wide rescarch I have neither had the nece ary time her the necessary means. But the Aitareya Brahmaņa which I have read, seemis almost to decide the point. In this work wherever stories are tuld, the so-called Inperfect or the ·PREFACE ix Perfect is always used, and the Aorist never occurs. On the contrary, when the persous in the story are represented as speaking with one another they use the Aorist, and the only sense that can be attached to it in these cases is that of the Englislı P:esent Perfect, in other wouli, it inchicates simply the completion of an active or an action that has just or recently been done. The reason why tho Avrist occurs in these cases only is that there if no scope for recent puest time in mere narrations; am thung that have. gust or recently occured can come to be spokea vt' only when persons are talking with each other. The picco glen at the end of this book contains passages remarkably illustrating what I way. The story you's.-" Hans chaudha said to Varuna, “Let a son be born tu me and I will then offer him as a sacritico to you.' - Woll,' and Vanna. Then it son was born to him. Tlien aid Varuna. You have crot n son sacrifice him to me now. Then said Havin'chandra, .When a victim becomes tun dayold, then be in tit to be sacritical Lottlie looy become to days old, I will then sieutice him to you. Well,' said Varuņil. Tlit boy became ten days old. Then said Varuni, · He has become ten days old, sacuticu lim now to me,' ”ınd phus it proceeds. Now in this and the remaining portion of the khanda the verbs sail" (ccuning several times), "was boru," "became, anlo others that are used by the narrator peaking in his own person, are always in the Perfect, whilo have got," " has become," &c., used by Varuņu witherefek - He to the boy, are in the Aurist. The latter clearly refer to a time just gone by. In the same manner, in the story of 2 In the püsige noticed below, we have A TRAIE TITL, where 91977 1110 Jurist of 3719 with and in itsel in the maritim of it point event, but 11 the whole of the Bratwit ka there is. mufar as I can recollect, it a single Istance besides this where the narrator uses the dorst in speaking of a qasi action. The codence long then wollen helming, some other explamiliun must be attempted ju the present n. and this example vligt ly 10 means to be taken to invalidate the post on in the text. Perhaps whe: The realing vi lele boubs was fixed, 0197 and ATMINST which occurs une mediately after, were, through mistake, made to exchange places, ·PREF.ICE. Nábláncdishțlia, related in the fourteenth Khanda of the Fifth Pajichiki. the verbs अभाना, अभाक्षः, अदुः, and आदित used By..Vâbliápedishtha, and evidently, from the context, denoting events that have just lappened, are in the Aorist, as also अवादीः used by Rudra. While when the author, in narrating the story, speaks of certain things as having taken place, he invariably uses the Imperfect, thege events from his point of view having wccurred at a rungote past time. Siinilar instances in which the Aorist on the one hand, and the Inperfect or the Perfect on the other, art used exactly in the same Way in 1-23, 2-19. 3-33, +-17; (6-33, 6-34, 7-27, 7-S, 8-7, S:37 ; while narrativcon, in which the Perfect on the Imperfect only is 11:, and there there is either no Comer sation, or when there is, it is only with reference to present os future time', ide immunerable. 7--21and 5-3+ may also be consiltod + (OCCU IIL 18 en hel : - --- with the wholere of gettin: horus :.11 Malha || 111 । ... ... 11t-यम्म कामा यादीक्षामहापाम नमनिष्टाम: The collect wbuela We undeltanatime -th || Hot He hastm WITH 11 milk Hol आपाम i. : ...!! | आप hane got or obtain- 1. अदीक्षामाह Atli mpateci ut in costumly alinea 11 ( Hit Htli.it hit happental. † Some of poster pum litla locul 11•11 the levels in the list. : 1) - It 111 th !.instiane of th1- Bhilhuman tv in setthal torm- .! | rally at the list. I will hata }-1 of the form of the 1../im lefuted to the rear 11 will the shown further in that the brûltulluses the rules and Hamm futhiully in the use of the first and the {..ity in the not unil - that the form at thin tent with oint" tration that mm.in.in chopt maith its अजान आदित मा परिगान आसिपन अग्रहीत् अमृत अवादी: अपत् अमंस्त अचारीत् अमू अस्तृत अहोपात् अपत्मत अदीक्षिष्ट अवधी. अदात् अगासीत् अवांचत् मा पात् अवोचः अवधीत् अभान अकर अबोचम् अजीजनत् असीत् अभाव. अबोचन् अजेपी: अयाशीत् मा रथाः आपाम् अज्ञास्थाः अद्रुक्ष मागात अदर्शम् आझासम् अवाक्षी अवांचत् मा दुषत् म ·PREFACE. xi We thus see that the so-called Aorist denotes recept past time or the more completion of an action, and thus resembles the English Present Perfect. And this is confirmed by wbat Panini says on the subject. The Stras which gire the senses of the three past tenses are or 3-2-110; 07- out of 3-2-111: gott faz '3-2-115. They are thus to be interpreted :-" or the Aurist indicates past time; us or the Imperfect show's a prank action dong previnis to this day; and face or the Perfect, it past event which took place before this day, and which was not witnessed by the speaker." Non the first Sûtra gives a general anlı', the second is an exceptim to it, and the third apel excrption to this again ; The pitst timc, therefore, left aceording to Panini's system of rules oild ('ceptions, for 3 to indicate, is sponta, that is to nay, this cluy's. O can also by these Sûtras indicate past time grurmully, i.e., express imply the completion of an action without reference to any particular time. For, the catery purst tiine can admit of three divisions only according to the principle indicated in the Satars, viz., past time Jenerally and not specifically, the past time of this day, and olie past time previous to this day. The list is taken up by it and prose and the first two belong, therefore, to e. By another Sutra Thieft:, Panini, 3-3-135, presses recent and continuons past action, in additiov. Su ilmt according to Panini, e indicates (1) pasť time generally, (??) the past time of this day and not previous to this day and (3) recent past tiunc. Now all these characteristics we find in the English Present Perfect and not in the Indefinite Past. For, firxi, if we want to express imply the completion of an actiou, i.e., past time generally without reference to any particular past time, we do not use the Indefinite Past in Englislı, but the Present Perfect. 'I read Sir Walter Scott's Ivanhoe' necessarily implies somo of these # forms only fire अझत. अकत. अकर् . आनासम् anil अक्ष lo not ounform to the rule, laid duwu by Pipil lor iht Bláslá - the Sauskuit current in hus timc. (1883).

·PREFACE. particular time when the action of reading was done; in other words, the sense of the sentence is not complete without the specification of some time. We must add some such expression as two years ago,' or the particular time must be understood from the context. But when we say 'I have read Sir Walter Scott's Ivanhoe there is no such necessity. Secondly, the English Present Perfect like the Sanskrit can denote, ifoit denotes any specific time at all, the past time of this day only. For 'I lave read the book to-day' in good English; but I have read the book yesterday' or 'o yrar ago' is not. And, thirdly, the Present Perfect, as is gonerally admitted, denotes recent time in English. My object lias been to render this as much a Sanskrit Reading Book as a book on Sanskrit Grammar; in other words, not only to teach grammatical forms to the student, but to enable him to construe Sanskrit. I have, therefore, in addition to the sentences composed by myself, given in nearly all the lessons in good many extracts containing examples of the particular rules, from original Sanskrit works, such as the Aitareya Brahmana, the Upanishads, the Mahâbhârata, Kadambari, the Panchatantra, and the Raghuvains'a. With the same object, three long prose pieces, illustrative of thre different styles, and one poctical, have been given at the end. One of the former is from the Aitareya Brahmana, chosen on account of its richuess in verbal forms and the strength, purity, and simplicity of its style. The English sentences have, of course, all becn composed by me. I hope Teachers and Students will find this book useful. Such improvements as experience may show to be necessary will be made in subsequent editions, Ratnagiri, R. G. B. sth April, 1868.

·PREFACE. viii PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The observationsanade in the Preface to the last edition as to the sense of the Aorist have been confirmed by several passages I have met with in the Sinilitâs of the Vedas and in Brahmanas other than the Aitareyr. But since this is hardly the place for an aborate essay on the subject, I forbear to make any additioh to what I have already said on the -1lbject. I have only meant the remarks contained in the Preface on the meaning of the Sůtras of Pånini bearing on the question Bombay, R. G. B. With April 1870. PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. GRAMMAR was not an empiric study with Panini and the ther ancient grammarians of India. Those grent sages obsrved carefully the facts of their language and endeavoured always to connect them together by a law or rule and to bring These laws again under still inore general laws. Sanskrit Tirammar has thus become a science at their hands, and its study possesses an educational value of the same kind as that of Euclid and not much inferior to it in degree. For, to make up a particular forin, the mind of the student has to go through it certain process of synthesis. He lias to mark the mutual onnections of the rules lie has learnt, and in each given'case, to find out which of them, from the conditions involved, hold Good in that case, and to apply them in regular succession, until he arrives at the form required. A mere unscientific teaching of the forms as such and mixing them up unconnectedly into a list, our grammarians never resorted to, so long as they could trace a resemblance even between two of them, if not more. Convinced of the utility of this system, I tried in this book to adhere to Pånini so far as was convenient or practicable, and to give his general rules instead of splitting them up into ·xiv PREFACE. the particular cases they comprehend. In this manner also I was able to compress a great deal of matter into a comparatively small space. But the book necessarily became difficult, since instead of placing a ready-made form before the student it gave him only the rules and required him to constitute it for himself. Experience, however, both as a learner and as a teacher, has taught me that Sanskrk Grammar learnt according to the latter method is more caply and longer remembered thau if learnt empirically. And I maintain that the bouk, as it was, was not at all difficult, in the hands of a good teacher. But to meet the views of those who think otherwise, I have, in this edition, increased the number of examples without interfering with the system, and added explanations to show how to derive then and how, generally, to apply the rules in particular cases. All this new matter has been printed in small type. I have thus myself done, in a great measure, what I expected teachers to do and what I, as a teacher, ouce did. Several other changes and alterations haic been made in this edition. Separate vocabularies have been given for the English exercisey, the two lessous on the sccond? conjngation have been expauded into four, the number of verses from Bhartrihari has been reduced, and the passage from Kaulan barî removed and another somewhat shorter and much simpler from the same work, substituted for it. I have also here and there added a few rules, especially in the lesson on compounds, and given a few more exercises. I'was not so sanguine about the success of this book as of the first. But I am very happy w perceive that this also has met with favour, and that along with the first it has become the means, howsoever humble, of facilitating and promoting the study of the language of the ancient Rishis among their inodern descendants. R. G. B. Bombay, 15th April 1873.

·CONTENTS. PAGE. V 1 .. ......... ... TATTACLS.. 1:SSON | lrregularities prolonging to the 1st, 4th, Gth, and 10th Conjugations II. FIFTII AND EIGHTH COVJIGATIONS. Present Tonne 11 III. -Imprrfect Tense .... 17 IV. -Iimperative and Potential 20 V. Vistu CUJUGATION.-Present and Imperative. 25 11. Imperfect and Potential 31 VII. StronD COVOCATION.-Present and Imperative 34 VIII. -Imperfect and Powential 43 IX. Swo CONJUGATION (rontinuel) - Present and Imzorative 48 X. -Imperfect and Potential 57 XI. Turi) CULATION 61 XII. SEVESTU CONJUGATION 69 XIII. Perfect XIV. (continued) 84 IV. Part I. First and Second Futures, and Condi. 93 tional Part II. Passive forms 99 XVI. Declensional Irregularities 102 XVII. Numerals 116 XVIII. Comparative aud Superlative Degrees of Adjectives, &c. 134 XIX. COMPOUND NOCX8.-Drandva and Tatpurusha. 131 XX. Bahuvrſhi and Avyayibhava.... 139 XXI. Causals 146 XXII. AORIST._First, Second and Third Varieties 151 XXIII, -Sixth and Seventh Varieties ... 160 ......... ...

·xvi
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT.
PAGE.
.......
......
......
LLSHON XXIV. Part I. AORIST.-Fourth and Fifth Varieties. 164
Part II. Benedictive Mood
174
XXV. Desideratives
176
XXVI. VERBAL DERIVATIVES.--Past, Perfect,
Future, and Potential;Participles, &c. 181
SLECTIONS TOR EXERCISE. From the Aitareya Brihmaņa. 188
The Three Rogues
192
The Brahmana and the Cobra.......
193
From Bhartrihari's Nitis'ataka
191
From Kadambari
199
GLASBANY_Sanskrit into English
201
English into Sanskrit
243
.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. LESSON I. गुए IRREGULARITIES NELONGSG TO THE Ist, fru, GTH, AND 10TI CONJUGATIONS. 1. 'to protect' Parasm., y to heatº Parasm., free "to go' or approach' Piyasm., 79 Parusm., when it means 'to praise,' and gra to praise' Parasm., all of the 1st conjugation, have it alded on to them before the conjugational sign; as पणायति. धूपायति. &c. The 3 of my trkes its Guña substitute betore this आय्. । गोपायति. आप is optionally retained in the non-conjugational trusesti tor and tako the Åtmanepada terminations when they do not take this आप as पणते. 2. भाश. Atn., भलाश Atm. aml भ्रम्, कम कम्, अस्, ल, and with Hy or withoat any proposition, all Parism., belong both to the 1st and to the tth conjugation, and Paraxт. to the 4th and 6th, its TV Or NTT. 3. The penultimate 37 of in lengthened when it takes Parasmaipaila terminations in the conjugationl tenses, as कामति or काम्यति; bnt Atm., आक्रमते ; similarly कम, and चम् 1st conj. with 57, lengthen their vowels. 4. TE and when it means to sharp or pare,' literally and 10t metaphorically, belong to the 1st and 5th conjuga- 'tions, as put or repulifa. 5. EHT' to blow,' 'to smell,' 1 'to think,' 'to go,' when it means to run,' 'to restrain,' and शद *to perish,' all of the 1st conjugation, substitute in the conjugational tenses धम्, जि, मन्, ऋच्छ्, धौ, यन्छ, and शीय, respectively, 23 ft, fafa, &c. The last is Âthanjavi in tlie conjugational tenses. 6. The penultimate 7 of ik is lengthened before the conjugational sigu and before any strong or Guña-making termination with an initial vowel, as to find For an explanation of this expireyson nec les ll. নস্থ ·2 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 7. देश con- . and सा Parasm., 713 Åtm., and रङ्ग Parasin. and Atm., all of the 1st conjugation, drop their nasal before the conjugational sign, as दशति, स्वजते, &c. 8..' When a radical # ( long ) does not undergo Guņa or Vriddhi substitute, it is changed to and to sy if a labial or precedes. The ç or 3 of these is lengthened when a sonant follows. Thus ज +th conj. forms जीर्यति, क 6th conj. किरति, and कृत 10th conj. कीर्तयति, &:. 9. Roots of the 4th conjugation, ending in uit drop it before the conjugational sign. Thus, सो forms स्यति, दो, यति, शो, श्यति, and छो. छ्यति, 10. दिव, शिव, शम्, तम्, दम्, श्रम्, and मद, all of the 4th conjugation, and and , when of the 4th conjugation, lengthen their vowel in the conjugational tonstis, as दीव्यति. भ्राम्यति or अमति &c. भ्रम् has भम्यति also /11. ध्य 4th con. in modified into fare before the y of that conjugation, a- विध्यति. 12. The ending t on उ short or long is changed to इय् or उन respectively befort' अ. the sign of the oth conjugation (ne Rule II , Leson II., a रि-रियति, नू नुवति, धू-धुवति. and both of the 6th conjugation are modified . into भृग्ज. and the conjugational tenses; as भृग्जति, क्षति, &c. 14. The and is changed to a when not dropped. (53). 15. लुप, लिए, विद्. कृत. nd पिश, all of the oth conj., insert it nasal before the final in the conjugational tenses; as forefa. 16. Some roots of the 10th conjugation are exclusively Atmanepudi, such arतन्त्र चित् भर्त्स मन्त्र तर्न विद. &c.: तन्त्रयते, तयते.&e 17. Many rints belong optionally to the 1st or 10th conjugation. such as पुज, पृच. सह. दृ . . ज़, रिच, तप. तृए, दृभ, भाई. &c.: योगति. योजयति. &c. वैषम्यमपि प्राप्ता धैर्यधनाः साधव आत्मनः सचरणवतं गोपायन्ति। 13. प्रश् .

·SECOXD BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 3 स्वजनवियोगेन व्यथितं मे मनो निष्ठाशून्यं भ्रमतीव ।। मार्गे बन्यानां कुसुमानामामोदमुपजिवन्तौ तौ दम्पती ऋषे- राश्रममगच्छताम् । अयं शीत आकाशवायुस्तव मुखे धर्मजान्स्वेदलवानाचामति। नदतः सिंहस्य स्वनं श्रुत्वा यथा सर्वे मृगास्वसन्ति तथैव भीमस्य शब्दं श्रुत्वा सर्वे योधा अत्रस्यन् । गगनमध्यमारूढस्य सवितुःप्रचण्डेन तापेन कान्तोऽयं शिखी तरोरालवाले स्थितं शीतमुदकं पर्याप्तमाचामति । निदाघेऽल्पैरपि तोयैमालाकारेण या तरोः पुष्टिविरच्यते सा किमनल्पान्यपि तोयानि विश्वतो विकिरता वारिदेन जनयितुं शक्या। श्रोत्रियायाभ्यागतांय वत्सतरी महोशं महाजं वा निर्वपन्ति गृहमेधिनः । तं हि धर्म धर्मसूत्रकाराः समामनन्ति । प्रत्युत्पन्नमतिःप्राप्तां क्रियां कर्तुं व्यवस्थति ॥ एतान्यनीकानि महानुभावं गृहन्ति मेघा इव रश्मिमन्तम् ॥ यावत् प्रतापनिधिराकमते न भानु- रहाय तावदरुणेन तमो निरस्तम् ॥ व्यतिपजति पदार्थानान्तरः कोऽपि हेतु- ने खलु बहिरुपाधीन्प्रीतयः संश्रयन्ते । .लिम्पतीव तमोऽङ्गानि वर्षतीवाअनं नमः । असत्पुरुषसेवेव समिनिष्फलतां गता ॥ त्वं तेनाभिहितः पथ्यं किं कोपं न नियच्छसि ॥ I with 347 when it meau- 10 "1146 up on Atmane paidu if used of a heuvenly brady. + दुधाचपचदण्इनधिच्छिांचवृशामजिममषां । कर्मयुक स्यादकथितं तथास्यानी- हकृयवहाम 11 lb. Dents enum ratulher awl root. hrasing the wanne wense as these govern twin cobert, its a pioneral rult. one direct and the other indirect. In the priveste the indirect uljert of this consta frolu 38 to Ty and tbeir equivalents is put in the nominatise and chor direct in the accusa. ture , and in the care of tlt. Ickoth नी, ह, कृष् l वह and their equivalents the direct othyrict i- put in the nominative and the other in the accusative; गलि याचने वसुधाम् .Ict he is the earth of Bali'. यलिया॑च्यते वसुधाम् Pase. ; शतं जयति देवदनम् .ict • he winr a hundred (coins) from Devadatta,' शतं बीयते देवदत्तः Pan.. ग्राममजां नयनि ..tt., ग्राममना नीयते Pax. In the present rere धा enth अभि of which अभिहित is the part part. rau. has the same sense as 5 whch means to ray or speak to.' .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. प्रतधिद्विषां जरति चेतसि भोगतृष्णा तेषां वषि विपिनेषु च जारयन्ति ।। सहते शस्त्रसंपातं सहति श्रममाहवे । उत्साहयति तश्चित्तमपि जेतुं शचीपतिम् ॥ पूजामहति सर्वेषामृपीणामाश्रमेऽप्यसौ। अर्हयत्यय॑सत्कारं मधुपर्क च पावनम् ।। न क्षाम्यति क्षितीशानामपराधलवानपि । अपराधसहस्राणि क्षमते यो द्विजन्मनाम् ॥ नाहिर्देशयते कंचित्तद्देशे गरुडाज्ञया । यदि प्रमादाद्दशति तस्मिन्न मते विषम् ॥ न तर्जति रुपा कंचिन्नीचमप्युपकारिणम् । परं तर्जयते दुष्टान् समन्तात्संगतान्मिथः॥ कोटिभिः पणते नित्यं राष्ट्र तस्य वणिग्जनः । यक्षाश्चापि पणायन्ति तद्विभूति गृहेगृहे ॥ सोंऽभिलषति श्रीमानिन्द्रियार्थोपसेवनम् । अभिलष्यत्यसौ योगी तेभ्य एव निवर्तनम् ।। लुम्पति प्रतिपक्षाणां स लक्ष्मी वाणवृष्टिभिः । न लुप्यति मतिस्तस्य सकलेऽप्यर्थसंशये ॥ अर्जते धर्ममवैकमर्थ धर्मार्थमर्जति । अर्जयत्यूजिताल्लोकान् स धर्मेणैव शाश्वतान् ॥ सर्वस्य जायते मानः स्वहिताच प्रमाद्यति । वृद्धौ भजति चापथ्यं नरो येन विनश्यति ।। भजन्ति विपदस्तूर्णमतिकामन्ति संपदः । तान्मदानावतिष्ठन्ते ये मते न्यायवादिनाम् ॥ प्राशास्तेजस्विनः सम्यक्पश्यन्ति च वदन्ति च । तेऽवज्ञाता महाराज काम्यन्ति विरमन्ति च ॥ * This and the fullusiny meanzas leter te ability of the name of Krishna. + When कम् - 11: in the ture of exerating (ot • haring (ifect, it 1- Armanejali. The doublink of a crude noun ar declensional form has the scuoc w • every'. - गृहेगृहे . merely hour, दिनदिने : chery dss. स्था ॥ith सम्, अव, प on वि tal er the Atmane patelhe term:ht: ... । रम् with वि. आ. परि or उप 1- Para-marghadi.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. जीर्यन्ति जीर्यतः केशा दन्ता जीर्यन्ति जीयेतः। जीवनाशा धनाशा च जीर्यतोऽपि न जीर्यति ॥ अहो खलभुजङ्गस्य विचित्रोऽयं धधक्रमः। अन्यस्य दशति श्रोत्रमन्यः प्राणैर्वियुज्यते ॥ विधी विध्यति सक्रोधे वर्ग धर्मः शरीरिणाम् । स एव केवलं तस्मादस्माकं जायतां गतिः॥ विहितस्याननुष्ठानानिन्दितस्य च सेवनात् । अनिग्रहाचेन्द्रियाणां नरः पतनमृच्छति ॥ .. with सम्] . l' in the power of cirl by which thuis wheel of the work *." - ! [ भ्रम ]. Lurround it, buwingutide him cut him upl तक्ष 1.1 21-1 ord. Tin that anvenbli the necklaceon of many of the kings rising "}) !!! lhanti. lrke [ Jट ] by thrill pressing against one unothl. Dues that gives werpunt bite ( 51 ) throporson touchin lumuth lus tout from a line fur blood ? Hiving first bowel ts lasishtha the preceptor of the family of the Ikhviku-, Rama embraced (*) his brothers. Indrajit Ining killul, grief burnt [ भ्रग्ज ] Ravann like three cronunt of houtmely death. Ticking away that lie wlueh I live, you try ( 7 ) to tak. aastal! my life. Attracted by the tale of the lamp the moth suddenly fell tuon it an diel ( # with ane, of any). Wilıing to make the elephant un back Aja pierced [69] Jum with an arrow'. In the fight with the Rákshasa, Ráma mowed (») many hundreds of his enemies with his sharp weapons. The soul of Ráma was plunge (fr) in grief caused by hins-paration from Sitá. " Stake [पण ] thy wife Painchili, sister of Krishna, the sons of Dhritarashtra to Yudhishthira when everything besides her hail bren won by them froin him. • not page 3. " said ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. latooke great trouble (Th with g) for the recovery of the jewel snatched away by the bird. *He who is as enmity* with the great quickly perishes (ark). Tiruanıls of faults are committed by me every moment; forgive them all, o God : Ob the inexpressible power of this maid, that not only things that live [] serve her but also those that do not live! T!iis wind moist with the spray of the adjoining river gently shakes [y] the Atimukta creeper in the garden. When Aja blew ( EAT] his conch, his warriors who had fled ir way returned and saw the armies of his enemies asleep. to VOCARULARY 1. Roots. 1st comj. I'ururin. und 10th 7 1st conj. Parasm. with 39, to conj. to deserve. smell. {to drink. man Gith conj. I'verasm. to cut. 1 strony. I'arasm, to lick up, * lith conj. Parasm. to strew; 10th conj. Âim. to have life arith fe, to scatter. or motion. pa Joh conj. to celebrate, to state causal of जन्, cause, to praise, to glorify. Irring about . जनयितुम् Inf. It Ist and 4th conj. Parasm. ard Tin Borism, to walki, to step, to operate, to have 10th wonj. to grow old, to effect; trith 371, to approach, waste away, to wear out. to step or trend upon, io rise par 1st conj. Parasm. to pare, to rise up.with fa, to step or chop; with Fr, to cut to go beyond, to part from. pieces,wound,tohurt by words. Parasm. to be or become at 1st conj. Parasm. and 10th fatigued, to be cabausted, to conj. Âim, to threaten, to mede depressed. reprove. 4th coni. Parasm. to forgive. TF Pura 8m to tremble, to be afraid. 1st conj. Farasi and Atm. to conceal. Parasm. to break, to snap. nace, to I'm try tom, here which is a denominaire from all ». 'enmitri' and into twomjugated by her son of ihu 1 conjug:ion ; as á mard pers. ring. I'm ·SECOXT BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . 2 अम्ज ith .ntייייין pour dowi. ta 1st conj. Purusm. and in the fare oth conj. Parasın. and Atm. conj. Atm. to bite, to sting. to smear, to anoint. y oth comj. l'arasm. to shake, to 99 tth conj. Parasm. to be agitate. destroyed, to disappear or om 18t ronj. Purasi, to suni, Vilishi. to roar, ta thunder. लुर 6th cmj. Parasın. and नश uith वि. to porish. it to take away, to rob, to Top 1st conj to prais, to liec or plunder, to deprave of. hake at play, tv gamle 79 1st conj. I'r.18in. and Ålm. l'urism. to her, to cut, to sow; mith Alm. to buke, to scorch solve farç. to offer sacrificial food, to you l'arasm. 10) under, to rpm *** 6th conj. I'orrusw. in sunki y 1st conj. Paraso. io rain, to be immergrul.. sloker clown, lefoni. L'arusm. to r«p*at per l'h conj Puros m. to pierce, oser in the mind, to iepriat, to wound. (mow, to boar. 6th and l'arnsin. to cut, मम् T, 1.) Jopean, ' to repeat his tradition, to pre T: 181 conj. to perish, to decay. scribo, to rule, og rith FF, to resort to, to rest TH 1st conj. Purism. io koop on, to dlopend pon. ini, to hold buch, to restrain, #Trith 3, to be alle, to be crithe fa audrquate, to be up to, to foel JA Ith conj. Porrsm. 10 strive, qual to. 10 endeavour. rith q. A 1 st conj. Parus m. to cling, Thrill in the l'oras., to to where to; with fa and rfa, Separated from. I zato join together. Terith fa, to arrunza, to offert. Ith conj. Parasm. to bring to to perform. an end, to finish, to destroy; Tirith fe, to stop. with fa and 77, to determine, y Parusm. to desire; with to resolve, to endeavour, to ft, to desire, to covet, to strive. FUT rrilh 7, to stay, to abide. crave. FR. a limb. Faut pron. m. 1. f. another. wira n. a black piguent, lampa sufur m. (farus m. restraint), black. not restraining, want of restagua". (375XTA 1. doing, , fi n. an army. (straint. *xecution), not doing, omin- oon n. any unwholesome or sion to do. Wrong thing.

·8 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. sun. a crore. the mid- अपराधमांस 2. (सहस्र n. a. thou- 3TTEE m. a battle. sani), a thousand of faults. इन्द्रियार्थोपसेवन n. (इन्द्रिय अभिहित past part. 7088. of धा sense, अर्थm.object, उपसेवन n. rrith Tip, spoken to. resorting to, enjoyment)enjoy. 7 past part of गम् prith ment of the objects of the Strand 37, come, arrived ; senses, sensual enjoyment. m a (male) guest. उपकारिन् m. 1. f. benevolent. 3. mn. the chariotrer of the artista m. n. f. lofty, excellent. TIM. a hair. अर्यसत्कार m. (मत्कार m. hospi- कोटि tality), hospitality done by to m. anger. means of 37€9, 1.0, a past part, of fatigued, terials for worshipping or exhausted, languishing. honouring a guest. ferait m. (farfa f. the earth) stebiTT M. (Åstym doubt, lord of the earth, a king. danger), langer to wealth. ym. 12. f. little, ft-w, 377 खलभुजङ्ग M. (खल m. a villain, m. i. f. many, much. 15 m. i serpent) a serpert in the form of a villain. ATT 181 part. pass. of y rroth sta, despiserl, disirgard- खलु ed, disobeyed. गगनमध्य m... (गगन N. the sky, असत्पुरुषसेवा /. (सत् m. n. f. no the middle) the gooul. EET f. senice) service mmddle of the sky. of a person who is not good, that f. resource, refuge. service done to a bail or wick-TEETIT f. order or command of Garitda, the enemy of the serof ", a serpent. pent-race. TETT ind. ar. instantly, soon, eft m.the householder who squecelily. (sky. performs domestic rites. 17.WTI m. the wind in the T4 m. n. 5. (TH m. heat) pro- TTT n. r. j. internal. dueel or caused by heat. Soita m. fragrant smell, per- TTH n. inind. funne. staatitt f. (a n. living, life, STT past part of 377271.. lope,desire) desire for ascended. ym. his country [living. आलवाल.. a basin for water align* m his enemy. mund the root of a tree. aff.. his prosperity. int. verily. मध्य m. acl person. with it . Final is home to or in the nominative angular and before 11:e twinnital terminations ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 9 fully, to . 11. 11 111. n. why i heat. न्यायवादिन् m. . 1. (न्याय . Mihara adr. during that time, in what is right) one who the meanwhile. speaks what is right. of adr. quickly. TTT 1. falling, falling from तेजस्विन् mon f. brilliant, splen virtue', lepruration, ruin. did, bright, spirited. 727 N. what is wholesome Qi to n. water. salut:us. दम्पती m. dr. wife and husband. | पदार्थ 11. i thing, an object. Fam. a tootli. Tra conj. hut: . 1. f. wickel. पर्याप्तम् (dr. one's द्विजन्मन् m. (द्रि two जन्मन् ॥. heart's content. barth jone who has enu buth, TTT 111. 11. 1. punity iniy, pune, one belonging to any of the holy. first three masteaed Diamana. Tre, j. nounishment. Pafaa m. (FEAT.!. cong) on 7707" ». f. hot, tierce. who lius two tongues, o setorgrafo m. (trany M. lent) pent. sture of heut. for aram, an eliny. TTTTT.. closite fur weiblia प्रत्युत्पत्रमति m. . f. (प्रत्युत्पन 7777 m. ( m. law, perel puerl.ofg with a fat and aphorism one who wompostos H) 10.ws-witted, quick, sharp. aphorisus un luw, a wmter i gari m. it mistake. on law. : T9 m. (plural) life, धैर्यधन m.n 1. (धैर्य Courale. Teatrin (34Trüm, an attrifortitude) one who wealth but", a preculiarity, environ. is fortitude luent) outwarıl attributes, pefacra n. the hot season, sum culiarities, or environment. przfe f. cere f. shower) fafa part part. pars. of farme, shower of arrows. cunsured, censuuble. भानु m the bun fare fint puest part. pass. of spa i Tron (afro 11. worldly ento throw irith fare, dispersed. joyment, com f. thirst)thirst fareria l. desisting abstaining, for worldly enjoyment. abstinence. 777 n. opinion, advice, counsel. निहाशन्य m... .J. (निष्ठा /. tisits, मधुपर्क an offering of honey, 4 m. 1. f. vid) void of curdled inilk, &c., to a quest finity, unsteady: on his arrival. foren!. fruitlessness TETT M. a great goat. tym. n. j. Dean, low, in a HTETTE M. n. f. of great pobi. low position. lity, noble. n mar. .

·10 SECOND BOOK, OF SANSKRIT. + nan, 110- artsporih a great king. [bull. , 7 n. voice, a word. HET M.( m. a bull) a great anda m. n. f. one þaving a A n. pride, affrogance. body; in. a human being, a PIUTETT m. a gardener. fory: udr. mutually, together. TEUTAT m. (TE 1. a weapoli, TAG «dr. for which while, u lile. Finta m. falling on) a stroke Tu n a battlefield. [sun. of a weapon. रश्मिमत् m. (fon m. a ray) the farat m. a peacock. To n. a kingdom, it nation. fra Pn. 1. f. cold. f. anger. H in. fatigue. लक्ष्मी f. the goldess of wealth श्रोत्र n. ear. and beuuty; splendom, glory. श्रोत्रिय m. a Brâhmaņa learned aforma n. (aro, at m. in the Veilas. chant) merchants. संगत pust part. of गम् with सम्. That f. a beifer. united. N". the process or manner HEI, 11.1. f. whole, all. of killing. FATT 16. n. f. angry. Iru 11. 1. f. belonging to a FETUELT H. (77 n. a vow) the forest or woods. Vow' of good or virtuous conduct. TYTT ". body. वर्मन् Har incl. all. at once. atfer m. n cloud. Jarious. Hirata (dr. round about. fafeto mn. r. f. wonderful, FTE dr. correctly, well. fafara". a forest. RETA 11. serving, rosorting to, fata* aur, in all directions. practising. Pafta prest part. pass of 7 fevra past part. of FIT, abiding, withi fa, prescribed in the being, existing. scriptures. स्वजनवियोग n. separation froun f. prosperit! one's own men or relations, TT. ditli ulty, cakunity. FA". Hvise', roar. sofern just pail. of Ety, FITEA 1. one's own gooil. afflicted. a m. (m. perspiration) *** ".11. f. possibile. [Indra. a particle or drop of perspira- सचीपति m.the husband of शची, tion. # «dr. slowly. हेतु 11. urmour. . a cause. Te cun tu vulntantves gives thetu the 14 of the abiature and sumci: vf the latine.

·SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 11 Desire ! Adjoining vafor past part. Inexpressible smart rate w.nf. pass. of धा with and नि. अनिर्वर्णनीय m.n.1.किम् m.n. Aja n m. naine of a person. f. rith she added. Atimukta creeper अतिमुक्तलसा.. Ingratitude कृतत्रता . Attracted familia post part. Krishna, sister of, atun.. pass, of the cave of a rith Moist आईm. . f. Blool शोणित. [वि.foth पता m. Necklace हार. Enraged the past partntet Pinchali qrant f. a princess of Flane farat s. the country of the Panchalas. Gently मन्दम् atv. Power ATA IN. Harsh Toy 1. r. j , (worils) T.; Pressing against each other ri. TT 1.11. . FTTÅTET n." Hasta, in, in dr. *Tits Bury Tremon. Tashvikus, ther, 557TT M. Corneil Snauhed way आक्षिप्त past in the plural, name of the part. poist. ut for rith 377. line of kings to which Rama Spray कण m. सीकर m. belongedi. (Ravana. ' Suddenly PGAT alv. Indrajit Fafara w. the son of I'nforgiving the form..... . LESSON II. FIRUL EIGIN (XIGATIONS The San-krit Verb has ten tonses and moods together. In four of the ris the Present, the Impofert, this Imperative and the Protontial, the worbis wiryo peculiar modifications, with retirence to which they are divided into nine conjugational classes * These tour are calles comjugational or sperial $nses and mouls. 1. With respect tu there, the tourngations of the Sanskrit grammarian, may bu grouped into two classes, the first comprising the 1st, 4th, 6th, and 10111, in the second, the remaining Thoneral characteristic of the first is that the ba-c+ ends in 3, lm of the second that it does not end in Sanshu (iratiniurias ton, but the augment 3th wenn original awwi undergrs in he tralt (njugation appears not only in be four tens and mouwls indrrated in the best but in neveral others alu). + That form of a noun or rows to which the termination is artwool in rallel the bank.

·12 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . General, Rules with regard to the Conjugational Tenses of the Second Class. 2. Before certain terminations,the roots together with the conjugational şigns undergo peculiar modifications. With reference to these, we will divide the terminations into two classcs, calling one set strong and the other weak. Perasmaipala. 3. The singulars are strong. Erception. The singulars of the Potential and the second person singular of the Imperative. 4. The duals and plurals are weak. Erreption. The duals and plurals of the Imperative first person. Therefore, the singulars of all persons of the Present and Innperfect and the third person singular and all numbers of the first person of the Imperative are strong and the rest weak. At паперада. 3. All the terminations are weak. Erreption.-Those of the first person Imperative, which iire strong 6. Before strong terminations de ning vowel and tho penultimate short of the base take their Guna Substitute. Present Tense. 7. In the second class of conjugations the Parasmaipada terminations of the Present are the same ils tliose vf the first class, but the Armeniada sitter in the following particulars :- (1) The wwel çocuring in some of the Åtmanepada termination given in the First Book is placed by 37. (2) The first person singular termination is? (3) Thea in the third person plural is dropped. Therefore the terminations are Sing. Dua! Pur. वहे महे आथे stia 350 1st plure. 3rd 29 ·SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 13 $. gin the fifth and 3 in the eighth conjugation arealded ou to the root in the conjugational Tenses before the terminations are applied. oth Conjugation. चि Purusm. and Atm. to collect. Sinm. Plur. चिनोमि चिनुव चिन्व चिनुम-चिन्म And चिनापि चिनुथः चिनुथ चिनानि चिनुत चिन्वन्ति Prins alled on to the runift, the burse is f. Thu em. 3 of the forcones 371, n..., the whole becomes frit beforo the any मि, मि, und नि ; while• It stmins unchangeel vefore वस्, मम्..", the weak ormations. I'ldier ow.lg of il trmination is dropped optionally beforg 21.1 , provadend it is not preceded by a conjunct consonant. Ilenco चिनुव --चिन्वः, चिनुम चिन्म in the ulione and चिनुवहे. चिन्वंद, चिनुमह चिन्मह ! ) , hit !! the forms आर उ17 ]d. ... चिन्व चिनुवहे-चिन्वह चिनुमहे-चिन्महे चिनुष चिन्वाथ चिनुध्ये चिनुते चिन्वान Hii ulthie terminations bunny wrak, not changed to it MI आमव. and आमुमः of " नु। 1styi. ܕܕ ܐ، ،; आप Partin. to obtain. Sing. mal I'lur. आनामि आप्रवः आनुमः प्रामापि आमुथ आमुथ आप्राति आमुत आप्नुवन्ति (In this conjugation, after tooth ending in a consonant the of is changed to TT when followed by a weak termination be. simning with a vowel. Hence we have strgation in the above, the 160 आर nding in a consonant. 8th Conjugation. तन् Parasm. and Atm. to stretch. Sing. Dual Plur. सनामि तनुव-तन्त्रः तनुमः-तन्मः तनोपि तनुथः तनुथ नोति तन्वन्ति 2 1st 18 And" ird " ·14 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1st pers Pud,, Sing. Dual Plur. तन्वे तनवहे-तन्वहे तनुमहे-तन्महे तनुपे तन्वाथे तनुध्वे 3rd तनुते तन्वाते तन्वते By (4), 1. 13, we have तनुवः or तन्वः &c. १. to do, 8th Conj. Purusm, and Atm. assumes the form before the strong, and before the weak terminations, in the Conjugational Tenses:- Paralom. âtim. Sing Dual Plur. Sing. Dual Plur. करोमि कुर्वः कुर्म. कुर्वहे कुर्महे Ind करोषि कुरुथः कुर्वाथे कुरुध्ये करोति कुर्वन्ति कुरुते कुर्वाते कुर्वते (u) In the case of gis 11ere'ssarily cropped before 7 and म. lence कुर्व.. धर्म । 1sters. कुर्वे . . Fridos यनेषु सोमं सुन्वतेऽध्वर्यवः । प्रत्यहं प्रातरुत्थायोपवनं च गत्वा पुष्पाण्यवचिनोमि । महात्मनां यशांसि दिक्षु प्रतन्वन्ति कवयः । दुःखपीडितामपि मां हृदयमर्मच्छिद्भिर्वचनैः किं पुनर्दुनौषि । द्वाःस्थौ पुरुषो राजकुलस्य द्वारमपावृण्वाते । पुण्यकृतः स्वेषां सुचरितानां फलं स्वर्गलोकेऽनुवते । आर्याः संसारसुखानि त्यक्त्वा किमर्थमरण्यवासमङ्गीकुरुध्वे । श्रुतिमनोहरांश्चित्रालापाशृण्मः । आकाशं मेघा वृण्वते । हे जगन्नायकन वयं चर्मचक्षुषा तव विभूतिमुपवीक्षितुं शकुमः। यत्त्वं कुरुषे तदन्यथा विधातुं कः शक्रोति । केनापि रक्षसा हतमस्माकं तुरगं वयं विचिनुमः। वारंवारमीश्वरस्याराधनां साधवः कुर्वन्ति । सत्कृतिर्मनुष्यस्य कीर्ति सर्वेषु देशेषु तनोति । दुरापमपि लोकेऽस्मिन् यद्यद्रस्त्वभिवाञ्छति । तत्तदानोति मेधावी तस्मात्कार्यः समुद्यमः ॥

·GECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 15 न दुनोति दयालुत्वाचसा कंचिदप्यसौ। दुरुक्तैरपि दीनानां मनस्तस्य न दूयते ॥ सोमं सुनोति यज्ञेषु सोमवंशविभूषणः । पुरः सुवति संग्रामे स्यन्दनं स्वयमेव सः॥ You cannot ( 7 ) compter your passion". We make () pilgrimage to Kan'i every year. The châtula bertes () frater, but do not obtain (BTC) it. Dont thou hear ( 7 ) what I say? I do not aprene (7 with fa ) the thought, because it is sinful. I hutz with in the gatsen ut dhe palace. The two mn-tructors expom (z with a ) the principles ont Nyal to their pupils. Voll only las bure. With TT) your own littleness bus doinut -0 Misis beautify withi HH ) money. Prudent people arcuinphıslı (ATT) their own purposes with S. . I saw an animal. conftautly. It has a thich tail, which it nhakes [y] enjoy, to VOCABULARY TI. Rools I the fijth Cumjngation. IT Alm, to get, to y or Purasın. and Atm. in pervale. shake. आप Paras. to obtain. l'aru914. to dare, to brave. fl'urasın. and Alnb. to collert, Paraxin, and Alin. to cover; cith E, to search, to stek, w and TT, to opeil; with with f,to expound, to express; Parusm. w give pain to, to with Ft, to shut; with , tease, to afflict. to restrain, to curb. Parasm. to be able. noith sta look for, HAC, to board. * This stanza and the next refer, as simplar unes in the last lessoa, tu Luig of the name of Krislina. † l'or the present participle here, qualifying you.

·16 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . 1 ( )* Parasm. to hear. any Parasm. to accomplislı. Parasm. and Åtm. to extract Soma juice. > Roots of the Eighth Conjugation. larasm, and Âim. to do with Parasm.and Åtm. to stretch, वशी, to conquer; cith अङ्गी, to spread, as a sacrificr, .., to betuhe oneself to, to ac. to perform it : rith q, to cept ritle få, to lay bare, spread to openrith farrat, to despise; 5) Atm. to process rrille ,to retahate, to resist I n. door. morit 12.11 Team. a sacrificialjiriest w hase Ith (01. Átm. to be paineil. duty it is to prepare and throw. 7 FOTO. n. f. toor-keeper. the oblations into the fire. 37Tyr ind otherwise. पुण्यकृत् m. n. f. ( पुण्य . and STTOJETA m. ( 37707 2. forest, to do) meritorious. and TH m. dwelling), forest प्रत्यहम् 7. (प्रति elery and अ. residence ". day ) every day. TITTIS. worship. (lue done TT 1. a Silcrifice. Tors 11. n. f. deserving or fit to राजकुल n. (राजन् m. and चर्मचनम् ॥ (चर्मन् a bude skin, house, a palace) royal palace and 1. the y.), tle TEC adr ofteu. physical eve fra f. power or greatness चित्रालाप m.(चित्र din cy ified And श्रुतिमनोहर m. . J. ( श्रुति f. cal STT TT m. conversatiou) ('on and FTTET m. 11. f. chruing) versation on diversi suljects. charming to the ear. जगनायक . ( जगत् ॥ the uni Fira M. a battle. verse, at 7, 11, the Joul ) the संसारमुख ॥. (संमार m. northdly Lord of the universe. waistence, . happiness, enjoynuent) enjoyinent of a era n. kindness. worldly existence. fra in n. 1. poor,necdly, attivted. Frutat f. a meritorious derd, 3 infifta". n. 1. afflicted Hinta m. exertion.(good action. with pain. #th cumj. Parasm. to impel.to 1911. n. f. ditlicult to obtain. push forward. Tom ". improper words, words referreum. n. f. ( 1. not well.spoken. the inoon) one who adoins ilie rijugation! ieraru enclin witlun lirichel m. a horse. • The fm which ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 17 1. the lunar race', an ornament of the lunar race (of kings). यन्दन m. a chariot. i...' in person,ufolimseli. हृदयमर्मरिछद् m. u.J. (हृदयं . the heart, मर्मन् . the vital parts, and for to cut), piercing the vital parts of the heart.. Berase यत ind. हि ind. Tassion मनोधर्म इन्द्रियति Constantly अनिशम् adr. इन्द्रिय ॥. Eas.. मौर्य . [url. Pilgrimen यात्रा.... By: Nar" प्रनिर्मवन्माम् । Principतस्व. नय. high, 10, गुहाय, गुडे, योहम. Prinlaint दूरदर्शिन् m. ... ... चतुर Gat द्वार . ..... In-trator अध्यापक m. ... Purpose कार्य Littline लगुना ।. Surul पाप ॥..... Mi: कदर्य.. Thok म्यूल m. ... विपुल ...n.J. ! चाय m. .... Thought संकल्प . बुद्धि ). 1 LESSON 111. FirTuLIND Ennius LTIOS -- continuerl. • Imperfect. Tiiu Pudupierde teminations in the same as those B t'i 1.! the tiitelans T?.. Atmanthalt tent11 aur this the Sam, but the ...इनान् ull इधाम i- plub आ ..... (1; ags :); and the rinder plur. 1- अन. Til tomation-th.fil...... .ling. Dual Plui. Jot]"r. वहि माहि .', थाम् आधाम् ध्वम् 31. आताम् अन 5th Cony आर lot pors l trentiy shtain. Siny. Duul आप्रवम् आनुव आनोः आमुनम् आप्नोत आमुताम अश Ain. tly pri adh.. आभुवि आभुवहि आभथाः आभुवाधाम् आमन आमवाताम् Plui. आमुम आमुन आमुवन् 3rl ., lstprs. आभुमति आभुध्वम् आभवत 3rd, ·18 BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1st rs. " . The singular Parasm. heing strong , a becomes नो in the first het of paradigms. The उ of this a is changed to उव, ie, नु becomes मुंर in आम्रनन्, आभुवि, &c., hy (), p. 13. चि Atm. to collect. Sing. Dual Plur. अचिन्वि अचिनुवहि-अचिन्वहि अचिनुमहि-अचिन्महि 2nd अचिनुथा अचिन्वाथाम अचिनुध्वम् 3rd अचिनुत अचिन्वाताम अचिन्वत Sth conj-तन् toistretch. l'arusm. अतनवम् अतनुव-अतन्त्र अतनुम-अतन्म 2nd अतनोः अतनुतम् अतनुत 3rd अतनोत अतनुताम् अतन्वन् Atm. अतन्वि अतनुवाहि-अतन्वहि अतनुमहि-अतन्महि Brul अतनुथाः अतन्वाथाम् अतनुध्वम् Srd अननुत अतन्त्राताम् अतन्वत Wo get अचिन्वहि, तन्व, अतन्वहि, cr, hy (1), p. 13. The forms of अकरवम् अकुर्व भकर्म Ac. d.c. By and (a), p. 14. ]st pla .. . ]sts. LI 1. Pris देवा वै यज्ञमतन्वत तांस्तन्वानानसुरा अभ्यगच्छन् । है संजय कुरुक्षेत्रे मामकाः पाण्डवाश्च किमकुर्वत तत्कथय । रामादीनानेतुं दूतानयोध्यां प्राहिणोजनकः। एकस्मिन्निबिडेऽरण्ये वसन्फलमूलादीनामशनेन वृत्तिमकुर्वि । कथय नो याः कथा वृद्धेभ्यस्त्वमशृणोः । रामं युद्धेऽधृष्णुवघ्राक्षसाः । उद्यम कुर्वन्नपि फलं नैवाप्नवं तस्माद्भवितव्यतैवात्रोपालभ्या। ईशैः कर्मभिर्महत्पुण्यं त्वं समचिनुथाः । भो भो अध्वर्यवः सोमं यूयमसुनुध्वं न वेति पृच्छति होता । रामलक्ष्मणौ सीतामरण्येऽन्विष्यन्तौ महान्तं कालं समीहितं. नैवाभुवाताम् । आपतिता आपदा प्रत्यकुर्म भवतां साहाय्येन । * A vun expressing duration is put in the accusative case.

·SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 19 The enemies of the king cared () to fight with him. Das'afatha performed (174) a sacrifice on the banks of the sarayů. I The ministers of the kino sentif with a ) me to watch the movements of the enemy. We Hung pen (z withest and on the gates of the fortress. What thon dilat [7] still gives peintu ().thy friends. I cook (17) 100 astotyl to the top of the mountain. Wherealul Jul Jook for [fą wth fa) the books which were lost? The two goals intervale if with ] Howers in the gaanden bestellin donatle unseen They tamad (7 with 1) Meir desires, anger, and 81. i with other and contemplating the Brahma obtained (*) (2nal felicity. Bubllana wounded (w or foror] loma in the breast with an aru. In the battle the hopes of the warriors were killed, but the obtain (1) thes and fought again. T!1011 1 Runa inmittel (la sin for which joul both ofrowelle plument VOCABULARY III. 01, FETT Oth cons l'arasm. to fe ith com l'uraxm, to go , rith wound. q, to seond. spoon 'pops purt. of g !! ".ume of a place where larunt. mith BTT) the Kuus fought. arching गम् unth अभि, to attack. Ta n. rating. fafter m. n. f. without inter. frym. 1. f. such. stices, dense. 39 in. n. f. Hamable, de quin. 11. j. ( root) nerving reproach. fruits, ruots, and others, •• The Atmanejarla form of the rost should be used here. When a root du twith Aimanepadi and Parasmaipadı. the forms of the former are used when the result of the action is confinel to one's own sell, and of the latter whus it is directed to another person.

·20 SECOND BOOK, OF SANSKRIT, 8. १८. 'भवितव्यता f. fate, destiny. संजय n. proper name. मामक m. n. f. mine. समीहित m.n. .f. what is desired; रामादि m.(राम proper name and the beginning ) Râma and HERCO n. friendship, help. others. हे interj. a vocative particle, oh! दृत्ति 1. livelihood, maintenance. होतृ m. a sacrificial priest whose हर n. n. f. old. duty it is to repeat the man. ind. an expletive. tras. बभ्रुवाहन m., son Ballruváhana of Arjuria, the Pindava. Desire FTH HILO Eternal शाश्वत M. 1. 1. jelitity T 11. iii tress दुर्ग Girel लोभ . Fillml हतst art. Ess. Lost e past part. Movement व्यापार m. Punishment दण्ड m. Sarayu सरयू f. a river neu Ayodhya. Watch, to.निरूपयितुम् int. of रूप luth conj. with far. 11. LESSON IV. FIFTH AND ETH CONJURATION-continuel. Parumatipadu. Imporatin. 1. In the second chans of compagatione fe is the termina- 11011 ct the nervi person mgular of the Imperative. fe is dropped on the oth conjugation when the root ens in a MORE and in the sth in all cases. llioner they are as follows:- Suy. Dual Ilur. आनि आव आम 2nd हि ताम् अन्तु आए ith Cony. भानवानि आप्रवाव आप्रवाम आनहि आनुनम् आमुत आपोत आग्रताम् आनुवन्तु 1st pers. " 1st pers ·SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 31. 1st ." mire मु 5th ('ony. ing. Dual Plurr. सुनवानि मनवाव सुनवाम Brut मुनुनम् मुनुत सुनोतु मुनुताम् Here the three numbers of olie tirst person being strong, 1 is changed to it, which again Being followed loy the initial a ot the terminations, becomes 77 and with 377. 7 llence a भामवाब,.. The tid prees. sincs is Weith in itibilition to the duals and plurals of thut and the ralrs. Plentocel. ". या istoo. This.lth timinatiime of the inpertuct. The thuid que son plural minination in TA. Tlv ate this 1'um. याम याव याम याम यानम् यात গৰ याताम यु निith Com. निनुयाम चिनुयाव चिनुयाम चिनुयाः चिनुयातम चिनुयात 3rd चिनुयानाम चिनुयुः All the tellit 1}t- The InIny worak, there. 17 !! Curnu in any cut. Atnamruttt. Impruti 33.' As in the Present and Imperfect, the gof the Åtmannpula termuations of the Imperative in all tho second group of conjugation litil आ, arl the t of the rd PN. plur. is clioppreu. The terminations therefore are Siro. Dual Plur. आवह भामह ::nd आथाम् ताम् आताम् अताम् चिन चिनवावहै चिनवामहै चिनुव चिन्वाथाम् चिनुध्वम् चिनुताम् चिन्वाताम् चिन्वताम् " चिनुयात 1st pere. स्त्र 3rd » 1st pors. 2nd 3rd ·22 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1st pers. Sing. Dual Plur. अभव अभवावहै अभवामहै Ind अभुव अभुवाथाम् अभुध्वम् अभुताम् अभुवाताम् अभुवताम् The three numbers of the 1st pers, of the Imperative being the only ones strong in the Åtmanepada, we Lave here in these cases the change of नु to नो, and then to नव , &c. 3rd ,, . Potentials 1st Brd . 16iHIS *" 4. The terminations are the sand as those of the Atmaneparla Potential of the first class of conjugations. Sinij. Dual Plur. चिन्वीय चिन्वीवहि चिन्वीमहि 2011 चिन्वीथा. चिन्वीयाथाम् चिन्वीध्वम् चिन्वीत चिन्वीयानाम् चिन्वीरन् अभुवीय अभुवीवहि अभुवीमहि Hard अभुवीथाः अभवीयाथाम् अभवीध्वम् 3rd अभवीत अश्रुग्याताम् अभुवीरन् As to the change of a tota in all these forms remember (1), p.1.3. 5. The forms of 100ts of the sth Conjugation are similar to those of चि. iith उ only auded on to then insteind of नु. loves its conjugational उ before tine Potential terminationbeeginning with य. Imperatin. Atm. Dual Plur. तन तनवावहै तनवामहे "nd तनुप्व तन्वाथाम् Parasın. तनवानि तनवाव तनवाम dc. Potentinl lururn. कुर्याम् कुर्याव कुर्याम कुर्या कुर्यातम् कुर्यात कुर्याताम् कुर्पः Trato l'ot. Åtm. 1st pers. sing. तमाम् ॥ Parasm. कर्वीय Atm. 1st prior .. c. In pera. " 1st pers.. Brd .. कृर्यात् :

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. OF 23 " ." 14. इंव हृदयं प्लुप्यत करवाणि Import. Parasm. Ist pers. sing. nul Atm. 1st We have in some of the above forms by (9), p. खादिरं यूपं कुर्वीत स्वर्गकामः खादिरेणैव वै यूपेन देवाः स्वर्ग कोकमजयंस्तथैवतद्यजमानः खादिरेण यूपेन स्वर्ग लोकं जयति । दुःखसंतापेन पच्यन्त व मेऽङ्गान्युत्कथ्यत व दृष्टिर्चलतीव शरीरम् । अत्र यत्प्राप्तकालं तत्करोतु भवान् । वन्स प्रसन्नोऽस्मि ते कथय किं ते प्रियं करवाणि । । है ऋत्विजोश्य सुत्यादिने सोमं मुनुध्वम् । • कथं नाम प्रभागदेशमुलयितुं शकुयाम् । पतरालापंगत्मनः कार्पण्यं मापावृणुष्व । गजन्यनुरागमाविप्कुर्वनां जना यतस्तेषां संकटानि नश्ययुः। आन्मनः पुत्राणां प्रवृत्युपलब्धय दासं श्रीनगरं प्रहिणु । गजन्प्रीताः स्मः शुश्रृपया तवैतया तस्मात्सर्वैर्गुणैरुपेतं पु- प्रमवामहि । शृणुतरे पौराः । अयं वसन्तसेनाघातकश्चारुदत्तो वधस्तम्भ नीरावे तद्यदीदृशं कर्म केऽपि कुरिन्दण्डमप्यतारशं प्रामुयुः। मृतं शरीरमुत्सृज्य काष्ठलोटसमं क्षितौ । विमुखा बान्धवा यान्ति धर्मस्तमनुगच्छति ॥ तस्माद्धर्म सहायार्थ नित्यं संचिनुयाच्छनैः । धर्मेण हि सहायेन तमस्तरति दुस्तरम् ॥ पूर्वे वयसि तत्कुर्यायेन वृद्धः मुखं वसेत् । यावजीवेन तत्कुर्याद्यनामुत्र सुखं वसेत् ।। श्वःकार्यमद्य कुर्वीत पूर्वाह्न चापराह्निकम् । न हि प्रतीक्षते मृत्युः कृतमस्य न वा कृतम् ॥ : If nomimal or terthal form endl11ng " ए, ऐ, ओ, or औ in followeel by l ... ! य :m Bf the authoritute for thi• fohriner are optionally dropperl. † When a worlor form online in any of the first four consonants of : • "arh is follly wealthy N the e 17 optionally changed to a when it in ite11 Feel by a towel. a remi-vywe rauara!.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Let the servant cover [F] the floor with carpets. Let Brahmanas go about the world and seek [f with fat] Nala. I would do [ ] it if he should bid me. Do not despise ( 7 with faca ) your enemies, for they tre powerful. Weak men should not, if they are wise, brave ( strong men. lu a Soma sacrifice the priests" should extract [] the juice of the Soma plant. Hero [ ] what he says. “ Thou art a fool,” says he. I wish you would send (re with a ) yu'il sons to England for education. Let us accomplisle (ATT) vw purposes as long as he is Olulisprosed towards us. Do not tease ( 3 ) those harınles, buids. VOCABULARY IV. HTT717 m. live, gnod-will. at mool. f. of a tree named adr. in the next wouli. खदिर. TTTTT, m.n... lelonging tu 8 m, name of a person. the latter part of the day. TFT m.in. f. difficult to be sur- 1779 in a talk. mounted, insurmountable. su rithe ata, to see, to care. gradata m. ( n. pair, and ja pust pass. puert. of q rith Firmy m. lieat ) lent of pain, 34. umed with, possessing. sorrow, atlliction. ETA 11. a se final print. पूर्वाह 1. the first part of the MITT 1. ll. 1. of this kind. day. 1907 r. weanness. Tjuest perl. of with g, काठलोष्टमम m. 16. 1. (FTE pleased, propitious. Ward, TE n an n. a lump PTY CO.f. (gefor intelliof earth, and fry lhe ) like gence, and are getting ) wool and u lump of earth. setting intelligence. TV 1st cinj. l'arreu, rrith To THE I, 9. j. (18 post part. to lvoil. of 3779 rith g, arrived, and fanat..the earth. Fre, in, time, that whose time 12 ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 35, ta 10!. ha arrived, suited to the or- (pleased. ha प्री. 191101! Parasm. tooburn. part. press of NA W. houitics. Ta vile its long as life name of a woman aut.gr m.destroyer) murderer of TH- TTTT ..(turised away from विमुख m. n. f. with the face ga alt. nuuully, slowly. Tum S. service, attendance on. 77 1. tv-morrow's luty cp work. HEROT Phat helpen, i companion. Erent ». the day on which somna julen is drunk m the Soma sacritice 5.5th conj. l'arresin. and fun. to curer; rill, . म्वर्गकाम m. ... 100, efter avn. I critical poronk to which tl. wameishul. in luth (011). I'lsin. 11m. 1.3. Imali , to titia! (to halluin and FTFY. il fonts सन्नम्नाधानक .. वमन्नमेना । 11 $1. FS, culty il 1: TUT. 1911 3777ppa 11. FETTA 1. Meista! अनपकाग्नि .॥ 1. da T, W, of this Towarin af M !! ct'usattil) Willispostood forint prest prirl. of लिह सम्नह". ॥ 1. LESSO.1 i. XVI (OJ L (1910. l'posit and Imparatire. 1. In the ninth roundation 71 Myrted between the put in the terminations. That is uino tloc: form of fr for the weak terminations begmuing with consouants, 15 bexture the wcak terminations beginning with vowels. The terininations belonging to the spocond class of conjugations use on onnisthe last tirer lewis. 3 ·26 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1st pers. 1st pers. " 1st pers. 2nd की to buy, Parasm. and atn. Present-Parasm. Sing. Dual Hlur. क्रीणामि क्रीणीवः क्रीणीमः 2nd क्रीणासि क्रीणीथः क्रीणीथ rd क्रीणाति क्रीणीतः क्रीणन्ति Atm. क्रीणे क्रीणीवहे क्रीणीमहे 2nd क्रीणीषे जीणाथे क्रीणीचे ord कीणीते कीणाते कीणते Imperative--Parasm. क्रीणानि कीणाव कीणाम कीणीहि क्रीणीतम् कीणीत कोणातु कीणीताम् कीणन्तु Atm. कीणावहै क्रीणामहै od कीणीव कीणाथाम् कीणीध्वम् कीणीताम् क्रीणाताम् कीणताम् Vark tho strong and weak terminations here with reference in the changes of att. 2. When a root ends in a consonant the Imperaus second person singular Parasm. is made up simply by ackning 379 to the rout; ils n'to steal 997 'steal (thou).' मुष् Pura sm.-Imperatire. मुष्णानि मुष्णाव मुष्णाम मुषाण मुप्णीतम् मुष्णीत मुष्णातु मुष्णीताम् मुष्णन्तु ]st pers. " Sid 1st poto अग्नितप्तं सुवर्ण विलिनाति । प्रियायै दातुं पुष्पस्रजं ग्रश्नामि । दोहनकाले वत्सं स्तम्भे बनन्ति । अस्मिन्नरण्ये मार्ग कर्तुं तरूँल्लुनीहि । अयं तव सदाचारस्ते लक्ष्मी पुष्णातु । युद्धेषु वीराः शत्रूणां शिरोभिभूमिमास्तृणते । * Vidc p. 29, note*. † Vide' p. 28, note t.

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 27 उखतं गच्छन्त्यास्तव गलितमुत्तरीयं गृहाणैतत् । विवाहविधौ कन्यायाः पाणिं वरो गृहाति । सुवर्णशतं दत्त्वा वयमश्वं महाजवं कीणीमहे । अपेक्षितं वृणतां भवन्त इत्यस्मानवदत्कृपालुर्भगवान् । रुद्रो देवानवददहं वरं वृणै। वृणीष्वेति तेऽभाषन्त । पावकस्तीर्थोदकं च पापकृतः पुनीत इति ब्राह्मणा बदन्ति । मणध्वंसिनो मनुजा वयमनाघनन्तस्य परमेश्वरस्य कथं तत्त्वं पानीमः। अस्मिन्महति दुर्भिने धान्यं न लभ्यते ततः किमनाम कथं च बावितं धाग्याम । धूनीति चम्पकवनानि धुनोत्यशोक चूतं धुनाति धुवति स्फुटितातिमुक्तम् । वायुर्विधूनयति चम्पकपुष्परेणूं. स्तकानने धवति चन्दनमञ्जरीश्च ॥ बाणावलं किरत्याजी कगति शरमण्डपम् । कृणोति करिणः शत्रोः स कृणाति हयान्पगन् । स्तम्भने पुरुषः प्राया यौवनेन धनेन च । न स्तभाति क्षितीशोऽपि न स्तभ्नाति युवाप्यसौ.।। कृणात्यसौ द्विषां दर्प शिरस्तेषां निकृन्तति । कीर्तयन्ति गुणांस्तस्य विस्मयेन दिवौकसः ॥ स्तृणोति वाणजालैः स रणे वीरवरूथिनीम् । तच्छिरोोि स्तृणान्युर्वी तृणगजफलैग्वि ॥ स्वप्नेऽपि नानृतां वाणी संगृणाति स भूपतिः । यस्य संगिरते किंचित्तस्मै तत्प्रतिपादयेत् ॥ लिनाति धर्म एवासो नन्द्रियार्थेषु लीयते ॥ * This staliza and similar ontmanthin an well as urquent le rons refer > ahme of the haunt of Krishna, Sermon se fernanik islom bure already Een en in two of the pores sous le son, 1When a visarga precurlera श... winch In followed by a hard con. mnant, it is optionally (Troppmal. Arot in its causal sense 1. arayeneral rulti. onjugateel as if it were root of the lirh cortugation.

·26 SECOND BOQK OF SANSKRIT. sfronta u gara: forari # geri यद्भर्तुरेव हितमिच्छति तत्कलत्रम् । तन्मित्रमापदि सुखे च समक्रियं य- देतत्त्रयं जगति पुण्यकृतो लभन्ते ॥ The wind shakes [at] the tops of trees. Do (thou yo not steal [ ] money; for the officer of the king punish thione who do it (steat money). We cat (371) nothing on fastiny-days. The Brahmanas now-a-days take ( 7 ) prize-oues Daksluni) soufron Yavanas.. Pruchane (Fil (thon) largelicaps of corn for me at Bumbay. Govindalojes [] off the branches of the tree. La Nariyana till (o) liis pot with water at the tank. Thiou do not know [77] their fraudulent schemes. Luthern cul [ OF with fa ) their desires which often cury them a-tray. I always please [9] (terylly coming to my house. I have stayed here for it long time, permit ( with ] de todo () Gouda.1011 quity lę] -inful nell wie's they simply Toomas Hello to VOCABULARY V. limits of the Ninth Conjugation. W lat, 10 cal. OFW I'ususm. and Alin far l arasind lem to buy. take, with F, to cuih. fra l'arasın. io tortile, to give (5) Purusm. and átm. 10 MD 10. knowirrith ne, to permit. *74 Purusni. tagitate TT l'arusi. to nourish (please.. Tony Pism. 10 joutuneither. fr l'araisin. an Åtm. to love, to :! il vil 2013 mai luual sigu as sif +1:15.3:17: inilit ja multiusti 2xl of a nnt is dropped ·29 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. मुष् wear out. E horas E Turism. to burn. FA Parasm. and Atm. to cover; Fry Parasm. to tie, to fasten. with 371, to cover, to spread, of Purasm and Åtm.to destroy. # Parasm. and Atm. to șill, Parasm. to steal. to lestroy. soft Parasm. and Âtm. to cook. 57 Iurasm. to become old, to FFF Parasm. to stop, to be." come stiff or rigid, to become Jauglity. T Parasm. inithe सम्, to speak. l'orasm. and Âtm. to purify. Parafm. anı Âlm. to shake. l'rasm. to melt, to be disq larasi, to bill. solved, to be absorbed, with Fêt, to melt. Purasm. to tear. Poft. l'urism. and ậtm.,to cut, lop a lurasm, and imm. to choose. अनितप्त m. n. f. ( अग्नि, and तप्त T oth conj. Parasm. to swallcAv; peatedl) heated by fire. noith Åtm. to promise. अनावनन्त m. n. f. (अनादि with- चन्दनमञ्जरी J.(चन्दन m. a sandal out beginning, and stra tire, f. iz blosson), a without end) having neither flower-stalk, a sprout) a blosboinning nor end. som, dv., of the sandal tree. अपेक्षित . plast pass. Part. of चम्पकपुप्परेणु m.(चम्पकm. a kind अप, what is desired. of tree with fragrant flowers, starter, m. name of a kind of tree. Tu m. pollen) the pollen in mm: f. a fight, a battle. the flowers of chumpakas. Star. an upper garmcat. TETETA . a collection or grove उद्दतम् past art. of हन् with of champahı trees. [flower. Je used as an alv. carelessly, m. à mango tree; n. its ff. the carth. (tumultuously: ta n. his head. करिन् m. an elephant. TETT M. (FTTT n. a forest, Fall, wife. (to kill. a grose) his grove or forest. 3.5th conj. I arasm. and Atm. Tit. n. (anter it. i holy thing, ATT m. 1. f. kind. such as a river, and 3 Mo क्षणध्वंसिन् M. 4. J. (क्षण m. a water) holy water. moment, ध्वंसिन् perishing) तृणराजफल n. (तृणराज m. a palu. perishing in a moment. tice,a fruit of the palm-tree. 'faria m. (fafa f. the earth ) tin.a collection of three. (given. lord of the earth, a king. Tatl8ul. of T'to give,' having Thea past part. of Tom, dropped. m. priile. * Land the following loll rots sturten their eming vowel in the con. atuna tal-4. far rrith ·30 SEI OYD BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1 x cum. TETT. , fire. 12. TETETT, m. TER .. milking, are m. fire. pe, m.time, time of milking. FSTEET m. (Farg m. marriage 1 177) 101k ronj. irith Ê, to and ETT m, a cer/mony) the shake. ceremony of marriage. Parson. ne atm. Farat m.admiration,amazement. धू to shake, to set in uintion. वीग्वाधिनी /. (वरूथिनी f. an prunl m 11. f. other belonging ariny) an army of warriors to another or the other party. or heroes. Trout in the Suprema uler of TT UIT M. n. it bower or shed the I'minirse, Ciol. made of arrows. पादय mithप्रति inal of पद with HET TTT m. (HCL 1. n. f. good, afa, to make over, to give. and 77977 m. conduct) good A mn. 11. 79 asm, and conduct. a ono wo hires done) One समक्रिय ...J. (सम equal, who has commiten sin. and FAT f. doing ) doing equally, crinhandel. geogen. (groq olind n I. a gailand) i grland of flowers. सुवर्णशत garof m. ir golden OTTH ind. mostly, in most cises. coin, and sta n. a hundred ) :1 hundred coins of gold. TOTT, 11. (Tron a collection) a number or multitude of arrows. AFTET 1st conj. Âim, and 5th (091). Parasm. to become fixed महानव m. n. I. (महत् great, ind or rigid, to become laughty. 11. Speel) very swift. FORT I, a post. *Tr n. it youtli, a young man. 5th conj. Parasm. and Åtm. maart. youth. lo (over, to spread, to strew. THE " the god Swa. Fafanye n. an opened atithe mons. Álm. 10 cling or mnrikta flower. press closely, w be absorbed, lain, a dream. io lhe dissolved. ET m. a horse. Astray उत्पथम् alr. Branch शाखा . Simply केवलम् adi. Fasting-lay उपवासदिन ॥.(उपवा Stay FYT: stayed fera past part. pm a fastand fra 1. a day). Yavana FA n. a foreigner, a Fraudulent scheme CRT". Mahomedan; a Greek ( in an- Now tlayı fa adr. ind. cient times). Officer of the king TT 11. it lll. Pot कुम्भ m. • lhe deterhun of us mund 11 regular. Neke lesson XVI. # Inila them!. then renne drages its nasal in the conjugational tenses **l: dr*** in die l. (se noie 7. '?).

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT.. 31 1 st pers. and " 1st pers. and " १ LESSON VI. VINTH CONJUGATION-continued: Imperfect. Parasna. Sing. Dual Plur. अकीणाम् अकीणीव अकोणीम अक्रीणाः अफ्रीणीतम् अक्रीणीत 3rd अकीणात् अक्रीणीताम् अक्रीणन् Atm. Sing. Dual Plur.. अक्रीणि अक्रीणीवहि अफ्रीणीमहि अकीणीथाः अकोणाथाम् अंकीणीध्वम् 3rd अक्रीणीत अक्रीणाताम् अकीणत Potential. Parasm. कीणीयाम् कीणीयाव कीणीयाम कीणीयाः' कीणीयातम् कीणीयात 3rd कीणीयात् कीणीयाताम् कीणीयुः Remember that the terminations of the Parasmaipada Potential are weak. They begin with a consonant, therefore it becomes oft hx l, }.2.5. Atm. कीणीय कीणीवहि कीणीमहि कीणीथाः क्रीणीयाथाम् कीणीध्वम् कीणीत कीणीयाताम् कीणीरन् .1 st pers. Imperf.-मन्थ Parasm. अमथ्नाम्-अमनीव-अमथ्नीम (vide p. 28 note +), लू Paresm. अलुनाम्-अलुनीव-अलुनीम (vide P. 29 note*), Atm. अलुनि-अल्लुनीवहि-अलुनीमहि &c., &c. 1st pin. 2nd " 1st pers. andu 30" कार्तिक्येकादश्यां कथयत कान्पदार्थानाश्नीत । कतानि वस्त्राणि यानि त्वमकीणीथाः। रे परिचारक किमर्थमद्य भूमि कटै स्तृणाः । यज्ञांस्तन्वाना वयं बहून्पशून्यूपे देवेभ्योऽबधीम । तस्मिन्देशे मया साध योद्धं बहवो भटा आगतास्तानहमे- काकी शस्त्रास्त्रैरमृद्राम्।

·32 SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. न कंन्यायाः शुल्कं गृहीयादिति शास्त्रप्रतिषेधे सत्यपि केचि- दुदरंभरयो ब्राह्मणा गृह्णन्त्येव । दमयन्त्याः स्वयंवरकाले बहवो राजानो मामियं वृणीतमामियं वृणीतति मन्यमानाः कुण्डिनपुरमागता रङ्गं प्राविशन् । नलं वुवू- घुर्दमयन्ती रङ्गागतानपान्प्रेक्षमाणा तलतुल्याकृतीन्पञ्च पुरुषान- पश्यन् । ततः संदेहान्नाभ्यजानान्नलं नृपम् । तेषां चत्वारो नल- रूपधारिण इन्द्रादयो देवा इति ज्ञात्वाभाषत ।कथं देवाजानीयां कथं च नलं नृपं बोधयम् । यदा सा देवाशरणं गता तदा ते स्वीयानि रूपाण्याविरकुर्वन् । पश्चान्नलं नृपं दमयन्त्यवृणीत । अनन्तरं देवानां कापं प्रतिकतु तावुभौ स्तुतिभिस्तानप्रीणीताम्। नता देवा नलं वरन्वगृहन् ।। यत्कृतेऽरीन् व्यगृहीम समुद्रमतगम च । सा हतंति वदन् राममुपातिष्टन्मरुन्सुतः ॥ Hd...|| 20mm Mandailinn ohuning handle think- himl [मन्य] the ocean. I woke (f witli fat) Hy booked fomniile, but did not rat much mon um relucra tu atom ( his enem l'ritra, who was it is alman. He thus control the -in of Bralimat.nurthr. of uhich it dial not it [ im. Wlleen dull the port triple the cury] the sayings of the Rh? If You shoull please मी) the timl- by !!piety, they Muld briston t.m- [ग्रह 1 अनु] on!!. Rama in Lithuman lived this forest with Sita, anal .ift [भ] 10t and 111t. Why did you pluck with fa unda] the Huwers from Ilan's slelns in the Sundell, 1... witlistanding* I told you 1100 to don? It ltook [प] inind.i' book. the master would rerulem. Did you not hnou (1) that the Pandava-resiiled for onet Vear in the country of Viráta? - . * Tv the GIRHAmatate hone. tvn.x.'.'16.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . 33 VOCABULARY VI. h with वि Åtm. to sell. 19th conj. with afy, to re, 9th coilj. aith Teng to recognize. ceive in a friendly manner, to 973 9th conj. L'arqsm, to churn. favour; with f, to be at war z Ith conj. Parasm. to pound, with. to reduce to atoms, a n. form. इन्दादि (इन्द्र und आदि beginning, परिचारक m. an attendant. Indra at the head) Indra and E m. a soldier. others. na n. the son of the Wind, उदरंभरि m.n. f.(उदर n. stomach, Mâruti, a monkey' sollier and to fill) one who fills deroted to Rûma. his belly or stomaci, selfishly Fudoinu. for whose (relative): greedy. sake, for whom. PETER 11. 11. . alone, solitary. T m.the place where any great 2 m, a mat. thing is done, stage. #TATTEÑO F. (FTFEET F. be. रङ्गागत m. n. f. come to the longing to the month of Kâr stage. tika, and TF1 f f. eleventhi) the eleventh day of Kartıka. वुवर्णी m. n. f. desirous of choos- PETIT n. name of a city, the ing. capital of the Vidalhas or TETET N. weapons of all kinds. Bt.us, TIETATI M. (EITE n. scripture, #9 m. anger, i esentiucnt. and affert m..prohibition) TIT: numer. nom. plur. fou. scriptural prohibition. af. name of a woman,thie 5*, in. n. the money given to wife of Vala. the parents of a bride, oriyi. नलतुल्याकृति m. n.f.(नल ॥., तुल्य nally as a purchase price. m. n. f. like, and rana f. #TE 1. doubt. forlu having the form of Nala. Arriul. withi used with the नलरूपधारिन् m. n f. (नल रूप. instrumental). form, and ita assuming ) स्था with उप, to go to. who has assumed the म्वयंवरकाल m. (स्वयंवर n. choice. form of Sala. of a husband, and it m. Tu numer. 101. and acc. plur. time) time of choosing a hustie. band. one को with परि, कि, or अब Àtiunepaile only.

·34 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. निर, दिश 6th conj. rith' प्रति and आ. m. Brahmana-murder ब्रह्महत्या f. Churning-handle मन्धनदण्ड m. (मन्धन n. churning, and दण्ड on a handle), मन्थान m. Furniture गृहोपम्कर m. Piety भक्ति/. देवनिष्ठा.. Reprova. f 1011 conj. prith जति Root Saying,वचन 1. उक्ति। Stem बन्धन n. Virata विराट m. name of a king. Vritra वृत्रm. an enemy of Indra. ang. INporn. LESSON VII. SECOXD) CONJUGATIOX. Present and Imperatire. 1. In the second conjugation the terminations are direct. ly applied to the roots. End conj. Parts an. to go. या Present. Dual Plur. यामि यावः याम यासि साथः याथ याति यातः यान्ति Imperatire. यानि याव याम Out याहि यातम् 3rd यातु याताम् यात Tere the root itself undergoes no change. The forms are made up simply by willing the terminations. TT, TT, JI, 'to protect,' ख्या, मा, भा, प्सा, श्रा, and दा 'to cut' art. to the thus conjugated. Nearly all 2001 cof this conjugation not ending in' 347 are irregular We will proceed to notice the peculiarities of most of these %. The sp of spain dropped before the weak terminations, त: dr. dual. सन्ति 3rd pers. plur. Para.in. Present. Sing. Dual Plum. Imper.. अस्मि स्म असि स्थ 3rd अस्ति सन्ति Her the online sing.. which by the rule ought to he अम्सि, drops one Ft " ·SECOND BOOK OF, SANSKRIT. 35 A " . 1st pers. a. " l'rrusm. Imperatrie. Sing. Dual Plur. 1st असानि असाव असाम 2nd 'एधि 3rd अस्तु The three numbers of the 1st pers. being strong, the 37 is not «lropped; or, the 2nd pers. sing., is irregular. When in certain cases this root takes Âtm. teriminations, the forms of the Present Tense are : स्वहे स्महे 2nd साथे 3rd स्ते साते सते The or is dropped, all the terminations being weak, # is chang. e to g in the 1st pers. sing., and it is dropped before a boy the following rule. 1. The preceding is dropped before a termination beginning with a 3. The ending vowel of af to lie down,' takes its Guņa -ubstitute before all the personal termmations. In the case of this root y is pretixed to the terminations of १].. third person plural. Atm. Present. Iual . शवहे शमहे nud शेषे शयाथे शध्वे 3..! शेते शयांत शेरते Am. Imperutine शयै शयावहै शयामहै शेव शयाथाम् शेध्वम् 3rd शेताम् शयाताम् शेरताम् ît becomes which before vowels is changed to शय. Hence भये, शयाथे, &e. र being prefixed to अने and अताम् we have रते und रताम्. 4. The ending उ (Short) of roots takes its Vriddhi substitute, i. e, becomes uit, wlien followed by a strong termination beginning with a consonan II. The ending ş or 3 short or long of a root is changed to इय् or उ when followeel by a weak termination beginning with a vowel. 1st per.. Siny. शये 1st prs. 2nd ·36 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 11. " 18tin and .,. " l'araru. Present. Sing. Dual Tlur. नौमि नुवः नुमः 3nul नौषि नुथः नुथ 3rd नुनः नुवन्ति l'arasm. impurative. नवानि नवाव नत्राम नुहि नुतम् नुत 3rd 'नौतु नुताम् नुवन्तु Wr hast नोमि. नापि, &c., in the case of the strong terminations , fa, fe. They have an initial consonant, while in the 1st person Imparative, though the tommations are strong, they begin with Onl. Hories the gofal is changed to funct by the general rulolii, p. 12.,, qul tms we buscar, which becomes a before the 100). शु * 10) join is to be thus conjugated. A1 and the augment is optionally prefixed to, the formations beyming with a consonant. l'arum. I're serit. Deal Plur. म्नामि म्तवीमि स्तुव -स्तुवीव. म्तुम स्तुवीम. मतापि म्तवीपि म्तुथ स्तुवीथ' म्तुथ स्तुवीथ म्तौति म्तवीति म्तुत. स्तुवीत स्तुवन्ति. to find found the strony terminations the stakes VriikUily p. 133, but when these termmtions have metixeil to them by 13, they crise cu lac an initial consonant, and hence in that case He has Guna, and thus ly. the change of स्तु to म्तो and स्तर, we have स्तनीति. When the weak terminations have prefixel, the final 3 of the root becomes 37 by 11 , p. 3.5. Ilence agafta &c. The Bril pers. plur fra las no initial consonant, therefore no en les pruit liefore 11 llence we have one form only. The forms of the imperative should be made up on these printiples स्तोतु-स्तवीनु sing, स्तुहि स्तुवीहि 2nd pers. sing., म्सवानि, 1st pers. sim! . स्तवाव Impers. dual, kc. The Atimanepala paradigme मनुते-स्तुवीते 3rd pers. sing., स्तुवाते Pod prosedural, FER 3rd pers pluus should be constructed in the Sina " 1 . Sant muv. Full the similarly conjugated.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 37 1 st pers. 3rd " ब्रूतः 0. After the strong terminations beginning with a consonant have the augment f prefixed to them. Parasm. Present, Sing. Dual Piur. ब्रवीमि बेवः ब्रूमः 2nd ब्रवीषि ब्रूथः ब्रवीति अवन्ति The last by Il., p. 35. The Atm. forms are sa 3rd pers. sing. ब्रुवाते 3ril pers. Onel, ब्रुवते 3rd pers. plus, &c. The Imperativist pers. is ब्रवाणि, ke. 7. The following are five irregular forms of the Present Tense of a defective root, which means to speak'; 316 3rd pers. sing., आहतु l jrurs dz४, आहुः : Mrs. pl.tur., आत्थ nel pers. sing., TEY: 2nd pers. dial. 8. The terminations of the first person of the Inperative its appended to 'to give birth to' are weak. Âtm. presentmæ 3rd pers. sing., at 3ril pers. dual, esta 3rd pers. plur. &c., Imperative -मध्य 2nd pers. sing., सुवै 1st pers. sing., मुवावहै 1 st pers. dual, मुवामहै 1 st pers. plur. .). After रुद्, स्वर, वस्, अन्। and जा the augment इ fised to the terminations beginning with any consonant 'cept r, as रोदिमि, रुदिवः, &c. Parasın. Prorsent. Dual रोदिमि रदिवः रुदिमः ul रोदिषि .रुदिथः रुदिथ रोदिति रुदितः रुदन्ति Imperative on the same principles-रुदिहि 2nd pers, king.,रोदानि 1st {"rs. sing., &c. The other roots shoulıl be similarly conjugated. The 3rd pers. plur, terinination of per luses its 7 as will be subsequently noticed. 10. The root ç'to go’ Purusm is an exception to Rule 11., p. 35. It is changed to a befine a weak Permination with an initial vowel. Parasm. Present. एमि इवः 2nd एपि 3rd एति यन्ति is preanti. Plur. 1st pers. " 3rd, 1st pers.

·38 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Pur 3rd, Imperative. Ist pers. अयानि &c. with soft to study, Âtn. Present. Sing. Dual lat prrs. अधीये अधीवहे अधीमहे 2nd अधीषे अधीयाथे अधीध्वे अधीते अधीयाते अधीयते Suparateel from अधि, the last three forms are इते, इयाते, इयते, in which we seer.is changed to इय् before आते and अते, and so on with the list. Ist Mrs. Imprit.-अध्ययै अध्ययावहै-अध्ययामहै. इ taking its Guna becomes g, which itgain is changed to 377 and with the termina. tions the forins are opo, dc. आस् Atm. Imperative. आमै आसावहै आसामहै 3nd आस्स्त्र आसाथाम् आध्वम् आस्ताम् आसाताम् आसताम् By I., P. is dropped before ध्वम्. Jatni. " अस्मिगति य सन्ति कवयस्तानमस्कृत्यैतं ग्रन्थमारो। पृच्छ बालकः किं रोदिति । है कृपानिधे जगदात्मंस्त्वां ब्रह्मादयः सर्व देवाः स्तुत्यु- षय सर्वे। ईरशं त्वां शरणमुपैमि । प्रसीद । पाहि मां नरकाद्वोरात् । अस्यां पाठशालायां बालकाः काव्यमधीयते । तरुषु मधुरं रुवन्ति पक्षिणो वायुश्च शीतलो वाति तस्मा- द्रम्यमिदं स्थानम् । अत्रैव वृक्षमूले शिलामध्यासामहै । भो भोः पौराः क गतोऽस्माकं महाराजः । किं ब्रूथ । देव्या सह कीडाशैलमध्यास्त इति । एवमस्तु । अहं तत्र गच्छामि सर्व च वृत्तं कथयामि । अकिंचनो वितृष्णश्च सुखं स्वपिति रात्रौ । ये प्राणन्ति जीवन्ति च तेषां जडानां सदिहेतुं मे ब्रूहि । • Whc: शी. आस् , and स्था are precuried by the preposition अधि, they Fresu the accusatne of the place where the actions art jxerformed.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 39 वत्से समाश्वसिहि समाश्वसिहि । अयमागतस्तव पुत्रको यं त्वं मृतं मन्यसे। गोविन्द स्मितेनात्मनः कोपमपहुते । अश्विनौ मदनमपि सौन्दर्येऽतिशयाते । रात्रावुदयते चन्द्रो दिवोदयति भास्करः । उदेति स सदैवोग्रं नोदीयन्ते च विद्विषः॥ प्राणिनामुपकाराय प्राणिति प्रियदर्शनः । प्राण्यते पुण्यपुरुषः : श्रेयसे यशसे च सः॥ स स्तौति भास्करं भक्त्या नौति पापहरं हरम् ॥ .. एधि कार्यकरस्त्वं मे गत्वा प्रवद घिवम् । दिदृचमैथिली राम पश्यतु त्वाविलम्बितम् ।। ते जन्मभाजः खलु जीवलोके येषां मनो ध्यायति विश्वनाथम् । वाणी गुणान्स्तौति कथांशृणोति श्रोत्रद्वयं ते भवमुत्तरन्ति ॥ धर्मदूषण नूनं त्वं नाजाना नाशृणोरिदम् । निराकृत्य यथा बन्धूलँघुत्वं यात्यसंशयम् ॥ भूमौ शेते दशग्रीवो महार्हशयनोचितः। नेक्षते विह्वलं मां च न मे वाचं प्रयच्छति ॥ समाश्वसिमि केनाहं कथं प्राणिमि दुर्गतः। लोकत्रयपतितिा यस्य मे स्वपिति क्षितौ ।। रौदिम्यनाथमात्मानं बन्धुना रहितस्त्वया । प्रमाणं नोपकाराणामवगच्छामि यस्य ते ।। आस्ते भग आसीनस्योर्ध्वस्तिष्ठति तिष्ठतः। शेते निपद्यमानस्य चराति*चरतो भगः ॥ गाधोद के मत्स्य इव सुखं विन्देत कस्तदा। अनवाप्तेषु कामेषु मृत्युरभ्येति मानवम् ॥ जातमेवान्तकोऽन्ताय जरा चान्वेति देहिनम् । अनुषका द्वयेनैते भावाः स्थावरजङ्गमाः ॥ *Irregular for a or T lengthened for thic metre.

·40 DECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. निन्दन्नु नीतिनिपुणा यदि वा स्तुवन्तु लक्ष्मीः समाविशतु गच्छतु वा यथेष्टम् । अधैव वा मरणमस्तु युगान्तरे वा न्याय्यात्पथः प्रविचलन्ति पदं न धीरः॥ We do not believe (nr7 with fa '] in Gurinda's words. You prain (m) those who deserve censure. The bust sleep 02, lle down [Efr] on the banks of the (omati. (hild. de. piot on (), here comes (z with 36 and 377] pou mother with having taken) sweetmeat in her hands. These two cells bring forth [Ħ] calves every year. Dost then not know [& with spa] that Janaka was Rama's tatlier-111-10w ? Wit subject to thou and they brother study (5 Âtm. with f) at school? On the trips of high mountains mes respire [77 with fa] with difticulty. It seems (MI) to me that the people of this place are poor. Breathe (no with g) there the man who smites the poor and the loc pleas? A lan malli eepos (9) for a long time. Those who allure ( 3TH with 39 another than the time Civil de lint ittam eternal felicity. 11 what sort of an animal : horse is. T.1 ( VOCABULARY VII. Picouts of the Second Conjugation. sa Trasm. to breathe', arilla, Parum. to go. with शरणम् to lifeathe', to live and 39, to submit; with other, **A l'Arxan tolmes to go towards; with , to WTH .111. to sit, erith who, to come; rrith yo to know: mit, rrish 39. to adore, to rrith , to rise, to flourish. worship. çrrith art im. to study. . The nmin HR and I (1.. +1) art used in the conjugational teuses ouls.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 41 3, oui Purasm. to tell. a Parasm. to blow. जक्ष Parasm. to eat. † Âtm. to lie down, to sleep; T Parasnil, to cut. with spfa, to surpass. Turasm.sto praise. T Parasm. to cook. • नु qr l'arrism. to protect. AF Parusm. to.breathe; with CAT Parasm. to devour. fat, to respire, with Æ, to bea Purasm. and Åtm. to speak. licve, to confide; nith सम् and T Parasm. to seem, to appear, 37T, to calm one-self, to take to shine. courage. | Parasm. to go. सू Åtm. to give birth to. I Parism. to join. Parasil, and Âti, to praise. TT Parism. to give. [aloud. Puruso, to bathe. & Parasi. to make noise, to cry स्नु Parism, to drop, to ooze. Parasm. to weep, to bewail, to lament for, 69 Parasm. to sleep. Proy'rism. to give or t.tke. Atm. to corteal; with 3ty or वस् Âmto dress. with नि. 1*77 17.1. f. (37 not, and tth conj. Âim. with to FT 11. something) lie who rise, to rise up has nothing, poor. Su adv. mightily, powerfully, formirally. 4th conj. Atm. to breathe, to अण live. TRITT m. a lmnevolent action, doing good to another, ITU M. 11. f. helpless. FEf 111. n. f. crect, upper. अनुषता अनु and सक्त Prist putss. | कार्यकर m. u. J. on who does portof) accomparied. some business (for another). stra m. end, destruction. FITOTT 16. a poem. 377877, 1. the god of death. 8th conj. with TFF, to bow to. 377°18t conj. Âtm. with 8th conj. with me and 377, to rise. repudiute, to give up, to for- STT adv. without delay. wake. অশিন n. (used in the dual) the afa m. (I f. mercy, and twin celestial physicians so fara m. store) store of inercy, called. one very merciful, MÅTTE de, without doubt. क्रीडाशैल m. (क्रीडा f.amusement, TINCT m. the first cause. diversion, tres me a mountain) afrita nun. f. sitting, pres. part. a pleasure mountain or em. bankınent. WIE m. battle. fafaf.the earth, the ground. lst conj. Purasm. vith , to Fertig ind. verily. rise, STT i. (TTT 1. n. f. shallow, to .of आस.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. and 777 n. water) shallow TTET in. n. f. one that takes water. away sin. niall. trafi.f.ng of a river. go m. a holy or virtuous , m. 1. f. horrible. Frithg and fa, to remove, foarta'm. 1. f. ohe with a move aside. pleasing look. FTTT47 m. (Fruta . the world, a n. the Divine cause and and 3 in. soul, Soul of cossence of the universe. the world, ब्रह्मादि m. (ब्रह्मन् m. and आदि be- TE 11.". s.manimate vinning) the god Brahmâ and JHUTH m... j. one who is others. born, M. a man. 777 m. luck, prosperity. JETÜTT, m the world of living VE 11. the world, worldly existlxmgs, this world. ence. z n... f. progr. TET 11. a thing fing m... if desirous of seeing TFFT, 111, the sun. frond. adr. boy din. rau. 17. f. different. दुर्गत wie f. clistressel, miser. मधुरम adi. sweetly. able. HETTT m. lord, yrent king. fra mn. he who has a body,man. AETeatrga m. 17. 4. (HETE . 9 n. l collection of two. if. costly 7 n. waarop In. i. f. one that coul उचित 11. f. used to) accus- Guminates or violate's what is towed or used to costly or right. mich beds. Ist conj. I'4701811. in contem- HTTE 1!. man. plate or meditate ipon. for t. princess of Mithila, s, m. hell. Sita. निपपमान 1cs. part. of पद rite यथेष्टम् arlr. according to fancy, fa, lyng down. to heart's content, faru ... alfa 1. polichooses. ties or prudence for gut. "...). पुगान्तर 11. (TT age, period, piroticient) proficient in poli. trat another) another age or Lies, or very prudent. period. The end. ceruinly, verily. TIN 1. n. f. pleasant. Alq n. 1. just, right, poro- f 18. f. deprived of, per. Hereft of. TY: (ablarire sug. of fra **. m. a descendant of Raghu. लोकत्रयपति m. (अयma collection *. a footstep. of three, or in. lord) the lord a bed as one road) from the way.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 43 . of the three worlds, viz., Heaven, Earth, and the lower regions. areIT f. dear, a female child. वितृष्ण m. n. 1. (वि deroid of, and TEUTT.f. desire) free from any desire. विश with सम् and to enter in, come in. TEATTYT in. Lord of the universe, God. विट्ठल m. 1. f. overwhelmed, afflicted. टक्षमूल . (वृक्ष intre, and मूल 1. root) the root of a tree. वृत्त n. what has taken place, an event. शीतल m. n.f. cool.. श्रोत्रद्वय n. a pair of ears. सद (सीद) 1st conj. .Parasm. to sit , rith , to be gracious or pleased. सायम् (१r. in the evening. स्थावरजङ्गम .... (स्थावर m. n. .. immoveable and जङ्गम m. 12. f. moveable) immoveable and moveable. म्मित v. smile. हर ॥ the god Sim. आ, Calf वत्स m. Subject विषय . Talen, laving, cal solutive . of ग्रह. I outficulty TFT 1. कष्ट. Father-in-law श्वशुर m. IHelpless अनाथ स... High उच्च m. n.. Lizy अलस m. n.J. तन्द्रिट m.../ Suite Sth conj. with 377 or नि, पीह 10th conj. True God, true ARTETET in. n. J., God परमात्मन् n. What sort of कीश ... Word वचः ॥. वचन : LESSON VIII. SECOND) COXJUGATIOX-continued. Imperfect anl Potentiul. 1. After roots ending in the termination of the Imperfect, third person plural, is optionally it before which the ending vowel is dropped. Sing. Dual Plur. 1st pers. 2nd yo अयाम् अयाः अयात् अयाव अयातम् अयाताम् अयाम अयात अयान्-अयुः 3rd ·44 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. reri. " and t • Jlurr by dropping the 371 of and appending the tenīporal auginent we have अय्, and with उम्, अयु: Potential. Sony. Dunl Rur. 1st यायाम् यायाव यायाम 2nd यायाः 'यायातम् यायात 314 यायात् यायाताम् यायुः The terminations are the same as those giver in 2, 11. 21. 2. After the root to be,' the terininations स् of the Imperfect take the augmente long. आमम् आस्म आमी. आम्तम् आम्त आमीत् आम्ताम् आसन् म्यात म्याताम् BY After कदम्बए. श्वम्, अन् and जन the angment į or 3 in goretical to the स and न of the Imperfect. अगदम् अरुदिव अरदिम अरुदित . Pol. 3rd pers. म्युःe. 1st pers. ( अरादी । अरुदितम् । अगद Pvt. . अगेदीत अरुदिताम् अरुदन् अरोदत् । For the insertion of I अरुदिताम् Ac, ste 9, P. 37. The third pert. plur. termmation in the case of varis JÆ, which will be noticed bereafter. Potential-inters. स्यात् ख्याताम् भी | Injuri.dis. अशेत. अशयाताम् अशेरत शयीत शयीयाताम् शयीग्न् See 3, 1. 3.1, and for the terminations 1, p. 17, and 1, p. 22. अम्तोत् अम्तुताम् अम्तुवन् Purasm. अस्तवीत् । अम्मुवीताम् अस्तुत अस्तुवाताम् अस्तुवत Atm. अस्तुवीत म्नुयात । स्तुयाताम् रस्तुपुः Parasın. Pm.3rd स्तुवीत स्नुवीयाताम् स्तुवीरन् Atm. For Vriddli sve 4. p. 35 and for the optional augment 4,5, p. 36, and explanation. }अम् 3rdprrs. स्तुवीयात् । नुवाशाताम् स्तुपा Taresm.

·SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 45 " " Sing. Dual Plur: Parasm. Imperf. 3rd pers. अब्रवीत् अब्रूताम् अब्रुवन् Atm. अब्रूत अबुवाताम् अब्रुवत Parusm. Pot. ब्रूयात् ब्रूयाताम् âtim. बुवीत ब्रुवीयाताम् ब्रुवीरन् See 6, p. 37. Imperf. 3rd pers. ऐत ऐताम् आयन् The temporal augment is 371, whichi, along with the p in the sing, and the g in other places, takes the Vriddhi of For (see First Book, p. 54). In the 3rd pers. plur. ? with अन् (10. P. 37), and with the temporal augment, आयन्:, Tam. uith अधि Imperf. and Mrs. अध्यत अध्ययाताम् अध्ययत. Before आताम् the is changed to इय् (II., p. 3 which, with the termination, IS इयाताम्। with the temporal augment it is ऐयाताम् as in the last case', and with अधि अध्ययाताम्. It undergoes the same changes before all other vowel terminations. Pot. 3rd pers. sing. अधीयीत, &c. आस् 2nd pers. In f. आम्था आसाथाम् आध्वम् forms यन् अहरहा स्नात्वा संध्यामुपासीत । दशरथस्य भार्या कौसल्या चैत्रे नवम्यां तिथी मध्याह्न पुत्र रामं प्रासूत । पारिक्षितस्य जनमेजयस्य सत्रं सारमेयोऽभ्यैत् । तत्र च जनमेजयस्यत्विजस्तमताडयन् । सोऽरोदीद्रुदंश्च मातरमयात् । मातापृच्छद्वत्स किं रोदिषि । सोऽब्रवीजनमेजयस्य सत्रमायं तत्र केऽपि मां प्राहरन् । मातावदतिक त्वमकरोः किं तानस्पृशः। सोऽभाषत नाहं मर्यादामत्यायम् । सरमा सत्रभूमि गत्वोचर्वाचाबूत । अयं मे पुत्रको न युष्मानस्पृशत्तत्किमेनमनपराधिनमताडयत। तां न कोऽपि प्रत्यभाषत । तेन क्रुद्धा सा देवशुनी सरमा जनमेजयं शप्त्वा गृहमयात् ।

·46 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. द्रोणाच्छस्त्रविद्यामध्यैयत पाण्डवाः कुशलवौ वाल्मीकेरध्यै- यातां कर्णश्च परशुरामादध्यैत । अभिवाद्य गुरुं ब्रूयादधीप्व" भगवनिति । अनिषण्णे गुरौ नासीत । विदेहानुपयन्तो वयमेकरात्रं गङ्गायास्तीरेऽवसाम तत्र च पूर्व- रात्रे नाना रम्याः कथाः कृत्वानन्तरमस्वपिम । ब्रूयात्क्षमी गभीरोऽसीति बत युधिष्टिरं प्रभुं को न । कथमहं बली स्यां कथं मयि प्रजा विश्वस्युः कथं च प्रकृतयो मामुपासीरनित्यवं चिन्तयतस्तस्य रात्रिरयात् । ततः प्रामुमतां वीरौ रपवावरुतां तथा । उष्णं च प्राणितां दीर्घमुश्चैाक्रोशतां तथा ॥ यथा काष्ठं च काष्ठं च समेयातां महोदधौ । समेत्य च व्यपेयातां तद्वद्भूतसमागमः॥ The son of Dhritarashtrn gamblcil with the sons of Pindu, and deprived them of all their wealth. The Pandavas then went (s) in a forest. Thithe many Brahmanils followed (s with ara] them. Then saul [F] Yudhishthira to them, “You should not follow [rnitli अनु] 1 we are [अम् ] now without we. Ith, and cannot be verified The Brahmanas then cail []. “We are [ अस् ] able to turn our own food." Yuilhishthiin their dil not reject [ख्या with प्रति and आ ] them. But he wasnt unwilling that the Brahmanas should work for their own luol, He theit asked his spiritual adviser what he should do. He told him, “Phaist [स्तु] the sun." Yudhishthira then praised [स्तु] the sun, and when the " • with ufis is here used in the sense of torchins. tre a verb hatne the sense of Exty with न.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 47 un was pleased, got from him a cooking utensil, from :hich they always got as much food as they wanted. The wives of Sagara gave birth to [x] many sons. I did not sleep (FTI) last night. When did you bathe [FI] in the waters of the Ganges ? The women of Vraja cried. [G] aloud when Kțisliņa went o Mathurâ. I studied [, with Nyâya at Benares. If I were [37] in Hastinapura, 1 should say [7] to Dritarâslițra that it was not proper to deprive the Pandavas of their wealth by dishonest gambling Vone should rely (way with fa] on the words of the wicked. JCABULARY VIII. 47977 m. ll. I. guilt less. farer.f. it day of the month. farqon m. n f. not sitting, Hve. for a long time, long, TETE: ind. every day. deeply. stre 3th conj. with 379, to attain. Tant f. bitch of the gods. Fritha and 374, to separate; mon proper name. inuth my to unite, to come Tiff. ninth day of the fortingether, night. ind.wr. Jouilly, woud, ARTI inil. different, wany. stup aile hotly htta m. son of Parikshit. 1n. one night. Fav moproprr name. TETTE M. prior, tiff. the for m.n.f. patient, forbearing. night) the prior or first part of the night. 957 m. and m. sons of Rima. palst conj. Paraxm. rithe far and gafa f. subject, people, ministerial officers. 377,to cry out aloud,to lament. inil. particle implying sur. Tir 11. n. f. deep, grave. prise, sorrow, &c. #in. the first month of the VTT 1st conj. witharat, to answer. जनमेजय m. name of the son of भूतसमागम n.coming together or Parikshit, grandson of Arjuna. union of animals or beings. TIT adv. like that, in the same मध्याह m. (मध्य middle,and अहन् n, day) midday, noon. Hindu year. Inauer.

·48 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 712 at f. bound, limit. #T".a sacrificial session; HT: i n. tl:e great ocean. TA F. the place of sacrifice. I will q, to faint. Araf. name of the bitch of the A n. name of a nuge. gode. Dame of a country FETTJ twilight (at the morning (in the plural). and evening twilights and in 979 1x conj. to curse. Tort the noon prayers are offered ind. pret pr. by Brahmanas). for ( anal fant) art ATTT m. the sun of Sarama, a or knowledge of war. dog. 11. Aloud ind. Proper युक्त mst part. of युज, Cooking utensil Ferro Tema 14. 11. ./. Droprive of 1st conj. with st., Sagar TT m. name of a king. Dishonest gambling 77797 n. Spiritual adviser 39TER M. (ATE . fraund, and पुरोहित ॥ मृत gambling Want sur lit cong Âim. rith 374. Earp spot luy conj. l'unitsin. Wicbeil (persons) To m. as M. THT III. Camble from Ith some roof 31 1 Without wealth Tera m. il. f. prrs. sin. pores. Women of Vrajit TFTFIT: f. Last night गता रात्रि। nom plur. Muthur TYTI I. name of all Work afro & sth corij. place, Tyrann. and Aun. Food अन. LESSON TY. SECOND CHALGAMON-continual. lu applying the terminations to the remaining roots of this conjugation several phone changes take place which We will non notice 1. The eudmg got a root is changed to g, when it is followed by luy con unani, Kerjee it haul ui a semi-vowel, or by nothing Thus for which, followed by fathe 3rd pers. sing. termina- Flowenlly nothma, t...ilie laster lains at the end of a won or forun. It is not meant that it should not fullovel by ans, eher worl 10 a sen- The expresament de lu lewe understand in this sons througlout.

·SECOND BOOK OF SAYSER . and * 31 49 tion of the present, becomes first y 7, p. 12 is clanded to home + fa, because the a of fa is not a pasal or a semitowel. Nous II. The initial थ् of a termination following a soft 1 - pirate orsthe fourth detter of a class are changed to g. The of he is a soft aspirate, thereſgienne fat is changed to f, and thus we have +ft. When linguals and dentals are.condition ed the dentals substitute the corresponding tinguisting sce 1. 21, First Book, 10th Edn.). We thus get the pa Then, III. followed by is dropped, and the precoiling vowel, at suit, is made long. Thus, we come to afe. When the 3rd pers, dual termination JA is applied, we have boy 1. fere + , by 11. Forse + 74, and then fort-A, and by]Il.FT:, the short being rendered long. There is no Guna here, the termination all being weak ( vide 1, p. 12). Thir gril pers. plur. is forefra; the termination for beginning with a vowel, no plonetic change takes place. In the 2nd pers. ring we have, for being strong, to by 1. Here, before for i 'n bie changed to fo buy, note, p 21, First Book, we have a perial rule, vir: - Il'. followed by is changed to the By this, we set Thing becomes fi by notut, p. 70, Ius Book, 10th El. Thus we arrive at for Ilonce the paradigms of the Present Tous l'aran..are: Sing. Dual Plur. Tit pers. लिहः लक्षि लीदः लीद लीट firefa 2 prise en and from pers. plur. shoull be made up lihe: 3rd pers. dural. Leforo fa, ti, anili, 110 phonetic hange takes place, f# and 7: beginning with it wasal ani with a smisowel. The Atm. forms are as follows:- लिहहे लिरहे ont लिहाथे TE 3rd लिहाते लिहते These should be maile up in the same way as that shown above. 1. The second person sing. termination of the Parasm. luoperative of the second group of conjugations is for when the base ends in are consonant excopt a nasal or a semi-vowel. 3 or लेन्धि 2nd 1st pers. " ·1.0 SECOND BOOK OF SAXAKRIT. Imperative. I'arasm. Sing. Dual लेहानि लेहाव लीडे लीदम लीदाम् Plur. लेहामा लीद लिहन्तु 1st लेहावहै लेहामहै हिक्ष्य लिहाथाम् लीदम् लीदाम् लिहाताम लिहताम् Remember that the three nos. of the 1st pers, are strong, and • • :'ndnis. sing. Palasm. niak. Roots dung mith and ending, with a hange 110 प. do tlom. wine circumstances as those mentioned 1. Runde I. Thus When the termination fa is appended to it becomes, fa •ing strong. दोष · ति ]ky II , P. 49, it is दो + घि. Then, VI. In the body of a word or grammatical form the precling content (scept in al substitutes the third or soft 'ana-pate of its class when followed by the third or fourth in-tter fooft ima-prata tor aspiratti). For . is substituteil the... mstances. Thus in a hai ( दोग : वि . ". दोग्धि The tual दुग्ध' should the imilarly marles u In the plural दुन्ति, there is no phonetic lange. Wlientom prors. sing. fo is appendel, we have iss Y. inf. In des condition, before applying the rule in notrt }..., First Book. It hase VII. When a 2000 bias or consists of a vllable beginning with and come within ft aspirate (fourth letter ), changeel 11 म. ग. tou, and r. to u. when the syllable - tollowed bn म. न. (nothing. By this it htIt धोर सि . then by note +, P... First Book, चोरु · सि. I hota, P... First Book, 10th Edn., धोक-पि ritten it. The parnihgms therefore are :- Parasm Tomat. दोध सन्धि दुग्य. दृहन्ति ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 51 a. The Tof 1.6 pers. हन्वः ܐܐܐܐܐ Åtm. 'Pres. 3rd pers. gra-gara-; 2nd pers.ge-geri, Lc. l'arusm. Impera. 3rd pers. To-TH-GE-T &c. Åtm. 3rd pers. दुग्धाम् दुहाताम्-दुहताम्, did pers. धुक्ष्व. दुहाथाम् धुरध्वम् &c. हन् is dropped before a weak termination beginning with any consonant, except a nasal or a semi-vowel. and the penultimate 37, before one beginuing with a vowel. b He is the second person singular of the Imperative. The of this root is changed to, when immediately followed by t VIII. In the body of a word on grammatical form न् and Hare changed to the nasal of the class to which the following letter (uot nasal itself) beloiigs, and to all an 118 l'ârue when followed by E, F, I and Purism. Present. Siny. Dual Plur. हन्मि हन्मः हसि हथः हथ हन्ति हतः affa llere न् is dropped in the 2m and 314 pers. (lual and amu pers. plin, because the terminations are weak and have an imtial ('olisonaut which is neither a nasal nor it semi-sonel, and is chanquel to an anu staruu by VIII. before fra buning a weak termination with an initial, sowo, the penultimate sy is dropped, and we have + 370. wluch by 2 c is gi-a. When in certain cases this root takes Âmmunopada terwinda trons ute forms of the Present Tense are:- हन्वहे हन्मह हसे ETUT हध्ये 3id हते ara नते As above, 7 is dropped here before the consonants which are neither nusals nor semi-vowels, and 37 before the vowels. In the latter case is changed to a Impero. Param. 3rd pers. EC-TEL. nd pers. sing. of. lit pers. sing. Tah. Atm. 31 qers. BATATA, &c. 3. The roots ist aud i have the augmeut y attached to thein before terminations beginning with # and Et, except that of the Imperfect second person plural. 31 1st peis.

·52 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 11 "I. Hugment 1 1x.. Rects widing in 1 or ez and the roots au, #, TA, 9A. TIL TJA. A Mange their final to q when followed by 11110 roubyacant (Acujot it hasal oi a semi-vowel, or by nothing. ईश Aim. Present. Sing. Dual Plur. रंश 'ईश्वहे ईश्महे 2nd इशिष ईशाथे इशिध्वे ईशाते ईशते Didmeň, the of this is changed to T. Then the dental a boca com a bocca connes e; hence we have fa. To # and the Tring porfiacl, we have it and ST TÀ. Imy/". 3.1 1. ईटाम् ईशाताम् ईशताम, EC., ईशै 1st Pr) . !!. Tlie M fultimate # of an tahesit« V'riddhi substitute bumse the free toommations, and optionally before the Mail odies with an atal vold. मृज ।'t unt मामि मृज्व मृज्म मृष्ट. मृष्ठ माधि मृष्टः मृजन्ति-मार्जन्ति The final a ot' thus leing changed to q before T, clc., Ly LI., It has ( मार्टि. मष्ट (. In the first case and in the sing. of the other to1 vills. the + is changed to आर् by the alore inle, and (olititolially so in the indurs. plur. Before सि, ज is changed to a 1.. :1ish IV, p. 19, aill the for itself tuins, पि, It it मानि. ImHI. Hindi माष्टुं मृष्टाम् मृजन्तु '' मार्जन्तु. 2nd pers. s":: मट्टि. In the liest, the termination is foly 1, p. 19, the 57 of telo hinyaad Ivan I..., in this q lecomes Blog VI., p. 50. . The শ্রয় in changed to g before the weak terni व स Pration उष्ठः उष्टः वश्मि उश्व. उश्म वक्षि वष्टि उशान्ति 1 ... . —nd p" ' kiy५. उडि ति: 1., it one-वर टि-वष्टि (notco", .:.1, F.B मि IS.. above-वक् + सि by IV., पि-वाशि 1. उष्ट .h alone. निवार - मि-व ' '-वर ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 53 .. विly 1, p. 49-उश + धि-उप धि-उप - दि ( note , 1. 21, F..B.)-उडि by VI., P. 70. 6. The rowel of शास् Paril. is changed to s before the (insonantal weak terminations. 7. The termination of the third person plural, as alpandeel to the roots शास्, जक्ष, चकाम्, दरिद्रा and जागृ, loses it-न्. 1Npers. " " -- , The Imperative second person singular of शास् is शाधि and चकाम, चकाडि or चकाधि. Sing. Dual I'luri शास्मि शिप्त. शिप्मः शास्सि शिष्ठ. शिष्ठ शास्ति शिष्टः शासति शाम् तस्-शिस् । तस् by 6-शिष् + तस् (स् heing changol to .-शिष् + टस् note ", p. 21, F. B.)-शिष्टः. शास 37fa by 7 not अन्ति-शासति- जागृ-Param. जागर्ति जागृतः-जाग्रति. Impers. Pnd pers. snij. जागृहि , 1st yer's. Kinj. जागराणि. S. The final 347 of eftzr is dropped before the weak ter- 1.11ations beginning with a vowel and changed to before Iluse with an initial consonant. •ya's. दरिद्राति-दरिद्वितः-दरिदति &c. ". The Imperative forms of far, are optionally malo up inling the corresponding forms of ą to Para Imrntire 3rd pers. वेत्तु or विदांकरोतु-वित्ताम् 01 विदांकुरुताम्-वि- दन्तु or विदांकुर्वन्तु . IPL• vent 3rd perv. वेत्ति-वित्तः-विदन्ति kc. I. When a conjunct consonant, the first member of which 1- स् or , is at the end of a word, or is followed by any conchaut, except a nasal or a semi-vowel, the Fur F is dropped. Thus in Tex + , the first member of ey is , and it is followed boy the of which is not a semi-vowel nor a nased; hence is Tropped, and we have चष् + ते and by note *, p. 21, F. B. चष्टे. In the case of the 2nd pers. sing. we have first चश् + से; the dropped as above and we have 79 + at; then by IV. p. 49 + से, and से becoming पे (note + p. 79, F. B., 10th Edn.), the form is open The paradigms therefore are:- . is ·.8ECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Song. • pri. चक्षे Atm. Present. Dual Plun चश्वहे चश्महे चक्षाथे चड्ढे चश्यते चक्षते वे-hy note P.31, F. B., . -and . . वट ध्वे . IN IT. P. 10. चर. 4 Imm inter. 3rdprs. चष्टाम्-चक्षाताम् &c. &c. द्विष दधि ।। Pory. Any. Pres. c.-दिह देग्धि 3rd pers. sing. . 'K xm.R. मविता वै प्रसवानामीप्टे। गोपः सायं धेनूदाग्धिापयः। अधुनाखिलं भरतवर्ष महाप्रतापा आफूभौमाः प्रशासति । नम्मिन्पुष्पे भ्रमरौ मधु लीढः। अग्निाडे पुगोहितं यजस्य देवमृत्विजम् । योऽस्मान्द्वष्टि यं च वयं द्विष्मस्तं नन्त्विमान्यस्माभिः पठ्य- मानानि मन्त्राक्षराणि । हे जगन्नाथाखिलस्यैतस्य वस्तुजातस्य त्वमीशिषे । है दीनबन्धो यद्यन्मे नम्रस्य पापं भवेत्तत्तत्प्रतिजहि। शत्रं हन्तुं शगन्विषेण देग्धि । आचश्व क मामकाकिनीमन विहायाकरुण यासि । यं मां धर्ममाचड्डे तमेव प्रत्यहमाचरामि । वन्से न युक्तं ते मङ्गलकाले रोदितुं प्रमृड्डयणि । अथवा मल्यो प्रमृष्टाम् । भाप्यकृत्पतञ्जलिः कात्यायनस्य वचनानि विस्तरतो व्याचष्टे । शिष्यस्तेऽहं शाधि मां त्वां प्रपन्नम् । शास्त्यरीन् धर्ममाशास्ते कीर्तिमाशंसते पराम् । स शंसति सतां वृत्तं विशसत्युत्पथास्थितान् ॥ ईद त्रिविष्टपास्थाने तत्कीर्ति वासवः स्वयम् । ईडयन्ति नरेन्द्राश्च भूमाषुद्भूतविस्मयाः॥ • The root gorern-the genitive of the object. + See nuiet p 3. ..

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 55 या निशा सर्वभूतानां तस्यां जागर्ति संयमी। यस्यां जाग्रति भूतानि सा निशा पश्यतो मुनेः ॥ य एनं वेत्ति हन्तारं यश्चैनं मन्यते हतम् । उौ तौ न विजानीतो नाय हन्ति न हन्यते ॥ करोति पापं योऽज्ञानानात्मनो वेत्ति च क्षयम् । प्रद्वेष्टि साधुवृत्तांश्च स लोकस्यैति वाच्यताम् ॥ प्राप्य चाप्युत्तमं जन्म लब्ध्वा चेन्द्रियसौष्ठवम् । न वेत्त्यात्महितं यस्तु स भवेदात्मघातकः॥ How many times in the day dost thou milk [दुह] cows ? Do not drive.the, bee from the flower, let it lick [लिह honey. Those who thoughtlessly kill [हन्] animals, never enjoy happiness. The people of cities sweep (ps with Fr] the streets clean whenever their kings enter them. In the last quarter of the night, the pupils of the Rishi pet up [जागृ] and learn the Vedas. We do not know [fa] whether Rajagrilia or Pâtaliputra 112s the capital of Magadba. Do not hate [द्विष] googl men. "lay the Queen and her descendants tule [शास्] us long. Let your reverence explain [ चक्ष with वि and आ ] this phorism. VOCABULARY IX. Roots of the Second Conjugution. ईद Atm. to praise. +चक्ष Atm. to speak; with ईश Atm.to be master of, to rule. tell; with and at, to explain. चकास् Parasm. to shine. जागू Parasm. to be awake. आ, to * The soul is referred to here. 1 Used in the Conjugational Tenses and the Perfect. It substitutes ET Parasm. and Atm. in the non-conjugational tenses and optionally in the Perfect.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Smar, fra l'masw. to be poor. for Parasm. and Âtm. to lick. far l'onem. and Atm. to lie TT Parasm. to wish, to shine. FIT Parasm. to know. l'ursm. and Átm. to milk. शाम् Param. to govern, to reguhat I'mmasm. and Atm. to hate. late, to discipline. a l'usu, to wipe, to clear, TTA Átm. with 347, to wish, to Pith g, to wipe off', arith AH, clesire. ET Parasui. to kill. -\("P"}!. नम्र . अकम्ण. A ( 37'not, and and Ty m. lord) the Lord of 7.7 1.) ruthless, one who Framf. his fame. [the universe. las 110 commission. fafaETTET 1. (Afrey : TEYTTET, M. ". (3574a self, heaven, 371197 11. assembly) 101 T. Pivostray) Serries the heavenly assembly, the stroya, wozuinslumself. assembly of the gods. आत्महित ॥. ( आत्मन् olf. and दीनबन्धु M. (दीन m. n.f. p001', fra Good) one's own good. Tr 1. brother) brother of इन्द्रियमाष्ठव . (इन्द्रिय ". humb or those that are poor. 1st, hd मष्टिव beauty; M. n. 1. shining. commen) undone make, n. f lumble. healthy l sound frame. To m. a king. st!!! come to praise. TTHET (pres. pass. part. of पठ् Fry4FUTA Nil. 11..1. (57497 ml. a 1st conj. to recite or read) wong path. TFT puest what is being recited. ;"!1. Of FUT 371, one who que m. name of the author liit taken til, One who has of a great grammaticum. taken to a wrong patlı. called the Mahâbhâshya. +49 m. 1. 1. (37 pist Thea m.family priest,chaplain. भू उद to l15€, to 1979 m. il. f. (past part. of lop producel) one in whom with g), one who has submit. 11.12.ment has ted or surrendered himself. TAJ m. anything that is pro- 34/lev bolle duced, produce. FTTTTTT m. name of a great भाप्यकृत् ॥ the writer of a Cirinnarinn. Bhâslıya or explanatory dis- 0 m. destruction, ruin. course, a comincntator. HITOTT". (A n. the universe, i ona m. (77 11. anything I intuirus of the Preme Tense of this ront are also made up by adding in the lerrum:*????* of the Perfect. anaz, Fal:,, fas: &c. (See Lesson wonder or Toreros lumn ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . fortunate or auspicious, and six with a 1st conj. Âum.to par time) an auspicious occahope. sion. TA 1st conj. Parasm. with fa, HETETT 1. a syllable a holy or to kill, to destroy. Vedic verse. HT m. å sage who has eu bed वस्तुजात . (वस्तु ॥., and जात. his passions, an ascetic. à collection) a collection of Wala 11. Vom. di lu. plu. things. all existing things. वाच्यता/. censurableness, liabi. सवितु ॥ lity to censure. साधुत्त . tko f. (FTY 1. 1.1. THE M. the god Indra. good, and 27 1. conduct) frica. alv. in detail, well-conducted विहाय (ths. of हा to abandon with APTA iul. in the piening. 6) Laving abandoned. TFT m. 11. f. a killer. + the sun. 1. nauc of Iphorism मूत्र . | Pitaliputra पाटलिपुत्र Bee भ्रमर m. a city in Magadha. Cintal Ther-fr.l. Quarter (तुरीयो भाग.) यामm. Descrudent 15 m. 1. f. FTF Rijayriha THTE N. name of in m. 11. f. city in Magadhit. Drive चुद् 10th conj. with 9. Read of 1st conj. L'arus m. llow many times felict: inil. Street रथ्या. List TTH m. 1. f. Thoughtlessly air.TWHTLIETA Jagadla HOTT: m. useil in the Whenever यदा यदा-तदा तदा. mane of a country or Your reverence भगवान् or भवान् [its people. nom. sing. Vi ser a LESSON X. SECOND CONJUGATION--concluded. Imperfect. and of the 2m and 3rd pers. sing. of the Imperfect are dropped after a consonant. II. Any consonant except a uasal at the end of a wond formi is changed to the first or third of its clas... qis 1. The changed to or Thus, in the Imperfect 3rd pers. sing. we have first they + and then store a loy 6, 1. 12. 7 is dropped by I. and theru ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1stro. 1sttis. . . 56 reshains अलेह. Now by I. P. 48 इ.is changed to द; whence ic the har अलेद, and by this rule, अलेट or अलेह. Similarly, स of the 2nd pers. sing. is dropped and by the same rules we have the bainc form, siz., अलेट or अलेह. The paradigms therefore are:- Sing. Dual Plur, अलेहम् अलिल अलिश 2nd अलेह-ह अलीदम् अलीद 3d अलेट-इ अलीदाम अलिहन् अनीताम् . लीद:/x. lal Pres. &c. ( for which set the last Lesbon). âtm. अलिहि अलिबहि अलिकहि अलीदा. अलिहाथाम् अलीद्वम् अलीद अलिहाताम् अलिहत ... अदुर । न-अदोह “त् by 6,1P. 12-अदोह hy I. p. 57-अदोघ V. p. 11-अधोर hy ]l. P. ()-अधोक् 01 अधोग by II. P.br above. Similarly, when is applied we have 3TIFE-H. अदोहम् अदुई अदुह्म अधोकग अदुग्धम् अदुग्ध 311 अधाका अदुग्धाम् अदुहन् Atm. indants. अदुग्ध अदुहाताम् अदुहत, Pd pers. sing. अदुग्धा • vloeing changed 20 ep by 11. p. 19. अहन् । त्-अहन् | I. I. 7. अहन ' ताम् (nal)-अहताम् न् ming droid : ' 1, अहन् अन् (plur.)-अह्न +"अन् : (latter part) 51-अनन् ।' P.51. अहनम् अहन्व अहन्म अहन् अहतम् अहत 30. अहताम् अनन् अद्दत अनाताम् अमृज · त्-अमा । त्y 1, P. 5:'-अमार्ज by I. p. 57- अमाई by IN - अमाई-ई 11 II. P. 37. Similarly, we hast अमाई nis sity. 1st nik अमार्जम अमृज्व अमृज्म अमाद६ अमृष्टम् अमृष्ट 3.1., अमाई ई अमृष्टाम् Itni. . - 1st per: .. अहन् अनत. " अमृजन्-अमार्जन * A CINCI (V Shane wali (as its brst member is allowed at the end of a wond. but not when the second member. .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 59 . 1. The termination of the Imperfect third person plural i उस् in the case of विद्, जाग, शास्, जक्ष, चकास्, and दरिद्रा. fase takes this termination optionally. III. Tht ending of a root is optionally changed to y or vivarga in the Imperfect second person singular. Thus अवेद् + स-अवेत्-द् or अव: Sing. Dual Plur. अवेदम् अविद्व . अविद्य 2nd अवे अवेत- अविसम् अवित्त अवेत-द अवित्ताम् अविदुः 2. The ending vowel takes its Guna before उस्. जागृ-Parasm. Imperf. 3rd per९. अजाग -अजागृताम् अजागरः &c. अजागृ + त्-अजागर् + त्. andl hy I. p. 57,अजागर्-अजागः IV. The ending # of a root is changed to gorą before ht termination t and optionally before स्. 1 st pers. 3rd , शास् P17 asn. 1st pers. and" "हम अशासम् अशिष्व अशिप्म अशा -भशात्-द् अशिष्टम् अशिष्ट अशात्-द् अशिष्टाम् अशामुः अशास् 'त्,त् being droppeed ure have अशास्, and by albove अशात्-द्. ईश Imperf. Atm. Bird. Pr) ९. ऐष्ट ऐशाताम् ऐशत , Dual per s. plur. It is changed to q hy 1X. 1':52, and 7 togliy VI.]. 50 and ध्व to d. -- Tamperf. Parasm. Brid pe) s. अवद-औष्टाम् औशन्: Before ताम् ili the being changed to 3, the temporal augment T with the 3 forms Vridhi, ५... औ. Potential. व it pers. दुह्याम् दुह्याम दुहीयं Param, Atm. Sing. Dual Pur. Sng. Dual Plur, दुखाव दुहीवहि दुद्दीमहि दुह्माः दुयातम् दुह्यात दुहीथाः दुहीयाथाम् दुहीध्वम् दुखात् दुह्याताम् दुछुः दुहीत दुहीयाताम् दुहीरन् हन् Parasm. 3rd pers. हन्यात हन्याताम्-हन्युः; Atm. 3rd pers. प्रीत नीयाताम्-नीरन्- शाम् Parasm. 3rd pers. शिष्यात-शिष्याताम्-शिप्युः 3rd ·G0 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. सायं प्रातर्धेनुमग्निहोत्रायाधोगृषिः । दण्डकायां वसन्तौ रामलक्ष्मणौ रक्षसां सहस्राण्यहताम् । वाणक्योऽकिंचनो ब्राह्मणो नन्दानद्वेद्धिप्रभावाच्च तानहन् । तेषां च राज्यं चन्द्रगुनी नाम नृपतिश्चाणक्यस्य शिष्योऽशात् । देवानां संदेशं हरनलो दमयन्त्या अन्तःपुरं प्राविशत् । प्रवि- शन्तं च तं देवानां वरादक्षितारो नाविदुः । कंचिहटवातडागस्य तटमुपगता लार्भेकांनभ्यन्नन् । म राजा दिग्विजयादारभ्यान्मनः सर्व वृत्तान्तं गन्धर्वकन्या- या' आचट। यथा पाण्डवा ग्णे नास्मान्हन्युस्तथा क्रियताम् । कश्चित्कुक्कुरो यज्ञमण्डपं. गती हवींप्यवालेट । तत्रविजस्तमा- मन्मर्व च समुपाहृतं यज्ञियं द्रव्यं त्यक्त्वा मण्डपं सममार्जन् । गजानो धर्मेण वसुधां शिप्युः। TI: Manual (ETTA | the cut after the Vandas Tit. II:11 16/12 to t]it. Ithan.12 100 चन] 10 11111- Th Aigit loo hated [द्विप) u for a long time i]]\ulal com 1111 12. With a battle with them and kille (ET) 22.des. Ticii lung did not know [fay) this, 1:ht it :) : in mital to the till of little. But . - in hill...1. Thilty - kingdom. 11. Nill milk दह । Vinterday? in ItaliN... जाग्र] the ilhole light i citiating the Ted.ts. \111 - 01/01 ज 11th HI11- 1. Clery morimig. । locUBULARYS. अप्रिोत्र " emerlu कुकुर m. ador गन्धर्वकन्या... the daughter ita andharita चन्द्रगुप्त m. name othing चाणक्य . name of a person. मर m. n. I. bank, margin. दिग्विजय ॥. (दिश J. quarteey, वि. जय .conjuest) conjuest of ht quarters. Or of all regions. दव्य ".a thing. नन्द m. name of a royal race, an individual of it. बटुn a hos.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 61 . m. a frog. TEST f. the earth. qusy m. a slied, an enclosure. A m. account, occurrence, यज्ञमण्डप m. enclosure prepared समुपाहत (21st yess. rart. of a for a sacrifice. and 371)collected. fira m.n. f. pertaining to sacri- Hahn. a thousand. fices. हन् ॥ith अभि or आ to strike. To i. a battle. cithसम् उप, Ingas 3751: pur. naine of a | Kalingas #F5T: plur. name of people or of their country. a people or of their country. Commander चमपति सेनापति॥. Maurya मौर्य. name of a dy- Field of battle रणभूमि . nasty, an individual of it. in person .. Repeat 1st Conj. l'arısm. Invader ist conj. Burasın. with Return Ta 1st conj. Åtm. with fa. offit. Territory faut in. पट LESSON ST. THIRD) (JIGATION. 1. In this conjugation the vel, and if there are more han one, the first, is oluplicated, together with the initial consonant, it any, before the terminations illal pied. 2. lieneral Rules of Brillivution.-- Halical lard 2.1 letter is changed the band waspirate (1st lutter) of its chiess in the reduplicative syllable; and a radisoft a point to the sett mapute. Thus the redupliation of prilog 1 in Forint, and Iyytlir tirst part on the almowo, T, 1777:71-7777 .y the sccoul part of the ilove and ? «.; 5f1-froſt-fan. 6. A aulical yuttural is changed to the correponding palatal (subject to the above rule), au खन्-खखन् । -इस्खन - vad चन्वन् 'y 3 ".; हा-हाहा by 1-हहा 1.9.2e., and FVET by the these. If a conjumet consonant begins i domst, the first member of it only with the vowel is geduplicateil. -y the above frigy 2 h. and ? FABET. d. Erreption: It the first member be a sibilant and ·62 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . . The second a hard letter, the hard letter is reduplicated; as म्पर्ष-पम्पर्ष A radical long rowel becomes short, and a radical # becomes अ, सही-जिही दा-ददा; कृ-चकृ. 3. Irregularities applicable to the third conjugation.- The rowel of the reduplicative sylable of मा, हा 'to go' भृ, and qorqanla is changed to g and that of the reduplicative yllable of fair, faa'awol fart takes its Guna substitute. 4. The reduplicative 7 of # is changed to t. (See 8, P. 78). . 1. The termination of the third person plural Parasm. loosen its nasal; as well as that of the Âtm. 6. The terwination of the third person plural of the Importent l'arasmnipda in FH , before which the final 377 of all 10t - Is dhonited. and the final इ, उ, and s, short or long', •nke thin Gunn silhstitute. (('omp. l and , p. 59). भृ Parasm. Present. .ving. Dual Plur. विभर्भि बिभृव बिभृमः विभर्षि विभृथः विश्थ 3.1 विभर्ति विभृतः विति Imperfect. अविभग्म अविभूव अविभृम 31 अविभ अविभृतम् अबिभृत अभिः अविभृताम् अधिभरः Immratire. बिभराणि चिभराव बिभराम विरहि विनम् 37.1.. बिभर्नु विभृताम् विधत Potential. विभृयाम् बिभृयाव विभ्याम End विभूयातम् विश्यात बिस्यात् विश्याताम् विपुः fre by 1,2 ra and 3. Rrniem ber the rnle about Guna before the strong terruinations (G, 13).विति। 5. 11. IMrs. " ." " Ist. गिरयाः " 3rd " ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 63 . .. " Imperf. 3rd pers. sing. अविभृ + त् ; by 6, p. 12 अविभk and by I. p. 57 अबिभर्-अविभः, 3rd pers. plur. अविभरुः by 6. Sing. Dual Plur. Atm. Pres. 3rd per's. विभूते बिभ्राते बिभ्रते Imperf. » अविभृत अविभ्राताम् अविभ्रंत Part sm. Pres. 3rd pers. जिहत्ति जिह्रीतः जिहियति (II. p.35.) Imperf. 3rd pers. अजित अजिह्रीताम् अजिह्रयुः (6). 7. The ending vowel of मा and हा 'to .go' is changed to 'when followed by a weak termination beginning with a consonant, and dropped before one beginning with a vowel. मा Atm. Pres. 3rd pers. मिमीते मिमाते मिमते Similarly हा Atm. to go.' जिहीते जिहाते जिहते . . Imperj. 3rd pers. अमिमीत. अमिमाताम् अमिमत - the आ of मा .. मिमा by 3. ते having an initial consonant, is changed tot and thus we have मिमी. Before आते, अते &c., the आ is dropped, the termiuations beginning with a vowel 8. The set of T'to abandon' undergoes the same changes as above, but the ई is optionally shortenel. Before Potential terminations beginning with य the आ of this root is dropped, and in the Imperative second person singular it is optionally letained, so that there are tlince forms, viz., जहाहि, जहिहि. जहीहि. 'to abandon' l'urasm. Pres. Sing. Dual Plur. - 1st pers. जहामि जहिव -जहीव जहिमः-जहीम. 2nd जहासि जहिथ-जहीधः जहिथ-जहीथ 3rd जहाति जहित-जहीतः जहति Imperf. 3rd yes. अजहात् अजहिताम्-अजहीताम् अजहुः Impera. जहातु जहिताम्-जहीताम् Pot. जयाताम् जयु 9. The t of भी is optionally shortened before the weak terminations with an initial consonant. I. The ending r of a root, bhort or long. not preceded by a conjunct consonant is changed to y before weak terminations with an initial vowel when the base consists of inore than one syllable.

·64 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . Tres. 3rd pers. . Sing. Dual दधामि दध्व दधासि धत्थ धड़े विधी अति-विभ्यति, the hase बिभी consisting of two syllables : but जिही- अति-जिहियति, for the ई of ही is preceded by abich is a conjunct consonant. बिभेति बिभित-विभीत: farzafa Parasil. Ionprof. अबिभेत अविभिताम्-अविभीताम् अबिभयुः ., Imporn. 1st Mrs. विभयानि विभयाव बिभयाम 10. and lose the ending vowel, before the weak termuinations and then I assumes the form धत् before स. ध्व. a and y. The Imperative second person singular forms of the Parasan. 21 देहि and धेहि. 2T to jout' or 'do.' Puren. Atm. Sing. Duat Plur. Plur. दध्मः दधे दध्वहे दध्महे Present धत्थ धत्से दधाथे दधाति धत्त दधति धत्ते दधाते दधते अदधाम् अदध्व अदध्म अदधि अदध्वहि अदध्महि Intertect. अदया अधत्तम् अधत्त अधत्थाः अदधाथाम् अघवम् अदधात् अधत्ताम् अदधु अधत्त अदधाताम् अदधत दधाम दधावहै दधामहै Imperatore.fr धत्तम् दधाथाम् धङ्कम दधातु धत्ताम् दधतु धत्ताम् दधाताम् दधताम् दध्याम् दध्यान दध्याम दधीय दधीवहि दयामाह l'utential दध्या दध्यातम् दध्यात दधीथाः दधीयाथाम् दधीध्वम् दध्यात् दध्याताम् दध्युः दधीत दधीयाताम् धीरन् In धदम् Be the q is changed to , being followed loy a suti consomnt which is not a nasal. In 377Y:, syr is dropped log ti. p. 02. Remember the terminations of the first pers. of the Imperi tive begin with आ except ऐ. 7 should be similarly conjugatel. 11. The penultimate slot vowel does not take its Gur, substitute before the vowel strong terminations in this conjugatiull. faran 1st pers. sing. I'mperi. Present Purtem 3rd pers. नेनेति नेनिक्त नेनिजति; Atm. नेनित नेनिजात निजते. Before ति, ज is changed to by note 10 F. B. P.

·SECOND BOOK OF, SANSKRIT. 65 " 3rd pers. 1. उ of Pura sm. Imperf. 1st pers. अनेनिजम् अनेनिज्व अनेनिज्म Åm. अनेनिजि अनेनिज्वहि अनेनिज्महि Parasm. Impert. नेनिजानि नेनिजाव नेनिजाम Atm. नेनिजै नेनिजावहै नेनिजामहै Present. Imperfect. L'urism. } जुहोति जुहुतः जुह्वति । अनुहोत् अजुहुताम् अजुहवुः Impera. 2nd pers. sing. TENT. The terminatia here is no !nstead of fg as a special case. The before a vowel woak termination is changed not to 3T by II. p. 35 but to . Present. Imperfect. मा :itun.il Mrs. मिमीते मिमाते मिमन्ते । अमिमीत अमिमाताम् अमिमत See 7, p. 63. जिहीते जिहाते जिहते अजिहीत अजिहाताम् अजिहत !'tmasm.,, पिपर्ति पितृत पिप्रति अपिपः अपिताम् अपिपरः पिपति पिपूर्तः पिपुरति अपिपः अपिपूर्ताम् अपिपरः इयति इयतः इग्रति ऐय ऐयताम् ऐयरुः in the case of is changed to by 8,1". 2. ऋ-ऋऋ by l, 6]- ]-इऋby, P. 62-इगृy 4, P. 62. आ + इय-ऐय. विज M.ird pers वेवेक्ति वेवितः वेविजति । अवविजम् अवविज्व अवेविज्म (1st pers.) वेविक्त वेविजाते वेविजते वेवेष्टि वेविष्ट वेविषति Present. Litm. वेविष्टे वेविपाते वेविषते . हा " प " " ऋ. " bw J. " fan Pararm " धान्यं मिमीते कुडवेन । अग्नौ समिधो जुहोत्यध्वर्युः । यथा मे पिता धर्म न प्रजहातु तथा मे वरं देहि । 'येभ्यः सर्वे लोका अबिभयुस्तान्राक्षसानरण्ये रामोऽहन् । भर्ना सह पितुः समीपं गच्छन्ती जिह्रमीत्यवदच्छकुन्तला । कृष्णश्चक्रमबिभरार्जुनो गाण्डीवं दुर्योधनभीमसेनौ गदाम- विभृतामन्ये सर्वे योधाः साधारणं धनुरबिभरुः । * Verbs implying fear and protection from danger govern the allative of The object from which the fear or langer proceeds. + See note I p. 6 F. B.

·SECOND BOPK OF SANSKRIT. 66 ब्राह्मणोऽब्राह्मणो वा यः कोऽपि निर्धनोऽशक्तश्च भवेत्तस्मै धनं दत्त। रामभार्या जहाहि जहिहि जहीहीति त्रिबिभीषणो रावण- मुपादिशत् । यस्मिन्कन्यामलंकृत्य वरमाहृय तस्मै तां ददति स ब्राह्मो विवाह उत्तमफलकः। हरिचरणयोः प्रक्षिप्तोऽयं पुष्पाणामञ्जलिनः कल्याणं विधत्ताम् । पुरोहितास्तेषां गृहं गत्वा प्रथमं पादानवानेनिजुः पश्चात्स-. मन्त्रकं कर्म व्यदधुः। ददाति दविणं भूरिदाति दारिद्यमर्थिनाम् । सोऽवदापति कीनि च शिरोऽवद्यति विद्विषाम् ॥ संदधाति धनुायां यदैवेषन् रुषान्वितः। तदैव तं भयाक्रान्ताः संधियन्ति धराधिपाः॥ न जहाति सदाचारं स सदा चारणस्तुतः। उजिहीते जगजित्वा तस्य कीर्तिः सुरालयम् ।। न क्लाम्यति दिनं कृत्स्नं ददानोऽपि धनं बहु । न च क्लामति संग्रामे निघ्नन् गजघटाशतम् ॥ न्यायप्रवृत्तो नृपतिरात्मानमपि च प्रजाः । त्रिवर्गेणोपसंधत्ते निहन्ति ध्रुवमन्यथा ॥ अधर्मान्नात्रसः पाप लोकवादान्न चाबिभेः॥ देवाद्विभीहि काकुत्स्थ जिह्रीहि त्वं तथा जनात् ।. मिथ्या मामभिसंकंध्यन्नवशां शत्रुणा हृताम् ।। आनन्दं ब्रह्मणो विद्वान बिभेति कदाचन ॥ यहदासि विशिष्टेभ्यो यश्चानासि दिनेदिने । तत्ते वित्तमहं मन्ये शेषं कस्यापि रक्षसि ।। न बिभेति यदा चायं यदा चास्मान्न विभ्यति । यदा.नेच्छति न वेष्टि ब्रह्म संपद्यते तदा । .. .. . and when precedent by a preposition guier the accusatire of Pareonior thing against whom or which the feeding is directed, and not thedatin.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 67 The sons of Dhțitarâshțra abandoned [ET] the cows and fied from the field of battle. Javaka gave [ET] his daughter Sitá to Râma, lic having bent the boty of S'iva. Brare men do not fear [ft] their enemies. I kept [ with Fa] my 'money in that house that the king's men might not take it. Make peace [धा with सम् ] with your powerful enemies, that your whole country may not be destroyed. Art tliou not ashamed Lay] to go about naked ? The Smțitis command[with fÀ]the remarriage of widows. Why didst thou shut [it with or 37f9) thy ears when Govinda was telling a story? Women wear [77 with qit] ornaments on their persons. One should distinguish [fers with f) self-respect from judeness, Waslı (fast with sta] athy hands and feet, and then begin ily Sandhya-adoration. The officers of the king measured [HT] the length of the land. The hermits fill[g orq] their gourds with water at the lake. VOCABULARY XI. Routs of the Third Conjugation. | Parasm. and Âli. to give. મેં Parism. and Åtm. to support, IT Dewasm. and Atm. to hold, to to hear. put, with E, to execute, to do, AT Âtm. to measure. to command (as in religions for a l'arasm. and Âım. to sepaworks); writh qft,to wear; with rate, to distinguish; with a Frage to make peace withi, toput fa l'arasm. and Åtm. to suror lay on, to fix on; with fa round or fe, to shut; with fa, toplace, FT Âtm to yo; with 37, to keep; with wa, to attend. upwards, to ascend, fast Parasm. and Átm. to purify; a Parasm, to abandon. joith 37A, to wasli. of l'arasm. to blush, to be Parasm to fill. ashamed. # Parasm. to fear, Parasm. to sacrifice. to gº gory ·68 SECOND BOQK OF SANSKRIT. ing. n. 1. Ấthu. “l HH, to we m. the cavity formed by farn. wealth, money. joining the lands. ETT.1. (F41.f. the string of a staqut ait. Othersise. bow]) the string of a bow. fa prestart. prass, of grith धराधिपा. (धरा..the earth, अधिप sty, followed, accompanied m. a lord) lord of the earth, a wth, full of. prora 101.9 f. abeggar. F 6th conj. Darum. with Free STEST IN 1. F. Indpiless., to make peace with. PTT 1.1.1. wrah, H alr. certainly उत्तमफलक ॥ ॥. I. (उत्तम ॥ Fifam. 11.121. without wealth, poor, foul, .("Xollent, F., n fruit, न्यायपटत्त m. n. f. (arm. and i 51.8.) of good fruit or justice, nprightness, te past Tannlt. part of ith to proceed) 13.770T 1. berinto one wiose conduct is just or Bahutsti:1. Rimte. upriglit. [become. TOT W. «2511of} con "ith me, tvorn. OTA ailr. or prop. (used with 27 11 11.1. Whole. (with. erros) visable, manifest. Ta til fimul haq to be anno farfar fa frum. name of the brother THYTTET 1. (TZT.' : nay, of River i lorost 11 a model in TIM. a particular form of loundrel arrays or hosts of marriage in use among Bril. clopoliants manas. 1.1. how. 2017 m. 11. 1. (377 pave TOTO the name of Arjuna peil. prisa. of Tin चारणम्तुत . 11. TOT 1. a overtaken, overcome ) overbarul) praised ]. Vrids. come los trar, For we thinenn foiz onl. ele falsely. fara collection or thir'ee', '/: raref.. the wife of Tima. Dhin11111 O? Belges merit, C. anger. iihdornoulli, and him or versites,cr fultilment of desires. If hires. juulil. offers to know, 7 m. censure of people. frafa dr.every day, day liyo knowing dlay. (sons). दुर्योधनभीमसेनी fafare m. n.!. respectable (verm dn', दुर्योधन and भीमसेन (comp.) ETF the great author of the Lut conj. l'année prith , Mahabharata, an epic poen. 10 purify, to cleanse. 67.9. name of a lady, wife # tth conj. Parasit trilh, to of a king pamed Dushyanta. out, to cut ott. m.in. remainder, all others. with an ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 09 #Haha adr. by mantras, i. e., HTETTOT in. n. f. ordinary by repeating mantras. सुरालय m. (सुर m. a god, आलय समिध /. sniall sticks of a sacred m. a place of abode), the abode tree, such as udumlara, to of the gods, heaven. be thrown into the sacrificial | FT with A, to kill, to destror, to fire. ruin. Battlefield रणभूमि./. Gourd कमण्डलु ५ Bent un past part. press. of Hermit, atageer m. yra m. the constel of नम्, रामेण धनुषि Length आयाम m. नामिते 'Rima having bent the Naked 3 m. n. f. bow.' Person शरीर ॥. देह m. Destroyed a past part. of Renarriage पुनरुद्राह ॥. in e past part. puss. Budoness 3rfare m. of छिद् with उद् Sandhyâ.asbwritun FETTETAAN. Flec 377 1.st conj. Åtm. with Self respect FITATA IN. परा changed to पला. LESSOX XII. SEVENTH (' OJI GATIOX. 1. In this conjugation, a is insertert between the radical vowel and the final consonant before the strong, and न before the wcak terminations. The rules about the changes of letters given in Lessons IX. and X. ought to be observed in 'appending the terminatiolls. 2. The original nasal of the root is dropped. 3. 7 is inserteil before the final ot ar instead of a wheel it is followed by the consonantal strong termination. Purmeripala. Present-- to obstruct'. Sung. Dual Plun. autfen 2nd रुणत्मि Eurfa रुन्धन्ति + for cont + for hy 1. above OTT + fa by II. p. 49— FUTE + F is not clungul to up when it is followed by a consonant of the dental class; as कुर्वन्ति. 1&t prete. 3rd , ·70 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1sters. " 3rd " 1st pers. " 3rd " 1st pers. 31 " the घि orरुणाडि by VI. P. 50; रुन्दः &c. similarly. In रुणत्ति, y is changed to a by note + p. 5 F. B. Imperfect. Sing. Dual Plur. अरुणधम् अरुन्ध्व अरुन्ध्म 2nd अरुणत्-द अरुन्दम् अरुन्द अरुणत्- अरुन्दाम अरुन्धन् 3rd pers. sing. 37FUNT-the tormination a being dropped by I p.07-अरुणत्न hy II. 1.57. In the 2nd pers. sing. the is op. tionally changed to Visurga hy III. p. 59. अरुन्ताम् &c. like रुणद्वि. Imperatire. रुणधारि रुणधाव रणधाम 2nd रुन्छम् रुणडु रुन्ताम् रुन्धन्तु See 4, p. 12 nd I. P. 19. Potential. सन्ध्याम् रुन्ध्याम रुन्ध्याः सन्ध्यातम् रुन्ध्यात 3rd सन्ध्यात् रुन्ध्याताम् रुन्ध्युः Atmanepuda. Present. 1st pers. सन्ध्वहे रुन्धमहे रुन्धाथे 3rd रुन्धाने रुन्धते Imperfect. अरन्धि अरुन्ध्वाह अरुन्ध्महि 2nd अरुन्धाथाम् अरुन्द्वम् अरन्ह अरुन्धाताम् Imperatire'. रुणधै रुणधावहै रुणधामहै रुन्धाथाम् रुन्ड्रम् रुन्धाताम् रुन्धताम् Potential. रुन्धीवहि रूधीमहि हन्धीथाः हन्धीयाधाम् रुन्धीध्वम् सम्धीयाताम् हन्धीरन् .. रुन्छे- 1st pers. 1st pers. 1st pers. " 3rd" .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 71 p. अङ्ग-Pres. 3rd pers. sing. अनक्ति, the nasal being dropped by 9. p. 69, and it changed to by note* p. 79 F. B. Imperf. 3rıl pers. sing. $123-17. Impera. 2nd pers. sing. arfer पिष्- Pres. 3rd pers. sing. पिनष्टि, the ति being dhanged to टि hy note* p. 21 F. B. Impera. 2nd pers. sing. पित्र +धि by l. p. 49-पिन्ध +धि by 1. ३. 69-पिन्ष् + dि by note* p. 21 F. B.-पिन्ह + dि by VI. p. 50-पिण्डि Hry VIII. 51. Imperf. 3rd pers. sing. अपिन by 1. p.69 and I. p. 57-अपि- नह-इ by II. p. 57. रिच-Parasm. Pres. 3rd. pers. sing. रिणच् +ति-रिणक + ति, hy rote" p. 79. F. B.-Pufai Impera. Pul pers. sing.fitto Imperf. Brdiers. sing. अरिणकना. far-Purasm. Pres. 3rd pers. sing. frafer. Impera. 2nd pers. sing. भिन्दि. Imperf. 2nil pers. sing. अभिनत्-द-:. féÆ-Impera. 2nd pers. sing. fefna, being dropped by 1. 1'. 35. Imperf. 3rd pers..sing. अहिनन् द्. 3nd yers. sing. अहिनत- द-: by IV. P.59. तृह-Pres. 3rd pers. sing. तृणे-ति by 3. P.69-तृणेद +ति-वृणेह चि-तृणेद + दि-तृणेदि just like लेदि p. 49, तृण्डः ॥al; तृ+ +- अन्ति-तृहन्ति by VIII. p. 51. Similarly, अतृणेट् like अलेह- दीनाब याचमानाय धनं ददतं मां मा रुन्द्धि .पापमेव त- स्मात्त्वामाश्रयेत् । किर्मीरस्य शरीरं चूर्णवदपिनड्डीमसेनः । रिपोः करिणां गण्डस्थलान्यभिन्दत वीराः। अद्यप्रभृति त्वां कोशागारे नियुनज्मि तदात्मनोऽधिकारेऽप्र. मत्तो भव । तस्यां तवानुरागमस्माकं पुरो व्यर्थ किं व्यनक्षि किं तेन लभेथाः। तामेव गच्छ । अरण्ये केचित्पशवोऽन्यान्हिसन्त्यतस्तान्हिस्रान्बुवन्ति । रेरे पान्था जाले निपतितोऽहम् । अत्रागत्य मे पाशांछित्त। यत्किचिल्लभसे तदुञ्जीथाः। अन्यस्य कस्यचिद्धनं मा गृभ्य । न हिंस्यात्सर्वाणि भूतानीत्येतं विधिमक्षरशोजना अनुसरन्ति।

·72 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. स्वगृहेऽर्थिनमागतं रघुः कियद्वस्विष्यते त्वयेत्यन्वयुत। गौ नाभुञ्जि मह्यं किंचिदायितुं देहि । वत्ति सर्वाणि शास्त्राणि गर्वस्तस्य न विद्यते । विन्ते धर्म सदा सद्भिस्तेषु पूजां च विन्दति ॥' वृणक्ति वृजिनैः सङ्गं वृक्ते च वृषलैः सह । वर्जत्यनार्जवोपतैः : स वर्जयति दुर्जनैः॥ न संपृणक्ति कृपणैः संपृक्ते न पृथग्जनैः । संपर्चति सदाचारैः संपर्चयति पण्डितैः॥ नियुके गुल्मपालान् स नियोजति नियोगिनः । नियोजयत्यनीकस्थान् स्वयं चात्मनि युज्यते ॥ न हिनस्ति वृथा जन्तूंस्तृणान्यपि न हिंसति । तमेव हिंसयत्यै यस्तदाज्ञां विलयते ॥ खिद्यतेऽसौ न भृत्यषु याचकेषु न खिन्दति । खिन्ते तेप्वंव य द्रव्यं दीयमानं न गृहते ॥ प्रणिके दक्षिणीयानां विप्राणां चरणौ च सः। यत्पादौ मुकुटज्योत्स्नाजलै नेक्ति राजकम् ॥ छिनत्ति संशयं शास्त्रे विदुषां सूक्तिभिस्सदा । छंदयत्यसिधाराभिविद्विषां मस्तकं च सः ।। मनो नोद्विजते तस्य ददतीर्थमहर्निशम् । उद्विनक्ति तु संसारादसारात्तत्त्ववेदिनः ॥ कचिहयुमाय धावन्ति प्रद्युमाय च केचन । नांधुके कोऽपि धर्माय सर्वाभिप्रेतहेतवे । पीडाकरममित्राणां कर्तव्यमिति शक्रजिन् । अब्रवीत् खड्कृष्टश्च तस्या मूर्धानमच्छिनत् ॥ तृणधि देहमात्मीयं त्वं वाचं न ददासि चेत् ॥ कामान्दुग्धे विप्रकर्षत्यलक्ष्मी कीर्ति सूते दुष्कृतं या हिनस्ति । तां चाप्यतां मातरं मङ्गलानां धेनुं धीराःसूनृतां वाचमाहुः॥ .. *Timilenugn lowel in clauri 10. This change taken pince op Imath when the vowed Pandan totawent or HINDImatical bumu, vuanier AT (nem:iver put o anul I (prejebsit2011) it in her csary.

·SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 73 . open ( I would cut down (fea ] the branch of the tree if Hari hould not prevent (Ft) nie. He pounded (VT) those medicinal drugs to give them to his brother, nyho is ill. Many Brâhmaņas dined (97) every day in the Vis’râmapalace with the last Brabinaņa king. A whirlwind datroys ( 73 ) trees and houses. I laid 3731 with À ) my grief to (before) him, and huis heart was melted* with pity. Let thy honour appoint ( Ta with a ) him to tlie post of commander of the forces; he is a-brave and skilful man. Why do you prevent [F] me [frouw) going to Kâs'î ? When and where dont thou dinc [ 2) usually? We grind [fr] our corn with our hands in Iudia; in England they grind by ineans of machines. Whom all I appoint' [ Ta with a ) to the office of counpullor? I now particularise [fety with rêt ) the different kinds of brutes. Dutxlestroy (737) all his hopes of prosperity. The Yavana besieged ( 77 ) Sâketa. VOCABULARY XII. Roots of the Seventh Conjugation. Pasm. to anoint; with Parasm. to kill, to destroy. fà, to make manifest, or lay for Purasm. to grind. open, पृच Purasm. with सम्, to come Åti. to kindle. in contact, to associate. T Parasm. and Åtm, to pound, ** Parasm.to dostroy, to break, to reduce to powder or dust. for Purasm. and Åım, to split. fears Ålm, to be distressed, to Puruom. to enjoy ; Årm. to be displeased or offended, dine, to eat. pore Para sm. and Atm. to cut. * Parasi and Åtm. to join; * Sanskrit idiom, was wct with pity. 7 ·74 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. mich sig, to put a question to; with fa, to appoint; with to endeavour, to. exert. Fira Parasm. and Atm. to evafast Parasn. with 3, to tremble, to fear, to be disgusted. [cuss. fare Åtm. to reason upon, to dis- TF Parasm. to avoid, to shun. fr Parasm. to distinguish; with fa, to particularise. FEA l'arusm. to kill, to destroy. cuate. l'arasm. and Årm. to obstruct, to prevent, to besiege. 1's. an WETTET: adr. literally. TOT m. n. f. mean, miseris, TUTT N. & house. little-minded. worfa adr. (077 to-lay, and 1st conj. L'arasm. to draw ; Typ fron) from today, or with fa and g, to make worse, henceforwargi. to reduce. sure-house. fra m. prost, power, effice. ATT n. a store-house, a trea- अनार्जवोपेत m.m... अन् not, आ 25 de .ll..f. (ay n. a sword) fa 1. straightness, straight one who has drawn out his forwardness, 4 paxt prert. sworil, "HX. of with 9 accom frary 4th conj. Âim. and 6th conj. panied ) not possessed of Por, asm. to be distressed, to straightforwardness; one who is without straightforward. le lispeleased or offended. TOEFT1. temples of an ele. अनीकस्थ ....... (अनीक ॥. phant. army, FUT to stand) one in गुल्मपाल m. (गुल्म m. a fort) prothe army, a soldier. tector or keeper of a fort. To pron. another. Ith cont. Parasm. to bo. Y m. .... (अ and प्रमत्त greedy for, to covet. entreless), not carrjess, careful. चूर्ण ok. 11. dust, powiler ; qara wf , a supplant. like dust, to dust. tj. baud luck, poverty. Per inil. ir. [divide. WATT 18. Mr. (ATT M. (ssenice) Pos 10th conj. to «ut off, to unsubstantial, unproticabile, a m. follower of Jina, a person useless. belonging to the Jaina sect. MT.M. (TTT 1. eulge) the al m. n. f. one who knows culge of a sworl. the truth or real philosophy. wenn aude. day and night. feruity in. n. f. deserving of ifra a. #. j. one's own. dakshina fra mil. f. poor. AU WA. * 1. how much. n. a wicked deed, wicked. dtr name of a giant. ATH m. derim. 1 ness, sin, ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. n. wealth. tremble, to fear, to be disgust- Am 2nd conj. Åtm. with g, to falu m. a Brahmana. (ed. wash. lst. conj. Parasm., 2nd conj. Addra m. 4 minister, an officer. Åtm. and 10th conj. to avoid, to shun. Ty m. a traveller. TT m. a net, & snare. afera m. a wicked person. fernt m. n. f. that which gives up adv. in vain, uselessly. pain. m. & S'ûdra, a sinner, a To lst conj. Parasm., 2nd conj. reprobate Átm. and 10th conj. with FH, Tafata in.the conqueror of S'akra to come in contact, to associate. or Indra, the son of Ravana. gyota m. a low person, a mean may lst conj. l'arusi. and Atm. fellow. with 371, to cling to, to go to, FT* the god of love. to resort to. n. welfare, prosperity, HETER Welt. Ha Ha m. n. ſ. what is lioly. yood, 3 Tar m. conduct) one whose conduct is good. Hir. M. 1. the head. मुकुटज्योत्स्नाजल 1. (मुकुट ... ! सर्वाभिप्रेतहेतु m. (अभिप्रेत past Clown) the water (in the p'i't. press. of g with a fit and form) of the light on lustre I desired, aimed at) the of crowns. canso of [the attainment of मूर्धन् m. the head. all desired objects. YTTE M. whose foot. (mind. m. N j. agreeable, pleasant. Ta uth. conj. Atm. to curl, one's #ful. ( gouil, afin l. speech) Tr 1st conj. l'uru8m. and 10th good words or sprech, correct com). to unite; with fa, exposition. appoint. [the kings. Féa 1st cons. Parulsm. and 1011 T51, n. multitude of kinys, all ion. to kill, to destroy. (ou“. mañ lst conj. Atm. vill fan. 11.). murderous, carnivorto to TIETS. Brahmana-king KOTTTH m. Branch Brute पशु m. Counsellor मन्त्रिन् m. धीसचिव ग. Different विविध m. n.j. Il grup m. n. f. Medicinal drug ओषधि. Office m. Pity दया/., दयाई Who it. J. molteil Post पद. [with pity. Saketa F 11. name of a town. Skilful at m. 11.173 m. n. f. Usually प्रायेण ind. adv. प्रायः ind. adr. Visrama-palace विश्रामग्रासाद m. Whirlwindचक्रवातm.झावात.

·16 BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. LESSON XIII. . Nov-CONJIGATIONAL TENSES. Perfect. 1. General.- The augment t is prefixed to those nonconjugational terminations which begin with any consonant except before they are applied to certain primitive roots. Such roots we will call set and the others unit. The number of the former is far greater than that of the latter; but. the latter are niore important, and are more generally to be inct with in Sanskrit literature.t 2. The following are the terminations of the Perfect:- • 1.... ucly Tipt - 19 (1) 10-15 of open silable onls: Theic at le111५1 1001 - kurli ne thore on the oth conjugation (.... चोरय, कथय), catal- &c. whichr alway-ant. † The following 1024w fyra rating the art from the unit 100th may hou learnellin lant hy thie' pouzul in case the comebureathnung lanta उददन्तैोतिरुणुशीसनुश्रुबिडीबिभि. । वृनभ्यां च विनकाचोऽजन्तेषु निहता. स्मृता ।। I... amonrst root:- antiing in 10 I. all ca101sting of online with the exception of those that end 571 and (. long and lon: FI) of and the others that fulies artut off from the list of utv.।। 2011), cod mots ending in a wowel those that en un 5 and Farm the other cuume-attel into avt. nint all the 10 of ou. डीङ्, डी ) Atm. वृड वृAtm and u.t-m. शक पच् मुचि रिन् वच विच् सिच प्रक्छि त्यज् निजिर भजः । भन भन नरन् मरिज यज युज गज र विजिर् म्वभि सन मुजः । अद शुद् ग्विद् छिद् नुदि नुद. पदा भिद् वितिर विनन् । शद् सदा स्विद्यति. श्कन्दि हदी कुध् श्रुधि यु:यनी । बन्धिर् युधि रुधी राधि व्यध् शुधः साधि मिभ्यती ।। मन्य हन्न आप् क्षिप् हापि तप् तिपस्तृप्यति दृप्यती । लिप लप् वा शप् स्वप् मृपि यभ रभ रभू गम् नम् यमो रमिः । कुशिर् दशि दिशी ६श मश रिश रुश लिश विश शश: कृषिः । विषु तुष् द्विष् दुष् पुष्य पिष् विष् शिव भुष बिष्यतयो पसिः ॥ वसतिर दह दिहि दुही नह मिह कह लिह वहिम्नथा । अनुदात्ता हलन्तेषु पातको अधिकं शतम् ।। In theat here - 1 the text: twitv are hunucrateel. For the exICs of the meetn' sime nein !iille an attached to then and fine other have their conjugutanal nu am a kelel un. अनुदान in the inst line is equivalent thatnet. The nineements made in themes et are true generally in Den-juga. tinal terem but in my cenni runratic repun mewlifications. The mrulifica- Liens Belts are in the case of the perfect are notice Malore in the fi'xt. a Atm. : वृञ् । .. THE HON ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 77 Sing. अ but (c) 1x !". Parasmaipada. Dual Plur, 1st orisi 2nil STYA 301 TER उस 3. Here there are only three terminations, viz., y, a, and H, capable of taking the augment s. (a) In the case of म, भृ.१.स्तु, नु, दु, and st. they do not take it; while, (b) as applied to all other roots T, H, ind do take थ in the case of unit roots ending in short # does not admit 1stwhile '7) after anit roots with a final vowel or having an it in them, it takes it optionally. Åtmenepada.. Sing. Dual Plur. वहे महे आधे आते 4. The learner will see that these terminations, with the virpotion of the singular anul plural of the third person, are the same as those of the Present of the 2nd class of conjuga- 11011". Ihangmented it becomes when in a form it is 1ecded by any vowel except 3 or 3. Wlicn it takes " undergoes the change ptimally when that is preceded in ZT, 7, 1, or The terminations capable of taking y do admit it after w routs except the eight enumerated above. A few roots, such as Ta, 79, fat, 1st conj. 'to turn out an-piciously or to regulate,' * T , CETTE ME, TT, 757, 77, TP, T, EE, YI 'to pervade,' &c., which are optionally set in all non-conjugational tenses, are w in the Perfect also. F, , I, are also optionally set but in the Perfect they admit q necessarily before all oxcept q. 7. Buse. The initial consonant with the following vowel * In the cas in which thuis rontves not uimit of the forms of the 1st pers, dual and plural are among and ITE; .c. the 41s changed to f. The rule is tluat the final of a root is changelin I when followed by Tor 3 ·78 BECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. उto उ, it reduplicated according to the rules given in Lesson XI. An initial vowel is reduplicated without the following consonant. 's. The reduplicative is changed to and when followed by a dissimilar vowel, and whén it is not, the two vowels combine and form (long) ई, and (long) ऊ. The rcduplicative of the root 'to go’ is lengthened before the weak terminations of the perfect. Thus उख-उरखy idhove,-by 9 yelow उओख and by this उवोख. SN-प-इएप-इयेष. When no Guna takes place we have उख-उ. उख-गव and इष-दर-ईष ; also इ-इइ-ईइ, and the last s being . changed to य by 10. P. 37 we have ईयतु:-ईयु:. 9. The chal anil the plural terinirations of the Paras- Immijulie and all Atimilitmula ones ture weak, and the singulitra of the former strong. («) The penultimate short vowel takes its (inna substitute before the latter, and (b) the final Towel and the penultimate 3 take Vriddhi optionally in the tirst and necessarily in the third person singular. (C) In The purson singular, the ending vowel takes Guna and le pultimate remains unchanged. TT Parasm.. Niny. Dual Plur. बुबोध बुबुधिव बुधिम बरोधिय बुबुधथुः 311 दुबोध बुबुधतुः पुर-पुपर-सोएy 9 (4) दुनोध, बुबुधिव-500 3 (5) p. 77. Átm. दुधिवहे एधिमहे युधिषे बुबुधाये d बुधाते बुधिरे कृParasma चकार-चकर nd 3rd ]st . " 1st pers. " " 1st prrt. " चः ह-कहवा .. 61 and : .P. 63.चकार-पकर by 9 (8) me पकार-चकर. चव चकc. by 3 (a).m.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 79 1st pers. " 3rd, 1st pers. .. श, द. Atm. Sing. Dual Plur. चके चकृवहे चकृमहे ml चकृषे चकाथे चढ़े चक्रे चकाते चक्रिरे For see 4, p. 77. नी]urtism. निनाय-निनय निन्यिद निन्यिम 3u. निनयिथ-निनेथ निन्यधु निन्य :rel निनाय निन्यतः निन्युः नी-नीनी 17, P. 77.निनी-bye. P. 62.निनै by 9 (1) p. 78-निनाय ind५. sing. ; निनी-निन्यतः hy I. P. 63. See also 3 (1) p: 77 and :) (ch alhose for निनयिथ-निनेथ. 11m 1st pers. निन्ये निन्यिवहे निन्यिमहे ६c. गद 10 or's. जगाद-जगदतु. जगदुः &c. &c. 10 Roots culing in # preceded by a conjunct consomant, and in (long) #, and the roots any ani change ile tiual vowel to its Guna, ¿r., अर् b. fore the weak termina- 11005 even of this teuse: and प do it optionally, and -thorten the vowel when they do not. ऋच्छ also changes its imtial to its Gurit. सम्मार-सस्मर सम्मरिव सम्मरिम सम्मर्थ मम्मरथु: सम्मर सम्मार सस्मरतः सस्मरः See 2 p. 61 and 3 (1) and (c) P. 77. शशार, शशरतुः-शश्रतु, -शश्रुः &e. 11. A few roots of the fith conjugation such as कुद, म्फर, त्रुहः स्फुर, न, and धू. do not take Gunı or V'șiddhi even before trong terminations except those of the 1st and 3rd pers. -ing of the Perfect, the any of the causal, and the of the third pers. sing. of the Passive Aorist ; तुत्रोट, नुत्रुटिय. 12. Some roots, such as the ana ब्रू are defective, and lave no forms for the non-conjugational tenses. 13. In the case of roots ending in T, (a) the termination 34 of the singulars of the 1st and 3rd person Parasmaipada, is replaced by pt. (6.) The final sy is dropped before the weak terminations beginning with a vowel, and before such as take the augmert . ६ 1sts. ": " 31 ." . गर. .

·60 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. st 18. . 14 जी जशिव जशिम and जमिथ-जज्ञाथ जशथुः 3ril जौ जज्ञतुः 77-79, and at being changed to it, we have it? 37 being elropper before y (nee :3 (p. 77) rand the vowel terminations • hu10 जज +=जशिथ, and also जशथुः Ac. 'The final ए, ऐ, und ओ of roots is replaced by आ bufore all termination whatever, except those of the conju- Yational teases and the present participle. ग्लै... pers. जग्लो-जगलतुः जग्लुः 2nd vers. जग्लिथ-जग्लाथ &c 15. (स.) भू. as reduplicated, assumes the form The of for is changed to the of हि to छ, and the च of चि 10 optionally in the Perfect. बभूव बभूविथ ; जिगाय-जिगय, जिग्यिव, जिगेध-जिगयिथ, 3 (11) p. 77; निघाय , चिकाय or चिचाय. 16. The pemultimate अ of गम्, हुन्, जन्, खन्, and घम्, i- Troppad before the weak terminations. 7 through illnd जन् and घम् after dropping 37, स् aud रू respectively: बभूर. (8.) . becomes become ut, 11. " Sing. Dual Plur. जघान जघन जनित्र जत्रिम जघनिध-जघन्य जनयुः जन 3rd जघान जनतुः जत्रुः 17 The buse of with अधि to study' i. अधिजगा in the Perfect. अधिजगे. अधिजगाते. अधिजगिरे &c. 15. (.) सम् and substitute fur कर, i.e., become खज and I when followed by a consonantal strong termination. {11.) These roots admit of optionally in the case of थ. सा-ममा सहन-सहन + थ-समज +थ by allove-सला + थ by IN. 1. सब +8 by note* pl F. B.. Similarly द. Also ससधि and ददर्शिय. प्रच्ए-पपच्छिथ पमठ y.) p. 77. substitutes The optionally in the Perfect. When a substituted takes & Dexcessarily before y. For the weak formms see 16 above. 19.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 81 20. The Perfect shows that the action took place at a very remote time, or that it was not witnessed by the speaker. It is generally used to narrate events of the remoto past; and in the first person it shows something done by the peaker of which he was unconscious, or which lie wants to hide by affirming the opposite बहु जगद पुरस्तात्तस्य मत्ता किलाहम् । कलिङ्गेष्ववसः। नाहं कलिङ्गाझगाम । पुरा किल दुष्यन्तो नाम राजा बभूव । स एकदा मृगयां कर्तुं वनमियाय । तं तस्य सैनिका अमात्याश्चानुजग्मुः । तस्मि- कानने दुष्यन्तो बहून्मृगाजघान । एकं.मृगं पलायमानमनुस- रन्मार्गे दिव्याश्रमपदं ददर्श । तस्य सैनिकाः पूर्वमन्नेव स्थाने तस्थुः । कण्वस्यायमृषेराश्रम इति ज्ञात्वा तं प्रविवेश । प्रविश्य च को नु भो अत्रेति पप्रच्छ । कण्वस्य कृतिका दुहिता शकुन्त- लाश्रमावहिरागत्य दुष्यन्तं स्वागतं व्याजहार । शकुन्तलां चारसर्वाङ्गीं दृष्ट्वा दुष्यन्तस्तां चकमे । तस्याः पाणिं गान्धर्वण विधिना राजा जग्राह । अनन्तरं कंचित्कालं तावुभौ तस्मिन्ना- श्रमे चिक्रीड़तुः। रममाणं राजानं प्रेक्ष्य सैनिकाः पुरं निववृतिरे। राजापि पश्चात्स्वं नगरमुपययौ । कियद्वसु ब्राह्मणेभ्यो यूयं दद । न वयं तेभ्यः किंचिद्ददिम । उन्मादं वीक्ष्य पद्मानां कुमुदानां च मन्दताम् । क्षणिकत्वं विभूतीनां चेतसा निश्चिकाय सः ।। शुश्राव रामस्तत्सर्व प्रतस्थे च ससैनिकः ॥ तस्तनुर्जज्वलुर्मम्लुर्जग्लुटुंलुठिरे क्षताः । मुमूर्छर्ववम् रक्तं ततृषुश्चोभये भटाः ॥ जम्बुमाली जहौ प्राणान् प्राव्णा मारुतिना हतः॥. बमाण स न मे मायां जिगायेन्द्रोऽपि किं नृभिः॥ A king named Gadhi gave ( 7 ) his daughter to Richika, the son of Bhrigui.

·83 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. + She gave birth [x] to a son, named Jamadagni. Jamadagni married ( #* with qft ] Renuka. He once got very angry ( ) with her for her indiscretion, and commanded [feat ) her sons to kill her. None did [] it except his youngest son Paras'urâma. He cut off (Ferry) her head with his axe. Jamadagni was pleased (TT) with the act, and said [ Atin. with TFT) “O son, choose a gift.” Paras'uráma begyud [a] that his another might be re's stored to lifu again (revive), and be free from her sin. Then said ( Âtin. with f and 371 ) Jamadagni, “So let it be," and ķeņuká rosc up ( Fent with g) alive. Some time after, king Kártavîrya came [it with 377 ) tu the hermitrgo. And he and bis soldiers destroyed (**) all the trees, laid waste ( A1 ) the ground, and carried off [x with 374] the Rinli's cows. Paras'urama was () not at home. When he came, he fought [ TT Átm.) with Kártavirya and killed (TTT) him. When the souls of Kártavirya heard [] of this, they were very angry [at] and went [ oth ) to the hermitage. Observing Jamadagni alone, they discharged [ fera or g7 ] arrows at him and killed him. When Paras'ı ama returned (@ta with â ] home, he was enraged, and resolved (f with form ] to exterminate the Khatriyas. He asked ( प्रच्छ with 372 ] the sons of Kårtavirrat Did you kill my father ?” “No; we never killed him," nud (t) they But Parus’urama knew (27) that they were guilty; am killed them and all other Kshatriyas. 01 * All runies bugmning with £ except the te, 10th conj.: 774, 7, 76? TE. T. anul TT range the I to o when precated by a prepositi( 1 taining & Between the sand the 7 those letters only which are given in nobelp. lj F. B. muy intervene and not others. Accorling to some of नू, and नर्द are not exceptions.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 83 . VOCABULARY XIII. उस् 1st conj, Parusm. to go. 4th conj. Parasm. to feel JAHIT m. joy, bloom. thirsty. 34ft adv. abpre. (both sides. Reqqa n. FESTAT n. (fra celestial, 339 pron. m. n. f. belonging to STTHVA n. hermitage) beau- U 11. name of a Rishi. tiful hermitage. 74 10th* conj. Atm. to love. 4th conj. Parasm. to be proudl. Tarehe nn. name of a country (in 3 Ist conj. Parusin. to run. the plur.) Jind. ivparticle showing doulit TTTT 17, a forest. or guess. og n. a night lotus. 99 n. a lotus that blooms.by clay. fat.f. adopted. [raged. TATA (pres. purt, of अय 181 4th conj. Purasm. to be en conj. Atm. to yo, with t, the oraina 1. momentariness. 'y being changes to FT) run- IT past part. pass. of me, ning. wounded gric all. before, in front. Tilst conj. Purasm. to speak. get pror. previous (person or rám.a particular form of par. F# adv. out. [thing). viage in which the only thing I 74 1st conj. Parasm. to speak. essential is the mutual consent for at f. dullness, withered con. of the bridegroom and bride. dition. + 1st conj. to protect. HTTf. jugglery, deceitful tricks. TETET IN. a stone. ! 1st conj. Parasit. to faint. TH Ìst conj. Parasm. to eat. TOT f. chase, hunting. चारसर्वाङ्गी/. (चार. beautiful, स the 1st conj. Purism. to grow aff all limbs) having all weary, to become faint or limbs beautiful, (conclude. [languid. चि citie निस्, to deterinine, to TTi'4th conj. Purulsm. to hurt. Apgulfam.name of a Rakshasa. 1st conj. Åtm. to roll on the 5. 1st conj. Parusm. to be ar. ground. dent, to glow. Lay 1st conj. Pariisin. to vomit. * The termination 374 of the 10th conj. 15 pirconally droppeal in the nonjugational tenses. In the case of this root. All other roots of this con. TULATION preserve the 372 with the final 37 dropped in all non-onjugational illises and mools, except the Benclictive l'arası, anlioriut. 3474 is optionally allel to this and the other roots given in Art. 1. p. 1, :hinc non-conjugntional tenses and mools. Ity and att insert a L after their 34 before terminations beginning With a vowel ; 'as try Perf. 3r pers. sing. The vowel here does not take Vșidhi because it ceases to be the penultimate when I is inserted. Tiin. blooil.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. ( fargfaf. wealth, prosperity. Fift m. 11. f. accompanied by soldiers. for 1st cmj. Porasm. to regulate, to turn out well auspiciously. FA 1st conj. Potras in. to cry, to tliunder. [affection to Pane 4th conj. Parasm. to bear 73 2neb conj. Paragm. to flow. Fløt conj, Parasm. to sound. Eng past part. pag. of T, struck, or Alive sert s. pres, part. (lct. Kirtavîrya tantos m. the name of जोर, सजीवा). (जीam life. of a king killed by Paras'u. and for Hg ud. with). ranna. All TTU. [Rishi. Named ind. inxll'. sing.' Bhrigu yum. the name of a of नामन्. Except whirl. Never नैव ind. न कार्डिचित् ind. Estrminato. q 10th conj. with Renuka tena f. wife of Jaina- उद- उन्मूलयितुम् । dagni and mother of Paras'u. Free पुन tat pr8s. part. of मुन्, rima. 7.!. ; to be free 53 posis. Revie जीव with पुनर्. Gidhi ms . the name of a Richika #Tin m. name of a king. Plishi. Iniliscretion aufitant m. [llislu. Very er adr. „Jamudayni m. name of a Youngest if w.n.f. LESSON XIV. PERFECT-Continued. ). When a root has an between two simple consonants, and the radical consonant is not changed in reduplication, he is replaced by pand the reduplicative syllable dropped before the weak terminations, and before the y of the and person singular of the Parasmaipada when it takes s. Sing. Dual Plur. ततान-सतन afara तेनिम nad तनिथ तेनः तेनतुः तेनुः to meets all the conditions in the rulo ; t does not, because it bas a conjunct consonant; and it and ora, bo puse in the reduplicative syllable their initial consonants become and respectively. Grid 21 ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 83 3ril pers. " थ तृत Therefore we have Sing. Dual Plur. ननन्द ननन्दतुः ननन्दुः जगाद जगदतुः जगदः बभाण बभणतुः बभणुः and not नेन्दतुः गेदतः, भेणतुः, &.. Anil pers. sing. of पत्र, पेचिथ-पपक्थ ; of शक, शेकिथ शशक्य. takes y optionally liy 3 (d.) p. 77. When it does takeat, the abovo change takes place, and not when it does not. is changed to कृly note p. 79_F. B. ". The roots त, फल, भज, पप and राय when it means to ottend change their 37 or 31 tu p.simularly, and , , वम्, फर, राज, भ्रानं, भ्राश, भलाश, म्यम् । घन् do it optionally. The roots here (numerated lo not come un him the general rule 1. by:-... 62-तता + अत: by 10. 79, and by the above नग्न... पे-पाते .kc. बश्राम-बभ्रमतु प्रेमतुः बभ्रमः or प्रेमुः &c. Roots beginning with und शस् and do not undergo 11.1- thange. वम्-3rd pers. क्वाम-वमतु-ववमु.. +. The following couts itnil some others change their q, 1, ilmę, tu's, 3 and #respectively before weak turininations turally: *वच्, यज, वप, वह, वम् 1-t conj., वे, व्ये, के, वि, वद, म्यप, ज्या, वश, व्यच, प्रच्छ, त्र, धम्ज, ग्रह and व्यथः Froin this 1-1 प्रच्छ, त्रश्च, uml भ्रमज due to be 11101 cal in the case of the Perteet. This change or the vowel so substituted is called Sainprusareact. 5. Betore the strong terminations of the Perfect, Sariprasaruril takes place in the reduplicative syllable only. The leduplicative syllable of व्यथ is Ê throughout. 6. The vowel following a Sau prasarana is idropped. 7. When the two members of a conjunct are capable of vaking Sauiprasārana, the latter only takes it. * This change due at lahat para whiron the first pleven of the roots in he text are followed by the wahi..mmations of the curgational tenses, where posible. ४ ·86 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Sing. Duat . 3rd . . . Parasm. Atm. Sing.. Dual Plur. Plur, 1 st pers. इयाज-इयज इजिव ईजिम ईजे इजिवहे ईजिमहे 3nd. इयजिय-इयष्ठ ईजथु: ईज ईजिषे ईजाथ इजिध्वे इयाज ईजाते ईजिरे यज-यय-अयम् by 5-इयज by 6-इयाज. यज-इज by 4 and 6-इज- ई- + अनुः ईजतुः. यज-इजिथ or इयज +थ by 3 (d.) P. 77-इयष् +थ by IX. p. 52-उयप् + ठ-इपष्ठ by note* p. 21 F. B. व्यव-व्यव्यध-विअ- य्यर by band 7-विष्य by G-विव्याध. स्वप-स्वस्वप-सुस्वप- सुष्वर + अ-मुप्वाप. व्यप-विध-विविध + अतु.-विविधतु. स्वप-मुप-सुषुए + अतु:-सु. पुपतुः. वच-3rd pers. Partism. उवाच, ऊचतुः, ऊचुः-- 2nd pers. sing. उवविध 0 उवक्थ. Atm. ऊचे, ऊचाते, &c. I. (a) Thtofthe a ioots दुह, मुह, स्नुह and FFE is optionally changed to g, i. ('., to por when it is followed by any consonant cacept a nasal or a semi-vowel or by nothing. मुमोहिथ, मुमोह थ (hy 6, P. -मुमोद -थ or मुमो + थ-मुमोद or मुमोग्ध (8) The finale of नह Is changed to ५ under the same fircumstances ; नेहिथ, and ननह+थ नन +थ-ननद. II. When the is dropped by 111. p. 49, the preceding or ur 377 is changed to 371. वर-ववाह-उवह +थ-उवद - थy I P. 18-उवद +ध by I. p. 49. उवह + by not* 11 F. B.-Fly III. p. 19, but luy this JETTE usteend of उवाढ. 5. (a. The mulitical Date of वे Parasm. and At., to 'weare,' before the strong terminations of the Perfect is उदय, and before the weak; illud that of a Parusin. and Atm., w 'cover,' in ferary beture the former and faraft before the latter. Jag admits before y. Otherwise, 14. p 60 would be applicable. व्ये ध्येव्ये एव्ये by 7-विव्ये by G-विय्यै+अ-विव्याय So alu a iu the strong furine of वह or ऊर Renes lomme wal F Buddiesel by a luwel . a dental, and the roots म्बा स्विद् स्वद्, स्वङ्ग, स्वप्. and iस्म cluangre their स् to m when preceded nerally in the same wonl or vrammatical form bymur vowel except 34 or आ wa guttural. सेक्, मप्र सृज्ञ, म, स्तु, and ल्यै are exceptions, ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 87 . and नश 10. मरज (6). The base of Paras in. and Åtm., to 'call or challenge;' is हु throughout ; and of वि, शु. I.e., they take Sariprasâraņa before the strong termination of the Perfect also. हेहडए हु by 6 above. (c). वे and धि are also conjugated from the unmodified bast. वैचा by 14, p. 80–ववा-ववौ ववतुः वः, by 13 (a) & (U) p. 79. 9. अद्, ऋ andव्ये admit of s necessarily before य. 2nd pers. sing. आरिथ 3rd pers. आर-आरतुः-आरु.. insert a after their sy before strong terminations beginning with a consonant. 11. (c)The Perfect of 100ts beginning with any vowel (except अ or आ) which is itself lang, or being short is follow:- ed by a conjunct consonant, is formed by addinge Byrn to the root and then appending the forms of the reduplicate Perfect of कृ. भू, or असु. ऋच्छ is an exceptio!). (७). The Perfect of roots of the 10th conjugation, causals, desideratives, and other derived roots, or, generally, of roots of more than one. syllable, is also formed in this way. This is called the Periplırastic Perfect. (c.) When a root is Atmanepadi, it takes the Atmanepndi forms of ?, and a Parasmai padi root takes the Parasmaipada forms. ईश Atm. u. " Sing. Dual Plier. 1st pers. ईशांचके ईशांचवहे ईशांचकमहे 2nil ईशांचषे ईशांचक्राये ईशांचढ़े 3rd ईशांचक ईशांचकाते ईशांचक्रिरे Also ईशामास, ईशांवभूव. &c. कय 10th conj. Puragm. b. 1st pers. कथयांचकार-चकर कथयांचव करायांचम 2nd कथयांचकर्थ कथयांचक्रथुः कथयांचक्र 3rd कथयांचकार कथयांचक्रतुः कथांचकुः Also Atm., कथयांचवे, &c. अय is retained in most of the non-conjugational tenses. (Stee note* p. 83.)

·88 SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 12. (a.) दय, अय, कास्, and आस take the Periphrastic Perfect necessarily, and उष्, विद, and जागृ optionally.. • (७.) भी, ही, भू, and galso take it optionally, but the base of these is reduplicated as in the 3rd conjugation and then भाम् and the helping verb appended. 13. आम् is a strong termination, wherefore the final ronel and the penultimate short except that of faz take their Guna before it. विभयांचकार, जिलयांचकार, विभरांचकार, &c. 14.. (a.) If the reduplicative syllable consists of 37 ous the is lengthened. (6.) Roots beginning with a ani anding with a double consonant, and those with an initial # and the root 371 to 'pervale, insentafti the reduplicative syllable. Siny. IDual I'lur. sre 3rd questo आनर्द आनर्दतुः आनईः आनन्त आनन्ततुः आनन्तुः आनृजे आनृजाते आनुजिरे 15. takes the Parasmaipada terininations in all non conjugational tenses, except thic Aurist and the Benedictive. 16. The prassive at the Perfect is formed by making up the forms according to the rules given m these twu lussouls. and apperiding the Amanda terminations, whether the 100t 1- Purushmitali nAthitadi in the actise. गतायां रात्रौ सुप्ता वयं किल बहु विलेपिम । युधिष्ठिरेण पृष्टो लोमशोऽगस्त्यस्य प्रभावं कथयामास । कृतयुगे कालेया इति विश्रुता दानवा वृत्रं समाश्रित्य महीं स्वर्गलोक च भृशं पीडयांचाः । नैतत्कर्तुमानईस्ते । तान्हन्तुं सेन्द्रा विबुधा न शेकुः। ते ब्रह्माणमुपसंगम्योचुर्भगवनखिलं त्रैलोक्यं दानवैरर्यते किमत्र करवामहै। परमेष्ठयुषाच भो देवा दधीचमृपिं गत्वा तस्यास्तीनि याच- ध्वम् । तेषां पत्रं कृत्वा वृत्रं हत। तथोति प्रतिज्ञाय ते सर्वे दधीचस्याश्रममुपययुः । " ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 89 तः तमृर्षि देवाः प्रणेमुस्तस्यास्थीनि च ययाचिरे। ततः स महात्मा त्रैलोक्यस्य हितायात्मनः प्राणानुत्ससर्ज। तस्य परासोरस्थीनि देवा जगृहुस्त्वष्टारं च गत्वा तं तेषामुप्रं वजं कारयामासुः। ततस्त्वष्टा शक्रमुवाचैतद्गृहीत्वा वृत्रं जहि । इन्द्रेण सहिता देवा रोदसी आवृत्य तिष्ठन्तं कालेयैरभिरक्षितं च वृत्रमासेदुः । तांश्च युद्धायाजुहुविरे ।। : सह देवानां तुमुलं युद्धं समापेदे । रजोभिः सर्वा दिशो व्यानशिरे । दानवेभ्यश्च देवा भृशं त्रेसुः । इतस्ततः प्रधाघतां तेषां वेगं देवा दौर्बल्यान सेहिरे भीताश्च पलायामासुः। तादृशांस्तान्दृष्ट्वेन्द्रो विष्णुं शरणं वव्राज । ततो विष्णुरात्मनस्तेज इन्द्रे निदधे देवाश्च महर्षयश्चापि तथा विदधिरे। ततो रणधुरामेकोऽपीन्द्र उवाह । स. वृत्रस्य वधाय महद्धर्जा मुमोच । तेन हतो वृत्रो भूमौ सुप्वाप। कोट्या कोट्या पुरद्वारमेकैकं रुरुधे द्विपाम् ॥ तत्कर्म वालिपुत्रस्य दृष्ट्रा विश्वं विसिप्मिये। संसू राक्षसाः सर्वे वहु मेने च राघवः॥ मुग्रीवो मुमुदे देवाः साध्वित्यूचुः सविस्मयाः। बिभीषणोऽभितुष्टाव प्रशशंसुःप्लवंगमाः॥ राघवो न दयां चक्रे दधुर्धर्य न केचन । मन्ने पतङ्गवद्वीरैर्दाहेति च विचुकुशे ॥ प्रिाणा दध्वंसिरे गात्रं तस्तम्भे च प्रिये हते । उच्छश्वास चिराहीना रुरोदासौ ररास च ॥ *Fi12. Lesson YXI. Ť This meant refer to the state of Sitâ uber alle mil w ler lusland, Rama, ing on the ground, as if deal, under the intluence of Indrajit's missile. 'The next two stanza- art her words of lamentation on the occasion.

·:0 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. लाहबन्धैर्बबन्धे नु वजेण किं विनिर्ममे । मनो मे न विना रामाचत्पुस्फोट सहस्रधा ॥ उत्तेरिथ समुद्रं त्वं मदर्थेऽरी जिहिंसिथ । ममर्थ चातिधोरां मां* धिग्जीवितलघूकृताम् ।। मालिन्यं मार्जयामास चन्द्रमारितमिरैः कृतम् । खलैर्दत्तं मृषा दोषमिव सत्पुरुषः सताम् ॥ ऐिन्द्रेण ह वै महाभिषेकेण संवर्त आङ्गिरसो मरुत्तमाविक्षि- नमभिषिच । तस्मादु मरुत्त आविक्षितः समन्तं सर्वतः पृथिवीं जयन्परीयायाश्वेन च मेध्येनेजे । तदप्येष श्लोकोऽभिगीतः। मरुतः परिवेष्टारो मरुत्तस्यावसन्गृहे । आविक्षितस्य कामप्रेर्विश्वे देवाः सभासद इति ॥ When the leader of the Kalyan was killed ( 6 puss. ] the fought [ पुध ] le-perutely, but the goals subdued [जि] them at last. The then head [ मन्त्र ॥ मन्त्रं कृ] a consultation and resolved I fee with fan) to destroy the universe. They thought I 47 ) the death or destruction of all Rishis in Bralumanas to be the best means to that end, for the universe depended (f with 371 or TFT with 377) on the chgious austerities they rent through [ तर or चर ].and the nacritices they puertorneil ( 77, Orx with 371 ). Ther, therefore". Concealer ( with g) themselves during the day in the seat, and at night stalked [ 75 ] abroad, hilled (A) a great many Brahmanas, and tormented (ofte ॥ अई] all people. The hermitages of Vasishtha. Bhargava, and other Rishis Here lail waste [ साद् caus. with अव ] and rendered [] tenantless; afterwards they burnt [ द ] them. । , The meermalole retete kovernis the accusaure. + BTT HEIRAT*: was a particular fuum of coronation according to which 1r was crownal king by the gols. That same form, when used in the Howf urtal lines, rendered then nulnerable, and enable them to L'quer the whole earth. is here equivalent to TEATE : नद् .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. [गम् उम 91 No men sacrificed [TR], and the gods were afraid ( vt or TH ). They did not know ( 11 ) who did all this, and so went with ) to Vishiņu and begged ( r ) his assistance. Visliņu told (F4 or 7) them that the Káleyas did this at night and lay concealed in the sea during the day. He commandei (feat with 377 ] them to you Agastya and request him to drink off the sea. The gods went (5 with ] to the sage, bowel ( 7 with 9) to him, and praised ( FT or if with 7] his miglit. He asked [774] them the purpose of their visit. This they toll [F] him; welepu Agastya went (7) to the sea, and the gols followed (o withi अनु ] lim. He clrank [ ] the sea, and the Kulevas vero dawn (A with 3 ) out from their place of refii, ('. Then a battle took place [TE with सम् and 37T] :ind the "Als killed [] them. उप . उग्र VOCABULARY SIV. STTTT n. the name of a sage. इ 2.0 conj. Pavarm. with aft, FATOTT m.in. f. very horrible to circumambulate. or wirked. 57. ar. to and fro. Starta idr. at last. g a particle. ( severe. af fra pust part.quise. of Ise f. austerr, kren, ronj. l'arası. with soft, sung. उप 1st comoj. Pino-71. to burn. staf unthe g 10th conj. Åtin. to pron. n. 1. f. one by one, nequest. 1xt and 10th conj. to afflict, Tain. » f. belonging to Inilra. to torment. Tafa n. one whose desires are 3797 5th conj. Atm. with fw to fulfilled. perrade. #Tey caus, of, to cause any. spray 11. a bone. thing to be done. TFT m. a descendant of ICT m. name of certain giants. अङ्गिरस. कृतयुगn.the first of the four ages आविक्षित m. the son of अविक्षित. according to Hindu mythology. cach ont. See Lesson XVI.. Art. 11.

·92 SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. कुश Ist conj. l'arusm, with fairy m. a monkey. to cry out. 977 1st conj. Parasın. to go. lor conj. Parasm. to go, to Fins 1st conj. Parasm. to bear stalk abroad. fruit. fatto v. after a long time. E adr. highly, m'ach. 5, 101h conj. with g, to conceal fara fram m. name of a brother of anything. Ravana and ally of Râma. Chin.. f, disgraced test 6th conj. Parasm. & Åtm. or doraded by life or by to hake. continuing to live. T5 1st conj. Atm. to shine. conj. Parasm. to perform 7737 1st conj. Åtm. to shine. religions austorities. *7727 1st conj. Atm. to shine. TET I, n. 1. like that. Heada. for me. falat ilk 11. aburkness, dark. मन्त्र 10th conj. Atm. to hold a g's m.11. f. violent, tumultuous. consultation, to consult. FL, to be afraill. HOT ", the three worlds. Ha m. i god 1st conj. Åtm. to give. TTTT m. name of a king. Hetfint, m. (HEQ m. ... f. great fr 11. the name of a lishi. and Terr. 1. sprinkling दय ly m. to have comwater as on the head of a king passion. when he is crowned ), great TE M. a demon. coronation. fall f. direction. fra 11. il. f. helpless, linor. Hry n. darkness,'(lirtiness. In 10th conj. to win off. . censure or calumny. minul. falsely. दौर्बल्य ness, HET m. n. f. fit or destined to for ind. tie upon be sacrificed. TFT de like moths. Taft m. the god Bralımi. TÆ Ist conj. Parasm. to scream. Tot n. luul, heaven and earth. TITE N. il. f. dead. 1st conj. Parasm, with fa, oftae m. one who listributes to lament, fool at the table. TFT with a 1st conj. Âem., to Team H. the ynte of a city. depend on. gre nn. prowess, greatness. 98 m. the name of a Rishi. C Sex XVI.. Art. 2. + This news dias two ba's and are empt the Benelet. Paman. The स् not impreul(.1.1.03 ) in all n«n-conjugational tenses when बरजू changel to ·. SECOXD BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 93 era m. (76 m. 2. iron, TFT m. a member of an asm a bond, a fetter) a fetter sembly or court. of iron. .Hi aur round aliout. T m. 1. adamant. PET: adr. in every direction. afya m. the son of l'ali, a HTEYİM. . f. with wonder, monkey chief. wondering. [parts. FT 1. a god. FETT Thlr. into a thousand विश्रुत m. 11. f. past part. pss. of » with fa, famous, famed as. avia 1. name of a monkey chief VET: m. plur, all the gols. and ally of Rima. T m. speed, velocity. acith उद्, to alandon. 7 m. a name of Indra, zm. 1. f. with Indra. fay with 977, to dependoori. स्तु with अभि, to prnise. RE m. the name of a priest. 6th rouj. l'avaon. to break, FFY an. a good man. to split asunder, साधु adla. well. Death वध . dat. for the attainment of the Ikesperately प्रसह्य ind. als: आfruit or end. त्मनिरपेक्षम् aily. साहसेन instr. Means उपाय ॥. अभ्युपाय ॥. usod as an adt. Might प्रभाव m. Destroy for 7th conj. with 36, Place of refuge 377 *POTTUTA N. मृद 10th conj. with fa; ges. Purpose poista n. तुम् inf.निषदयितुम् inf[साद . Religious austerities Ayifa plor. Destruction in m. art m. 377- Tenantless Asfa min. f. End कार्य 1. फल n.; फलावाप्तये Visit आगमन ॥. आगम m. LESSON TV Purt 1. FIRST AND SECOND FI'TURES AND CONDITIONAL.. 1.-FIRST FUTURE. 1. To the root should be added the affix before which the final vowel or the penultimate short takes Cuña. Nominative forms of the nouns thus maile up are to be considered as the fornis of the third person ; and in the first and scconil persons, the correspoming forms of the Parasmaipada Prescut tense of BTA should be appended to the nominative singular. When a root is Åtnianepadi, the Åtmancpada forms of a should be added.

·BFCOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . यह and roots 2: To the affix , r is to be prefixed after Set roots, anal optionally after those that are optionally Set. Anit roots, rot course, do not almit it. The roots इष, सह, लुभ्, रुष, and रिष admit of t.optionally before 3. The augment's in the case of the root is long in all non-conjugational tenses except the Perfect. व ending in ऋ. long) optionally lengthen it in all non-conju. gational tenses except the Perfect, Benedictive Âtm., and Aorist Parasm. 4. Anit roots having # for their penultimate change it. to 7 optionally, when followed by a strong* termination beginning with a hard consonant; as, FQET, TEI or FTET. Foi and Tws 18, p. 80 ; सज-स्रष्टा, घश-दष्टा. 5. When the of me is elropped by III. p.49, the precerl. ing ay or is changed to opt as that of in the salle circumstances. (Sen II p. Purasm. %3B 86). 1st pers. " Sing Dual T'lur. भविताम्मि भवितास्वः भवितास्मः And भवितासि भविताम्थः भवितास्थ भविता भवितारी भवितारः सह-सह-तामह ता-मद · धा-सद+दा-सादा-सोदा by above ; वह similuuly वोदा. लभ ना-लभ - धा-लब्धा. दह + ता-दए + ता-दरा + धा- दग्धा नह. ता-नर · ता. 10) P. 86-नध धा-नदाः सृज+ता-सन्न + ता 18. P. 60-स्लप ता-सप् + टा स्रष्टा : सप-सप्त or सप्ता. + -- 1st pr!.. मुद. Su.. Dual Plur. मादिताहे मोदितास्वहे मोदितास्महे ind मोदितासे मोदितासाथै मोदिताचे 3rd मोदिता मोदितारी मोदितारः deep. 34-35. . 1. c. any termination nach oxracions a Guan or Vrillhi chinnge 1 the poremeuling ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. II.-SECOND FUTURE. 1. The terminations of this tense are made up by prefixing for to those of the Present. The auginent ç is to le prefixed to F, or not, or optionally, according to the nature ..f the root. Before the terminations, the final vowel and che penultimate short, take litina. 1. The final of a root is changed to a when followed liv a "non-personal termination with an initial After गम् Parasn., हन् and roots ending in ऋ, इ is is be prefixed to for in this tense, though these roots are sluit and optionally, after कृत and नृत्, though they are Set. 3 कृप, व वृध, नृथु and स्यन्द् are optionally Parasmuipadi in the second Future, and when so, thie स्य does not takes as ppended to them. This holily good in the case of in कृप 11 tirst Future also. . 1st pers. 1st peis. 2nd 10 " Sing. Dual Tur. लप्म्ये टप्म्यावहे लप्म्यामहे लप्स्यसे लप्म्यध्ये 3d लप्म्यंत लप्म्यते लाम्यन्ते भू. भविष्यामि भविप्यावः भविष्यामः भविष्यसि भविष्यथः भविप्यथ भविष्यति भविप्यतः भविष्यन्ति लभ + स्य-लए - स्य-ते-लप्स्यते ; दिश -स्य-देश-देष-देश-देक + प्यनि- देश्यति दुह + स्य-दोह-दोष-थोप-धोक-धोक - प्यति-धोक्ष्यति । दश - म्य- दश by 18, p. 80-इ-दर-दरु + प्यति-द्रक्ष्यति; सए + स्यति-सरं or सपy 4 p. 94-सय॑ति or सम्यति ; वृर + स्य-वर्ग-वर्त-वयति or व. धिप्यते by 3 above. III.-CONDITIONAL.. 1. In the Conditional, the teriniuations of the Imperfect ile appended to fa, instead of those of the Present. The emporal augment sy is to be prefixed to the rout; in other By this expression are mean: all terminating nith the excepłon of Sire which express number alerson as मि, मि, ति, Ac.. and one or two क tiren.

·96 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1st Tre. " 1st 18 . respects the forms are exactly like those of the second Future. Sing. Dual Plur. अलप्म्ये अलप्स्यावहि अलप्स्यामहि Pul अलप्प्यथाः अलप्स्येथाम् आप्स्यध्वम् 3rd अलप्म्यत अनम्येताम् अलप्स्यन्त अभविष्यम् अभविष्याव अभविष्याम 2nd अभविष्यः अभविष्यतम् अभविष्यत d अभविष्यत् अभविष्यताम् अभविष्यन् " द with 777 optionally substitutes or forç in the Aorist and Colitional: It is then changed to sf before consonants; .- अध्येप्यत or अध्यगीप्यत:1d pers. sing. 3. The prässive frops of von-conjugational tenses are made up similily bx appending the Atmanepala terminations 14 the neared base'. The second Fntme capircases futurity generally, and citically the futurity of the day. The first Futue expressrecifically the futurity not of this clay. The Conditional is used in those conditional sentences in which the non-performance of the action is implied. It expresses buth futme and prizst times In the latter particular, it resembles the English Iluperfect conditional + हरिद्वारं गमिष्यामि तत्र च गङ्गाया उद्गमं हिमाचलंच द्रक्ष्यामि सर्वासां देवतानां पूजां च विधाय स्वकीयं ग्रामं प्रतिनिवामि । यद्यते हितकरं तत्सर्व कर्तुं यतिष्ये । स्वामिनादिष्टोऽपि पुष्पाणि नानयसि यदानीतानि न वेति स प्रक्ष्यति तदा किं प्रतिवक्ष्यसि । अस्माकं मित्रं हिरण्यको नाम मूपकराजो गण्डकीतीरे चित्र बने निवसति सोऽस्माकं पाशांश्छेत्स्यति । यदि मेाणपथमायास्यस्यसंशयं मरिष्यसि । सुवृष्टिभेदभविष्यत्तदा सुभिक्षमभविष्यत् । यदि स धर्ममत्यस्यदुःखभाक्समवर्तिप्यत । कुसुमपुर एकस्मिन्गृहे शत्रुणा पातितमग्निं यदि कृष्णवर्मा न निरवापयिष्यत्तदा सर्वमेव नगरमनिरपश्यत् ।

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 97 कुम्भकर्णस्य गात्राणि रामो रणे कयंतीति केन संभावितम्। पुष्करेण भ्रात्रा द्यूते जितो नलो राज्यात्परिभ्रष्टो दमयन्त्या सह वनमियाय । तत्रापि कलिना बहुविधैश्छलैः पीडितो सुप्तां दमयन्तीमुत्सृज्यैकस्मिन्स्थले जगाम । गच्छंश्च महान्तं दावं ददर्श । तन्मध्ये कर्कोटको नाम नाग आसीत् । तं स राजाग्ने- मध्यादुद्धृत्य कानिचित्पदानि निनाय । दशमे पदे कर्कोटको नलमदशत् । तेन नैषधस्य स्वीयं रूपमन्तरधीयत । आत्मानं विकृतं दृष्ट्वा स राजा विस्मितस्तस्थौ । ततः कर्कोटको नागः सान्त्वयनलमब्रवीत् । मया तेऽन्तर्हितं रूपं न त्वां विगुर्जना इति.॥ यत्कृते चासि निकृतो दुःखेन महता नल । विषेण स मदीयेन त्वयि दुःखं निवत्स्यति ॥ विषेण संवृतैर्गात्रैर्यावत्त्वां न विमोक्ष्यति । तावत्त्वयि महाराज दुःखं वै स निवत्स्यति ॥ अनागा येन निकृतस्त्वमनों जनाधिप । क्रोधादसूययित्वा तं रक्षा मे भवतः कृता ॥ न ते भयं महावीर दंट्रिभ्यः शत्रुतोऽपि वा। ब्रह्मर्षिभ्यश्च भविता मत्प्रसादानराधिप ॥ राजुन्विनिमित्ता च न ते पीडा भविष्यति । सङ्ग्रामेषु च राजेन्द्र शश्वजयमवाप्स्यसि ॥ गच्छ राजनितः सूतो बाहुकोऽहमिति बुवन् । समीपमृतुपर्णस्य स हि चैवाक्षनैपुणः ॥ अयोध्या नगरी रम्यामद्य वै निषधेश्वर । स तेऽक्षहृदयं दाता राजाश्वहृदयेन वै॥ इक्ष्वाकुकुलजः श्रीमान्मित्रं चैव भविष्यति । भविष्यसि यदाक्षः श्रेयसा योक्ष्यसे तदा ॥ समेष्यसि च दारैस्त्वं मा स्म शोके मनः कृथाः । राज्येन तनयाभ्यां च सत्यमेतद्रवीमि ते ॥ स्वरूपं च यदा द्रष्टुमिच्छेयास्त्वं नराधिप । * Th1- 1. tite form ut the entlnIr. Hing. if the Atu. Aurist of on the temratxment do-I (E.P. 151). ५ ·98 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. संस्मर्तव्यस्तदा तेऽहं वासश्चेदं निवासयेः॥ अनेन वाससा च्छन्नः स्वरूपं प्रतिपत्स्यसे। इत्युक्त्वा प्रददौ तस्मै दिव्यं वासोयुगं तदा । एवं नलं च संदिश्य वासो दत्त्वा च कौरव नागराजस्ततो राजंस्तत्रैवान्तरधीयत ॥ मरिप्यामि विजेप्ये वा हताश्चेत्तनया मम । हनिप्यामि रिपूस्तृर्ण न जीविष्यामि दुःखितः॥ स्मंप्यन्ते मुनयों देवाः कथयिष्यन्ति चानिशम् । दशग्रीवस्य दुर्नीतैर्विनष्टं रक्षसां कुलम् ॥ मधुकर मदिराक्ष्याः.शंस तस्याः प्रवृत्ति वरतनुरथवासौ नैव दृष्टा त्वया मे। यदि सुरभिमाप्स्यस्तन्मुखोच्छासगन्धं नव रतिरभविप्यत्पुण्डरीके किमस्मिन् ।। अकरिप्यदसी पापमतिनिकरुणैव सा । नाभविप्यमहं तत्र यदि तत्परिपन्थिनी॥ 11 I do not ce [] Nala to-das, I will thron [त्य iith परि me into fine, and perish [म]. The king does not tell me the object of his visit Well, I hall no [ज्ञा) it in the end. Suvenil, 10 Rituparna, and tell him“ Damavanti in 2011 200 ( wall, 11-401110 (FT with 377) a new Svavivarit, mms mitti and king on there, and it will come ofi [कृत with a tomorrow.' "If you wish. fir to Kundmapura in a single das , ton ar nun as the sum rises ( q with ), she will chouse (a) a Prond liusband." Damayanti gale much lealth to Parnada, and said, "I will give दा] ! ou more than Vala comes [ गम् ॥ith आ] Thou hast dune much for me, none else will do (7) 0 much; for now, as a t consequence of your efforts, I shall Sam of a wicked woman who wantello kill a young maxivut of 10 for her husband, but warresented by a tholy lame, who is the sxakti. + यत्नसामर्यात् of some such expressa should be used.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 99 soon be united (Tn pass., s or stay with h) to my husband." Oh Bâbuka ! thou shouldst not deceive me; how will these weak horses bear (or, afi] me to Kundinapura in sa ingle day? We will Aw mount [with 37]' our horses and run wiftly Båhuka said to the king, “Thou hast told me the number of leaves and fruits on this tree. Well, I will fell ( caus. of 18*, or Fay) it in your prescuce, and count the leaves." I will not touch ( FOST ] you, because you cat with (hindalas. I do not kuow when he will begin (T7 with 347] to construct a house to live in. Had Yajñalatta maile a bow (Th witwa) to itu wlien lie entered the 110046", he would not have considered [77] him a cunccited fellow'. Hiu he gone [] into the presence of his enemy innded, the enciny would have killet () liim. Had the cobra litten [7] lim at the time, and haul there been [] nobody to get melicine, Devadatta would certainly have died [Ę, or TF with 37). Thou wilt, by my blessing, enjoy [at] supremo poive in this world, and get [ 3777 TH) a son possessing all the virtues; keep all you subjects contented. Purt II. PASSIVE. In addition to the rules given in the First Book and in Sonne lessons of this, the student should commit to incmory the tollju ing: - 1. gallded to roots in the conjugational tenses is weak. The following changes take place before the qof the passive.- Ruots ensling in the change it to fe; as fara fram em. # preceded by a conjunt consonant and the root are chtrged to Guna ; as स्मयते fron) स्मृ. Art. 4 Lesson XIV. holds good in this case; as sota 3. froin To • The u tlus ruut is changelin in the causal.

·100 SECOND BOOK.OF SANSKRIT. d. .दा and and other roots assuming these forms,* मा, स्थागै, पा, सो and हा to abandon,' change their final vowel to t before य: Us दीयते, धीयते &c. A inal or उ is lengthened ; as जीयते from जि; स्तूयते fron स्तु . J. Final (long ) is changed to ईर्, and, wher preceded by a labial or e, to उर (see Art. 8p. 2). 9. Some roots such as मन्थ्, अञ्च् 'to go,' दांस्, दंश, सङ्ग, रङ्ग, अझ, भ, स्कन्द , ग्रन्थ, स्तम्भ, बन्ध, भ्रंश &c. drop their nasals. 3. The passive forms of the first and second Future, of roots ending.in a vowel, and of हन्, ग्रह, and दृश are optionally made up by changing the vowel to its Vriddhi,t and appending the Åtmanopada terminations of those tenses yith y prefixed to them eren when the root is Anit. 'q is added to roots ending in 37 in these optional forms! a. Explain the following:- स्तयते, स्तीर्यते, तीर्ये, पर्ये, उहते, अवसीयते, भाविष्यते, घानिष्यते, भवि. प्यते, दर्शिप्यते, द्रक्यते, हारिप्यते, नायिप्यते, नेष्यते, स्थास्यते, हरिष्यते स्थायिप्यते. b. Write down the passive forms of the second Future of :-- , वर, यम, सह, नह, सह, लिह, बन्ध, ग्लै, हा, भिद्, वृत्, रुच्दु, लू, सो. स्तु,रु, शास्: And of the Present and Imperfect of the following: श, वप, यज, दव, क,ट,स्म, व्यच. . VOCABULARY XV. अक्ष m. dic used in gambling. अतिनिकरुण m. n.f. (अति । Ver WYT in. n. f. one who kuors lery much) very pitilk-ss or (the secret of playing at) dice. cruel. अक्षनपुण m.n... one who is Pos. sussed of skill in playing at अनह m. n.f. not deserving. dice. [ing dice. अनागस् m. n.f. innocent, not अक्षहरयn.the secret of manag. guilty. .. * Whenover this expression is unrl. always understand दा 2nd cut,' and let conj. Io purify, 'to the exceptel. † This does not apply to Ex which tahes Gura only, while it does a pois to and of the oth Conjugativu which generally glo not take either luga or pudhi. ( See 11. p. 79. ) ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 101 न sa adr. frequently, con- ter m. n. f. afflicted. stantly, continuously. Aman. an evil or imprudent act. अचहृदय n. the secret of manag-निषधेश्वर m.. lord or king of a ing horses. country named Nishadha. Tady undoubtedly. #gou », skill. May to w ill to, to lay at m. king of a country named malice to. Nishacha, Nala. nh. the progenitor of the irith afar, to attain. solar race of kings. { T m. ruler. ofyfya'n.11. f. one who stands in the way or obstructs; 4- 154 m. source, springing up. fyfort.. standing in its way. tet, 1. nanie of a serpent. fem. the principle of evil. qfiue past part.of T uithof, poengt n. name of a town. deprived of, fallen, depraved. कृतज m. 11. f. (gors n. family, wita (zrast part. pase of the and from HTT, to be proluced) causal of Ta ) thrown. born in a family, of the race of. T* m. proper name. Frith fa, to injure, to wrong. Tefar m. n. f. of various sorts. mind. for, on account or. Tuy n. (gfort 19. a way) the गण्डकी.. name of a river;गण्डकी. way or range of an arrow. fra n. a bank of the Gandaki. TF, 1. the name of Nala dis- I w. limb, body. gused as a charioteer. fra 1. name of a forest. मूषक m. a mouse; मूपकराज ॥ 36'N, fraud. king of mice. TOT I. ison. T 11. a pair, a couple; argi तन्मुखोच्छासगन्ध .. (उच्छास . 1. a pair of clothes. breathing, tay m. perfume, fa f. love. smell) the fragrance of the xeith agat, to answer. .breath of her mouth. at anuls. with fa, to put on a इंष्टिन् m. an animal having sharp garinent, to dress. teeth, a snake. arte, caus. of all, with farç, to 91. n. f. tenth. extinguish. Till a forest conflagration, a विनष्ट past purt. of नश with कि, forest. destroyed. दिव्य 11. 11. j. celustial, btautiful. THE ado. froni ar enemy. TUTT 1. 1. f. one who suffers Tyq ndo. perpetually. pain, unhappy. ten past pass. part. of caus. . This is a nomiua! Verl), formed from henti by vlropping the final vowel anılackling 374, as in the loch Conjugati).

·102 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. of with Fr, thought of, FT m. charioteer. thought possible. हरिद्वार n. name of a holy place frig m. 1. f. to be rememat the foot of the Himalayas. bered. fEhge m. the Himalayas. are n. abupdance of food. T feruum. name of a mouse. प्रत्यक्षम् adv. Blessing आशिस.. ONumber संख्या Conceited starog past part. Object प्रयोजन 1. उद्देश m. Construct afwith Farsi Parņâda quife m. a proper name. Deceive धा witle अति and सम्, | Presence, in one's, समक्षम् ॥r.. लभ rith वि and प्र, व 10th Sudeva uza m. a proper name. End उदर्क . अवसान 1. परिणाम Supreme power साम्राज्य n. पार. M.; JG &c. in the endda [puss. Fellow कापुस [अनु. Unguarded अरक्षित past part. Keep contented Toreaus. with Visit आगमन n. conj. Âim. मेष्ठय 12. LESSON XVI. DECLENSIONAL IRREGULARITIES. The student should remember the terminations given at the head of Lesson XXV. First Book. 1. We will liere notice only the anomalous case-forms of several nouns; the rest are to be made up by simply adding the caso terminations and observing the general Sandhi rules. The vocutive singular, except when specified, is to be considered to be like the corresponding nominative. .. f4797, TSEAT, and other nouns whose latter members, or which, in themselves, are roots ending in 34, drop the ending it when followed by vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plural. Sing. Dual Plur. Vom विश्वपाः विश्वपौ विश्वपाः Acc. विश्वपौ विश्वपः The voc. sing., the gen. plur., and the first six forms of tho are like those of eft, and the abl., gen. and loc. sings. are pry:-1: -1 +. The first five forms of सखि are सखा, सखायौ यः यम यौ the acc. plur. is Freit, and the abl., gen., and loc. sings. and gen. plur. are prog:-: --Fart. The voc. sing. is het विश्वपाम् ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. IV 5. श्री, धी, भू and other nouns which are derived from roots without the addition of any termination, and the nouns and स्त्री change their final For उ, short or long, to इयू or उद respectively before the, vowel terminations. Et takes the terminations of नदी. while श्री धी. 5, and other feminine nouns of this description take them optionally in the dat., abl., gen. and lye. sings. and gen. plur. The acc. sing. of स्त्री is स्त्रीम् त्रियम् and the plural स्त्रीः or स्त्रियः The voc. sing. is fan. 6. Feminine root-nouns in t such as धी and श्री, and तरी, नन्त्री, and लक्ष्मी do not drop the स् of the nom. sing. स्त्री. Sing. Dual Plur. Jom. नी त्रियो स्त्रियः स्त्रियम् स्त्रीम् स्त्रियों स्त्रियाशीः &c. Al. स्त्रियाः स्त्रीभ्याम् स्त्रीभ्यः Gen. स्त्रियाः त्रियोः स्त्रीणाम् &c. l'oc. स्त्रि . . . 10m. Acc. 10l. श्रीः श्रियम् श्रियः श्रियाः श्रिय-श्रियाः श्रीः थियौ श्रियौ श्रीभ्याम् श्रियोः श्रियः श्रियः &c: श्रीभ्यः श्रियाम्-श्रीणाम् &c. Gen. Por. Vom. भवी Gen. भुवः &c. ध्रुवाम् भ्रूणाम् &c. भुत्रः-ध्रुवाः भ्रुवो Toc. 7 (1) The çor , short or long, of a root-noun is changed to qiz when it is not preceded by a conjunct consonant, and at ilse same time when the noun is preceded by a preposition as Buplied to the root and not the noun, or by a substantive which il the dissolution of the compound takes an oblique case; as ग्रामणीः-ग्यौ-ण्यः ण्यम् । प्रधीः-ध्यौ-ध्यः The loc. sing. of ग्रामणी and other nouns aucting in A is formed by adding the termination आम्; as ग्रामण्याम्. Nouns like ग्रामणी and सेनानी, which primarily signify a male occupation, are declined like the masculine even when used as adjectives to qualify feminine substantives. Other root-nouns in long t or s that change these ·104 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. vowels to qora as above are, when feminine, declined like नदी or वधू. For the nom. sing. of the former, see 6, p. 103. अधी.. . Sing. Dual Pfur. Dat. प्रध्यै विधीभ्याम् प्रधीभ्यः All. प्रध्याः प्रधीभ्याम् प्रधीभ्यः Gen. प्रध्याः प्रध्योः प्रधीनाम् पुनर्भू, also feminine, is similarly declined. (0.) Errentine-संधी and noums ending in भू; as सुधीः-धियो थियः, म्वयंभूः-भुवी-भुवः &c. These nouns and others that changes the for 3 to y or 7 when feminine are declined like श्री, SC(5, . 103. (c.) Countereptions. वर्षाभू and पुनर्भू , as वर्षाभ्वौ &c. S. and it change their final sy to it in the first five intlections, as sit:-o-a: &c. The acc. sings. are o anıl वाम्. and plurals गाः and The abl. and gen. sings. ac' गोः and योः. All nouns conding in ओ are thus declined. 9. # and right have no peculiarities. 10. before the consonantal terminations becomes Tl; as गः रायौ &c. Instr. राया-राभ्याम् - राभिः. 11. अस्थि, दधि सक्थि, and अक्षि ue to be considered ar अस्थन् दधन्, सक्थन्. and अक्षन् when followed by the vowel tciminations hegimming with the instr. sing., and are declined like nouns ending in ta 'They are declined like arft in the first two case. Yon. Act. अस्थि अस्थिनी अस्थीनि Instr. अस्ना अस्थिभ्याम् अस्थिभिः &c. A great many ruots become nouns without the addition of any termination. 12 The changes of the final çof a root when followed by particular consonants have been explained in Lossons IX. and XIV. Thus in the case of fog, a root-noun, the termination Fr.being cropped, the ç is changed to by I, p. 48, and that to For by II, p. 57. Before marra and other such terminations it is changed to by VI., p. 50. So we bare .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 10% 14 Nom. font लिहः &c. Instr. लिहा लिरभ्याम् लिरभिः being dropped, we have, by V. p. 50, 7; by VII. p.50, धुर. and by AI. p. 57, धुरु or धुर: Before भ्याम् and such other terminations we have दुर +भ्यार by V. p. 50. Then, 13. The change mentioneel in VII. Lesson IX. takes place before the consonantal terminations. By this and V 1. j. 50. we have 4. fs. Loc. Plur. yy The first five inflected forms of Sale are stagram 8-64-6. The voc. sing. is अनन् The final is changed 10, when followed by the consonantal términations, is MATATA-3775B: &c 15. The nom. sing. of ffa istIt becomes यु befuie the consonantal terminations, as A. 16. Nouns ending in the syllable such as 767, and अर्थमन् and पूषन्, differ from other uns ending in TT in lengthening the penultimate in the nom. sing. only. The न् of दृत्रहन् is changed to of when is not dropped., as ITT - GV: Troll , 21HT-CTH-8ft: iustr. &c. About the change of tu g when the 37 is droppedl, see Rulo?c pl. 17. AFETE HETETT change their to y when followed by the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plur., as ya: TT:, fata: acc. plur. &c. In other respects they follow the general declension of noun euling in ta 18. The first five form of पथिन् are पन्थाः-न्धानौ-नः नम-नौ. The final is dropped before the vowel terminations. In uthor respects it follows the general declension of uns ending in f; as qyt: acc sing. Our-for-na-fufit: in-tr. &c. The voc. sing. is gout: like the nom. sing. 19. Afrituclined similarly. Eyfer differs from tliese only in the non-insertivu of the nasal in the first five inflections; 90:-am-: nom.; #: acc. plur.; cu instr. sing. 20. The rof ghar ubeys rule IX. Lesson IX. 37 and ..

·106 SECOND ROOK OF S.INSKRIT. Nom. sing. परित्रान् -परित्राए, स् being dropped,-परिवार hy II. p. 57. Instr. dual परित्राज+भ्याम्-परित्रा+भ्याम् । the above परिवाइभ्याम् by VI. p. 50. So also nom. sing. of fart; FT-fly by IX. p, 152, # being dropped-विद-ह by fi. p. 57. Ikastr. dual विर-विष्-विइभ्याम् Decline siinilarly देवेज (देव+यज), निश, विश्वसृज , राज &c. 21. प्राच, प्रत्यच् , उदच् , अवाच , सम्यच , and तिर्यच hare : nasal inserted before the final consonant in the first five in- Mections of the masc. The nom. sings. are प्राङ्, प्रत्यङ्, उदङ्, &r Before the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plur. and before the neuter nom. and acc. dual ई, प्रत्य, उद सम्य, and तिर्य become प्रती, उदी, समी and तिरश ; as प्रतीचः, उदीचः fruity, and fores: acc. plur. The feminine forms of these are made up by adding t to the crude thus modified, as प्राची प्रतीची, &c. Masc. Sing. Duať Plur. Yon. तिर्यक तिर्यचौ तिर्यष्चः तिर्यचम् तिर्यञ्चौ तिरश्चः Instr. तिरक्षा तिर्यग्भ्याम् तिर्यग्भिः &c. Veut. Tom. d Acc. तिर्यक्ग तिरश्ची तिम्चि 22. वज, तारश. दिश und दृश chunge the final to t or n when followed by hard or soft consonants, and to either whe followed by nothing ; nom. plur. सक् or सग, instr. du. स्रग्भ्याम् 23. Present participles of the roots enumerated in 7 p. 53, and of those of the third conjugation do not insert ? before the final in the first five inflections of the masc the non, an ace plurs of the neuter they insert ally. The mom. and acc. duals of the neuter, and the femi nine buse pre formed by simply adding ई. विपत् pres. part. of भृ. options Sirigy. Tom. Dual विधतौ विधती Plur. रिश्रतः विधतः &c. बिभतम् ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 107 Veut. Jum. d. Acc. para विभ्रती विधति विभन्ति &c. Fem. बिभ्रती 4. The present j'articiples of rout: ending in 37 of tho sorrod conjugytion like those of avots of the oth conjugation :.-10 optionally before the of the feminine and of the kuter nom. and are lual ; यात्-याती or यान्ती n. nom. and (l'l'. dr. and fem. 25. The first file forms of घुस are पुमान्-मांसौ-मांसः-मांसम् मांसौ. The roc. sing. is पुमन्. The ending F is dropped #fore the cousonantal terminations. 26. fe and other pouns ending in [ such as TT, TT &c., stal आशिस् lengthen the penultiinate when followed by a ronsonantal termination, or by nothing. The æ of the last lucomes q under the usual circumstances. This change takes place even if an anusvara, a visarga, or श, ष, or स in- Pellene between the previous vowel anil i 37raft:T or 3 ricg. Sing. Dual Plur. Vom. गीः गिरी गिरः Arc. गिरम गिरः Instr. गिरा गीाम् गीर्भिः &c.. 7. अप... usclined in the plural only. The noim. is It qis changed to before the terminations with an initial 7. 28 The final न् of अहन् is changed to y before the nom. -ing, and to visarga before the otlic consouantal termi- आप:. Wittibus. om. Acc. अहः अही-अहनी अहानि Instr. अहोभ्याम् अहोभिः &c. अहर्भाति where अहर is nom. sing. 20. पूर्व, पर, अवर, दक्षिण, उत्तर, अपर, अथर, and when they indicate mirete relation (in space, time, or person, and अन्तर when it means internal' or under-garment' are declined like pronouns. They are optionally so declined in the nom. plur. and abl. and loc. sing; as a or qart:, geita or पूर्वस्मात्, पूर्व or पूर्वस्मिन् .

·108 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 30. The following ten words, which are pronouns and ani Jeclined as such, form the sing. of the nom. and acc. neute •by adding t or :-अन्य, अत्यतर, कतर, कतम, यंतर, यतम, ततर ततम, एकतम, इतर; as अन्यत-द, कतरत-द. 31. The nom. plural mast. of 9th, apok, ani, 199 and an is optionally formed like that of pronouns. ## is : pronoun. 32. 4t, mit and pther masc. nouns ending in f form thei acc, sing, and plur. by adding and 7 respectively. 33.. The work thig is declined as if it were my necessarily in thi first five inflections, and optionally before the vowel termination beginning with the instr. sing. except that of the gen. plu., thi form of which is hear alone. The voc. sing. is pret. In othe respects it is declined like masculine nouns in 3. 34. The words to and fast optionally assume the forms and FITÆ before the vowel terminations; in other respects the firs in declinul lıke feminine nouns in 371 and the other like nouns i अ . जग, जरसौ or जरे &c. 37. apa is declined like nouns ending in aa except in the nou and voc. sing. When the negative particle 377 is prefised, it i declined like आत्मन् :36. उशनस् differs from other nouns ending in अस् (as चन्द्रमम in the nom. sing., which is 37al, and the voc. sing. wwhich is op tionally उशनन्, उशन, or उशन:- 37. Before the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plu the ending syllable at of certain nouns is changed to the : of which with the preceding अ or आ becomes औ, as विश्वौहः dulur. of fame. is changed to fc. as in the case of fee, an we have fa77-T nom. sing. FraTETTA instr. dual. &c. of तुरासाह is changed to before the consonanti terminations. 39. दोषन् m. n. असन् ।. दत् ॥. पद . नस्... मास् m. हद् . मार n. D.T.EE in. ll. Th".FT". THT . fact have no forms fi the now, and the sing. And dunl of the ace. In other cases they ar leclined according to the generl rules. The of TET and मार is dropped before the consonantul terminations, HTH howeit does not drop its F L fore g. :ac 33. The F ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 109 यदा महान्वैयाकरणः पाणिनिः समजायत तदा व्याकरण- विषये प्राचा कानिचिन्मतानि प्रतीचा मतेभ्यो मिचान्यासन् । पूर्वेषां संप्रदायमनुस्त्य ग्रन्थारम्भे देवतां स्तौमि । विधवाया पुनरुद्धाहः सशास्त्र इत्येके शास्त्रविरुद्ध इस्यन्ये कलौ प्रतिषिद्ध इत्यपरे वदन्ति । विवाहविधावर्यमणं पूषणं चाधिकृत्य मन्त्रान्पठन्ति । अपराधं विना पत्युर्नारी तस्मै प्रकुप्यति । प्रजापीडनजो वह्नी राक्षः श्रियं कुलं प्राणांश्च दहति । यस्मिन्शकटे सोमो राजानिीयते तस्य धुर्यन्यतरोऽनङ्गान्युक्तः स्यादन्यतरो विमुक्तोऽयं राजानमुपाहरेयुः । यूनां बुद्धिः शास्त्रैः संस्क्रियते । पत्या परित्यक्ता विधवा वायान्यं पतिं विन्दते सा पुनर्भूर्भवति । दिवि यथा संख्यातीतास्तारकास्तथैव दाशरथौ रामे गुणाः । तस्याश्चार्वङ्गयाः स्त्रिया लावण्यं पश्यन्तो जना अक्षणां फलं .. प्रापुः। इन्द्रियं वा एतदस्मिल्लोके यहधि । यहनाभिषिञ्चतीन्द्रिय- मेवा स्मिस्त द्दधाति । मधुराभिर्गीभिः साधु सान्त्वयामास गोविन्दः । स साधुश्च तमाशीभिरनुगृह्येष्टं प्रदेशं जगाम । अना रक्षः संसृजतात् । एकः शब्दः सम्यग्ज्ञातः सम्यक्प्रयुक्तश्च स्वर्ग लोक कामधु- ग्भवतीति वैयाकरणानां मतम् । पुण्येऽहनि पुरोधास्तं राज्येऽभिषिषेच मन्त्रं चेमं पपाठ । Fee Art, Lesson XVII. i The secreal plant sona in often spohton of - राजा. on kina This refce to the person who is sprinkleri oer with water or called nmall. नंद i here equivalent to therefore.' Wheu the victim is kellel at a nacrince its blexxl xe given away to our Mt. TC 15 a term Xiation optionally tiwal tu formu the 2nd and 3rd pers. sing of the Imperatire. It is a weak termination. 10

·110
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT.
याभिरिन्द्रमभ्यषिश्चत्प्रजापतिः सोमं राजानं वरुणं यमं मर्नु
ताभिरद्भिरभिषिञ्चामि त्वामहं राज्ञां त्वमधिराजो भबेह ।
देवासुरा वा एषु लोकेषु संयतिरे । त एतस्यां प्राश्यां दिशि
येतिरे तस्तांतोऽसुरा अजयन् । ते दक्षिणस्यां दिधि येतिरे तां-
स्ततोऽसुरा अजयन् । ते प्रतीच्यां दिशि येतिरे तांस्ततोऽसुरा
अजयन् । त उदीच्यां दिशि येतिरे तांस्ततोऽसुरा अजयन् ।
आदित्यचन्द्रावनिलोऽनलश्च
धौभूमिरापो हृदयं यमश्च ।
अहश्च रात्रिश्च उभे च संध्ये
धर्मोऽपि जानाति नरस्य वृत्तम् ॥
अवश्यं नश्वरे देहे दुर्दमे च यमे द्विषि ।
हास्यं नास्याद्विनिर्याति यत्पुंसामिदमद्भुतम् ॥
सत्यं संसृतिगर्तेयं दुःखैः खैः पूर्णा निरन्तरम् ।
यतस्तयतिरेकेण नान्यत्किचिदिहाप्यते ॥
अनित्ये प्रियसंवासे संसारे चक्रवद्गतौ ।
पथि संगतमेवैतद्धाता माता पिता सखा ।
हदि विद्ध इवात्यर्थ यया संतप्यते जनः ।
पीडितोऽपि हि मेधावी न तां वाचमुदीरयेत् ॥
तस्य पृथ्वी प्रसूतेऽर्थ धर्ममर्थः प्रसूयते ।
प्रसौति विजयं धर्मः स च प्रसवति श्रियम् ॥
गर्हते न तथा श्वानं चाण्डालं च न गर्हति ।
गईयत्याहवे भग्नं यथासौ क्षत्रियं नरम् ॥
हते भर्तरि वैक्लव्याक्लिन्दन्ति तदरिलियः ।
अजौरभुभिस्तासां क्लियन्ति नयनानि च ॥
ददास्यसौ धनं भूरि ब्राह्मणेभ्यो दिनेदिने ।
ददते ब्राह्मणास्तस्मै संतुष्टा नित्यमाशिषः॥
असौ स्वमायमानोऽपि कत्थते नात्मनो गुणान् ।
कथयन्ति जना एष तस्य तानदुतान् भुवि ।

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 111 वृश्चिकानां भुजङ्गानां दुर्जनानां च वेधसा विभज्य नियतं न्यस्तं विषं पुच्छे मुले हदि । ब्दनैश्चचिंतेत द्यौर्दिशः काशैरिव श्रिताः । क्षीण क्षालितेवो शर्वरीशे निराजति ।। यथामिषं जले मत्स्यैर्भक्ष्यते श्वापदैर्भुवि । आकाशे पक्षिभिश्चैव तथा सर्वत्र वित्तवान् ।। नकः स्वस्थानमासाद्य गजेन्द्रमपि कर्षति । स एव प्रच्युतः स्थानाच्छुनापि परिभूयते ॥ बुद्धिमान्पुरुषो जह्याद्भिनां नावमिवाम्भसि । अप्रवक्तारमानार्यमनधीयानमृत्विजम् ।।. जाड्यं धियो हरति सिञ्चति वाचि सत्यं मानोन्नतिं दिशति पापमपाकरोति । चेतःप्रसादयति दिक्षु तनोति कीर्ति सत्संगतिः कथय किं न करोति पुंसाम् ।। मानुषाणां प्रमाणं स्याद्भुक्तिर्वं दशवार्षिकी। विहंगानां तिरश्चां च यावदेव समाश्रयः॥ कृष्णसारे ददश्चक्षुस्त्वयि चाधिज्यकार्मुके। मुंगानुसारिणं साक्षात्पश्यामीव पिनाकिनम् ॥ नाधर्मश्चरितो लोके सद्यः फलति गौरिव । शनैरावर्तमानस्तु कर्तुर्मूलानि कृन्तति ॥ When Bharata was crowned, he gave culs [गो] to Brahinaņas by hundreds. Dirghatainas saw him giving (TE) them. In former [ पूर्व ] tiines, Brahmanas used (ute) cows' [गो] hesh and goats thesh. * Thus sts forth the periol of justion or t]ment necessary to cou. stitute ownerslup w the cast of men and the luxet ammals. + Said to King Dashyanta by lus clariteet whey he was pursuing an antelope.

·112 SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. . The Northern (7) people regarded slayery as inhuman and fought with the Southern (rarto root it out. Us’ams (79) was the preceptor of the Asuras and Bșihaspati of the Devas. There exist works of politics of which they are the reputed authbrs. They began to excavate the hill, and effected it after many days (instr.) The headman of the village (Tuft) was asked by the. commander whether lie would give grain to his army. The hut near Chitrakûța was built by the recluses Cort- *) that dwelt in the vicinity. Women [ft] shall bring up (take care of ) children, and men (galshall acquire money by hard labour. Dilipa's horse was once taken away by India (4760 or मघवन्.] In the beginning there were waters ( 37) only. On these waters appeared the self-existent (Far) Brahmâ, and by that self-existent being all these things were created. He is blind of one eye [f]. The boney in the flowers of the Kunda creeper has been drunk by bees (fr). Inlols are made of the bones (371€T) of clephantso He who walks by the path [afera] of truth attains prosperit. In Cirecce there were two hills which were called “duga! (17) beads." Thou art commanded by thy husband [fa] to give money to the poor. His companion [arca) having gone to Kâsâî, he lives herv alone The nane of Arvaman occurs in Zend religious books. Ciive me any one (77) of those books. Bráhmanns repenting the Vedas are like frogs (antal croaking in the rains.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 113 VOCABULARY XIV. O n. af . the eye. Jafa f. loftiness, mngnanimity; 957 17h. n. f. continuous, fre-f.. the earth. quent. JT m. name of the preceptor et adr.ceedingly, grent of the Asurar. ly, very much. ऋभुक्षिन् m. a name of Indra. अद्भुत in. n. f. wonderful. YTT m. I. liead, skull. (wish. BTT 1. n. f. pron. lower, low. 1916 1.7. t. one fulfilling any 3177 m. a wicked action. कार्मुक m a bow; with अधिज्य m. . f. one who has his bow TTT 1. an ox. E m. fire. strung. {flower. TTT in. a kind of white OFTE 1. wind. 389.1. water (v set in the plur.) SC , a family, with Tm.nf. pron. other, another. and 3751 371, o remove; with अधि, to ain at ; अधिकृत्य 3797, n. one who does not speak having rimel at, i.e., referor teach. [forefathers. ring to अर्थमन् a deity, one of the dead DOTETT M. an antelope. अवन् 1. a horse. fra tth conj. l'ar asm. to in or PTT 1. 11. f. pron. hinder, pos. become wet or dauip. terior, inferior. 1st conj. Parasm. to lamont. *754qwr. certainly,inevitirlly fre n. milk. El 1. n. 1. southern. JĘ Int conj. l'arenni. and 10th MRT 1. lilooil. c'09). to think wennly of, to THERE 11. blood. spurn. day. shq m. 11. flesh, bait. fir f. pwell. 1st соп). ilmi. Th.f. a blessing. to fthink आसन् n. the moutl:. incanly of, to spurn. 37TFT . the mouth. fī ml, a bull; j. it cow, speech, the rarth. WTEE m. a battle. (of u village fiz r, vigour (of limbs). orgofr m. the learler or hearman 1st conj. Parasm, and 1011 m. the moon. conj. cith to utter, to/ चस्वदति 1ta n. f. (git like a Spuak. wheel) one whose movement TTT n. n. f. pron, over, upper, is like that of a wheel, ever-re. after, subsequent. 7 n. sandalwood. (volving. 2017 m. n. f. northern. चरित piest part. yass. of चर, In. water, practised or done. अहम् . FERIE ·114 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. inanner. चर्चित past part. pass. of चर्च, | धुर f. a yoke. besmeared. 7 M. a crocodile. Coco m. a pariah, an outcast. 47 in. n. f. perishåble. A.S. a beautiful woman, Taf. the nose. belle. नियतम् adv. verilve n. the heart, intellect, Hafrath adv. thout interval, जन् with सम्, to be born, to closely. flourish. far oft m. a god. W n. dullness. fait m. n. f. wicked. oft f. a musical instrument, fast f. night. lute. पट 1st conj. Parasm. to repeat, frat.f. a wife of his enemy. to read. Tofte, m. (afata m. exclu- Tha ure. master, husband. sion) its exclusion or alfsenct. To m. a path, a way. 1th conj. Atm. 2011 FE, to TEM. the foot. he pained or afllicted. Tot m. the sun, a protector. . 1 loat. TT m. 12. f. pron. another, other. METL 11 1. f. like that, in that fruft past part. pass, of chart with off, abandoned. forta m. a lower animal; n. 11. afata n. a recluse. f. horizontal, sileways. foarta m. a name of S'iva. TIFTE, 11. it mame of Indra. jh . a man. frary f. light, splendour, bright. The f. a widow remarried.. TT.I. a town. O M. a tooth. gŪT TFT mn. a family priest. ***. part. of 77, to give. por mest part. pass. of q, filled, favor 11. 9. f. pron, southern. full. n. eurdled milk. पूर्व I. n. f. pron. former, easteini. Tutfor mn. son of Mas'aratha. 977. f. an army. [with 4. ff. a day, heaven. प्रच्युत rast part. of च्यु to fall Fem J. direction, quarter, TIETH m. 1. f. (481 f. sub- दुर्दम MIL. n. 1. difficult to be con jects, fica n. oppression, and trolled or put down. जन् arising), arising I f. sight, an ere. from the Operession of the CTR . 18. . worshipper of gods. subjects. Y n. 1. an Arm. प्रतिषिद्ध past part. pass. of सिष 1. Learen. irth aft, forbidden, pro- 1.6. intellect, hibited, Hess. ज from ·SECOND BOOK OF RAXBKRIT. 115 True M. 1. f. western. T 1st conj. Parasm, and 'Alm. rin.n.f. keen, acute, talented. with A, to shine. at past part. pass. of The Tam. a king; 12. 11.f. shining! mouth g, used. m. wealth. 9 m. n. f. Sastern. ParaTE M. (Ehre m. dwelling in m. a frog GEO n.'beauty, loveliness. together) dwelling together of af m. fire. beloved persons,-the company of beloved persons. FTTT m. n. f. wealthy. ag melt part. pass. of ETT, FF1st conj. Parasm. to bear pierced, struck, wounded. fruit. past part. pass. of Ferst m. a man of the mercantile भञ्ज Cate; f. subjects, people. broken down, run way (from the field). furgon the protector of all, God. with f, to divide. FIF. n. the protector or sup. TT . il serpent. porter of the universe, Tit. f. possession, enjoyment. 775 m. the creator, Bralımî. 7.1. the earth. तृत् आ, to tun round, to rith oft, to despise, to treat turn back. contemptuously. Winn eyebrow. Indra. TITET m. killer of TT, T, 1. a scorpion, 4872 in. it name of Indra. Afrin. it churning handle. 1799 n. gour, affliction. मधुलिह m. a black bee. वैयाकरण in. a grammarian. Hinn. ETTETUT N. Srammar, tlesh. HİR N. 77 m. n. a (art. Arif f. (777 m. respect) lof- 377.741. animal-lung unens of respect, great self- TEETH m. a conch-blower. 14 dr. slowly. respect. TA in. a month. PAST. TO f. the night) the COTT THIRT m. n. 1. following or lord of the night, the moon. poursuing an antelope. 1.1. wealth, goldess of wealth. 7 rith , to struggle. tot m. a doy. in. the god of death, the 4747 in. a beast of prey, a beast. deity presiding over death. are m. a friend, a companion, संख्यातीत m.n.J. (संख्या/. num. या with विand निस्, togo away, ber, era m. n. f. gone boyond) innumerable, 2 of m. & way. to pass away.

·116 SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. Fige past part. of TT with 1st conj. Parasm. and 2nd pleased, satisfied, gratified. conj. Parasm. with q, to hora mi. a custom, a tradi produce. tional observance. 2nd conj. Åtm. pwith 4, to Hafnaf f. (hafa f. this world, produce. worldly existence, taf f. a pit) 4th conj. Ath. with q, to the pit of this world or worldly produce. existence. [virtuous. I with FF, to bring in contact सत्संगति f. company of the with, to unite with. Frith 37 1st conj. Parasm. eft f. woman, wife. to approach, to.come to. Fam. n. summit. zu1th (in the causal) to F914 denom. Âtm. to be in a plese , to propitiate. dream, to speak in a dream. HiH odv. at once, immedfately. Firm. n. f. self-existent. FETE n. 1. f. good, c. 7. f. good... [peror. ETET n. smile, laughter. FATA M. a great king, an em. with उप and 3T 1st conj. l'a. FTETTCL aulv, in the presence of, rasm. and Atm. to bring, to in sight of take. rith उप. Acquire or 1st and 10th conj. | Grain T+ n. Inhuman मानवानह n. 2.1. निर. Beginning अग्र ॥. आदि m. नुकोशं कर्म. Blind spot m. n. f. Politics नीतिशास्त्र Bring up, oncal of वृक्ष, वर्धय Ruins वर्षा plur. Prith सम्, पोषणं or भरणं कृ. Religious book धर्मग्रन्थ . Build 3rd conj. rith fart Reputed for past part By hundreds Niry: mnd. Pass. प्रसिद्ध past part. कर्तृत्वे Call or rith syf; fufcalled. नाभिमतौ reputed as author Ist cong, Inith 371. (two). Dirghatamas दीर्घतमस् m. name Slavery TET 2. of a Rishi, [नितुम् inf. Excavate खन् with उद्; उत्ख• । Croak र Truth ऋत. LESSON XVII. NUMERALS. 1. The following is a list of the Sanskrit cardinal muinerals :- ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 117 द्रि One Two Three Four Five ११ एकादशन् १२ द्वादशन् १३, त्रयोदशन् १४ चतुर्दशन् २५ पञ्चदशन १६ षोडशन् १७ सप्तदशन् २८ अष्टादशन् (नवदशन एकोनविंशति Eleren Twelve Thirteen Fourteen Fifteen Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen ५ पञ्चन् • सप्तन् Seven ८ अष्टन् Eight Ninc Ten ९ नवन् १० दशन् } Nineteen २० विंशति Twenty. Up to नवदशन्, these Tumerals Inay be considered tus muljectives, i. e., they take the number and cne of the noun to which they are applied ; and the first four, the gender also. . विशति Twenty षष्टि Sixty विश Thirty सप्तति Seventy चत्वारिंशत् Forty अशीति Eighty पञ्चाशत् Fifty नवति Ninety These inay be considered as substantives. They are all fewivine ; the noun to which they alle applied may be of any gender. With a plural noun they are used in the singular, ils Frara: 'tienty Brálmanas.' They have duals and plurals like other nouns, but when these are used the construction is different ; atauirati fararsfj.' tuo twenties of Brâh- Imanas'; ब्राह्मणानां विंशतयः muiny twenties of Brahinanas'. The singular niay be used similarly ; ils murai faralar:'une trunty of Brahmanas'. 3. The numbers intermediate between any two of these are formed by prefixing एक, द्वि &c. up to नवन् to the lower ; but the ninth intermediato number is generally mulo up by prefixing of to the higher. In making these componnds the final न् is invariably dropped ; Fa becomes , fa, 74: and अष्टन्, अष्टा. But the three latter clhanges are optional in the case of चत्वाशिन्, पवान्, पष्टि, सप्तति, and नवति ; and do livt take place at all in the case of wafifa. These numerals ·118 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. sfranata Forty-three s file has the also follow the constructions explained in the preceding paragraph. a hundred' is a neuter noun. Norfra Thirty-one (द्विचत्वारिंशत् ३२द्वात्रिंशत् Thirty-two Lertaiftara forty-two 1 reforma Thirty-threo ३४ चतुर्विंशत् Thirty-four अयश्चत्वारिंशत् 16 Tur Thirty-five अष्टचत्वारिंशत Forty-eight teftar Thirty-six अष्टाचत्वारिंशत् ३७ सप्तत्रिशत् Thirty-seven fc. &c. १८ अष्टाविंशत् Thirty-eight ८२ द्वयशीति Eighty-twy SETT-TV, Thirty- निचत्वारिंशत् mine ८३ ज्यशीति Eighty-three DECLENSION. Masculine. 4. is declined like it 01111 ; its an indefinite pronouu in the sense of the Englisli one in " the great oues ont this country," It has the dual and the plural. dunl only, um in declining, is to be considered as wice, us a noun ending in 37. nom. ind acc., 44 instr., dat., and abl., 1t: gen. and love. # and the other adjectival numerals are declined in the plural only. fo follows the general declension of misuline muns ending'in f.' The genitive only in pueruliar, it is प्रयाणाम् The nom, of is IT: in the gen. and luc. quia ani The Best aro regular. After the other adjectival meals the nom. an acc. terminations are dropped, the finala is eliminated here as before the consonantul termotions, and the ot अन् is lengthened in the semile, il 9 nom. and acc., Taf: instr., 797: dat. and abl, TINI Sel., T9 lok. ; RE UI nom. and acr', : inser., Teat: dat. and abl., quolin gen., Figelow. w imany?' is similarly declined. is also declined in another way; sret nuit. and acc., Here the initial of this channel to the cornwalling lingual. For the rule is thu dhuinlo *?v nvi clangul cu linguals when there follow a consınaut of the lingual clax which is to the end of a word or gran matical form : as FE 77.. अ .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 119 fra anıl निमभ्यः and अष्टाभिः instr., अष्टाभ्यः dat. and abl., अष्टासु loc. There is no clifference in the genitive. Feminine. एका art द्वा are deelined like सर्वा. The feminine forms ofत्रि and चतुर are तिट and चतस. which are thus declined. nom. and acc', तिमभिः and चतसभिः instr., चतमभ्यः dat and abl, तिमणाम् andl चतसृणाम् gen., will face and चतरपु loc. The feminine forms of other adjectival numerals are not slistirent from the masculine. Neuter. एकम् Nom.ant Are. दि दे त्रि त्रीणि चत्वारि The neuter forms of other adjectival nuinerals are similar in the inasculine. 7. The ordinals corresponding to off, FIT and I । प्रथम, द्वितीय तृतीय, चतुर्थ, and Instead of प्रथम, अग्रिम ..lil आदिम, and of चतुर्थ. नुर्य and तुरीय are also lised. From che tier cardinal numerals up to 174 inclusive, they are formed by (oppmg the final and adling म, as पञ्चमः &c.; oiled after दशन् up to नवदशन्, by simply dropping न्, एकादशः &c. 8. The ordinals from farofa and the other substantival humerals, and froin their compounds, are forinod by adding तम; as विशतितमः, एकविंशतितमः, विशत्तमः, एकत्रिंशत्तमः &c. Anullier way is by dropping the नि of विशति, and the final consonant of the rest. Where there is a final vowel, that vowel is changed to w, but only in compound munerals, the simple ones forming their ordinals in the first way, as forai, एकविंशः, विशः, एकत्रिंशः, पष्टितमः, एकपष्टः एकषष्टितमः &c. शत hundred' has great. 9. The feminines of प्रथम, अग्रिम, आदिम, द्वितीय, तृतीय, तुर्य and tra, are formed by adding 871, and of the rest by changing the final w toई.as प्रथमा, द्वितीया &c., and चतुर्थी, पञ्चमी, एकविंशी. एकविंशतितमी &c. .. पष्ट a ·120 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . . तावन 10. The nom. plur. of प्रथम m. is प्रथमे or प्रथमाः, and the list., abl., gen, and loc. sings. of द्वितीय and तृतीय or द्वितीया cand airy are optionally like those of pronouns ending in भ आ, as द्वितीयस्मै or द्वितीयाय kc. 11. Adverbs of, definite frequency are formed from numerals by the auldition of peto fefe, and that, and to the rest, before which the final न् is dropped. For एक we line AI C. Ex fz: 'twice,' ft: Chrice,' an: ' fum- 1.1016,' पत्रकृत्वः पदकृत्वः &c. 12 The termination this applied to the TT, and andi यत् इदम् and किम्. in the sense of as much as.' The three former become 77 7m par, and the two latter x anil ft that much.' तावान mas novi sing पञ्चाशत ब्राह्मण यः प्रत्यहं कृष्णवर्मानं ददाति । गुरोः परिचर्या कुर्वतस्तस्य द्विचत्वारिंशदहानि व्यतीयुः। चतस्रो विद्याश्चतुष्पष्टिं कलाश्च चन्द्रापीडोऽशिक्षत । चत्वारि शृङ्गा बयोऽस्य पादा द्वे शीर्षे सप्त हस्तासोऽस्य। श्रावणस्य कृष्णपक्षेऽष्टम्यां तिथौ देवकी कृष्णं सुषुवे । त्रिः सप्तकृत्वः परशुरामः पृथिवीमक्षत्रियामकरोत् । सप्तदश सामिधेनीरनुबूयात् । ता एताः सप्त! न्वाह । तासां त्रिः प्रथमागन्वाह त्रिह- समां ता एकादश संपद्यन्ते । प्रयविशद्वै देवा अष्टौ वसव एकादश रुद्रा द्वादशादित्याः प्रजापतिश्च वषट्रारश्च । || शतमनूच्यमायुकामस्य' । शतायुर्वै पुरुष आयुष्येवेनं .om. plum. of Nxn +Som.pun at हरत : Tut-rnatal nt the auth kirtleol. It contain- a desi tion of the main! shun nt tin tangol. F The noministant of thiv 10 होना, interst.al Tiu refers to the repxat. .ng of the cretathy the loti at a cran Curemons. | At thereum ( प्रातरनुवाक which foomsia Igushtoms sacritice. a great many serve arr rrinted by the priests. T.. muulker of the determined in this For instance, firxt, he says. • If the critice dlesnt i lung life. re hundred Icre should be repeatel. liron follow #nasin fot ikis, and won. 4. This quslitic- यजमान or ncr:Herl. understori .. This refers to the यबमान. jart Jaante.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . 121 तद्दधाति । त्रीणि च शतानि च षष्टिश्चानूच्यानि यज्ञकामस्य । श्रीणि च वै.शतानि पष्टिश्च संवत्सरस्याहानि । तावान्संवत्सरः संवत्सरः प्रजापतिः प्रजापतिर्यक्षः । उपैनं यशो नमतिं यस्यैवं विद्वांस्त्रीणि शतानि च षष्टि चान्वाह । सप्त च शतानि विं- शतिश्चानूच्यापि प्रजापशुकामस्य । सप्त च वै शतानि विंशति- श्च संवत्सरस्याहोरात्राः। संविभाजयति श्रीमान् स वित्तेन द्विजोत्तमान् । धर्मपष्टांशभागेन तेऽपि संविभजन्ति तम् ॥ गर्भाप्टमेऽब्दे कुर्वीत ब्राह्मणस्योपनायनम् । गर्भादेकादशे राक्षो गर्भात्तु द्वादशे विशः॥. त्रिराचामेदपः पूर्व द्विः प्रमृज्यात्ततो मुखम् । . खानि चैव स्पृशेदद्भिरात्मानं शिर एव च ॥ जीवन्तोऽपि मृताः पञ्च व्यासेन परिकीर्तिताः । दरिद्रो व्याधितो मूर्खः प्रवासी नित्यसेवकः ॥ अनारम्भो हि कार्याणां प्रथमं बुद्धिलक्षणम् । प्रारब्धस्यान्तगमनं द्वितीयं बुद्धिलक्षणम् ।। नष्टे मृते प्रवजिते क्लीये च पतिते पतौः । 'पञ्चस्वापत्सु नारीणां पतिरन्यो विधीयते ॥ तिनः कोट्योऽर्धकोटी च यानि लोमानि मानवे । तावत्कालं वसेत्स्वर्ग भर्तारं यानुगच्छति ॥ . Du the 27th day of the inonth a couclave of Panditas wa- held. At that time ninety-nine men were examined, of wliom titty-four were found to be good gratutarians. The Panditas say that there are eighteen Puranas and twenty-four Sinritis. Originally there were three Vedas - Rigveda, Yajurveda, aud Sámaveda ; afterwards there came to be four. तद् is here equivalent to तस्माद * The nominative of this is the priest sich, undertown. : This is a deration from Pigium. See last Lesson, Art. 3. 11 . .

·122 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. There are now two principal branches or S'ákhas of Yajurveda. The Smriti of Manu is in twelve chapters, and in the seventh the duties of kings are enumerated. On the tenth of the bright half of Âs'vina, 'people in the Deccan give to cach other leaves of the S'ami tree, calling them gold. FO, All cnenies were killed by the five Pândavas. Rama cut off the fen heads of Rávana. He gained proficiency in the four learnings (lores), sis. Sastras, and sixty-four arts. I toll liim to depart three tinies, and when he did not do I gave him a kick.' The Hindus believe that there are eight guardians of the cight different quarters. Of the cighteen Parras of the Mahabharata, the third is the best, because it contains many pleasant stories. The doctor has directed ine to take this medicine fui* forty-two days. I have studied seventeen cantos of the Raghuvariis'a, seven of the Kumarasatibhava, nine dramatic plays, and cighty. six pages of Patanjali's Mahábláshya. of VOCABULARY XVII. अक्षत्रियm.n.f.destitute of क्षत्रिय आगुप्काम m. one wishing to SITTEN 1n. not legmning. live a long life. अनय्य pot. part. of वच rith अनु. ç with ofa, to pass away. to le recitul. 314 11. 1. f. last. STITUTT ". going to the end. 1. the coremony WHITE (TTC and ) he re- उपनायन the investiture with citer, repeats. उपनयन the sacred thread. ya m. year. 7.1. an art. अर्षकोटी./. (अर्थ. half, कोटी./. ari n. business, work. ten millions) five millions. कीर्तित with परि (from कृk 10th MITT M. day and night. conj. to tell) enumerated. * See note p. 18.

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 123 भज with and fa, m. the eighth incarnation, anfeta past part. of me with a, of Vishņu. exiled or turned a rocluse, कृष्णपक्ष m. the dark half of the| दिलक्षण n. (बुद्धि f. talent, लक्षण lunar monte. in a sign) a sign of talent. कृष्णवर्मन् m. a proper naine. सम् and A, to admit At m. n. neuter, impotent. to a share, to bestow upon. th the cavities of the human TK 10th conj. rmth सम् Lodly, as mouth, pose, &c. to admit to a slare, to bo. quiera m. 1. f. (of an. concepstow upon. tion, and th eightlı) eighth TR with'q, to wash. fion conception. THE 11. a hair, PTE 9. name of it prince. वषटार m. the ery वौषट् at the org lst conj. Parasm. with 34T, time of throwing an oblation to take in a little water into Mito the fire; this is considerthe mouth and drink it as a el a deity. religious ceremony. FATTIlearning, lore. TEAT adr. for so long a time. For m. n. f. knowing. Fit J. Inother of Krislina. i at m. the third order or caste PÁRTH m. one who is best among the lindus. among Brahmaņas. TO 1. n. . sick. vergisam m. one-sixth part TTH m. the reputed author of of religious merit as a slure. the Juhibhirata, a Rishi. ofera m. 1. f. sinful, apostate. शतायुम m. 1. f. living for a hun. Titth conj. Atm. with #%, to amount to 7 , a horn. oftaret.. service, attendance on. TETT . the fifth month of the Forfa n. the god Brahmâ. अनापशुकाम (प्रजा./.progeny, पशु । HARTT m, a year. maattle, and any m. wish, uno Art.l. a verse repeated at wishing for progeny and cattle. the tune of kindling the प्रवासिन् m. a traveller, sacred fire. L del years. Hindu years qarat. 11. Ås's ina mara m., name of a Canto मर्ग m. month. Conclave ममात्र Bright-half NETTI of the lunar month. Doctor for a m. m. Calling spfarrera pres, purt. of Dramatic play 763n. घा with अभि. Duty धर्म m. सभा./.

·124 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Enumerated faith a past part. Originally to loc. sing. of aru, pass. Forror past part.paes. आदौ loc. sing. of आदि. Found 9 ea past part, pass. Parvan gaa n. a section, a canto. Fryma past part. pass. Purang gamot n. ngre of a class Good Hirata m. n. f. fagur of works contain ng legendary m. n. f. accounts of pany things and Guardian of a quarter दिक्पाल m. of a religious and ritualistic Held (as a weeting) fafea past character. part. {a kick. Raghuvaji s'a Tyait m. naine of Kick लत्ता.1; लत्तया प्रहरति gives à poem by Kalidasa. Kumitrasnrnbhava कुमारसंभव m. Rigveda ऋग्वेद m. name of .. naine of a poem by Kalidasa. Veda. Lore fa f. Simaveda सामवेद m. name of Mahibhirata महाभारत no name Veda. of an ic poein celebrating 'Sami stift f. a kind of tree. the quarrels and wars be- Yajurveda Turan m. name of a tween the sons of Ping and Veda. Dhritarashtra. LESSON SVIII. CHARATIVE AND SUPERLATIT DCGREES OF ADJECTIVES, &c. 1. TR is it termination of the comparative degree and of the superlative Before these the ending vowel of it word or the ending consonant, if any, with the preceding vowel, is dropped; as og positive, Th comparative, fry superlative : 46 10.8., TETTE comp., &c. These terminations are applied to aljectives of quality and 100 to participles and other verbal derivatives as ar and 7 (mentionod below), re. 2. The æ occurring in the words ry, , , , and offers is elmuged to t; ils Ty pas., prefita comp., and प्रविष्ठ supp. 3. The final vllable (i. c. the last vowel with the preced- ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 125 near . ing consonant) of the words स्थूल, दर, हस्व, विष, and शुद्रand the portion वन् of युवन् are dropped, and the preceding vowel takes funa, as स्थूल 108 , स्थवीयस comp., and स्थविष्ठ sep. 4. The possessive termiptions to be presently mentioned are dropperp;as बलवत् 11/08., बलीयस cont., and बलिष्ठ sup. 5. The following is a list of the irregularities :- Positiim. Comparative Superlative. praiseworthy श्रेयस old ज्यायस् (ज्येष्ठ वर्षीयस् वर्षि. अन्तिक नेदीयस् नेदिह. बाद firin well साधीयम साधिष्ठ प्रिय dear प्रेयम् प्र. firm स्थेयस स्थेठ. thick, much म्फेयत् स्फेट. गुरु heavy गरीयम् गरिष्ठ. wide वरीयम् वरित. बहुल many, much बहीयम् बंहिष्ट दीर्घ long द्वाघीयस द्वाधिष्ठ भृयम् भूयिष्ठः इयवीयम् यविष्ठ युवन young कनीयस साविष्ट किनीयम् Small अल्पीयम् अल्पिष्ट. 6. The comparative ending in should be doclined in the inanucr shown in Lesson XXVII. First Book. Ito feminine is formed by the anldition of , and of the superlative by affixing आ; as कनीयसी, कनिष्ठा. 7. it is another comparative termination, the superlative corresponding to which is तमः These are applied not only to) adjectives but to nouns, particles and other incrclinables und verls. In the last case they take the forus me and तमाम् and also when addled to indeclinables, except in those instances in which, with the terminations, the indeclinables form wjectives. The words to which these suffixes are added undergo po change. many, much किनिष्ठ.

·126 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . Ex-लघु pos. लघुतरः, लघुतमः; पाचकतरः, पाचकतमः पचतितराम, पतितमाम् स्तराम्, उस्तमाम् उच्चस्तरः adj. उच्चस्तमः adj. 8. The feminine of adjectives ending in तर and तम is formed by.affixing आ. 9. Derivatives signifying the 'possessor' bf the thing expressed by the base are formed by affixing tha to substantives ; as frug' talented,' from eft'talent. 10. The म of this termination is changed to a when the base ends in a or 84 (short or long), or-has either for its penultimate; as a wealthy,' from 7 'wealth ;' far greu, यशस्वत, भास्वत्, किंवत्, लक्ष्मीवत्. There are a few exceptions, as यवमह, भूमिभत्, &c. 11. To substantives ending in of the suffix इन् is also added in this sense, before which the preceding 3r is dropped ; as दण्डिन्, धनिन् , &c. विन् is another termination having this sense. It is applied to some nouns. 12. श m. n.f. and दश m.n (शी/) are appended to pronouns in the sense of 'likc.' The final letter of the base is dropped and आ added to it; as ताश ' like that,' त्वास • like thee.' इदम् and फिम् become t and की; as ईश. 13. The verbal or other forms of कृ, भू, or sometimes अस are added 10 a noun or an indeclinable to express the doing or being like the thing denoted by the base. 14 The ending sy or 37 is changed to &, except in the case of an indeclinable. 1. The preceding < or g is rendered long, and c. # is changed to H. d. Final 1 and tht A of मनस्, अरुस्, चचस्, चेतम् रहस् and रजस् are dropped. Er-धनीकरोति. धनीभवति, गङ्गीभवति. प्रत्यक्षीकरोति, स्वीकृतम् n. शुचीभूतम् ॥., पदभवनम् ।., मात्रीकरोति, दिवाभूता. ऋग्वेदात्सामवेदस्य महिमा भूयान् । यशवर्मायोध्यां गच्छन्नम्वनोऽर्धाद्भूयोऽतिक्रम्याथाम्यत् । कृष्णस्य सुभद्रा यवीयसी स्वसा। सर्वेषु कुसुमेषु शिरीषकुसुमं प्रदिष्टम् ।

·BACOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 127 निम्श्रेयसाय कर्मपथावानमार्गः साधीयान् । श्रेष्ठस्तु सर्वेषां भक्तिमार्ग। परमात्माणोरप्यणीयान्महतोपि महीयान्वर्तते । धार्तराष्ट्रन्यः पाण्डवाः कृष्णसाहाय्याबलीयांसः किं तु तेषां योधसमाजो गरीयान् । दुःखितस्य वृत्तान्तश्रवणेनाद्रीभवन्ति हृदयान्यनुकम्पिनां म- हात्मनाम्। यो यज्ञकर्माणि यथाविधि करोति स प्रजावान्पशुमास्तेज. स्वी ब्रह्मवर्चसी यशस्वांश्च भवति । विष्णुशर्मण एकपञ्चाशत्पुत्रा आसन् । तेषां ये मभ्यमाहेषद- ताज्यायांसः पञ्चविंशतिस्ते कनीयोभिः पञ्चविंशत्या कलहं सर्वासु नदीषु भागीरथी द्राधिष्ठा विस्तारे वरिष्ठा च । तस्याः सलिलं यमुनायाः शुचितरम् । पर्वतेषु हिमालयः प्रथिष्ठः । अहो दीप्तिमतोऽपि विश्वसनीयतास्य राज्ञो वपुषः । ईदृशी मे मन्दभाग्यता यन्त्र केवलं भर्तुविरहो दारकयोरपि । हा सौम्य हनूमन्क्क पुनस्त्वादशस्य साधोर्महोपकारिणः सं- भवोऽस्मि अंगति। नैतद्विभः कतरन्नो गरीयो यद्वा जयेम यदि वा नो जयेयुः। नेयं मे जटा किं तु वेणीकृतः कचानां कलाप इत्यत्रवीत्का- चित्ली। दासीभूतां सर्पाणां जनन्याः सेवां कुर्वती स्वमातरं बन्धनान्मु- मोच गरुडः। तपश्चरन्रावणः स्वीयानि नव शिरांसि शिवायोपायनीचका- रेति शृणुमः। प्रियतमस्य पुण्डरीकस्य मरणेन सशोकया महाश्वेतया तिर- स्कता विषया दूरीकृतो बान्धवजनोऽकीकृतमरण्येऽवसानम् । एकः पुरुषः प्रियतमायाः प्रासादस्योपरितनी भूमि प्रवेष्टुमि- छुर्वातायनादधोवलम्बमानमहिं रज्जूकत्यारोह ।

·138 SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. उपरते भर्तरि यत्प्राणाः परित्यज्यन्ते तन्मौर्ण्यम् । उत्तरा विराटदुहिता बालिका विनयवति धीमति विक्रान्ते च पञ्चत्व- मभिमन्यावुपगतेऽपिप्राणान्न नहौ।अन्या अपि सहस्रशः कन्यका अभर्तृमत्यो जाताः सत्यो जीवितानि न तत्यजुरिति श्रूयते । जीवनाय मनुजन्मनामिह भ्राम्यतामथ कदामि स प्रभुः। त्वाशो भवति भाग्ययोगतो वेत्ति यः सदसतां यदन्तरम् ॥ ~ Kausalya was the eldest [%] of the three wives of Dasaratha, and Kaikeyi the youngest [ युवन् ]. Sita's bodily form was more slender [तनु than Draupadi's. That the greater [बहु] is equal to the less [लघु] is absurd. In running, the horse is the swiftest [आशु] of all aniinals. The virtuous [ सहूँण, पुण्य ] are happy [ मुख ] and deserve respect. Rukmiņi was dearer [fero] to Krishna than Satyabhama. When one's luck is bail, even his relations become (as if they were) his enemies [विपक्ष). What is the called who has wealth [वसु], or fortitude [धैर्य], or fame [यशस्, कीर्ति], ol land [भूमि ] ? " All should become as of one mind [एकचित्त ] and hating taken this net should fy off. Indra was the mightiest [ओजस्विन्] and most powerful (num) of all the gouls, and therefore they crowned him kinys The sense of the original passage is rendered (as iſ) clear [विशद ] by a commentator, and sometimes mystified [ Jट]. Damayanti was the most beautiful [ सुन्दर, चारु ] of all the women of the time, and the most devoted [भक्त, अनुरक्त ] to her lusbaud.+ Thy lieart has at this moment melted (become as if a liquiil) [इव'] through affection. The bullocks that are fastened to the yokes of carriages are fatter [पीवर] than common ones. • The student should answer thuis question, +l.in. or then.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 129 O Sita, there is not another woman like thee [r), so pure, so simple, and so loving (ECHT, gure), and not another, man like me [], so ruthless gind so cruel. VOCABULARY XVIII. stoy m. n. f. little; m. an atom, T5 m. an cagle, the bird of i sinull particle. that spacie's used by Vislipu STF iml. below, down. as his car. MET 1. a road. TCT. I. matted liais. अनुकम्पिन् m. ».f.compassionate. 77, n. livelihood. state 1. difference. fra ". life. arty n. son of Arjuna. Thro n. (a .. wowledge, WTA N. 11. a sore or wouni. Apofm.'a way) the knowledge YEMETHIT WH. F. hanging. of God is a way to eternal WTUTT', residence. bliss. ft m. a snuke. ETTE. IN. it inale child, son. STA m. 1. f. wet. A. pendour. m. . f. wishin, wisher m. 11. f. firmi, twin. JITIT 1. laughter of a king FA TA . twa bwaltunde. nam. Virita. परिट m. a master, unter. 39f7 in. n. t. what is above. gre. 11. a propues name, & TTT 11.present. lotus flower. 7TH m. 1. f. of one min. ny m. il. J. large, urat. m. the hair, Tr71.16straint, imprisonment. कर्मपथ m. 'कर्मन् action, andl पथिन् बालिका.. u girl. a way) way of action, i.-. fra m. 1. f. illumined by the performance of religious the Verlas, possessing tho ceremonies &c. as it was to splendou conferred by the eternal bliss. practice of the Verlic rites. CT m. a quarrel. Fantos 11. (! love, devo- N m. a bundle, a collection. tion, and then way) ** 1. n. l. weak athu. devotion to or loge of Ciod us TOUTET n. lielp of Krishna. a way to eternal bliss. *** 1st conj. Parasm. with Trap in. (77T 1. luck, good wa, to cross, to go over, to fortune, it in. accession) transgress. the accession of good luck or m. N. f. small, mean, fortune. ne.

·130 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. nian, m. n. f. much, mighty. ET M. n. f. small. AETH m. n. f. middle; n. waist. a n. the body. #T#1 m. (m. one of the first in. n. f. codrageous, posprogenitors of men) one born psessing prowess. of Manu, á human being, a fêtre firestat f. capacity to inspire confidence. मन्दभाग्यता 1. (मन्द dull, भाग्य विषय m. objects giving sensual fortune, #TATTy one who is pleasure. unfortunate) misfortune. facosari an, a proper name. HE7*** f. name of the daughter fattatt m. extent. of a Gandharva. टत्तान्तश्रवण ॥. त्तान्त m. history, महोपकारिन् m. 17. f. very benevoaccount, STETUT 1. hearingt lent. hearing of history or account. Area n. folly. atror at offf. braided bair. यशवर्मन् m. propier name. forfra 1. a kind of flower. Tufaf allr. according to the tra m. 11. f. pure. rules laid down in ceremonial 9 m. possibility, probability: works. CHCE, M. n. f. good and bad. TUTT /. name of a river. af u, water. TT M. A yoke. FETTF m. n. 1. (with, T m. TEHT ». (T m. a warı ior, soriow) aftlicted with sorrow. FUTR I. a multitude) a mul. FEET: adr. by thousands. titude of warriors, in ariny. THAT f. wife of Arjuna. TFs.f a rope. FAT f. service. The With 39, 1st conj. Parasm. HTFT m. n. f. gentle. to die. 674 m. naine of a monkey. TA". secrecy, solitariness, a devotee of Rima. secret; aulr. secretly, solitarily. ( F. 1. f. short. Absurt अपुक्त past part. अनुप- | Kaikevi कैकेयी ... name of one q past part. of the wives of Das'arutha. Bad प्रतिकूल m. n. S. Kausalya HIT f. name of one Bolily form तनु/वपुस।.आकृति.. of the wires of Das'aratha. Commentator टीकाकार m. टीका- Moment क्षण m. [m. i. f. Net HTC n. Cunmou FT ITO. 1.f.amiru Pure farasites in. The f. Crpel दृशंस m. n.. Relation बन्धु m. बन्धुजन . Idened faryo pasl pass. part.; शाति. [Kinhna. oft farge. Rukuiņi front f. wife of ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 131 Running विश्वण n. Rnthless निर्पण 17. n. f. Satyabhimi सत्यभामा... name of one of the wives of Krishnd. Sense अर्थ m. Simple ऋजु m. m. f. आर्जवयुक्त m. n. 1. m. 11. F. LESSON XIX. COMPOUNDS. . 2: (1. Drandra (Copulistire) and Tatpuruslu (Determinative). I. 1. In Sanskrit one simple noun* my be compoundul with another, and this compound with a third or another compound; or several nouns may be compounded together simultaneously. In this manner we may have a sompound consisting of any number of simple worils. According to the sense or manner in which nouns are thus put together oumpounds are divided into several classes. A compound of the class called Dvanilva consists of nouns which, if not compounded, would be joined by the copulntive, particle; a- रामश्च कृष्णच रामकृष्णौ रामश्च लक्ष्मणश भरतत्र शवनश-रामल- क्मणभरतशत्रना When the compound cousists of two nouns, each being understood to be singular, it takes the dual; and the plural, wben it contains more than two nouns. der of the final mu'm is the gender of the whole; as कुकुटमर योविमे, मपरीकछुटाविमौ. c. A Dvandva compound is singular and neuter when it implies an aggregate or when the things enumerated constitute one complex ilca, as WTET Part. This may be called the collective species of Dvandva When a compound consists of words siguifying insects, limbs . Laky a substantįre, aljective, or an indeclinable word(07744). told by no means be supposed that any noun may be compounded her in any sense. The fanskrit idiom allows of certain compounds others. Ignorant persons not knowing this pat fort is by no means so. Maay minute rules have been given ans, somehof which are reproduced in the text. Practically Bet anthors is the safest guide. Ü The genon the ·132 BECOND BOOK OF BANSKER. of the body of an animal, parts of an army, objects between which there is a natural antipathy, or of common names not Klenoting an aniinal, it is always of this nature ; as autor, पाणिपादम्, रथिका थारोहम्, अहिनकुलम्, धानाशष्कृलि. In other cases this construction depends on the will of thy speaker. 3. A word ending in # anrl implying blood-relationship or some kind of learning, changes this vowel to 3 when fol. lowed by another word ending in or by jt, as claritate मातापितरौ, पितापुत्री 4. When a collective Dvandva compound ends in a letto , of the palatal class, or y, q, ore the vowel is added on to it; as वाक्स्वचम्, त्वक्सनम्, शमीटषदम्, वाक्त्विषम्, छत्रोपानहम्. When it is not collective the 8p is'not added, as injure careet: II. 1. A compound of the Tatpurusha Class consists of two members, the first of which determines the sense of the other,* or is attributive to it. The attributive member may have the meaning of a casc, or may be used in apposition to the other, and consist, in this latter case, of an adjective or a substantive. The former we will call an inflectional compound, and the latter an appositional (named Karmadháraya in Sanskļit Grammai»), as 17:24:=Taya: (inflectional), 'गम्भीरो नादः गम्भीरनादः (app.), पुरुषो व्याघ्र इव-पुरुषव्याघ्रः (pp) 2. Thure are sia varieties of the first species, corresponding to the six oblique cases :- (1) A noun in the accusative case is compounded with fork, अतीत, पतित, गत, अत्यस्त, प्राप्त, आपन; as कृष्णं श्रितः कृष्णश्रित, दुःखमापन -दुःखापन, स्वर्ग गतः स्वर्गगतः (3) When the accusative expresses the duration of a continu. ous action or state, it is compounded with another indicative of that action or state ; मुर्त सुखम् मुहूर्तसुखम्. bio A noun in the instrumental is compounded with expressive of the effect, (3) and with the words & or words having the sense of 7 and with and (3) It is also sometimes compounded with ver or • In a few cases the attributive member is placed after ·BOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 133 C. when the instrumental has the sense of the agent or instrument of the action. (4) When it signifies an article used to season food it is com. pounded with the following word if that word siguifios a kind of fool. Examples.-(1) झालया खण्ड: शकुलाखण्डः-(2) मासेन पूर्व:- मासपूर्वःमात्रा सदृश:-मातृसरशः वाचा कलहः वाकलह: 50.-(हरिणा वात. हरित्रातः, नवैर्भिन्नः-नखभिन्नः &c.-1) दनौदनः-दथ्योदन: &er A noun in the dative is coinpounded with another (1) ex. gressive of the material of which the thing expenssed by the first noun is made ; as युपाय दारु-यूपदार. (2) is also compounded with अर्थ, बलि, हित, Anil रक्षित, The compound with अर्थ is an adjective and takes the number and gender of the noun it qualifies ; as द्विजायायम् --द्विजार्थ ओदनः, द्विजायेयम् -द्विजार्थी यवागः, विजायेदम- द्विमार्थ पय., भूतेभ्यो बलिः भूतबलिः, गवे हितम्-गोहितम्, गवे रहितम गोरचितम्. d. A noun in the ablative may be compounded with भय, भीम भीतिand भी,and sometimes with अपेत, अपोट, मुक्त, पतित and अपला- चोराद्भयम्-चोरभयम् सुखादपेतः सुखापेतः चान्मुक्तः स्वर्गात्पतित स्वर्गपतितः. e. (1) A noun in the genitive may be compounded. with any other 'noun, as राशः पुरुषः-राजपुरुष But there are many exceptions. It is not compoundled with verbal derivatives ending in * and and denoting the agent , अपां मष्टा, ओदनस्य पाचकः, घटस्य कर्ता, not अप्नाटा, ओदनपाचकः, or घटकर्ता. There are a few counter-exceptions, as देवपूजकः, बाबणयाजक: &c. Such genitives again as the following are not compounded:- Top द्विजः श्रेष्ठ, सतां पठः, आश्चर्यो गवां दोहोज्गोपेन &c. , अपर, अवर, and उत्तर are compoundel with nouns in tbe and are placel first. Siinilarly a word espressive of mpounded with the noun in the genitive can expressivo placed first. Iu both cases the noun in the genitive the whole, of which & part is expressed by the कायसापूर्वकायः, परमं राकेचरमरात्रः, मध्यमा .

·136 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. अस्मिन्कलौ खलोत्सृष्टदुष्टवाग्बाणदारुणे। कथं जीवेजगन्न स्युः संनाहा: सजना यदि . ज्याध्ययनदानानि तपः सत्यं धृतिः क्षमा । अलोभ इति मार्योऽयं धर्मस्याष्टविधः स्मृतः रोगशोकपरीतापबन्धनव्यसनानि च । *आत्मापराधवृक्षाणां फलान्येतानि देहिनाम् ।। सुखदुः :खे समे कृत्वा लाभालाभौ जयाजयौ । ततो युद्धाय युज्यस्व नैवं पापमवाप्स्यसि ॥ धर्मार्थकाममीक्षाणां यस्यैकोऽपि न विद्यते । अजागलस्तनस्येव तस्य जन्म निरर्थकम् ॥ यदेतदनुमरणं नाम तंदर्तनिष्फलम् । अविद्वजनाचरित एष मार्गो मोहविलसितमेतदज्ञानपद्धतिरियं रभसाचरितमिदं क्षुद्रह ष्टिरेषातिप्रमादोऽयं मौर्ण्यस्खलितमिदं यदुपरते पितरि भ्रातरि सुहदि भर्तरि वा प्राणाः परित्यज्यन्ते। स्वयं चेत्र जहति न परि- त्याज्याः। अत्र हि विचार्यमाणे स्वार्थ एव प्राणपरित्यागोऽयमस- घशोकवेदनाप्रतीकारत्वादात्मनः। उपरतस्य तु न कमपि गुणमा- वहति । न तावत्तस्यायं प्रत्युजीवनोपायो न धर्मोपचयकारणं न शुभलोकोपार्जनहेतुर्न निरयपातप्रतीकारोनदर्शनोपायोनपरस्प- रसमागममिमित्तम्। अन्यामेव स्वकर्मफलपरिपाकोपचितामसा- अवशो नीयते भूमिमसावप्यात्मघातिनः केवलमेनसा संयुज्यते। The master teaches 11s eight times in a fortnight The priests perform an Agnishtoma sacrifice in sir duys. The glory of Râma's exploits was sung in the scren silings and seren Jaîtálas. • Wint ending m consumante when nor the last member of a cim. jumu are extated as before the collantal case-terminations; THE अपराध= आत्म + अपराध-आत्मापराध, विद्वम् + रन=विद्वदल. † Spoken by Krishan to .Arjuna who hml expressed his unwillingness to fight. The student shoukl use Sanskrit compounds for the words printed in? italics ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 137 thatriy The duties of Brahmanas, Khatriyas, Vais'yan, and hidros are mentioned in the Smritis of Manu, Yajnawilliye, and Asitu. Rima and Sugrira nlade an alliauce for mutual assistance. Raghu, wip took with him his great army going touurils the existern seled appeared like Bhagiratha, who led Carga tillen from the patted luir of Siru. Traversing the eastern countries in the manner, the conqicror reaclicd the coast of the great * ocean (which appcar- ...) ark on account of the forests of Tilê trees. Having rooted on the Vangas (who were) haughty on onemost of their fleet of ships, he crected privmphal. (of trivmph) columns in the region between the branches (1) O the Gungu. The king of the Kalinyas received him with missiles, as ile mountains received Indra, propereil to cut (their) wings, with stunes. The conqueror took away the wcalth and not the land of che lord of Malendru (wlio was) tirst ulptured and then alice el. The sea, though prestul afar by the alırow of. Parem'ierima, appareil as if touching the mountain Salıyı on nccount of his extensive army (which joined the two). VOCABULARY XIX. fuera n. a kind of sacrifice. of widlows burning them. FTT M. 11. burning charcoal. Hilies with the dead boilies SALI. U she-goat. of their husbands fafarer, M. 16. 1. very fruitless. TCH contentnient, absence afgera m. a great error, great of greed, carelessness. 979 m. 91. 1. bring il the power HUT n. following in death, of another, dejx'ndent, help ur dying after, as in the case less. TOTYY m. loss. * HET becomes heel when it forms the first member of an appositional Tatpuruska or Bahurrihi.

·138 SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. tore let WHO m. n. f. pot. part. of gyra . becoming mature, with 3, insufferable. maturity. wraft.m. n. f. followed, prac-fttaa n. pain, affiction, tised ; 17. practice, act. TTT m. falling, falle 491for 'on. 1. f. pne who want m. help against an conimits suicide. प्रतीकार evil, a remedy. उस्मृष्ट Past Part. Pass. of सृज प्रत्युज्जीवन n. restoring to life with Ta go, discharged again, revival. UTTO, m. name of a person. TUTA M. n. f. (past part. of 1 5997 m. store, storing, gather with g), disappeared (as dark. ing. ness) and appeared (as light;;. उपचित past (488. part. of चि 1. day break. with 39, collected. [ceased. I n, a root, basis. 3957 m. n. 5. dead, deceased, He m.•foolishness, infatuation. TTF n. sm. TITA m. lastiness, rashness. Foto 1. what is to be done, a ITT . disease, sickness. work to he got through, a duty. लघुलघु adv. early. mm. the Kali nge, i. eo, T7 m. acquisition, gain. the FT: m. plural, the name of a nge in which the world at people or their country: present'is, being the last and the most sinful of the four ag Ist conj. Parasm. and Åtm. with 3T, to bring. ages. e m. tho throat. are m. n. a day. faTIATIT (pres. part. of the go m. efficacy, advantage. pass. of the caus, of zy to go m. n. last. with a being thought or ur m. victory, triumph. considered. देहिन् mm. 1. f. embodied, having facft n. a wanton pastime. body; . # man, the soul. at f. agony. fra m. hell. farroa 1. 9. f. useless, vain. FTE m. an armour. FTT 1. world. Tata f. a way, a mode. Fafca n. a slip, a mistake. faisa on. ». f. pot. part. af Fita n. the female breast, the fra rith nft, deserving to be FF m. a column. abandonal. Fantay n. one's duty. (nipple.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT, 139 Pitala पाताल 11. Alliance संधि m. सख्या. n. the nether Issistance साहाय्य region. Captured गृहीत past part. pass. Preparel उचत past part. of यम्' of ग्रह with उद् अद्भुतचरित 1. Column स्तम्भm. Pushed gfar दूरोत्सारित. उत्सारित Conqueror विजिगीषु m. past prert. pass of the caus. of Cutting छेद . मृith उद्. Dark श्याम m. n.... [m. ... Region between अन्तर n. अन्त. Fastern पूर्व m..1.pron. प्राच्य Exploit पराक्रम m. Released मुक्त ast yeart. pass. of .Fleet of ships #TATTA n. Tanghty Jen past.part. Stream स्रोतस् ॥. Tord नाथ ॥ Tili ताली... n kintl of palm tree. Mahendra महेन्द्र m. name of aTouching लग्न m. n.J.. mountain and the adjacent Traverse 1st and Ith conj. country. with 371 Purcl8m. Ot.in अर्णव . Wing To Me LESSON XX. BUILTRIHI AND AVYSTUHLAVA (MPOL'SPIS. 1.' 1. Tu'o or more nouns in apposition to each other with the attributive member placod first may be compounded and liseu as an avljective to qualify a substantive. The substaninte inust not be in apposition to theseparate inembers of the compound. A compound of this nature is called Baluribi; महाबाहुः, पीताम्बरः. As a Karunadhāraya, महाबाहुः is luiva- Jent to Heart: 'great arm;' but as a Bahuvrihi, it stands for महान्बाहुर्यस्य, 'he whose arrm is great, ie , 'great-arrned, - also Art: 'he whose garment is yellow.' महान्याहूर्यस्य सः-महाबाहुनल:. Here बाटु or महत् does not stand in apposition to fos, but the coinpound many: dve, as it quali. In घनश्यामो मलः, श्यामः is in aprrosition with fore compound is not a Bahuvrihi. That, therefore, is a Ba. huirthit in the dissolution of which the ta is in an oblique case; पाप्तबार सम्प्राप्तोरको ग्रामः-बयो नयो यस्मिन्बहुनदीको देश: : fics नल, where- ·140 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 2.' Somctimes the first member of a Bahuvrihi is not in apposition to the second ; as चक्रमाणिः-चक्रं पाणौ रस्य ‘he in whose hånds there is a wheel' 3. When comparison is involted, the first member may have the sense of the genitive; as qua:, equivalent to चन्द्रम्येव कान्तिर्यम्य. As a Tatputifusha it means simply चन्द्रम्य कान्तिः. 4. The negativ('jurticle 37 or st7 or a preposition somctimes furuns a Baluuvali compound with a substantive; as अविधमानः पुत्रो यम्य स: अपुत्रः, निर्गता घृणा यस्य सः=निघृणः (see 10 below), विगतं जीवितं यस्य स:= विजीवितः, उद्ता कन्धरा यस्य सः उत्कन्धरः ६८. अविद्यमानपुत्रः, निर्गतघृणः &c are also admissible by the general rule. 5. A compound of words denoting the carlinal points belongs to this class, and signifies the point or direction between those points, ils Et CAT 101tl-east.' A noun signifying El direction, which we uncompounded is declined like a pronoun.js optionally su declined when thus compounded. A compound of A or with a substantive when used als illi adjective is a Bilmviki.its : HELT UTH TO: . 7. An adjectival compound of a numeral or an indeclinable, or of आसन्न, अदूर, or अधिक, with a num mera), is a'Bahuvili. In this case, the final vowel, or the final consonant with the preceding vowel, of the latter' numeral, and saft of forutn are dropped and the termination 37 is added. Ex. form two or three,' fant: 'twice ten,' 54**: about ten,' i.c., nine or eleven,' sam: 'nearly twenty,' serrat: 'not far from thirty' uqram: inore than forty. But w when preceded by 79 and fy does not drop any letter, but s is simply added to it; as 73 about four,' fraget: tlıree or four.' 8. When the last world of a Balurili ends in E, or is a feminine nou ending in for , the termination is added on to it; as परः कर्ता यस्य तव परकई जगद; मीयो गस्मिन्साबाहुनदीको देशः, रूपवद्धएक: This ruth is not applicable when the feminine nouu is such as is capable of taking 0. 017 & ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 141 , पपगन्धि &c. :. or r for its final before the vowe case-terminations. सी is a counter-exception. 9. If Bahurrihi ends in अक्षि or धनुम्, these words assume the forms of अध and धन्वन् ; as कमला: lotus-eyed, अधिग्यधन्वा ne whose bow is strung.' .b. If it ends in गन्ध, this word becomes गन्धि, whon उद्. पूति, सु. or सुरभि precedes, or when the compound involves comparison ; as उन्धि, मुगन्धि c. Similarly to becomes sont wheh preceded by a single word. d. When the cryling word does not undergo such changes and additions, is optionally aftixed ww all compounds of this class except thosco formed by rules 5-7: अध्ययननिमित्तको मे वासोऽस्मिन्यामे. 10. The final vowel of a Balgrilui compound, if its last member is où or a feminine noun ending, in 35, is shortened, when no क is added; as चित्रा गावो यम्य सः-चित्रगुः, लक्ष्मीर्भार्या यम्य सः-लक्ष्मीभार्यः. The आ in optionally shortened when क traffixed, as लक्ष्मीभार्याक लक्ष्मीभार्यक: II. I. Adverbial compounds (37577A) are formed by joitting together an inderlmable. (in preposition or an adverb) and a noun. a. Allierbs are to be considereil us neuter ircusative singulars. 1. Adverbial compounds (mling in 3 take sometimes the termination of the instruinental or locative singular. c. A final long vowel becomes short (see 10, p. 135). d. The ending 7 is dropped, but optionally when the final substantive of the corupound is ncuter. Er. अधिहरि in Hari,' अनुविष्णु 'after Vishnu,' i. e., following Vishnu,' उपगङ्गम् near the Garigin,' अनुगमम् 'along with or by the side of the Gaiga,' यथाशक्ति 'according to one's abilities,' अध्यात्मम् 'on or in the soul,' प्रत्यहम् or प्रत्यह 'every day,' सतृणम् 'together with grass.' These are thus ordinarily dissolved:- हराविति-अधिहरि । विष्णोः पश्रा --अनुविष्णु । गमायाः समीपम् उपगम् । गङ्गामन्वायतम्-अनुगाम् । शक्तिमनतिक्रम्य- यथाशचि । आत्मनीति-अध्यात्मम् । अहन्यहनीति:-प्रत्यहम् or प्रत्यह पमप्यपरि. स्यग्यमानम्। भाषांचा यद्यदिष्टं तत्तदधिज्यधन्वनस्तस्य भूपतेर्नानासाचं किंचिदाजीत् । ..

·142 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. प्रतिदिनं त्र्यम्बकं यथाविधि पूजयामि यावदवकाशं ग्रन्था- नवलोकयाम्यामध्याहसमयमक्षमालां गृहीत्वा जपामि । त्रिचतुराण्यहान्यस्मिन्मे गृहे वस्तुं त्वमर्हसियावत्तवार्थसिदि करोमि। आसन्नपञ्चाशा गा ब्राह्मणेभ्योऽददाद्यक्षवर्मा श्रावणस्य प्रथ- मे सोमवासरे। चिरप्रवृत्त एष मृतस्य पुनर्जीवप्रदाने पन्थाः।तथाहि । विश्वा- वसुना गन्धर्वराजेन मेनकायामुत्पन्नां प्रमद्वरां नाम कन्यामाः शीविषविलुप्तजीवितां स्थूलकेशाश्रमे भार्गवस्य नप्ता प्रमृतितनयो मुनिकुमारको रुरुर्नाम स्वामुषोऽर्धन योजितवान् । अर्जुन चाश्वमेधतुरगानुसारिणमात्मजेन बभ्रुवाहननामा समरशिरसि शरापहृतप्राणमुलूपी नाम नागकन्यका सोच्छा. समकरोत् । अभिमन्युतनयं च परिक्षितमश्वत्थामास्त्रपावकपरिप्लुष्टमुदरा दुपरतमेव निर्गतमुत्तराप्रलापोपजनितकृपो भगवान्वासुदेवो दु. र्लभानसून्प्रापितवान् । * यान्येव सुरभिकुसुमधूपानुलेपनादीनिचन्द्रापीड्समागमसुः खोपभोगायानीतानि तैरेव मृतेतस्मिन्देवतोचितामपचितिं संपा- घ चन्द्रापीडमूर्ती मूर्तिमतीव शोकवृत्तिरार्तरूपा रूपान्तरमिव तत्क्षणेनैवोपगता गतजीवितेव शून्यमुखी मुखावलोकिनी चन्द्रा पीडस्य पीडोत्पीडितहृदयापि रक्षन्ती बाष्पमोक्षमुद्दामवृत्तेः शो- कादपि मरणादपि च कष्टतमामवस्थामनुभवन्ती तथैवाङ्के स. मारोपितचन्द्रापीडचरणद्वया दूरागमनखिन्नेनापि बुभुक्षितेना- प्यप्रतिपन्नस्नानपानभोजनेन मुक्तात्मना राजपुत्रलोकेन स्वपरि- अनेन च राह निराहारा कादम्बरी तं दिवसमनयत् । • This refers to Kadambari. a thumse rha gues to a certain appointest place to moct her lover (handràpida but finds him dead. Hopies have bee"? held out to her by some supernatural power of iker lord's revival, and it has been directal to preserre his waly.

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 143 - सञ्जन्ति कुञ्जरघटाः खलु तत्प्रवीण तं संततं युधि परिष्वजते जयश्रीः। चेतः समासजति तस्य गुणानुरागा- द्विद्याकिशुद्धहृदये विदुषां समूहे ॥ यं न स्पृशन्त्येनमचिन्त्यतत्त्वं दुरन्तधामानमनन्तरूपम् । मनोवचोवृत्तंय आत्मभाजां स एव पूज्यः परमः शिवो नः।। अयं निजः परो वेति गणना लघुचेतसाम् । उदारचरितानां तु वसुधैव कुटुम्बकम् ।। दंष्ट्राभङ्गं मृगाणामधिपतय इव व्यक्तमानावलेपाः । नाशाभङ्गं सहन्ते नृवर नृपतयस्त्वादृशाः सार्वभौमाः॥ 1 stw jire or six 111e'n, inore than fifty-fivc cous, and 1.Inol youty dogs ou the road. This is the king of the Argas, whose love has beril sought iyaolestial dansels. In doim tlu goddesses Srian Sarasvati, whose abudes by nature aredifferent, live together. The king, who luard the account of Whúsrplå, was not able to say a word, oletcoine with grief. This is a king of the name of Paruintupa, whose spirit is futhonuble and who luas obtained great fume by keeping les subjects contented. I now explain the principles ut Nyaya, cucording to my thilities. Locusts fly towards the fire. Raghu erected a trophy or triumphal columu on every nnountain. Janasthâna is situated on the banks of (along-side of the Golaturi.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 144 to her Having sent the girl to her husband's house, and being as if I hail paid back a deposit, I am now at ease.. This is the lord of Avanti,, who is long-arthed, broadbreasted, and slender-waisted. The lotus-eyed maid, whose limbs were delicate, did not fix ler affections on him. egini Sunanda spoke to the moon-facel damsel (whose face was like the moon) when she reached the place wliere was sitting Hemângâda, the lord of the Kulingas, whose Wux alorrud with Asigulus, whose power was equal to that of tle mountain Mahendra, and who by his prome* Muud destroyed his ademics. VOCABULARY XX. STT 1. life. THOUT... (7 m. a plant, or its 3779TL 1. one possessed of a Aced, and TOT f. wreath or a soul, it man. string) i rosary of Star prima piest part., pass. of f STT in the lapi. prith 371, brought, femper min. I. inconceivable, unimaginable. AT m.ll. f. troubled, distressed. fitrag m. one whose bow is it m. a snake. strung. STTATT M. ib. f. obtainable. YETM m. love, lihing. 1947 m. 9. f. born, ETA H. an vintment. ETT IN. 1..1. noble, generous. gryfafa.l. worship trefa 11. n. 1. of a wild is rý m. oliject of desire. position, inordinate, ser 1L pride. siie. raym. the sacritice of a liorse 6 m. I haughty. E n. vitih breath, life in this far part part. puss. of Se'nise it is used in the plural, the causal of जन् dah उप. the ritual brenths being tive in proluced. uumler). girl wl. enjoyment. NT a particle showing uplu. j. nawe of a serpent-dam. exces- ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 145 sacre-l' percepts. 2 m. sol. sel, for some time a wife of of आप with Arjuna made to get, having given. 977.f. daugler, a girl. in, . a tear. F.F. nstne of a dainşel. बुभुक्षित m. "... hungry. Ft. ", family. Tig in. zime of a Rishi, FTTT 1. it young boy. TT 11. respect, self-respect. 9 m. 1. f. one who has ac. qft . name of a celestial complished his purposes, good, i clumsel. virtuous. | TT ult. coriling to the Tiffam. 16. 1. dead. FETTET IN. 1.f. having long 177 r. o long is. en in practice. TT... httle. Aq liv. l'irruesli to po if:7777 prouve part. art. of the nounce in a loir voie, to Woof Towing joined. mutter (as prayers). ITW the will of a mn. IF 1h 37 lvecinj. . SITT.. an opithet of Rudra, 10th in jo to book at, te ser iva. fa pel pile of 57 rroth for, i jaw, « fung. cestionscal. ITER 1. il. f. nose and is lif- T 1. the name of it (illa Irruilt to be reached, intinite. dharvil, 27.!. i crits. 577. pulmones AT ". lustry', glory. fer. p20111, 112.mars. To m.incensos 7=79711.1. men laveness FTTETT M. f. not being on the follow, grede bloed, ufu catal, fasting. chegar courronte bakke. Fan m paturi. 974 til. cum nolly, its subtion परिचित् 11. son of 7771 Prita pribat proto por Fruulson of अर्जन 11.118. oi rich मम् afrika m, an attendant, a Siós. FR Gth conj. Prasm. iu le foge prve poest. of Tirith ofe, or!. omne brily. sxorchel, burnt. ATT lilo lowrot, juth. TTT m. progress, prevalence. मार्वभौम m..... ... uniscinul move. tofa m. naine of a man. rein). TOTT fungide of a woman. Friu m. 1. j fragrant. Tutor n. starting, march. HISTA 11. j. having broth. AVAT past part. act. of the Fm the 1140 of 2 sage. in 1 vant. 13 ·146 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. जना. Abode Locust शलभ me आस्पद. आवास m. Love अनुराग m. Angada अङ्गद m. a kind of orna- Nature निसर्ग .. ment: Preast वक्षस् n. (Overcome अभिभूत past part Broad विशाल m. n... pass. of भू with अभि, पर्याकुल Celestial damsel अप्सरस् / सुरा m. n. J. आकुल n. n. f. Paid back aga past pari, Deposit न्यास m. निक्षेप m. pass. of the cars, ofse vorth Different fira prest part. pass. प्रति. [king. of भिद Paranitapa. परंतप m. name of a Every. प्रति prep. Prowess प्रताप m. पराक्रम . Fix Ith conj. Sought प्रार्थित past part.ornst. Herningada THTFT 1. tlo naine of अर्थ witles. of a king. Spirit'सत्व . Keeping contented सनुरञ्जन n. Towards अभि prep. (as applied to the subjects of Unfathomable Toit in. 11. f. a king). Waist मध्य n. . LESSON XXI. CAUSALS. 1. The causal of a root is formed by the addition of अय. aud mahing the same vowel changes as before the 37 of the tenth conjugation; that he make's,' FITTE 'She causes tu make.' ... The ciusal form takes citler padla. 3. Roots ending in अम् (Acept कम्, अम्, and चम्), जन् ज, दल, वल, वर. वन्: ज्वल and secreral others not very important, do not change their rowel. Of these, वम्, नम्, वन्, and ज्वत्र change their s optionally, when not preceded by a prepo. nition; as जनयति, वलयति, नमयति-नामयति, उन्नमयति. +. Roots ending in आ. ही. and add on the augmenta before अय as दा-दापयति, हेपयति, अर्पयति. 5. Roots ending in ए, ऐ, or ओ substitute आ for their vowels ; as धे-धा-धापयति, दो-दा-दापयति. (See 14, p.४०) 6. g shorteus its 3 necessarily; de and at optionally when not preceded by a preposition ; as अपयति, ग्लपयति ग्लापयति, प्रग्लापयति. .

·SEOOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 147 8. रभ and लभ . 7. substitutes for f optiorally; as रोपपति रोहयति हन् becomes घाद. insert a nasal.before the final, as रम्भयति, उम्भयति. 9. मो, छो सो, हे, व्ये, वे, and पा to drink' add. instead of q before sp; and or to protect' adds e; a शाययति, साययति, &c. The roots जि. क्री, and with fat, substitute » for their vowels ; as जापयति, कापयति, and अध्यापयति. 10.* The ending or of any is dropped wheu followod by the augments. अय itself is dropped, the vowel changes being rotioed, before (1) the past participinl termination, (6.) such as begin with qand (.) those of verbal derivatives which begin with a vowel; as विई to know, विदित 'known, and वेदित 'made known'; संहत्य prim. संहार्य cums. The अय with its last w dropped is retained after a root having a Short penultimate before the 7 of the indeclinablo past part ; as प्रणमय्य. 11. The causal forms of roots of the tenth conjugation are ibe samo as the primitive. 12. When the cansal forms of intransitive roots, of transitive ones having a literary work for their object anıl of such as impiy motion, knowledge or information, and eating, and of tit are user), the agent of the verb in its primitivo sense is put in the accusative case. This rule is not applicable to af and az and is optional in the case of and other cases the primitive agent is in the iustrumentul casc. यजमानो यज्ञकर्मत्विरिभरारम्भयति । इन्द्रः स्वयशः किंनरमिथुनानि गापयामास । पुष्पमित्रो यजते याजकास्तं याजयन्ति । कृष्णवर्मा पुत्रेण ब्राह्मणेभ्यः प्रत्यहं शतं गा दापयति । जानकी रथमारोप्य जाह्नवीतीरमासाद्य रामाज्ञापितो ल- क्ष्मणस्ता विजहौ। भुप्रसादलवोऽप्यधीरप्रकृतेर्दासजनस्य प्रागल्भ्यं जनयति । * The rules in this Articie app in the 377 vf the luth conjuguttuu alss. In ·148 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. असुरस्य तिग्मतपसा भातात्मा भगवाशंकरः स्वीयं रूपं ते दर्शयामास। नगेन्द्रसक्तां दृष्टिं पायें कस्यामि क्रन्दितमीकर्ण्य राजा निवर्तयामास। अस्मिल्लोकेऽनुष्ठितो धर्मस्तस्य कर्तारं स्वर्गलोक प्रापयति । ग्रीष्मकाले धर्मोऽङ्गानि ग्लपयति स्वेदं प्रतयति तृष्णां परि- वर्धयति च। बहिभरि प्रवृत्तमृषिकुमारकं प्रवेशयितुं प्रतिहारीमाज्ञापया: मास राजा। चिरनष्टमात्मनो बालकं दृष्ट्वा सा सुन्दरी भृशं रुरोद तं च दृढं परिप्वज्याश्रुभिः पयामास । शनगमयत्स्वर्ग वेदार्थ स्वानवेदयत् । आशयञ्चामृतं देवान्वेदमध्यापयद्विधिम् । आसयत्सलिले पृथ्वीं यः स मे श्रीहरिर्गतिः॥ रमयन्ति मनस्तावद्भावाः संसारसंभवाः । यावन्न श्रूयते साश्रुलोकफूत्कारकाहलः॥ स्वीयं यशः पौरुषं च गुप्तये कथितं च यत् । कृतं यदुपकाराय धर्मशो न प्रकाशयेत् ॥ वेदाविनाशिनं नित्यं य *एनमजमव्ययम् । कथं स पुरुषः पार्थ के घातयति हन्ति कम् ॥ नैनं छिन्दन्ति शस्त्राणि नैनं दहति पावकः । न चैनं क्लेदयन्त्यापो न शोषयति मारुतः॥ संयोजयति विद्यैव नीचगापि नरं सरित् । समुद्रमिव दुर्धर्ष नृपं भाग्यमतः परम् ॥ यदि सत्याभिसंधस्त्वं राजघ्रामं प्रवासय । नव पञ्च च वर्षाणि निर्जने गहने वने ॥ युधिष्ठिरस्तु कौन्तेयो मयमाहूय सत्वरम् । कारयामास वै तेन सभामद्भुतदर्शनाम् ॥ This refer to the muul whether of man or the universe.

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 119 दृष्टिस्तृणीकृतजगत्त्रयसवसारा धीरोद्धता नमयतीव गतिर्धरित्रीम् । कौमारकेऽपि गिरिवहंतां दधानो वरो रो रसः किमयमेत्युत दर्प एव ॥ The king makes the Brahmaņas accept* (up with a fr ] he money. Vasishțla causeil Dasaratha to perforan (77) a critice. The wicked deeds of Bajiraja make us blushi [ ]. Indra caused Mátali to bring [ îi witls *7 ) Arjuna to Iewen in his only car. He first makes men conficle sue with fã ). in him, and hen destroys [ 731. With Ha, or ) them. Being commanded ( 7 with 37 ) by Its Cirru, lio every lay fed (777] his cows and made them drink (77) water. Ho finishel ( 317 with ] his morning devotious, after ulich lie fed [n] siitern Brahmanits, ind then took his un meal. Rama's going to a forest to lose there for foutren years litsioned सङ्ग witha) Dasavatha's death. Saunjaya maule Dhrituráltuia luar () (told him ) what happened on the field of battle, where the Pandavas and the - 113 of Dhgitarashtra were tightin. It is fate that sometimes makes brothers and triomis fight 7 ] with each other, and occasionally causes tu cut ( 65 ) off leis own head. A father should marry [नी with परि, वर with पि 1 उद् ] liis daughter to a well-behaved young man, of a 1.pectable lamily and of good educatiun. The verses that this boy has ropeatoil remiul [Fq) me of the times in which I lived on the top of mount Prasravana with any beloved and my brother Lakshmiņa. The S'yâparnaswent to the sacrifice of Sunshalgana, and tuok their seats within the Vedi, wheronpon the king ordere bis men to unseat (fyt with 39t) them; they accordingly unseated them. While being utiseated, they cricd aloud. at lilall even • The causal of the roots is to I usel. † Tue of Ph am Fry is drypperl after the puremition 7 ·152 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. CV 1st pers. 2nd augment sy or 97 is prefixdd to the roots in this tense as in "the Imperfect. J.-First Variety. 1. The terminations of the Imperfect are applied to roots with the exception of that of the third person pVural, which in this case is F. Before ya the preceding 371, if any, is cropped. Sing. Dual Plur. अम् व म F तम् 3rd ताम् TT 'to drink,' FATT, , iiT and other roots assuming the forms of it and 7 in virtue of rule 14. p. 80, y which is substituted for इ 'to go in the Aorist, and to be,' belong to this variety 3. The third person plural termination in the case of is 377; and before the terminations beginning with a vowel a is added on to t 4. TT, , TT, Fit, and are conjugated in this way optionally (remember rule 14 p. so). Their other forms are made up according to the sixth variety takes the thirol Aorist also. 5. This variety is Parasmaipadi exclusively. Such of the roots belonging to it, as are Åtmaneradi also, take the fourth or fifth variety in that Pada. T-'to give.' Sing. Dual Plur. TETET अदाम 2nul 3THT: अदातम् अदात TETEL* अदाताम् अदुः आ being dropped before उस् by l above, we have अत् + उस्- अदु:. Similarly अस्थुः, अगुः &c. II.- Second Variety. 1. 3 is added on to the root, and then the terminations of the Imperfect of the first class of conjugations are appended. * Rulc II. p. 57 is applicable in this as in all such cases. 1st pers. 3rd ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 153 1st pers. Paris? Sing. Dual Plur. 1st perso अम् म 2nd तम् त 3rd ताम् . अन् The 3r is belided before 371 and 377, and lengthened before 1 and H (See p. 6 note* and p. 5 F. B.) åtm. aft. महि 2ncl थास् TUTT 3rd त इताम् अन्त is elided before 34-8 and lengthened before aff and A as above. 2. The radical vowels do not take their Guna o: riddhi substitute. 3. This variety is Parasinai pati with but a few exceptions. 4. Some roots are conjug::teil in this way optionally and some necessarily. The most important of these are given in the following list :- Vecessarily. feq to anoint. ut to be greedy: सिच् to sprinkle. घस् to desour. () to call. 4 to be distressed in body or These three roots when quind. Âtmanepadi take this variety IT t be satisfied. optionally. Ty to be thirsty. BPEL (BYFY) to tlırow. to be tamed. 3714 to obtain. I to be deplavec. क्रुध to hurt, to act the truitor. to be fatigued. नश to perish. 4th conj. to forgive. ET (FT) in Parism. and Åtm. fra tu pulverize, toigrind. to tell. पुष् Ath conj. to nourish. Tu to go. Ath conj. to wander, to err. * The forms wluch aume wts asume before 34 are enclosed within brackets ; as-आस्थ् + अम् = आस्थम् ; अब + अम्= अहम् a. to be angry: TO ( TA ) to fall.

·154 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Ey to cut. लिह मद् to be mad. fity to distinguish. मुच to leave, to release. Dit to be purified. Te to be silly. 7 to exert one's self. Hey 4th conj. to adhere. 4th conj. to covet (to spea. g to be dejected, to sit. de ate) in Parasm. and Åtm. 4th conj. to be ready. TEE to be able. y to move, to creep. Arto perish, to wither away. to hear affection to. शम् to be calm. "regulate. f 4th conj. to perspire. ETA (fr) to govern, to rule, to 4th conj. to be glad. 6. Optionally. T to reduce to powder. स्तम्भ.(स्तभ्) to obstruch yy to proclaim. Fly Ise conj. to break off. aya to atop. The following roots of the first fere to cut off. conjugation are generally (FT) to become old. Åtmanepadi, but when they तृप to be satisfied. take this variety of the Aorist I to be proud. they become Parasmaipadi:- TEL (f) to see. to make for,to tend towards. निज to wash off. to become agitated. to know. युत् to shine. foto penetrate. ध्वंस (ध्वस्) to perish. T5 to join. IT (75T) to fall. fra to make empty. 19 to shine. cry. FT to obstruct. cret to increase. विw to separate. TT to shine, to look decent. शुच् 4th conj. to be pure. FT (FT) to drop. (down. a () to swell. h (F) to fall down, to drop () to jump upwards. स्विद् to perspire. 5. Of these for takes the third and fifth varieties besides this and the rest, the fourth or fifth according as they are anitor set. 6. fazy takes the seventh variety when it means 'to embrace.' 7. Such of the roots in the two lists as are conjugated in the Âtmanepada with the exception of those mentioned above, take the fourth or fifth variety in that Pada. to हत् to be.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 155 2nd 99 3rd Sing. Dual Plur. 18t pers. अपुषम् अपुषाव अपुंषाम अपुषः अपुषतम् अपुषत अपुषत् अपुषताम् अपुषन् III.-Third Variety. 1. The Aorist forms of roots of the tenth conjugation ·and of causals are made up in this way. 2. a. The app is dropped, but the vowel changes and Others effected in, the primitive root before it are retained. 6. The penultimate vowel is shoitele. C. Then the root is to be reduplicated according to the general rules. If the yllable following the reduplicative une be short and not prosodially* long, d. the 37 of the reduplicative syllable is changed to g; C. and its vowel generally, when short and not prosodially long, is lengbened. f. To the baso so prepared are to be appended 37, and the terminations of the Impertect as in the second variety. Thus from 774 (the ciutsal of ), by «lropping 371, wc lave T; by shortening the penultimate, : by reduplication, ; by changing the reduplicative 37 to , ; lvy lengthening the I, f7; and by applying 37, the termination a, and the temporal augment, अबीभवत्. So from स्पन्दयति (caus. of स्पन्द we have by (s. FYR; TETE by c. and 2 d. 1'. 61; 37TT byt. For b. there is no occasion, since the penultimate is not a voucl, and ngne also for d. and c. since ", the syllabıle following the reduplicative q, is prosodially long being followed by a conjunct consonant. स्वलयति (caus. of स्खल ; स्वद by ; चम्खन by . and 3 d. and b. p. 61; facer by dl.; opfaraca lsy f. For 1. there is no occasion, and also for e., since the vowel iſ of the reduplicative syllable for is prosodially long. 3. a. If a root begins with a vowel, the following consobantis reduplicated and q added to it in the reduplicative syllable. b. When a conjunct consonant with 7, 1, or 7 as A syllable is prosottially long when, being short itself, it is followed by a conjunct consonant.

·156 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. or ज, we have its first member follows the initial vowel, the second member is reduplicated. Thus अह-आटय-आद by 2 6.; अट by 28.; अटिट् by-3 a.; आदिद by adding the temporal augmens आ (F.BP. 54); and आटिटत by 21. So उन्द्-उन्दय-उन्द चन्दि by 3 U.; औन्दिद् by the rule in p.bi F. B., and औन्दिदत्. Similarly भई has आर्जिहत्. In the two latter cases उन् and अर् are set aside and and are reduplicated and added to them. 4. a. If a root ends in उ, short or long, that vowel is to . be substituted for in the reduplicative syllable when the following syllable does not consist of a letter of the labial class or य, र, ल, व, followed by 37. Thus कु, causal कावय-कार-क-चकर and चिकन, but as the root ends in चुकव-चूंकव-अचूकवत् ; but in the case of भू or पू we have अवीभवत् or अपीपवत्, and not अबूभवत् or अपूपवत्. 6. The ç is optionally retained in the case of E, T, and च्यु. Ex. अशिश्रवत् or अशुश्रवत् Aor. caus. of श्रुः 5. The following roots shorten their penultimate optionally :- and धान, भाष, भास्, दीप, जीव , मील, पीइ ; and also द्वे, , लुप a few others ; as अपीरिडत् or अपिपीडत्. पीडय-पीइ.पिपीह-अपिपीडत्. 2 e. has no place here. When the penultimate is shortenel, we have पीइ-पिइ-पिपिइ-पीपिई-अपीपिडत 6. The vowel changes mentioned in Article 2, i. e., the shortening of the penultimate (1.), tlie substitution of for 7 (d.), and the lengthening of the reduplicative syllable (e.), do not take place in the case of the following roots:- कथा वर्, शल्, रह, स्पृह, सूच, मृग, ध्वन्, पार् as कथ्-अचकथन वर्-अववरत्. 7. The अ of the reduplicative syllable of स्मृ, द, त्वर प्रथ म्र, स्ता and स्पश is preserved, and the of those of ac and चेष्ट is optionally changed to अ; as असस्मरत्, अददरत्, &c. and अववेष्टत् or अविवेष्टत्. 8. गण has two forms अजगणत् or अजीगणत. 9. The roots श्रि, and take the third variety in the primitive form. वि takes it optionally. घे (see p. 152, Art. 4), drops its o after reduplication.

·SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 157 In these cases reduplication alone, is necessary. f-forf + अत्-अशिश्रियत् by II., p. 35, the अ being weak; धे-अदधत्. 10. स्थापयति has अतिष्टिपत् पानयति, अपीप्यन् ; and प्रापयति, अजिघ्रपत् or अजिघ्रिपत् 11. The penultimate short # of a rdot is optionally retained, and long ऋ optionally shortened. वर्तय caus. of हृतः by dropping the अय we have वर्व, or ca by the above ; वर्त-वर्त-अववर्तत्. 2 d. and e. are not upplicable. त् -वत्-विटत by : d.-वीटत् bye. -अवीटमत्. कीर्तय caus. of कत, after the dropping of the अय, कीर्त, and कृत by the above, which insetwo forms अचिकीर्तत् or अचीकृतत्. 12. Same roots, the most important of which are लोक, लोच्, शाम, श्लाघ, बाथ, सैद, वेर, एन, लाय, राघ, ताय, दाशु, योर, and राज do not shorten the penultimete; as अलुलोकत and अततायत. 13. हे and स्वप are in the Aorist of the causal to be taken and and चि optidually as शु, as अनूहवत् or अजुहावत, by Art. , असूघुपत्, अशशवत् ॥ अशिश्चयत् 14. This variety is both Atmanepadi and Parasmaspadi. हृ ' to carry' cuus. Purusm. Sing. Dual Plur. ist Pcrs. अजीदरम् अजीहराव अजीहराम अजीहरः अजोहरतम् अजीहरत अजीहरत् अजीहरताम् अजीहरन् Atm. 1st Pers. अजीहरे अजीरावाहि अजीहरामहि mul अजीहरथाः अजीहरेथाम् अजीहरध्वम् अजीहरत अजीहरेताम् अजीहरन्त ns nud" 3rd " 3rd " काशीं गन्तुकामः श्रीनगरान्निरगात्पण्डितः सह परिवारेण । भगो अर्यमा सरिता पुरंधिर्मह्यं त्वादुर्गार्हपत्याग्न देवाः। तस्मिन्गर्वनुचरे गृहं प्रविष्टे यूयं किमधुनोदस्थात । गुरुरय- मिति मंत्वा। अस्मिनिर्जने वने नष्टमश्वमियन्तं कालमन्विष्यन्नपि न समासदम्। 14 ·158 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 'इंदमाम्रफलं वृक्षादपप्तत् । यदि रोचते गृहीत्वा स्वादस्व । हे गङ्गे यदीदृशेभ्यः पापेभ्यो मामुददीधरस्ततः सत्यमनाथः शरणमसि विष्णुपदपङ्कजोद्भवासि । प्रातरारंभ्य पञ्चसततिं वृक्षानसिचाम । वत्सस्य मरणेन तद्विषयकाः सर्वे मनोरथा मेऽध्वसन् । क्रीडार्थमुपवनमगमतां दंपती तयोनिवृत्तयोरात्मनः करुणवा- र्ता कथय। इयं बालिका दुःखवार्ता श्रुत्वामुहत् । आश्वासयैनामुदकेन च सिश्च । इमं प्राममागच्छन्तौ भवनिर्दिष्टे गहने वने नानापक्षिगणस- माकुलं महावटवृक्षं तमदर्शाव । उपाध्यायो देवानपूपुजद नातिथयो यथेष्टं भुञ्जताम् । अस्मिन्मण्डपे समाहृतान्ब्राह्मणानहमजगणम् । पञ्च शतानि तेषां वर्तन्ते । एतेभ्योऽधुना दक्षिणां दातुमारभस्व । मचिन्तिता सरणिर्वरीयसेऽधिकारिणे नारुचदतः स तां नि. रास्थन्नवीनां च स्वयं कल्पितां प्रावीवृतत् । किं यूयमवोचत पुनरपि कथयत नाहमवहितोऽभूवम् । मुक्का निःश्रीकमप्यनं मराली न गतान्यतः।। भ्रमराली त्वगाद्वेगादिदं सदसदन्तरम् ॥ प्रातिष्ठिपत्सबोधार्थ कुम्भकर्णस्य राक्षसान् ॥ राघवस्यामुषः कान्तामाप्तैरुक्तो न चार्पिपः॥ मुष्टिनाददरत्तस्य मूर्धानं मारुतात्मजः॥ We have drunk [पा ] Soma and have become [भू] im. mortal. Devadatta has weighed [ तूल ] this gold, make ornaments of it. The king of the Kaliigas has besieged [ रुप ] Pataliputra, but many of his soldiers have fallen out i sk] of the line and are looking for plunder.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 159 Ashțâvakra, coming from a placy twelve coss off, is now tired []..Give him food and drink. He has not been able ( 7] to convince me that my belief in the existence of ghosts is unfounded. The minister has governed ( a ) the country justly. He is loved by all the people. Govinda looked for the lost book one whole day, but has not found [गम् with अधि, with सम् and') it. We have cut off (fr) a branch of the Palâs'a tree for umaking a sacrificial post. you not washed (1) your hands yet ? I have given a hot* bath ( 8 capis. ) to my children. Hast thou not heated [17g caus. ] the water yet, a«. I told (TT) you to do? The owner being dead, they have caused the house to be pulled down [Fe caus. with or Fat caus. ] and his clothes to be burned (caus. ]. y with VOCABULARY XXII. BTTTT m. n. f. helpless. TentH m. 1. f. desirous to go. 947 m. an attendant, a ser- TT m. & sacred fire kept Vant: perpetually by a householder, WEST 1. a lotus. household duties. Fac ( past part. of 2 with afar m. n. f. concerning him. WT) attentive. TR4 18conj. Atm. to spread. BETER. m. name of a person. to 4th conj. Atm. to shine. HF 4th conj. with fars, to repeal, to draw out, to save. to abolish. 1st conj. Parasni, to suck, to STTH m. it friend, a well-wisher. drink, et f. a line or row. ध्वन् 18t conj. Parasm. to sound. with farç, to set out. ta m. n. f. new. GUT m. n. f. doleful, lamentable. gitar m. retinue. aferent past part. pass of the Tort m. a kind of tret. causal of du planned, invent- gift m. name of a deity. ed. [Ravana. in m. awakening. Furtof m. name of a brother of' 1977 m. name of a deity. Use gasuitcasting with the caus. of 7.

·160 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. सम् and . अंश 1st corj. Atm. and 4tlyconj. introduce, to bring into prac Parasm. to fall. tice. Husy m. a temporary hall erect- . te 10th conj. t7 deceive, te ed on festive occasions. defraud. मनोरथ n. wish, desire. with 3T, to obtain मराली/. a female swan. to meet with-to find. मारुतात्मज m. the son of the god समाकुल m. n. f. occupied with of wind, Miruti. full of. मृग 10th conj. Atm. tq look for, सरणि-णी f. path, disposition or to search. arrangement of things. रह 10th conj. to quit. सवितृ m. the sun. वटवृक्ष m. a banian tree.. सूच 10th conj. to indicate. वर् loth conj: to choose.. स्वामिम् m. owner. हत् प्र (in the causal) to Belief श्रद्धा.. विश्वास m. Convince with प्रति caus., प्रतीतिं कृ. TExistence भाव m. अस्तित्व . Ghost प्रेत . वेताल m. पिशाच m. Immortal अमृत past art. of मृ १vith अ, अमर m. n.. Justly धर्मेण, न्यायेन. Lile व्यूह m. column of an army Love लिह 4th conj.; he is love तस्मिन्नियति. Plunder लोप्वा. लुण्ठन . Unfounded निर्मूल m. 2. f. Yet अद्यापि ind. LESSON XXIII. I:-Sirth Turriety. 1. The sixth variety of the Aorist is formed by addingt the root the forms of the third Aorist of with som clauges, the of 3 being dropped. These forms may ! curasidered as the terminations. They are as follows: Sing. Dual Plur. सिपम् सिप्त सिष्म सीः सिष्टम् सिट 3rd' सीत् सिष्टाम् सिः To be able to couumit them easily to memory, the learner nu regard them as wade up of the Imperfect forms of अस्, with ti 1 pers. Paul ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 161 31 dropped and for prefixed, this latter necessitating the change of the fellowing to g. Instead of *, g should be taken to be the third person plural forn, and fo is not to be prefixed to the second and third person singuldı. 2. Roots ending in 371", , T, and 44, take this variety. 3. This variety is Para mapadli only. 3 साम सि Biul 99 II.--Seronth Variety.. 1. This consists in adding to the root the forms of tho . Second Aorist of 37Ħ'to be,' the of अस. being droppel. lidther words, all 37 to # and append the terminations of the Imperfect with the modifications shown below. These forms, considered as terminations, 'rudel on to the root. Parasm. Atur. 1st pers. HELE सावहि Araft F: सतम् सत FTTT: HTTF सध्वम् 3rd Fra सताम् सन् साताम् 2. This variety is botlı Atm. and Parasın. 3. Anitt roots ending in 1, , F, and , and having , 3, #, or for their penultimate, have theii Aorist formed in this way. 4. The woot ga is an exception. 5. The roots fyz, qt, and at optionally take this variety. 6. The third person singular, second person singular and plural, and first person dual of the Âtmanepada of the loots दुह, दिह, लिह and are optionally formed by dropping the Ħor Ft, and appending the reinaining portions of the terminations. it Parasm. Sing. Dual Plur. 1st pers. अग्लासिपम् अग्लासिप्प अग्लासिम TEHT: अग्लासिष्टम् अग्लासिष्ठ अग्लासीत् अग्लासिष्टाम् अग्लासिषुः * Roots ending in g, doand 3h are to be considered as roots ending in 311, asubserved in Art. 14, Lesson XIII, † Sec p. 76 Note 7. Biul 3rd , ·162 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. " " " लिङ्ग Parasm. Sing. Dual Plur.. 1st pers. अलिक्षम् अलिक्षाव अलिक्षम 2nd अलिक्षः अलिक्षतम् अलिक्षत 3rd अलिशत् अलिक्षताम् अलिक्षन् Atm. 1st pers. अलिक्षि अलिक्षावहि-अलिबहि अलिक्षामहि अलिक्षथाः-अलीदा: अलिक्षाथाम् अलिक्षध्वम्-अलीद्वम् अलिक्षत-अलीट अलिक्षाताम् अलिक्षन्त भ+लिह + सत्-लिह-लिद by L, p. 48-लिक by IV., p. 49-लि पत् लिक्षत् by notet p. 79 F. B.-अलिक्षत्. अ+दिह + सत्-दिह-दिघ by V.,.50.-धि by VII., p. 50-धिक by notet p.a. F. B.-धिक + षत् as above-अधिक्षत्. अदिश + सत्-दिश-दिष् by IX., p. 52-दिक by IV., p. 49-दिक + षत् as abore-अदिक्षत्. अ+ कृष् + सत्-कृष् कृक् &c. as abore-अकृक्षत्. अ+ लिह + सत-लिह-लिद &c. as above-अलिक्षत , also लिह+त-लिद + त by I,]. 48-लिद ध by II., p. 49-लिद + by . 21 F. B.-लीट by III., p. 49.-and with the temporal augment, अलीद. 2120 3rd » v note* नित्यकर्मानुष्ठानायास्नासीस्तच्छूद्रादीन्मा स्पृक्षः। वेणुधमन्याग्निमध्मासिषम्। तदस्मिन्प्रदीप्ते वहावाहुती-प्रास्य। भोः पुरोहित भवदाज्ञामनुसृत्य बटवेऽहं सावित्रीमुपादिक्षम्। तदधुनान्यत्करणीयं दर्शय । विवाहविधेरितिकर्तव्यतामत्रत्या ब्राह्मणा नाशासिषुरतो मां तत्संपादनायाहुन् । अस्तमयासीद्रविस्तिमिरेणावृतं नभः। तत्किमद्यापि गां नाधु क्षत पयः। कृषीवला भूमिमकृक्षन्परं त्वामा॑सु स्थितेऽपि सूर्ये पर्जन्यो न वर्षति । मा वयं भ्रातरः परस्परं द्विक्षामेत्यस्माकं पितासनमरणो रिक्थस्य समानांश्चतुरो भागानकरोत् । महाकार्यारम्भे देवो गुरुजनश्च वन्दितज्य इति वचनमनुरुध्य गृहदेवतां मातरं पितरमन्यांश्च वृद्धान्प्राणंसिष्म ।

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 163 कूपतडागादिनिर्माणाय महान्तो यत्वा युप्माभिः कृतास्ते कस्मिन्पर्यवासासिषुः। इदं मधु किं नालिक्षः । चिक्करमेतत् । He embrised [z] his ehild and went [] bitterly. We have mounted [Twith 37 ] our horses and are now marching against the enemy. The flowers, brought yesterday, lave now faded [] throw them out and bring new ones. Yaving told us how Chandrahetu and Lava fought with cach otler, and how Ráma commanded them to be quiet,* lie has ceased [Ta with Parasin.): I have not yet thought [ El withofa ) which would be better for me, the study of law or of medicine. Have you smelt () the Hr wer? It is very fragrant. The king has sat [feat with yo) upon the throne and is consulting with his ministers. We have protected (T) you so long from evil or injury and you now act the traitor towards us; what could be more mournful ? Why kast thou abandoned ( 1 ) an affectionate wife who never did anything you did not like? VOCABULARY XXIII. SET 1. doing, executing. इतिकर्तव्यताf.method or the way STFT m. sunset. of doing anything. 372 f. the sixth lunar mansion. Fuito pot. part. what is to be STTS past part. pass. of T with done. T, filled, covered. UEFAT f. family deity. आसनमरण m. n... (आसन्न.. fariri n. darkness. f. near, and to 1. death) pot f. a pipe. one --whose death is near, farratio n. daily religious perabout to die. formance. I f. sacrificial oblation, पर्जन्य m. rain. * प्रशाम्यतमित्यादिशत्.

·164 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. प्रदीप्त past part. of दीप to shipe | समान m.w.f. equal. with g, shining brightly. Hrafi f. the holy, mantra or IT m. a division. verse of the Rigveda, gene. ftry n. property, wealth. rally called Gayatri, and refent m. n. 4. palatable peated by all Brâhmaņas वन्दितव्य pot. piart. of वन्द fit to every day. be bowed to. FT 4th conj. I arasm. to end; 1st conj. Prasin. to rain. title परि and अव, to end in, ay m. a bamboo. to result in. 1919 1. accomplishing. Act the traitor द्रुह 4th conj. Parusm. Bitterly प्रमुक्तकण्ठम्, upl as an adv. Chandraketu चन्द्रकेतु m. naime of the son of Lakshmana, brother of Râmna. Evil अनर्थ m. पीडा संकट .. Fragrant Et m. n. f. Law धर्मशास्त्र. March against गम् with अभि. Medicine (as a science) aan. आयुर्वेद m. More mournful Giant 1. 12. f. LESSON XXIV. Part 1. Fourtly and Fifth Varieties. made up 1. The most general varieties of the Aorist are the fourth and the fifth. Any root that does not belong to any of thọ preceling ones takes one or other of these. In the same manner a root that takes one of the others optionally, or in the Parasmaipada only, has its other or Åtmancpada form in either of these ways. 2. (a.) The fifth differs from the fourth in prefixing the augmenty to the terminations, and consequently it is the Aorist of Set roots and the fourth that of Aniť roots. and when Parasm. belong to the fifth variety, though Anit; and (c.) < and roots ending in + pitceded by a conjunct consonant or in long , when Âtmanepadi, and (d.)

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 165 3. नुand . such as are optionally Set, to either. (e.) धू when Parasm. and spor take the fifth only. do not admit g when they take the Åtmanepada terminations. 4. a. The forms of the Imperfect of an 'to be,' with the initial 3 dropped, are appended to the root as terninations. B. The third person plural has सुः instead of सन्..c. When in the fifth variety z is prefixed, the # of the second and third person singular is droppeil. dl. The rule about the change of a to s given in 4, p. 77 holds goud in the case of we in this tense. I. B preceded and followed by any consonant except a nasal or a semirowel is diopped ; as अभिद्+स्त=असि; अभेद् +स्ताम्-अभैत्ताम्. Fourth Variety. Fifth Variety. Parasm. Parasm. Sing. Dual I'lur. Sing. Dual Plur. सम् सीः स्तम् इष्ट सीत् स्ताम् इष्टाम् Atm. Atm. सिं स्वहि स्महि इपि इवहि इमाहि स्थाः साथाम् ध्वम् इष्ठाः इषाथाम् इध्वम् साताम् रुपाताम् PARASMA IPAD... Fourth l'uriety. j. In the Parasınaipada forms of the fourth variety the vowel of a root takes its Vriddhi substitute; as far arcefiel Fifth Variety. 6. In the Parasmaipada fifth, (a.) the ending 5, E, #, and , short or long and (6.) the penultimate of roots ending in or and (c.) that of an and The take Vșiddhi necessarily; as ल-अलौ+षम्-अलाविषम्, चर-अचारिषम्, फल-अफालिपम्. 7. The अ, if not prosodially long, of roots having an ini. tial consonant and ending in any consonant except g and its takes Vriddhi optionally; as गद्-अगदी or अगादीत. 여적여 .

·166 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. क्षण, बस्, .. or उ, 8. Exceptions.-Roots ending in ह, म्, , and जागू, कहा लग, हस, yि and some others, do not take Vriddhi; as कम्-अकमीत्. 9. The penultimate इ, उ, ऋ, ल, take their Guna in the fifth form ; as सिष-असेंधीव, शुच-अशोचीत्, कृत्-अकीद ÂTMAN UPADA. Fourth Variety. 10. In the Atuanepada fourth variety, (a.) the ending : short or long, takes Guna, while (.) the ending and the penultimate vowel remain unchanged ; as नी अनेष्ट, असोष्ट, भृ अभृषत 3rd pers: plur., भिद्-अभित्त. •Ending r (long) is treated as in 8, p. 2 ; AS स्वृ अस्तीर्ट, वृअवष्ट, 11. After a short vowel the of and स्थाः is dropped ; ast-अहत. 12. In the Atmanepada, दा, धा, and such roots as assume those forms in the non-conjugational tenses, and Fy substitute इ for the final आ, and this does not take Guna ; as अदित, अदिषाताम्. Fifth Variety. 13. The ending vowel or the penultimate short takes its Guna substitute in the fifth variety; as लू-अलविष्ट, मुद्-अमोदिष्ट. आ यम् 14. In the Åtmanepada fourth Aorist, drops its nasal necessarily, and th, and when it means to marry, optionally. वध is used instead of हन् in the Parasmaipada and optionally in the Atmanepada. does not take Vriddhi.. with Atm.-आ + अ + हन् + स्त-हस्त-ह+ त by 11 above -अहत-आहत; dual आहसाताम्-plur. आहसत- Another form is अवधिष्ट. with उप Atm.-उपायत, उपायसाताम् &c. or उपायंस्त, उपायंसाताम् &c. गम् with सम् Atm.. समगत or समगस्त &c. 15. The third person singular of the Aorist of पद is अपादि, ile., it is made up by using the termination instead of स्त. दीए, जन्, बुध, पूर, ताय, and प्याय् substitute this s for fi optionally. 16. Cho As in the case of other non-conjugational tenses the passive of the Aorist is made up simply by appending ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 167 अ 1st pers. nd - Âtmanepada terminations to the prepared base. b. The first, second, third, and sixth Aorists dre active, wherefore the roots belonging to them take the Âtm: fourth,. fifth, or seventh in the passiver c. In the passive of the Aorist all roots take a for the third person singular instead of स्त or सत. 17. Before this thie ending vowel and the penultimate take Vriddhinand any other penultimate short takes Guņa. The of जन् ard of Set roots ending in Ę exccpt ry with आ, कम् and वम् is not changed. 18. Final 37 takes the augment į before the 19. The of F is changed to y wher, the vowel undergoes Vriddhi (see 7, p. 147). 20. Article 3, p. 100 holds good also in this tense. भृ Parism. Sing. Dual Plur. अभार्षिम् अभार्च अभार्म अभार्षीः अभार्टम् अभार्ट 3rd अभार्फत् अभाीम् अभाः अ + भृ + सीत्-भार् by 5, P. 165-अभार्षीत् (notet p. 79 F. B.) Atm. अभृषि अभृप्ताह अभृमहि अभृथाः अभृपाथाम् अदम् -3rd अभृत अभृपाताम् अभृषत अ +भृ+स्त-the vowel remaining unchanged by 10.(७.). 166- the स is dropped by II, p. 166-अभृत. लू Purasm.. अलाविषम् अलाविष्व अलाविष्म 2nd अलावीः अलाविष्टम् अढाविष्ट 3rd अलावीत् अलाविष्टाम् अलाविपुः अ + लू + ईत्-लौ+ ईत् by 6 (a.) P. 165-अलावीत्. Atm. अलविषि अलविवाह अलविप्महि 2nd , अलविष्ठाः अलविषाथाम् अलविध्वम्-दम् अलविष्ट अलविषाताम् अलविषत अ+लू + इष्ट-लू-लो by 13, p. 166-अलविष्ट. 1. प्रछ being Anit belongs to the 4th variety;-अ+पछ + सीव- पाए by 5, p. 165- by IX., P. 52-प्राक by IV., p. 49-पार + पीत् by notet p. 79 F. B.-अप्राक्षीत्. Dual अ+पए + स्ताम्-प्रार 1st pers. 2nd " . . 1st per's. : 1st pers. .. " 3rd .

·168 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. T ३ दार by V. 50-धार ताम् by I., p. 165-प्रा + ताम्-प्राष्टाम् by note* p. 21 F. B_ अप्राष्टाम्plur. अप्राथु:. 2nd pers. अमाक्षीः-अप्राष्टम्-अशष्ट. Ist pers. अप्राक्षम्-अप्राश्व-अप्राक्ष्म. 2. तृप-one form is अतृपत् by 4 ., pr 154. The root takes optionally by 6, p. 77; fence it takes both the 4th and 5th varie. ties. अ+ तृप् + सीत्-त्रए optionally by 4, p. 94-त्रारby 5, p. 165- अत्राप्सीत् सृप-ताएं by 5, p. 165-अतासीत्, durat.s, अत्राप्ताम् and अताम्,ि स् being dropped by I., p. 165. The fifth is अतीत्, Guna by 9, p. 166; dual, अतर्पिष्टाम् &c. So this root has four. forms. is similar. 3. त्यज-अ+ त्यज + सीत्-त्याज by 5, p. 16.) त्याक् by note" p. 79 F. B.-त्याक् + पीत् notet p. 79_F. B.-अत्याक्षीत् ; dhal, अत्याक्ताम्, स् being dropped by I. p. 165.. 4. + दह + सीतू-दाह by 5, p. 165- p. by VII. p. 50-धाक by note+ p. 5. F. B.-अधाक्षीत्, datad, अ + दह + स्ताम्-अ+दाह + स्ताम्. First of all स् is dropped ; then we have अ+ दाह् + ताम्-दाय् + ताम् by V. P. 50-दाद + धाम् by II. P. 49- अदाग्धाम् by VI. p. 50; plur. अधाक्षुः. 5. वस-अ+वस् + सीत-वास्-वात् by I. p. 95-अवात्सीत्। dual, अ + वास् +स्ताम्. TIere the of वस् imust be changed to त् before cropping the स् of स्ताम् by I. p. 165. 6. वह-अ+ वह + सीत्-वाह-वाद by I. P. 48-बार by IV. P. 49-वाक् + पीत्-अवाक्षीत् ; dhal, अ+वह + स्ताम्-वाह + ताम्-वाह ताम्वाद धाम् by II. p. 49-वाद + दाम्-बादाम् by III.P. 49-अवोदाम् by II. p.86. Similar changes take place before तम्, त, and Atu.त,थास् and ध्वम्. is both Parasm. and Atm. By 4 U. p. 154 one form of its Aorist is अरुधत्. As to the other, we have first अ + रुप + सीत्-रोध by 5, p. 165-रौत् by note + p. 5 F. B.-अरौत्सीत् (dual, रौध + स्ताम् -रोध + ताम्,स् boing dropped-रोध + धाम् by II. P. 49-रौद्धाम् by VI. r. 50-अरौताम् plur. अरौत्सु:. Atm. अरुप + स्त-रुध + त by dropping स्, tlien रुह as above-अरुह dual अरुत्साताम्, plur. अरुत्सत. 8. Atm.- -अलभ् + स्त-लभ + त-लभ् + ध-लब्ध-अलब्ध; tual, अ+ लभ + साताम्-अलप्साताम् by note + p. 5 F.B. 9. स्खल्-'अस्खालीत् by 6 (1.) p. 165 ; नद-अनदीत्-अनादीत् by , p. 165 ; नन्द-अनन्दीत्. 10. सृज being Anit belongs to the 4th variety;--अ+ सृजन सीत्-सज by 4. p. 94-साज by 5, p. 165-सा by IX. साक by IV. p. 49-साक् + पीत् by note + p. 79 F. B.-अनाक्षीत. + 52- ·SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 169 11. Z Parasm. and Atm. being Set belongs to the 5th variety; Parasm. अवारीत. In the Arm. it takes lhoth the 4th and ith varieties by. (c.), p. 164. अं++ स्त-अ++त by 11, p. 166 अत; अ+ + इष्ट-वर + इष्ट by 13, P. 166-अवरिष्टः-वर् ईष्ट optionally by 3, p. 94-अवरीष्ट. 12. E with अधि being Ants belongs to the 4th Variety'; अधि + आ + इ + स्त-अधि + आ + ए + स्त-अधि +ऐ+ स्त-अध्यष्ट; or अधि +अ+गा+स्त-नी+स्त by2. p. 96-अध्यगीष्ट. दुष्टाञ् शब्दान्मा प्रयुक्ष्महि म्लेच्छाश्च मा भूमेत्यध्येयं व्याक- रणम् । ओदनं शाकांश्च सूदा, अंपाचरतोऽधुना सर्वान्ब्राह्मणान्भोजय । कनिष्टं पुत्रमहमव्रवं पुत्रक कुसुमपुरं गन्वा तत्रैकस्मिन्हे मया निक्षिप्तं धनमास्ते तद्गृहाण । सोऽगच्छत् । निवृत्य च मामब्रवी- त्तात भ्रातरो मे तत्रागत्यास्मभ्यमेतद्धनं पितादादिति वदन्तः सर्वमेव तदादिपत। यत्त्वं सत्यमवादीस्तत्तुभ्यमहमेतद्गवां शतं ददामि । त्वमात्मनः पूर्वभार्यामत्याक्षीरन्यां च पर्यणैषीरिति यदश्रीषं ततिक सत्यम् । मुग्धाकातिरतीव प्रियश्चावयोः शिशुरमृतेति शोकविकलोऽहं भार्या च मे । परं तु किं वृथाशोकेन सत्यमेव तद्यत्कविराह । कश्चैकान्तं सुखमुपगतो दुःखमेकान्ततो वा । नीचैर्गच्छत्युपरि च दशा चक्रनेमिक्रमेण ॥ ऋषयो वै सरस्वत्यां सत्रमासत । ते कवपमैलूपं सोमादनय- न्दास्याः पुत्रः कितवोऽब्राह्मणः कथं नो मध्येऽदीक्षिष्टेति । साचिव्ये मामेवान्यान्सर्वाननादृत्य राजाऽयौक्षीदतोऽभियु- केन मनसा मया कार्यमनुष्ठेयम् । अस्मिन्क्षेत्रे विपुलं धान्यमवाप्सम् । अङ्गीकृतं महत्कार्य पारयितुमक्षमा वयमुदनाम । अखिला मनोरथा मेऽफालिषुरतोऽहं सुखमस्वाप्सं न किंचि- दवेदिषम्। 15 ·170 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. किं नाद्याप्यग्निरथमद्राष्ट प्रत्यहं त्रिरनेन मार्गेण स नीयते । मुक्तकेशी मां. दृष्ट्वा दुर्योधनस्र्य भार्या भानुमत्यहसीत्तन्मे दहति देहमित्यव्रवीभीमं द्रौपदी। असमर्थोऽयमर्जुनो धार्तराष्ट्रैः सह योद्धमतः सभामान्यव- तिष्टेति जना युः। भार्या मे 'पुत्रमसविष्ट । अतो जातकर्मादिसंस्काराणां संभा- रान्करोमि। अधुनैव सोऽत्रागत्यायं पुरुषः सुविनीतोऽयं दुर्विनीत इति बहु प्रालापीत् । मैवं पुनः प्रलपीदित्येकदा तं भृशं ताडय । अस्माभिराशप्तः पौराणिक पुराणकथाः कथयितुमारब्ध तदेहि श्रोतुम्। परिचारकं मे दन्दशूकोऽदाढीत्तत्त्वरस्व भिषजं गत्वौषध- मानय। इयन्तं कालमुद्यमं कुर्वन्नपि सुखं नालप्सि तस्मानियति- लीयसी। महता प्रयत्नेन तेन संचितं धनमहथास्तस्मात्पापोऽसि गर्ह- णीयचरितोऽसि । तेऽभ्यगुर्भवनं तस्य सुप्तं चैक्षिषताथ तम् ॥ अवोचत्कुम्भकर्णस्तं वयं मन्त्रेऽभ्यधाम यत् । न त्वं सर्व तदोषीः फलं तस्येदमागमत् ॥ प्राज्ञवाक्यान्यवामंस्था मूर्खवाक्येष्ववास्थिथाः । अध्यगीष्ठाश्च शास्त्राणि प्रत्यपत्था हितं न च ॥ मूर्खास्त्वामववञ्चन्त ये विग्रहमचीकरन् । अभाणीन्माल्यवान्युक्तमक्षंस्थास्त्वं न तन्मदात् ॥ ततोऽक्रन्दीद्दशग्रीवस्तमाशिश्वसदिन्द्रजित् । निरकासीच संक्रुद्धः प्रार्चिचञ्च स्वयंभुवम् ॥ सोऽलब्ध ब्रह्मणः शस्त्रं स्यन्दनं च जयावहम् ।। प्रोदपाति नभस्तेन स च प्रापि महागिरिः । यस्मिन्नज्वालिषू रात्रौ महौषध्यः सहस्रशः॥

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 171 एतं ह वा ऐन्द्रं महाभिषेकं वासिष्ठः सात्यहव्योऽत्यरातये जानंतपये प्रोवाच । तस्माद्वत्यरातिर्जानंतपिरराजा" सन्विद्यया समन्तं सर्वसः पृथिवीं जयन्परीयाय । स होवांच वासिष्ठः सा- त्यहव्योऽजैषी समन्तं सर्वतः पृथिवीं सहन्मा गमयेति । स होवाचात्यरातिर्जानंतपिर्यदा ब्राह्मणोत्तरकुरूञ्जयेयमथ त्वमु हैव पृथिव्यै राजा स्वाः सेनापतिरेव तेऽहं स्यामिति । स होवाच वासिष्ठः सात्यहथ्यो देवक्षेत्रं वै तन्न वै तन्मयों जेतुमर्हत्यद्रुक्षो वै म आऽत इदं दद इति । ततो हात्यरातिं जानंतपिमात्तवीर्य निःशुक्रममित्रतपनः शुष्मिणः शैब्यो राजा जघान । The enemies ļāve burned [77] tiponty villages, and are now marching against the capital. The birds confined in the cage have all town (f Åtm. with उद्] away. The fiiends, whom I expected so long, are coine [गम् or t with आ], and have just alighted [त with अव ] from their carriages. We have lopped off [लू Or छिद् ] the branches of the trees in the garden.' They have dug [t] many canals communicating with the river Sindlıu, for agricultural purposes. When he said [] he could be a Sanskrit Pandita in ten days, I smiled [स्मि]. Yajñadatta has recently performed [, it with fet, or FYT with अनु] his sou's Upanayann ceremony. He gave [दा] much Dakshiņā to Brâhımaņas on that occasion. It was but just now that they remembereid [Fr] they had sent a man to call Govinda for aid. - * The changes of the final which some woul, unlergo at the end of comfwounds do not take bace in the case of Tatpurusha compounds with 3 ७. अन्. † Dutive user in the sense of the Genitive. ' द्रु here takes the seventh form, as it should by the general rules, and th is not changed to ध्. $ In the Velic dialco, a preposition need nut be immcdiately prefixed to a verb; several words may intervene.

·172 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. you Do not be afraid [xft with #T), it is not a cobra that see before you, but a rope! The English have killed [a] the ring-leaders and re-conquered (fr.with garç] the couutry. From his constantly sitting at home and not doing anything, have resulted (577 or with fag] poyefty, and many painful discases. Have you made' [ ] the ornaments that I told you to make? Show them to'me if you have. The king's surveyors have not yet measured (777) the whole land. We have turn [] all those papers, «now that tlfey are of 110 uso He has pounded (] the medicine, emptied [ft] the vessel, put (fer with fa] that powder into it, poured* water, and placed it on the fire. Govinda's wishes are gratified [a] and he is now liappy. He has abandoned [c77 with aft] all worldly affairs, and has now become a recluse [वज with परि]. We have not yet accepted (up with afa] the inoney they gale us yesterday. They are suiven [] their king faithfully. The traders have bought (nt with qft] all the cotton il the market, and sent [fe with a) it off to England. The monkeys lave broken [2754] the roof of the house. The brothers have divided [with fa] their ancestral property. I have endured (Ag] all the taunts of the people calmıly, and borue ( FR ) the responsibility of governing umintelruptedly. The tud kings have equipped (w with Fa] their armies for a battle. nitli जलेन 01 सिच् with नि. सिच् become- पिच् after नि.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 173 VOCABULARY XXIV. 377 n. raf. inable. comtaken away. FTF. m. a snake. sifato m. fire-carriaye, milway Ta f. state, condition. carriage. 1st conj. I'arism, to burn. aftufat m. name of a Kslixo u 1st conj. Atui. to consecrate triya. and thus tit oneself for per- अनुष्ठेय pot. part. of स्था rith formnings a sacrifice.. 3TE, what is to be executed. दुर्विनीक m. n. 1. rude. omfat m. an enemy. t 6th (0). Átm. rrith 31, to 3779TH past perl. pilles. pay respot to, to regir. manded. 34TET m. 10 f. fram 371 azidl.377 . destiny: 1997,n. the land of the gods. poane peert. puss. of zy to give, fa:14. n. f. powerle: * the dr. down, below. 371Frith Fi, to hold il sacri. ficial session, to perform a TH.. the circumference of a wheel. Succession of sacrifices, o [into. पत् rith प्र and to fly, to fly STTTT: M. plur. name of a Twith gfa, to know or undercountry beyond the llimastand, to accept, to du, to layas (probalily the original practise. sout of the Âryas.) TTTT m. one who serwis and syftar. above. "Yolains the Puranas, Waptra in. te f. invariable. Timely conj. l'aresild. एकान्ततः cule. invariably. crowned with success. in. son of Ilusha. #!st con l'arresiani îlm. औषध 1. a medicine. rrill fa, to divades 9 m. name of a person. भानुमती... wife Duryodhana, PRE m. a rogue, il dishonest the eldest son of Dhritarishatrik. person, a swindler, मन् STET, to disrurl. BUTT N. name of a town, HET ". lustre, greatness FPUTATE m. 1. f. that which brings #ETT 1. greatness, power. victory. TRITT IN. Name of a giant, the n. birth-ceremony. wat-nal 511 father of Friarg m. son of Junaiutapa. Ravana. In. an oppressor. Trifft.j. having the hair disor- 14 th conj. Para sın. to be derail or dishevelled. gratified or satisfipd. rut m. ni. f. of a lovely IT 1st conj. Parasm. to bite. form or shape. to le . -- ·174 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. म्लेच्छ m. a barbarian. शैव्य m. name of aking. [sorron. pq 1st conj. Parasm. with 9, to free m. n. f.:Percome with speak, to prattle. संत्रn. a sacrificial session. वञ्च 10th conj. Atm. to deceive. सरस्वती.. name of a river. वासिष्ठ m. a descendant of Vasi- साचिव्य n. counsellorship. शाक m. vegetable. [shtha. FITOTECT m. name of a priest. शुष्मिण m.n.f. powerful. सुविनीत m. 2.f. modest. . . Agricultural purpose, for, कृषि- | Painful व्यथाकर m. n. f. पीडाकर हेतोः, कृषिकर्मणे. m. n.. Ancestral पितृपैतामह m. n.f. Paper पत्रक . Cage पञ्जर M. Poverty दारिद्य ?. दुर्गति.. Canal कुल्या.. Powder क्षोद चूर्ण . Capiteराजधानी/. Property रिक्थ ०. वित्त n. Cobra फणिन् M. नाग m. Responsibility of governing Communicating संगत past part. राज्यधुरा.. or FITTEGHITT ?ires. part. Ringlendor प्रधानराजद्रोहिन् m. Confined नियन्त्रित past part. Root छदिस् ॥. पटल 2. pass. The past part. pass. Surveyor भूमापक n. Cotton तृल m. पिचु . Taunt उपालम्भ m. Disease व्याधि m. Trader वणिज n. Faithfully भक्त्या, निष्ठया. Uninterruptedly अविरतम् alr. Market पण्यवीधिका.. आपण m. Yajihadatta यज्ञदत्त .nauproper Medicine औषध . ओषधि f. a mcdicinal herb, yener, a herb. nanie. Part II. of of the 3rd BENEDICTIVE MOOD. 1. The Parasmaipala terminations of this mood are made up by adding TF to those of the Imperfect. The 3rd pers. plur. is यासुः and the TÆ is dropped before the व and and 2nd pers. sing. 2. To the terminations of the Atmanejada Potential and to the a and' et occurring in them prefix Ft. These will be the ter. minations of the Atmanepada Benedictive. पीध्वम् becomes पीदम् in the circumstances mentioned in 4, p. 77. 3. The Parasmaipada ternyinations are Reak, and the Atma. nepada strong.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRI. 175 change their Rules regarding the Parasmaipada forms. 4. Arts. & a, b, c, e, f and $, in Lesson XV., Pt. II., Lold good here also. 5. The roots' enumerated in Art. 3 d. on page 100, change their final vowel to ए. 6. Other roots ending in 3 preceded by a conjunct consonant, आ to ए optionally; as ग्लेयात्-लायात ग्लेयास्ताम्-ग्लाया. स्ताम् &c. from ग्लै. Âtmanepadla forms. 7. The terminations take after Set roots and optionally after those that are optionally Set. 8. Roots ending in ऋ (long), and in ऋ (short) preceded by a conjunct consonant, and & admit of इ optionally ; a वरिषीष्ट, वृषीष्ट (see below) from a, स्तरिपीष्ट, स्तृपोष्ट from . 9. Final # or # and the penultimatorowe do not undergo their Guna substitutes when the terminations do not take हपीष्ट from हृ, स्तरिपीष्ट, स्तीढुष्ट from मुक्षीष्ट from मुच. 10. In addition to the general rule for forming the passive of non-conjugational tenses and mooils by appending the Atmanepada trominations to the prepared base, Art. 3, p. 100, also holds good in the case of this mood. . s 1st pers. : " 1st pers. Parasm. Sing. Dual Plur. क्रियासम क्रियाम्ब क्रियाम्म 2nd क्रियाः क्रियाम्तम् क्रियाम्त 3rd क्रियात् क्रिनाम्ताम् क्रियासुः Atm. कृपीय कृषीवाहि कृषीमहि 2nd कृषीष्टाः कृपीयाम्थाम् कृपीदम् 3rd कृषीष्ट कृषीयास्ताम् . कृषीरन् 1. Explain the following forms, referring to the several rules applicable in each case: दिश्यात्, दिक्षीष्ट, रुमात्, रत्सीष्ट, उच्यात्, मर्यान्, म्तर्यान, नीयात्, नेषीष्ट, देयात, दासीष्ट, घाशीष्ट, गाहिपीष्ट, प्रेयात्, प्रायात्, तीर्यात, पूर्यात, उद्यात् बक्षीष्ट, मोदिषीष्ट, धुक्षीष्ट, दुधात्. 6. Give the Benedictive forms of the following roots :- ह, वप, यन , सह, नह, रुह, लिह, बन्य, ग्लै, हा, भि, भू, त्, रुच, दुलू, सो, स्तु, रु, शास्. " :- ·176 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. LESSON XXV. a. DESIDERATIVES. 1. a. The root is reduplicated according to the general rules given in Lesson XI. and Art. 3, p. 155; and then the termination appended to it.. In the conjugational tensen 3p is added to . 6. The sp in the reduplicative syllable is changed to g. 2. To this स् the augment is to be prefixed or not according as the root is Set or anıt subject to the following, exceptions:- ग्रह, गुह, and roots ending in 3 or 5. do 110admit of g; as fara afat. b. Átm., | Atm., Fi, yt, all of the 6th con., fen, Åtvi अञ्ज, प्रच्छ, ऋ, and अश admit of इ; a पिच्छिषति, दिधरिपते, Ac. Roots ending in ऋ and इन्, and the roots दृ, दम्भ, त्रि. Y, and take optionally; as "दुषति or दिदेविषति from दिव, शिश्रीपति Or शिश्रयिपति from श्रि, &c. 3. The general rule + of Guņa should be applied subject to the following exceptions:-- Roots ending in 5, 3, and + (all of them atroit ul long ) or having these vowels for their penultimates do not admit of Guņa when the # to be uppended to them dues not take the auginents; as Trufa, ferrafa. b. do not take Guna. Roots having 3 or q short for their penultimate, and beginning with an! consonant, and ending with any except q and admit ut Guna optionally, when the स् takes the augment ; as well पति, मुमुदिषते or मुमोदिषते, &e. is 4. Roots ending in a vowel lengthen it when the # unaugmented; as Hofrafa from f# 'to conquer.' lengthens its 37. 5. (८. ग्रह, स्वप and प्रच्छ change the and to se and 3 as bate; (sec 6, p. 85.) a. रुद, विद्, and हन also ** See note p. 182. † Nee Art. 6, p. 12.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 177 to क. b. The य of बुत् is chanond to in the reduplicative syllable. c. The contal of the follaving roots is clianged to rul the roots are not reduplicated : मि, मी, मा. दा, धा, and other roots assuming the forms of and धा, रझ लभ, शक, पत्, पद Of these, those ending in à vowel add a a d. आप has इंप्सति, and ज्ञप, जीप्सति and.जिज्ञपयिषति. दम्भ has three forms, चिप्सति, धीप्सति, दिदम्भिषति. तन्, has तितांसति, तितंसति, तितनिपति , and पत्, पित्सति, पिपतिपति. f. पू Atm. has पिपविषते and यु, यियविषति. # has affenfat and g with or when it aneans 'to be convinced,' प्रतीपिपति, इ in the sense of togo substituting गम्. k. The i of f5 is changed to n after the reduplicativo yllable, the of fe anul to 7, and the 7 of fa optionally (i. Desideratives may be formed fioin the causal base', or 100th of the tenth conjugation, according to the general rules. 7. Art. 4, p. 156, is applicable to the Desideratives of the Causal andoof roots of the 10th conjugation. A root in its desiderative form takes the same terminations (Parasmaipada, Atmanepaula, or botli) that it do's in the primitive. U. The desideratives of ज्ञा, श्रु, स्मृ, and इश are Âtianepadi. कृ. + स्- by 4, स् not takings by 2,-कीर hy 8 p. 2, not taking (Guna by 3 -चिकीर by 1 a.-चिकीर्षति, म heing changed to m and अ alurended to it by 1; IPurtism. by: a. मृ + स्-म-मूर-मुमूर-मुमूर्पति. भू + स्-बुभु by 1 a.-बुभूषति, स् not taking rhy a. and s not being changed to Guna by 3 a. ग्रह + स्-जगह-जिग्रह + स्, स् lot taking by 2 0.-जिगृह by ba.- जिगृद-जिघृद-जिघृक्-जिक + सति-जिघृक्षति शुन् + स्-दिद्युत् by 54.-दियोत् or दिद्युत् by 3 ८. स् tyking rhy 2-दियोतिषते दिद्युतिषते; Atm. liy 8 cu. भिद् + स्-विभिद् by 1 a.; no Guna by 3 a.-विभित्सति. a. By affixing 3 to the desiderative form, nouns sig- तन् and पत् are optionally wrt in the case of this स. a.

·178 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. wifying the 'wishers are formed. These nouns govern an accusative, as चिकीर्षुः कटम्. 6. By affixing 37 abstract nouns are formed ; as foNTH desire of knowledge,' 'curiosity.' प्रारिप्सितस्य ग्रन्थस्याविघ्नपरिसमाप्तय इष्टदेवतां स्तौति स्वयंवरकाले सीतां लिप्सवोरावणादयो बहवो राजानो विदे- हाञ्जग्मुः। कि तु रुद्रधनुर्नमयितुमशक्ताः सर्वे भग्नाशा बभूवुः। अभितापसंपदमथोष्णरुचिनिजतेजसामसहमान इव । पयसि प्रपित्सुरूपराम्बुनिधेरधिरोदुमस्तगिरिमभ्यपतत् ॥ ब्रह्मतत्त्वं जिज्ञासमानः कश्चिदाचार्यमुपेत्याध्यापय भो ब्रह्म- त्युवाच । तसां सभायामेव दुर्योधनं गदाघातेन जिघांसुीमसेनो यु- धिष्ठिरेण निवारितः। यियक्षमाणेनाहूतः पार्थेनाथ द्विषन्मुरम् । अभिचैद्यं प्रतिष्ठासुरासीत्कार्यद्वयाकुलः॥ प्रासादतलमारुरुक्षुः सोपानपङ्किषु पदं निधत्ते । यूरोपीयवैभवं दिदृक्षमाणाः प्रतिसंवत्सरं कतिचिद्भरतख- ण्डीया अङ्गभूम्यादिदेशानग्निनौकाभिर्गच्छन्ति । ब्राह्मणी बुभूषू राजर्षिविश्वामित्र उग्रं तपश्चके ।। प्रभूतवर्षणादस्या नद्याः कूलं पिपतिषति । तदस्मिन्मा पदं निधेहि। सूर्यवंशसंभवानां राज्ञां यशो जिगासुः कालिदास आह । क्क सूर्यप्रभवो वंशः क्व चाल्पविषया मतिः। तितीर्घर्दुस्तरं मोहादुडुपेनास्मि सागरम् ॥ भूरि धनमादित्सुना बलेनानुगम्यमानः शरदारम्भे दिगन्ता- जिगीषू रघुरयोध्यायाः प्रतस्थे । बटुमुपनिनीषुराचार्यः स्वाधिकारसिद्धये कृच्छ्रत्रयं कुर्यात् । राजगृहं प्रविविक्षुर्ऋषिकुमारको हठानिःसारितो दुर्विनीतै- रिपालैः। आत्मनः कौशलं दिदर्शयिपन्त्यङ्गना महान्तं कालमनृत्यत् । अर्थयन्ते द्विजन्मानो तस्मादर्थ यियक्षतः। अर्थापयत्यसौ सम्यग् दुर्बुद्धं वैदिकं वचः॥

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 179 [ ] The dog is about to die* [?]; do not disturb him. Wishing to benıl [caus. (of th] the branch of the tree, he raised his old. А very violent storm arose, the sun was invisible, and it appeared as if the wind was going to trůr with all trees by tlm roots, and tų destroy [ ) all houses. Vis'vâmitra practised austerities for a thousand years, till his whole frame, instinct with the subtle principle of Brahma, became refulgent, and he appeared to be about to burn (a) the whole universe by lus extraordinary splendour.. Having seen his own kinsmen prepared to tight (TU) with him, his fige became väle. This child is inclined to sleep (FTT), put him into the cradle, and rock him to sleep. There is a man waiting at the door who wants tu spreceli (19) to you on matters of gr valt importance. He who wishes to be free from the tranımels of the world (life) shoulil go to a philosopher, be acquainted with the Bralima, and meditate on it. Those who risk to introduce [ cans. of वृत् with ystem of widow-marriages should proceed at once to the task ; the time for discussion is gone. In that battle there was a soldier, who, being rounded, was afflicted with a raging thirst (desire to drink [91]). Dhrishtaketu was about to strile ( with a) a Rishi with liis sword, mistaking him for his enemy, when I caught hold of his hand. I went to Kâs i intending to bathe (776) in the holy waters of the Ganges, and to live [FÆ with ] there for two years to study the Sainkhya philosophy. The two girls weyiuto the garden intending to gather (for with sta] Howers. The self-existeut God, desirous to create (qan] thic world, appeared on the surface of the waters, which covered the [ ] the whole space. * l'se desidcrative forms for the expressions printed in Italics.

·180 SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. The parrot that was confined in the cage this morning is about to fly away (ET, or ga with 3). VOCABULARY XXV. 7 37f717 m. btitness to performers n. Lank. any ceremony. कृच्छत्रय n. à penance. 3797fafa m. (37TT other, i.l., and 77 thre) three penances, western, and TFT ocean) with सम्, to store. the western ocean. Erta 1. the end of quarters, अभिचैद्यम् (. (from चैव m the countries in all directions. king of Chedi, who was Krislina's enemy) THE m.i. Je difficult to be under Lowards stood, olscure. Chaidya ofwary m. violent beat. SITTEN. a porter, a cloorkcep. 57f 10th conj. Åtm. to beg. oft rrith 39, to perform the cerr mony of the investiture na perfez denom. Parusm. and the sacred thread. âtm. to explain. Th. f. a line, a row. 39fat f. not comprehensive, whose range is small. पत् ॥ith अभि, to jump towards. m.01.f. without obstacle. qTfarg.f.cond,rccomplishmen. stafft m. the western moun- Taue m. n. f. violent. tain, on which the sun, 2001, U n. all aim). and stills are supposed to set. 179 past part. Misè. of to 371718 12. a religious teacher destroy, blown up, destroyed. who invests the student with भूरि 17. 17. ſ. much, the sacred thread, and in- IT m. jame of an enemy of structs him in the Vedas. Vislıņu or Krishna. 3779TT.f. hope. TTT m. n. 4. pertaining t. fegaalf. tutelar (ilesired) deity. the continent of Europe. gg in. n. f. raging, severe. with th, to ascend. Jy m. n. a raft, & canoe. a 12. in-fall, raining. Storfor m. the sun. & 10th conj. with fa, to oppose qara pron. several. to dissuade from, Ar m. n. 1. distracted by * m. n. f. belonging to : having two things to do at Veda, E m. birth. one time.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 181 Fica n. name of a system of mn. the family of the sun, philosophy, the solar ruce. & (curs.) witdi Vars, to drive fra 1. stairs, steps. a way, to exped Tota Mell. lig violence. feft.l. accomplishment Aflicted आर्त past part. अर्दित Kinsmun ज्ञाति m. बन्धु . Pale past part. passo m. 11. j. faeui m. H. J. Cage पअर m. Philosopher तत्वविद m.. Cralle प्रेटा.. Raging प्रबल m.n.fबलीयम् ॥.n.J. Discussion वादविवाद . Rals नम् caus. with उत्. . Disturb Refulgent a pes. part. TE Extraordinary ya mo... Futura pres, purt. Rockateqilen. or आन्दोलयु ilen. Importance गुरुत्व n. महत्त्व १.; a matter of importance गुरु- Subtle principle H17 N. कार्य. System Efs m. qafa/. Instinct safera past part. puss. Trammel Forn face ni. 11. nga past part. pass, Violent qque m. H. f. Invisible अश्य m. n. J. LESSON XXVI. (L. VERBAL DERIVATIVES. 1. After Set roots the augnient ę is to be prefixed tu the तुम् of the infinitive of purpose, and not after Anit ones, and optionally after those that are both Set and Anit. 2. The of the past participle is to be considered as aweak* termination. Therefore the Guna change (6 p. 12) clocs not take place, and such rulcs us 4 p. 83 and 8 p. 2 are applicable ; 1-7, 7-5477. 6. The general rule about the augment < (1 above) should be attended to. There are, liowever, many exceptions. The following roots do not admit :- (1) Those ending in 3, 5, and #, as 5-7, 7-11, Trof. * By this expression is meant such a tcrmination as does not occasion a Guna ni Vriddlu change in the preecling. 16 C.

·182 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. श e. (2) Such as take optionally before any termination whatever. IT-TÉ (2 p. 94), 71-ET (2 c. 9. 170), fera-** «(2 c.p. 176), 9-99-46 p. 77 and I. a., 4. 86), X-Filed! (6 a. p. 183 and h. below). And there are several more. d. After a final and र the becomes , and the preceding t is also changed to न्; as भिन्न from भिद्, शीर्ण from It is also changed to 7 after roots ending in 37 and beginping with a conjunct consonant containing 7, a, Ę, ora, and also after several other roots. Exceptions-le, far 7th, conj., s'À, ST, and gt change the 7 to 7 optionally, and E71, ETT, and मद् do not. f. The vowels of aft, fe 1st conj., fag, fata, and धूत्र undergo Guņa substitutes when they admit of <. 9. The nasals of यम्, रम्, नम्, गम्, हन्, मन्, तन्, क्षण, क्षिण, ऋण, and वन् are dropped; as गत from गम्, तत from तन्. h. Other roots ending in अम् and अन् lengthen thei vowel when they do not take ; as 7-777, TH-EITAG, cra (6. a. p. 183 and 6 r. 77). i. Tlte penultimate nasal is dropped when a does not take इ. रञ्-रक्त, अञ्ज-अक्त. 3. a. The active past participle is formed by affixing वत् to the passive; as कृतवान् from कृ, लब्धवान् from लभ. 6. The feminine of this is formed by adding &; as Einari 4. The active participle of the Perfect is formed by Parasm. and आन Atm. to that form of the root which it assumes before the weak terminations of the Perfect, such as that of the third person plural. 0. When this form is monosyllabic, i. e., contains one vowel only, or when the root ends in 371, & should be prefixed to वस् 'घस् also admits of ; as ददिवस् from दा, पेतिवस् from पद but चकृवस्-चकाण from कृ, जहवस्-जहाण from हु. * Final Fan changed 10 5. before a wcah terminatiou beginnmg with an! consonant except a nasal or a sem vowel. This 3. forms Vriddhi with the precedmg 34 01 3TT. as 1. adding वस् ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 183 c. e. After the far 6th conj., farzt, and श, वस् takes I optionally; as जग्मिवस् or *जरान्वस् from गम् d. Before and आन some roots such as बन्ध, अंज, &c., drop the nasal and roots in long # do pot take (miņa; as st- FEA, Fada. The first change, however, woes not take place in the Perfect and the last does. The form of the 3rd pers. plural of the Perfect should be taken as the base of the participle before the vowel terminations of the cases beginning with the accusative plural and before the & of the feminine and of the dual nom. and acc. of the neuter, as चिक्रीवस्-चिक्रियुषा Instr. Sing: चिकिपुषी f, जगन्वस् br जग्मिवम्-जामुषा Instr.sing. जग्मुषी: The form, however, shoulıl be modified according to d ,mt the particular cases. 5. The participle of the second Future is formed by adding Bra Parasm. and Arytm. to a form of that tense divested of its personal termination. The preceding sy is to be dropped before अत्, as करिष्यत् being about to do'; करिष्य- AMT (active) 'being about to do,' (passive) ' being about to be done'; FETT ' being about to sce'; 7741o being about to be seen The fenſinine of Fra is Freit or Fyrft. 6. the indeclinable past participle takos I in the case of Set roots, and optionally, in the case of ordinary Set roots ending in अम् or अन्. 8. It is a weak termination; but in some cases when it takes the vowel takes its Guna substitute. C. 2 g. and h. above, are applicable when it does not take तन्-तत्वा or तनित्वा by 6 cl. and this, मन्-मत्वा, शम्-शान्त्वा or शमित्वा &c. d. यम्, रम्, गम्, and नम् diop their final husal bptionally before the g of the indeclinable past participle, and the remaining roots out of those given in 2 y. above, drop it necessarily. (l. The त्वा * See Nute p. 77.

·184 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. C. froin th 7. The terminations of the potential* passive participle are तव्य, अनीय, and . b. Before you and stir, the ending voweloand the pen. ultimate short take their Gona. nou odmits of ç in the case of Set roots, &c. d. (1) Before the final and penultimate F and 7 take their Guna, the final 37 becoming 7; as ea, fiige (2). The ending s is changed to t; as from 27. (3) Roots ending in # change it to its Vșiddhi; as and (4) g, b, c Parasm. and Átm., 7, 4, and roots having a penultimate # do not change their vowel before . After a short vowel q is prefixed to y; as Fea. There are some exceptions to these rules, which are too various to be mentioned. 8. The affixes तृ and 37% form nouns denoting the doer' of the action expressed by the root. b. Before tlie former the ending vowel and the penultimate short take their Guña substitute; and c. before the latter, the ending vowel and the penultimate 37 (except that of Set roots ending in ) take Vriddhi, and any other penultimate short, Guna ; as नेतृ, नायक from नी; वक्तृ, वाचक from वचं बाड़े, बोधक from शम्, चम् with आ forms आचामक. d. Roots ending in 37 have y added on to them befole this अक; as स्थायक, दायक, from FITT and दा. The of हन् is changed to त् before a derivative suffin which effects a Vriddhi change in the vowel; as graff, (see 19 p. 167). f. The feminine of तृ is ñ and of अक, इका a. from बुध, शमक C. and sometimes . 9. a. 37A, 37, and fa form abstract invins from roots. 6. Palais a weak termination. Before it, the roots undergo nearly the same changes as before the termination of the past participle; as वच-उक्ति, मुच-मुक्ति. * This is passive when the verb is transitive, and impersonal when the verb is intransitive.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 185 C. भा Before some roots take Guna and some Vșiddhi; and before the ending vowel and the penultimate short take Guna;asभाव भवन, जि-जय, हन्-घात-हनन, खुर-बोध-बोधन. ll. The final la or 'is changed to or a beture this sp; a पच-पाक, युज-योग. 10. Nouns ending in for are feminine and those epiling in stare masculine while those ending in ga are nruter, as a general rule. तस्मादेवं विदुषे ब्राह्मणायैवं चक्रुषे ने क्षत्रियो द्रुह्यात् ।। गजा यक्ष्यमाणो ब्राह्मणं पुरोदधीत ।। छन्दांसि वै देवेभ्यो हव्यमूवी श्रान्तानि जघनार्धे यास्य तिष्ठन्ति यथाश्वो वाश्वतरो वोहिवांस्तिष्ठेदेषम् । असुरैः सह योत्स्यमान इन्द्रो वरुणस्य साहाय्यं ययाचे । वरुणसाहाय्यं लब्धवतस्तस्मात्सर्वेऽसुरा अबिभयुः। व्यर्थ मे जन्म न मया कृतं कर्तव्यं न भुक्तं भोक्तव्यं न दृष्ट द्रष्टव्यं न श्रुतं श्रोतव्यम् । निषेदुषीं राशीं दृष्ट्वा दास्योऽपि सपत्नीवृत्तं कथयिष्य- न्त्योऽधस्तस्थुः। ब्राह्मणेभ्यो दत्तसर्वस्वो रघुः प्रत्यमागतायाथिने धनं दित्सुः कुबेरात्तनिष्कष्टुं चकमे । कुबेरस्तु तेनाभियास्यमानमात्मानं प्रेक्ष्य स्वयमेव तस्य कोशे धनवृष्टिं पातयामास । तत्सर्व धनमा- त्मने ददिवांसं रघु वक्ष्यमाणामाशिषं सोऽर्युवाच । आशास्यमन्यत्पुनरुक्तभूतं श्रेयांसि सर्वाण्यधिजग्मुषस्ते । पुत्रं लभस्वात्मगुणानुरूपं भवन्तमीड्यं भवतः पितेव ॥ ततो रघुः पुत्र प्रापाजं नाम । तं कतिभिः संवत्सरैविवाहयो- ग्यदर्श ज्ञात्वा ससैन्यमिन्दुमतीस्वयंवराय विदर्भान्प्रस्थापि- तवान् । मार्गे नर्मदारोधस्येकरात्रमुषितवतस्तस्य सेनानिवेशी वन्य- जत्वमृषिशापात्समापेदानेन केनचिद्गन्धर्वेण तुमुलचके । * The metres of the verses repeated at a sacute ale -uppsed to carry lie utfenngs to the gods.

·186 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. तमापतन्तं नृपतेरवध्यो वन्यः करीति श्रुतवान्कुमारः। निवर्तयिष्यन्विशिखेनं कुम्भे जघान नात्यायत्तकृष्टचापः॥ स "विद्धमात्रः स्वीयं दिव्यं रूपं प्राप । ततः प्रजहुषेऽप्या- त्मन उपचक्रूषेऽजाय संमोहनाख्यमस्त्रं ददौ । एवं तयोरध्वनि दैवयोगादविदुषोः सख्यमचिन्त्यहेतु । एको सयौ चैत्ररथप्रदेशान्सौराज्यरम्यानपरो विदर्भान् । तं नगरोपकण्ठे तस्थिवांसं तदागमनहृष्टो विदर्भनाथः प्रत्यु- जगाम नगरं चानीय संर्वी सत्कियां चकार । त्रैलोक्यदीपके देवे लोकान्तरमुपेयुषि । तमस्तान्तमभूद्विश्वं कः सुखी महदापदि.॥ Valmiki cursed the Nishada, who had killedt [हन् ] one of a pair of Krauñcha birds. The Rishi blesscd the prince who liad promised [ with श्रु प्रति] to give him a hundred cows. Vidura gave the Pandavas some advice when they were about to go [गम् or s] to Varanavati. Before he burnt [दह ] the town, the General removed all the women and children from it. Before ordering (feat with 3 ) that the money should be iestored to him, the judge counselled him to conduct himself properly. Before Yajñadatta was permitted (sT with ] to go away from Kás'i, Devadatta told him to perform penances for the sins he had committed. When she was about to be sent [fy orgy with a ) to lier husband's house, Kanva told Sakuntala to go round the fire, and counselled her not to be proud of her greatness. The garments which are to be gi'ren l] to Visliņu very good and costly. are * . 'only, simply : The termination मात्र. as applied to nouns, means विद्धमात्र, “simply or only hit." + The student should use verbal derivatives for the worls and expres-2011 printed in Italics.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 187 That tree is to be cut douin (Far). What is to be understooct: [ ] from the curious message he has sent? Jarásamdlia, kho lud conquerel (f) all kings and imprisoned them, was killed by Krisliņa and Bhiwan His word is not trustcowthy [with fa ] and his deeds are censurable (fr). That is not an eatable [ 1721, or e with sifat and sta'] nor a Trinkable [9] thing; why should week it ? He, having shown soine signs of wisdom; is no more to be vegarded (F) as a foul. . I with VOCABULARY XXVI. MF m. name of Raghu's son. 4th conj. l'arcisin. to be dis- Frutta alv. or m. n.f. very, far, tressecl, very long. 97 m. il... that which lights 3TTA alv. down, ир. STTTT m. n. f. in accordance पुरम्, to make one a fawith. mly priest. TATOTT m. a mule. TAT. f. naine of a river. TENT . naine. पुनरुत्तभृत m.n:/. (पुनरुक्त repeatout f. the name of a laly. ed or a repetition, and 395703 n. space near a town or become, like a repetition. village, or its boundary. FOTOM. 1. . orale. rcent, Fit4 m. the frontal globe on fresh. upper part of the forehead M. u region. of an elephant. TITAN. bank. Trith 39, to do gooil. लोकान्तरम् n. (अन्यो लोक लोका- गम् with प्रति and उद्, to advance - another world. towards. वच with आशिषम्, to give a चैत्ररथ m. the country or region blessing of the Gandharvas. at in. n. f. produced or exist- 3 n, a metre. ing in a forest. Frar .. (3777 n. the hip, the TENT m. goil of the sea. binder part of anything, and fert m. (in the plur.) the name ut half) the latter or hinder of a country, the modern part. Berals. the ·188 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. विशिख m. an arrow. सत्क्रिया f. hospitality. दृष्टि.f. rain. संपत्नी f. a fellow-wife. सर्वस्व n. (सर्व 21 and स्व n.) all शाप m. a curse. शास Atm. 2nd conj. too wealth or possession. [army, wish; to bless. सेनानिवेश m. the camp of an संमोहन . name of a miraculous सौराज्य m. good government. weapon. हव्य 1. an offering. with TT Conduct properly सदाचारं प्रति-Nishida निषाद m. name of a wild पद, सदाचारेण हत. tribe or an individual of it. Costly महाई m. n.fool Proud उत्सित past part., उत्से- Curious विलक्षण m. n... किनी/ Go round प्रदक्षिणीकृत Restorerदा wite प्रति.. Imprison कारागृहे निक्षिप. Sign चिह्न Jarasanidha जरासंध m. name of Varanavati वारणावती.f. name of a king of Magadlia. [birds. a place. Kraulicha कौन m. a species of Vidura विदुर am. a proper name. SELECTIONS FOR EXERCISE. I. (From the AITARETA BRAHMANA-PAÑCHIKÂ, 7). हरिश्चन्द्रो ह वैधस ऐक्ष्वाको राजाऽपुत्र *आस । तस्य ह शतं जायां बभूवुः । तासु पुत्रं न लेभे । तस्य ह पर्ववनारदौ गृह ऊषतुः। स ह नारदं पप्रच्छ । यश्विमं पुत्रमिच्छन्ति ये विजानन्ति ये च न । किंस्वित्पुत्रेण विन्दते तन्म आचश्व नारद ॥ इति । स एकया पृष्टो दशभिः प्रत्युवाच । ऋणमस्मिन्त्सिंनयत्यमृतत्वं च गच्छति । पिता पुत्रस्य जातस्य पश्येच्चेजीवतो मुखम् ॥ यावन्तः पृथिव्यां भोगा यावन्तो जातवेदसि । यावन्तो अप्सु प्राणिनां भूयान्पुत्रे पितुस्ततः॥ शश्वतमुत्रेण पितरोऽत्यायन्बहुलं तमः॥ * Perfect of अस् ' to the.' in classical Sanskrit it is used only as an auxilury to form the Periphrastic Perfect. † Understand after this, ITPUT a veine.' . is optionally inserted between a final, and H.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 189 अथैनमुवाच वरुणं राजानमुपधाव पुत्रो मे जायतां तेन त्वा यजा इति । तथेति । स वरुणं राजानमुपससार पुत्रो मे जायतां तेन त्वा यजा इति । तथेति । तस्य ह पुत्रो जझे रोहितो नाम । तं होवाचाजनि ते वै पुत्रो यजस्व मानेनेति । स होवाच यदा वै पशुनिर्दशो ,भवत्यथ स मेध्यो भवति निर्दशो न्वस्त्वय त्वा यजा इति । तथेति । स ह निर्दश आस । तं होवाच निर्दशो न्वभूधजस्व मानेनेति । स होवाच यदा वै पशोर्दन्ता जायन्तेऽथ स मेध्यो भवति दन्ता न्वस्य जायन्तामथं त्वा यजा इति।तथेति। तस्य ह दन्ता जशिरे । तं होवाचाशत वा अस्य दन्ता यजस्व मानेनेति । स होवाच यदा वै पशोर्दन्ताः पद्यन्तेऽथ स मेध्यो भवति दन्ता न्वस्य पद्यन्तामथ त्वा यजा इति । तति । तस्य ह दन्ताः पेदिरे । तं होवाचापत्सत वा अस्य दन्ता यजस्व मानेनेति । स होवाच यदा वै पशोर्दन्ताः पुनर्जायन्तेऽथ स मेध्यो भवति दन्तान्वस्य पुनर्जायन्तामथ त्वा यजा इति । तथेति । तस्य ह दन्ताः पुनर्जज्ञिरे । तं होवाचाशत वा अस्य पुनर्दन्ता यजस्व मानेनेति । स होवाच यदा वै क्षत्रियः सांनाहुको भव- त्यथ स मेध्यो भवति संनाहं नु प्राप्नोत्वथ त्वा यजा इति तथेति । स ह संचाहं प्रापत्तं होवाच संनाहं नु प्रामोद्यजस्व मानेनेति । स तथेत्युक्त्वा पुत्रमामन्त्रयामास ततायं वै मह्यं त्वामददाधन्त त्वयाहमिमं यजा इति । स ह नेत्युक्त्वा धनुरादायारण्यमपा. तस्थौ । स संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार । अथ हैस्वाकं वरुणो जग्राह । तस्य होदरं जज्ञे । तदुह रोहितः शुश्राव । सोऽरण्याग्राममेयाय तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच । नानाश्रान्ताय श्रीरस्तीति रोहित शुश्रुम । पापो नृषद्वरो जन इन्द्र इञ्चरतः सखा ॥ चरैवेति । चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह द्वितीयं सं- वत्सरमरण्ये चचार । सोऽरण्याब्राममेयाय। तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्यत्योवाच । .. * 3rd pers. plul. Aoist of जन् (Indir).

·190 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. पुष्पिण्यौ चरतो जङ्के भूष्णुरात्मा फलमहिः । *शेरेऽस्य सर्वे पाप्मानः श्रमेण प्रपथे हताः चरैवेति । चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोन्नदिति तृतीयं संवत्स रमरण्ये चचार । सौऽरण्याब्राममेयाय । तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच । आस्ते भग आप्लीनस्योर्ध्वस्तिष्ठति तिष्ठतः । शेते निपद्यमानस चराति चरतो भगः॥ चरैवेति । चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह चतुर्थ संवत्स- रमरण्ये चचार । सोऽरण्याद्राममेयाय । तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच । कलिः शयानो भवति संजिहानस्तु द्वापरः। उत्तिष्ठंत्रेता भवति कृतं संपद्यते चरन् । चरैवेति । चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह पञ्चमं संवत्स- रमरण्ये चचार । सोऽरण्याद्राममेयाय । तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच । चरन्वै मधु विन्दति चरन्त्स्वादुमुदुम्बरम् । सूर्यस्य पश्य श्रेमाणं यो न तन्द्रयते चरन् ॥ चरैवेति । चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह षष्ठं संवत्सर मरण्ये चचार । सोऽजीगत सौयवसिमृषिमशनया परीतमरण्य उपेयाय । तस्य ह त्रयः पुत्रा आसुः शुनःपुच्छः शुनःशेपः शुनो- लाल इति । तं होवाच ऋषेऽहं ते शतं ददाम्यहमेषामेकेना- त्मानं निष्कीणा इति । स ज्येष्ठं पुत्रं निगृह्वान उवाच न विम- मिति नो एवेममिति कनिष्ठं माता । तौ हमध्यमे संपादयांचक्र तुः शुनाशेपे । तस्य ह शतं दत्त्वा स तमादाय सोऽरण्याद्राममे- याय । स पितरमेत्योवाच तत हन्ताहमनेनात्मानं निष्कीणा इति। स वरुणं राजानमुपससारानेन त्वा यजा इति । तथेति भूयान्वै * 3rd pers. plur. of शी pres. tense (Indic).

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT, 191 ब्राझणः क्षत्रियादिति वरुण उवाच । तस्मा एतं राजसूयं यह- क्रतुं प्रोवाच । तमेतमभिषेचन पुरुष पशुमालेभे। तस्य ह विश्वामित्रो होतासीजमदग्निरध्वर्युर्वसिष्ठो ब्रह्मायास्य उदाता । तस्मा उपाकृताय नियोक्तारं न विविदुः । स होवा- चाजीगतः सौयवसिर्मह्यमपएं शतं दत्ताहमेनं नियोक्ष्यामीति । तस्मा अपरं शतं ददुस्तं स *निनियोज । तसा उपाहताय नि- युक्तायाप्रीताय पर्यग्निकृताय विशसितारं न विविदुः। स होवा- चाजीगर्तः सौयवसिमामपरं शतं दत्ताहमेनं विशसिष्यामीति । तस्मा अपरं शतं दतुः। सोऽसि निःशान एयाय। अथ ह शुन-शेप ईक्षांचक्रेऽमोनुषामिव वै मा विशसिष्यन्ति हन्ताहं देवता उपधा- वामीति । स प्रजापतिमेव प्रथमं देवतानामुमससार । तं प्रजाप- तिरुवाचाग्निर्वे देवानां नेदिष्टस्तमेवोपधावेति।सोऽग्निमुपससार। तमग्निरुवाच सविता वै प्रसवानामीशे। तमेवोपधावेति । सस- वितारमुपससार।तं सवितोवाच वरुणाय पैराशे नियुक्तोऽसीति तमेघोपधाति । स वरुणं राजानमुपससार । तं वरुण उवाचा- ग्नि देवानां मुखं सुहृदयतमस्तं नु स्तुह्यथ त्वोत्स्रक्ष्याम इति । सोऽग्निं तुष्टाव । तमग्निरुवाच विश्वान्देवान्स्तुह्यथ त्वोल्स्रक्ष्याम इति । स विश्वान्देवांस्तुष्टाव । तं विश्वेदेवा ऊचुरिन्द्रो चै देवा- नामोजिष्ठो बलिष्ठः सहिष्ठः सत्तमः पारयिष्णुतमस्तं नु स्तुह्य- थ त्वोत्नश्याम इति । स इन्द्रं तुष्टाव । तस्मा इन्द्रः स्तूयमानः प्रीतो मनसा हिरण्यरथं ददौ । तमिन्द्र उवाचाश्विनौ नु स्तु- ाथ त्वोत्नस्याम इति । सोऽश्विनौ तुष्टाव । तमश्विना ऊचतु- रुषसं नु स्तुह्यथ त्वोत्स्रक्ष्याम इति । स उषसं तुष्टाव । तस्यह स्मय॒च्युक्तायां विपाशो मुमुचे । कनीय ऐश्वाकस्योदरं भवति । उत्तमस्यामेवर्युक्ताम् विपाशो मुमुचे । अगद ऐक्ष्वाक आस । Instead of the first syllable of the root, the preposition reeins 10 buc reduplicated here. + 3rd pers. sing. pres. Ved.; regularly it ought to be ईटे. * This stands for the lymu sung by Sunahis'epa in praise of L'shas ur thie Iawn.

·192 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. गच्छन्तः II. त्याणां धूर्तानाम् । कस्मिंश्चिदधिष्ठाने मित्रशर्मा नाम ब्राह्मणः तिवसति स स कद्गाचिमाघमासे पशुप्रार्थनाय प्रामान्तरं गतः । तत्र ते कश्चिद्यजर्मानो याचितः। भो यजमान आगामिन्याममावास्याय यक्ष्यामि यज्ञं तद्देहि मे पशुमेकम् । अथ तेन तस्य शास्त्रोक्त पीवरतनुः पशुः प्रदत्तः। सोऽपि तं समर्थमितश्चेतश्च मवलोक्य स्कन्धे कृत्वा सत्वरं स्वपुराभिमुखः प्रतस्थे । अथ तस्य गच्छतो मार्गे त्रयो धूर्ताः संमुखा बभूवुः । तेच तादृशं पीवरतनुं पशुं स्कन्धमारूढमवलोक्य मिथोऽभिहितम्। अहो अस्य पशोर्भक्षणादयतनो हिमपातो व्यर्थतां नीयते । तदेनं वञ्चयित्वा पशुमादाय शीतत्राणं कुर्मः। अथ तेषामेकतमो वेषपरिवर्तनं विधाय संमुखो भूत्वा तमू चे । भो भोः किमेवं जनविरुद्धं हास्यकार्यमनुष्ठीयते यदेष सार मेयोऽपवित्रः स्कन्धारूढो नीयते । ततश्च तेन कोपाभिभूतेनाभि- हितमहो किमन्धो भवान्यत्पशुं सारमेयं प्रतिपादयसि । सोऽत्र- वीब्रह्मन् कोपस्त्वया न कार्यों यथेच्छं गम्यतामिति । अथ यावकिचिध्वान्तरं गच्छति तावद्वितीयो भूर्तः संमु. खः समुपेत्य तमुवाच । भो ब्रह्मन् कष्टं कष्टं यद्यपि वल्लभोऽयं ते सारमेयस्तथापि स्कन्धमारोपयितुं न युज्यते । अथासौ स. कोपमिदमाह । भोः किमन्धो भवान्यत्पशुं सारमेयं वदसि । सोऽब्रवीद्भगवन् मा कोपं कुर्वज्ञानान्मयाभिहितम् । त्वमात्मरं. चितं समाचरेति। अथ वावत्स्तोकं वान्तरं गच्छति तावत्तृतीयोऽन्यवेषधारी धूर्तः संमुखः समुपेत्य तमुवाच । भो अकुतमेतद्यत्त्वं सारमेयं स्कन्धाधिरूढं नयसि तत्त्यज्यतामेष यावदन्यः कश्चिन्न पश्यति । अथासौ बहु विमृश्य तं पशुं सारमेयमेव मन्यमानो भया झूमौ प्रक्षिप्य स्वगृहमुद्दिश्य पलायितः । ततस्ते त्रयो मिलित्या तं पशुमादाय प्रतस्थिरे।

·SECOND BOOK OF RAYAKRIT. 193 ब्राह्मणभुजंगमयोः। अस्ति कस्मिंश्चिदधिष्ठाने हरिदत्तो नाम ब्राह्मणः । तस्य च कृषि कुर्वतः सदैव निष्फलः 'कालोऽतिवर्तते । अथैकस्मि- दिवसे स ब्राह्मणो धर्मार्तः स्वक्षेत्रमध्ये वृक्षच्छाराज्यां प्रसुप्तः । अनतिदूरे वल्मीकोपरि प्रसारितं भीषणं भुजंगमं दृष्ट्वासौ चिन्तयामास । मूनमेषा क्षेत्रदेवता कदाचिदपि न पूजिता ते- नेदं मे कृषिकर्म विफलीभवति तदहमस्याः पूजामद्य करिष्या- मि । इत्यवधार्य कुतोऽपि क्षीरं याचिस्वा शरावे निक्षिप्य व- ल्मीकान्तिकमुपगम्योवाच । भोः क्षेत्रपाल मयैतावन्तं कालं न ज्ञातं यत्त्वमत्र घससि तेन पूजा न कृता तत्सांप्रतं क्षमस्वे- ति । एवमुक्त्वा दुग्धं निवेध गृहाभिमुखं प्रायात् । अथ प्रातर्यावदागत्य पश्यति तावद्दीनारमेकं शरावे दृष्ट- वान् । एवं च प्रतिदिनमेकाकी समागत्य तस्मै क्षीरं ददात्ये- कैकं च दीनारं गृह्णाति । अथैकस्मिन्दिवसे वल्मीके क्षीरनयनाय पुत्रं नियुज्य ब्राह्म- णो ग्रामं जगाम.। पुत्रोऽपि क्षीरं तत्र नीत्वा संस्थाप्य च पुन- गृहं समायातः। दिनान्तरे तत्र गत्वा स दीनारमेकं दृष्टा गृही- त्वा च चिन्तितवान् । नूनं सौवर्णदीनारपूर्णोऽयं वल्मीकस्तदेनं भुजंगं हत्वा सर्वमेकवारं ग्रहीष्यामि । एवं संप्रधार्याम्येद्युः क्षीरं ददता ब्राह्मणपुत्रेण सी लगुडेन शिरसि ताडितः । स च दैववशादमुक्तजीवितो रोषात्तं ब्राह्मणकुमारं तीवविषैर्दशनैस्त- थादशद्यथा स सद्यः पञ्चत्वमुपागतः। अथ पुनरपि ब्राह्मणः प्रत्यूषे क्षीरं गृहीत्वा तत्र गन्या तार- स्वरेण सर्पमस्तोत् । तदा सर्पो वल्मीकान्तर्लीन एव ब्राह्मणं प्रत्युवाच । त्वं लोभादत्रागतः पुत्रशोकमपि विहाय । इतःपरं तव मम च प्रीति!चिता । तव पुत्रेण यौवनोन्मत्तेनाहं ताडितो मया च स दष्टः । कथं मया लगुडप्रहारो विस्मर्तव्यस्त्वया च पुत्रशोकदुःखं कथं विस्मर्तव्यम् । इत्युक्त्वा बहुमूल्यं हीरक- मणिं तस्मै दत्त्वा पुनस्त्वया नागन्तव्यमिति कथयित्वा विवरं प्रविष्टः। ब्राह्मणोऽपिमणि गृहीत्वा पुत्रवुद्धिं निन्दस्वगृहमागतः। 17

·194
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT.
III. (From BHARTRIHARI'S NITIS'ATAKA.)
अक्षः सुखमाराध्यः सुखंतरमाराध्यते विशेष
झानलवदुर्विदग्धं ब्रह्मापि नरं न रञ्जयति ॥
लभेत निकतासु तैलमपि यत्नतः पीडय-
पिबेञ्च मृगतृष्णिकासु सलिलं पिपासार्दितः।
कदाचिदपि पर्यटश्शशविषाणमासादये-
न तु प्रतिनिविष्टमूर्खजनचित्तमाराधयेत् ॥२॥
व्यालं बालमृणालतन्तुभिरसौ रोड़े समुज्जृम्भते
छेत्तुं वज्रमणीशिरीषकुसुमप्रान्तेन संनह्यते ।
माधुर्यं मधुबिन्दुना रचयितुं क्षाराम्बुधेरीहते
नेतुं वाञ्छति यः र्खलान्पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधास्यन्दिभिः ॥३॥
स्वायत्तमेकान्तगुणं विधात्रा विनिर्मितं छादनमशतायाः।
विशेषतः सर्वविदां समाजे विभूषणं मौनमपण्डितानाम् ॥४॥
साहित्यसंगीतकलाविहीनः साक्षात्पशुः पुच्छविषाणहीनः।
तृणं न खादन्नपि जीवमानस्तद्भागधेयं परमं पशूनाम् ॥५॥
येषां न विद्या न तपो न दानं ज्ञानं न शीलं न गुणो.न धर्म
ते मृत्युलोके भुवि भारभूता मनुष्यरूपेण मृगाश्चरन्ति ।।
वरं गहनदुर्गेषु भ्रान्तं वनचरैः सह ।
न मूर्खजनसंपर्कः सुरेन्द्रभवनेष्वपि ॥७॥
हर्तुर्याति न गोचरं किमपि शं पुष्णाति यत्सर्वदा-
प्यार्थभ्यः प्रतिपाद्यमानमनिशं प्राप्नोति वृद्धिं पराम् ।
कल्पान्तेष्वपि न प्रयाति निधनं विद्याख्यमन्तर्धनं
येषां तान्प्रति मानमुज्झत नृपाः कस्तैः सह स्पर्धत ॥ ८॥
अम्भोजिनीवननिवासविलासमेव
हंसस्य हन्ति नितरां कुपितो विधाता।
न त्वस्य दुग्धजलभेदविधौ प्रसिद्ध
वैदग्ध्यकीर्तिमपहर्तुमसौ समर्थः॥९॥

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT.
195
.
केयूरा न विभूषयन्ति पुरुषं हारा न चन्द्रोज्ज्वला
न मानं नीलेपनं न कुसुमं नालंहता मूर्धजाः ।
वाण्येका समलंकरोति पुरुष या संस्कृता धार्यते
क्षीयन्ते खलु भूषणानि सततं वाग्भूषणं भूषणम् ॥ १०॥
विद्या नाम नरस्य रूपमधिकं प्रच्छन्नगुप्तं धनं
विद्या भोगकरी यशःसुखकरी विद्या गुरूणां गुरुः।
विद्या बन्धुजनो विदेशगमने विद्या परी देवता
विद्या राजसु पूजिता न तु धनं विद्याविहीनः पशुः ॥ ११ ॥
सूनुः सुश्चरित: सती प्रियतमा स्वामी प्रसादोन्मुखः
स्निग्धं मित्रमवञ्चकः परिजनो निष्क्लेशलेशं मनः ।
आकारो रुचिरः स्थिरश्च विभवो विद्यावदातं मुखं
तुष्टे विष्टपहारिणीष्टदहरौ संप्राप्यते देहिना ॥१२॥
प्राणाघातानिवृत्तिः परधनहरणे संयमः सत्यवाक्यं
काले शक्या प्रदानं युवतिजनकथामूकभावः परेषाम् ।
तृष्णास्रोतोविभको गुरुषु च विनयः सर्वभूतानुकम्पा
सामान्यः सर्वशासीयनुपहतविधिः श्रेयसामेष पन्थाः ॥१३॥
प्रारभ्यते
नीचैः
प्रारभ्य विनामन्ति मध्याः।
विप्नः पुनम्युलर प्रतिहन्यमानाः
प्रारब्धमुत्तमजना न परित्यजन्ति ॥ १४ ॥
प्रिया न्याय्या वृत्तिर्मलिनमसुभङ्गेऽप्यसुकर-
मसन्तो नाभ्यर्थ्याः सुहदपि न याच्यः कृशधनः।
विपधुश्चैः स्पेयं पदमनुविधेयं च महतां
सतां केनोद्दिष्टं विषममसिधाराव्रतमिदम् ॥ १५॥
स्वल्पं स्नायुवसावशेषमलिनं निर्मासमप्यस्थिक
श्वा लब्ध्वा परितोषमेति न तु तत्तस्य क्षुधाशान्तये ।
सिंहो अम्बुकमकमातमपि त्यक्त्वा निहन्ति विपं
सर्वः सोऽपि वाम्छति जनः सत्त्वानुरूपं फलम् ॥ १६ ॥

·196 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. लालचालनमधवरणावपात भूमौ निपल्य वदनोदरदर्शनं च । श्वा पिण्डदस्य कुरुते गतपुंगवस्तु धीरं खिलोकयति चाटुशतैश्च भुते ॥ १७ ॥ परिवर्तिनि संसारे मृतः को वा न जायते। स जातो येन जारोन याति वंशः समुन्नतिम् ॥ १८ ॥ कुसुमस्तबकस्येव ईयी वृत्तिर्मनस्विनः । मूनि वा सर्वलोकस्यं विशीर्यंत वनेऽथवा ॥ १९ ।। तानीन्द्रियाणि सकलानि तदेव कर्म सा बुद्धिरप्रतिहता वचनं तदेव । अर्थोष्मणा विरहितः पुरुषः स एव अन्यः क्षणेन भवतीति विचित्रमेतत् ॥ २० ॥ दौर्मन्त्र्यावृपतिविनश्यति यतिः सङ्गात्सुतो लालना- द्विप्रांऽनध्ययनात्कुलं कुतनयाच्छीलं खलोपासनात् । ह्रीर्मद्यादनवेक्षणादपि कृषिः स्नेहः प्रवासाश्रया- न्मैत्री चाप्रणयात्समृद्धिरनयात्त्यागात्प्रमादाद्धनम् ॥ २१॥ दानं भोगो नाशस्तिस्रो गतयो भवन्ति वित्तस्य। यो न ददाति न भुते तस्य तृतीया गतिर्भवति ॥ २२ ॥ रे रे चातक सावधानमनसा मित्र क्षणं श्रूयता- मम्भोदा बहवो वसन्ति गगने सर्वेऽपि नैतादृशाः। केचिदृष्टिभिरार्द्रयन्ति धरणी गर्जन्ति केचिद्वथा यं यं पश्यसि तस्य तस्य पुरतो मा ब्रूहि दीनं वचः ॥२३॥ जाड्यं ह्रीमति गण्यते व्रतरुचौ दम्भः शुचौ कैतवं शूरे निघृणता अजौ विमतिता दैन्यं प्रिंयालापिनि । तेजस्गिन्यवलिप्तता मुखरता वक्तर्यशक्तिः स्थिरे तत्को नाम गुणो भवेत्सुगुणिनां यो दुर्जनैर्नाङ्कितः ॥ २४ ॥ लोभश्चेदगुणेन किं पिशुनता यद्यस्ति किं पातकैः सत्यं चेत्तपसा च किं शुचि मनो यद्यस्ति तीर्थेन किम् । ..

·SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT. 197 सौजन्यं यदि किं निजैः सुमहिमा यद्यस्ति किंमण्डनैः सद्विद्या यदि किं धनैरपयशो यद्यस्ति किं मृत्युना ॥ २५ ॥ न कश्चिचण्डकोपानामात्मभ्यो नाम भूभुजाम् ! होतारमपि जुबानं स्पृष्टो दहति पावकः ।।२६।। आरम्भगुर्वी क्षयिएगी क्रमेण लध्वी पुरा वृद्धिमती च पश्चात् । दिनस्य पूर्वार्धपरार्धभिन्ना छायेव मैत्री खलसजनानाम् ॥२७॥ मृगमीनसजनानां तृणजलसंतोषविहितवृत्तीनाम् । लुब्धकधीवरपिशुना निष्कारणवैरिणो जगति ॥ २८ ॥ वाञ्छा सजनंसंगमे परगुणे प्रीतिगुरौ नम्रता विद्यायां व्यसनं स्वयोषिति रतिर्लोकापवादाद्भयम् ।, भक्तिः शूलिनि शक्तिरात्मदमने संसर्गमुक्तिः खले- प्वेत येषु वसन्ति निर्मलगुणास्तेभ्यो नरेभ्यो नमः ।।२०।। प्रदानं प्रच्छन्नं गृहमुपगते संभ्रमविधिः प्रियं कृत्वा मौनं सदसि कथनं नाप्युपकृतेः। अनुत्सेको लक्ष्म्यां निरभिभवसाराः परकथाः सतां केनोद्दिष्टं विषममसिधाराव्रतमिदम् ॥ ३०॥ संपत्सु महतां चित्तं भवत्युत्पलकोमलम् । आपत्सु च महाशैलशिलासंघातकर्कशम् ॥ ३१ ॥ संतमायसि संस्थितस्य पयसो नामापि न ज्ञायते मुक्ताकारतया तदेव नलिनीपत्रस्थितं राजते । स्वात्यां सागरशुक्तिमध्यपतितं सन्मौक्तिकं जायते प्रायेणाधममध्यमोत्तमगुणः संवासतो जायते ॥ ३२॥ नम्रत्वेनोन्नमन्तः परगुणकथनैः स्वान्गुणान्ख्यापयन्तः स्वार्थान्संपादयन्तो विततबहुतरारम्भयत्नाः परार्थे । क्षान्त्यैवाक्षेपरुक्षाक्षरमुखरमुखान्दुर्मुखान्दूषयन्तः सन्तः साश्चर्यचर्या जगति बहुमताः कस्य नाभ्यर्चनीयाः ॥३३॥ भवन्ति नम्रास्तरवः कलोद्गमैनवाम्बुभिर्भूरिविलम्बिनो घनाः। अनुद्धताःसत्पुरुषाःसमृद्धिभिःस्वभावएवैषपरोपकारिणाम्३४

·198
SECOND BOOK OF BANSKRIT.
श्रोत्रं श्रुतेनैव न कुण्डलेन दानेन पाणिर्न तु कङ्कणेन ।
विभाति कायः करुणापराणां परोपकारैर्न तु चादनेन ॥ ३५ ॥
पापानिवारयति योजयते हिताय
गुह्यं र गृहति गुणान्प्रकटीकरोति ।
आपद्गतं न च जहाति ददाति काले
सन्मित्रलक्षणमिदं प्रवदन्ति सन्तः॥३६॥
एते सत्पुरुषाः परार्थघटकाः स्वार्थान्परित्यज्य ये
सम्मान्यास्तु परार्थमुधमभृतः स्वार्थाविरोधेन ये।
तेऽमी मानवराक्षसाः परहितं स्वार्थाय निघ्नन्ति ये
ये तु नन्ति निरर्थकं परहितं ते के न जानीमहे ॥३७ ।।
इतः स्वपिति केशवः कुलमितस्तदीयद्विषा-
मितश्च शरणार्थिनः शिखरिणां गणाः शेरते।
इतोऽपि वडवानलः सह समस्तसंवर्तकै-
रहो विततमूर्जितं भरसहं च सिन्धोर्वपुः ॥ ३८ ॥
तृष्णां छिन्द्धि भज क्षमा जहि मदं पापे रतिं मा कृथाः
सत्यं ब्रूह्यनुयाहि साधुपदवीं सेवस्व विद्वजनान् ।
मान्यान्मानय विद्विषोऽप्यनुनय प्रच्छादय स्वान्गुणा-
कीर्ति मालय दुःखिते कुरु दयामेतत्सतां लक्षणम् ॥ ३९ ॥
मनसि वचसि काये पुण्यपीयूषपूर्णा-
त्रिभुवनमुपकारश्रेणिभिः प्रीणयन्तः ।
परगुणपरमाणून्पर्वतीकृत्य नित्यं
निजहदि विकसन्तः सन्ति सन्तः कियन्तः॥४०॥
रवैर्महाहैस्तुतुषुन देवा न भेजिरे भीमविषेण भीतिम् ।
सुधां विना न प्रययुर्विरामं न निश्चितार्थाद्विरमन्ति धीराः॥४१॥
ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता शौर्यस्य वाक्संयमो
शानस्योपशमः श्रुतस्य विनयो वित्तस्य पात्रे व्ययः।
अक्रोधस्तपसः क्षमा प्रभवितुर्धर्मस्य र्निजता
सर्वेषामपि सर्वकारणमिदं शीलं परं भूषणम् ॥ ४२ ॥

·BECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 199 IV. (From KÂDAMBARÎ, PART I.) *देवि किमा क्रियतां दैवायत्ते वस्तुनि । अलं रुदितेन । न वयमनुप्राह्याःप्रायो देवतानाम् । आत्मजपरिष्वनामृतास्वादसु- खस्य नूनमभाजनमस्माकं हृदयम् । अन्यस्मिञ्जन्मनि न 'कृतम- वदातं कर्म । जन्मान्तरविहितं हि कर्म फलमुपनयति पुरुषस्ये- ह जन्मनि । न हि शक्यं दैवमन्यथा कर्तुमभियुक्तेनापि । यावत्तु भानुप्यके शक्यमुपपादयितुं तावत्सर्वमुपपाद्यताम् । अधिकां कुरु देवि गुरुषु भक्तिम् । द्विगुणामुपफादय देवतासु पूजाम् । ऋषिजनपरिचर्यासु दर्शितादरा भव । परं हि दैवतमृषयो यत्ने- नाराधिता यथासमीहितफलानामतिदुर्लभानामपि दातारो भव- न्ति । श्रूयते हि पुरा चण्डकौशिकप्रसादामगधेषु बृहद्रथो नाम राजा जनार्दनस्य जेतारमतुलवलपराक्रमं जरासंधं नाम तनयं लेभे । दशरथश्च राजा परिणतवया अपि विभाण्डकमहामुनिसुत- स्यमेशृङ्गस्य प्रसादानारायणभुजानिवाप्रतिहतानुदधीनिवाक्षो- भ्यानवाप चतुरः पुत्रान्। अन्ये च राजर्षयस्तपोधनानाराध्यपुत्रद- शनामृतस्वादसुखभाजो बभूवुः। अमोघफला हि महामुनिजन- संवा । अहमपि खलु कदा समुपारूढगर्भभरालसामापाण्डुरमु- खीमासनचन्द्रोदयामिव पौर्णमासीनिशां देवीं द्रक्ष्यामि । कदा मे तनयजन्ममहोत्सवानन्दनिर्भरो हरिप्यति पूर्णपात्रं परिजनः। कदा हारिद्रवसनधारिणी सुतसनाथोत्सङ्गा द्यौरिवोदितरवि- मण्डला सबालातपा मामानन्दयिष्यति देवी । कदा सर्वोपधि- पिञ्जरजटिलकेशो गोरोचनाचित्रितकण्ठसूत्रग्रन्थिरुत्तानशयो दशनशून्यस्मिताननः पुत्रको जनयिष्यति मे हृदयाहादम् । कदा गोरोचनाकपिलद्युतिरन्तःपुरिकाकरतलपरंपरासंचार्यमाणमूर्ति- रशेषजनाभिनन्दितो मङ्गलप्रदीप इव मे शोकान्धकारमुन्मूल- यिप्यति चक्षुषोः । कदा च क्षितितलरेणुधूसरो मएडयिष्यति मम हृदयेन दृष्ट्या च सह परिभ्रमन्भवनाङ्गनम् । कदा केसरि- * This is a speech addressed by a king to his queen who was viceply Lijeved on account of her being childless, ·200 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. किशोरक इव संजातजानुचकमणारम्भः संचरिष्यतीतस्ततः स्फटिकमणिमयभित्त्यन्तरितान्भवनमृगशाषकानाजिघृक्षुः । क- दान्तःपूरिकानूपुरनिनादसंगतान्गृहकलहंसकाननुसरन्कक्षान्त- रप्रधाषितः कनकमेखलाघण्टिकारवानुसारिणीमायासयिष्यति धात्रीम् । कदा मातुश्चरणरागोपयुक्त शेषेण पिण्डालक्तकरसेन कञ्चकिनां विडम्बयिष्यति मुखानि । कदा कुतूंहुललोललोचनो मणिकुट्टिमेष्वधोदत्तदृष्टिरनुसरियति स्खलद्गतिरात्मनः प्रति- बिम्बानि । कदा नरेन्द्रसहस्रप्रसारितभुजयुगलाभिनन्द्यमानाग- मनो भूषणमणिमयूखलेखाकुलीक्रियमाणलोलदृष्टिरास्थानस्थि- तस्य मम पुरः मर्यटिष्यति सभान्तरेषु । इत्येतानि चान्यानि म- नोरक्शतानि चिन्तयतोऽन्तःसंतप्यमानस्य यान्ति रजन्यः। मा- मपि दहत्येवायमहर्निशमनल इवानपत्यतासमुद्भवः शोकः। शू- न्यमेव में प्रतिभाति जगत् । अफलमिवाखिलं पश्यामि जीवितं राज्यं च । अप्रतिविधेये तु विधातरि किं करोमि । तन्मुध्यता देवि शोकानुबन्धः। आधीयतां धैर्ये धर्मे च धीः।धर्मपराम हि सदा समीपसंचारिण्यः कल्याणसंपदो भवन्ति । धाय सलिलमादाय स्वयं करतलेनाभिनवपल्लवेनेब मि लतुल्यमाननमस्याः साश्रुलेखं ममार्ज।

·1.-GENERAL GLOSSARY OF SANSKRIT WORDS OCCƯRRING IN THE Blok the lap. 37 11. a limb. 31. ofyty w., tire-carriage, railway carrigge. AKU M. 16. f. (37 not, and starea m. it kind of sacrifice. ETUI f.) ruthless, one who has spagna n. sacrifice to Fire. no compassion. TEM, fram vas n. fo (or not, and 3rfga m. n. 4. blamed, censured, FTA n. something) he who found fault with. has nothing, poor. 377 m. dice used in gambling. 37 n. a courtyard, & place. 3 m. n. f. one who knows TETT M. 11. burning charcoal. (the secret of playing at), dice. eft m. 16. f. destitute of - farct m. n. f. inconceivable, unimaginable. त्रिय. 3759 m. name of Raghu's son; steagur m. n. f. one who is possessed of skill in playing at m. n. t. unborn. dice. 37 378 m. n. f. continuous, frequent. 37677 m.nf. unable. TAT f. a she-goat. 3717 TMT.F. (Term. a plant, or its orord m. name of & Brilmaſi. seed, and it f. wreath or a string) a rosary of 37. 7th conj. Paralom. to anoint; 3731 378TT: aihe. literally, with , to make pianifest, or 37TT n. the secret of manag. lay open. ing dice. 37977 n. a bluck pigment, lampblack. Tag m. n. f. not to be ruf. fe m. the cavity formed lvy fled, not to be frightened, joining the hands. immoveable. अण 4th conj. Åtm. to breathe, STATE M. 1. f. without disease, to live. healthy. 3tu m. n. f. little; Am. an atom, HOTTT m. the name of a sage. a small particle. ITT 1. a house. अतियोर m. n. f. (अति Very, अग्नितत m. n. f. (अग्नि, and तप्त very much ) very horrible or heated) hented by fire. wicked. 3 n. the eye.

·202 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. spfefacator m. n. f. very pitiless Spare m. an ox. or cruel. TTSETT 1. eta n. doing, ufafata m. n. f: very fruitless. execution), not doing, omis. fagurt m. a great error, greato sion to do. carelessness, अनपत्यता (अपत्य n. a child) (अपत्य To m. 11. f. Mcomparable. childlessness. 3770 ulr. exceedingly, great straf w. n. f. guiltless. ly, very much. 3777 m. want of prudence. अत्यराति m. name of a Kshanam m. n. f. not deserving triya. To m. fire. Tinita adv. or 17. f. very TÀIETOT 11. not taking care. far, very long. TTTTH ma n. f. innocent, not m. n. f. wonderful guilty. 3717 m. 1. f. of to-day, be 37-TTCT in. n. f. helpless. longing to this day. अनादनन्त m. n.f. (अनादि with. 3717efa uur. (379 to-day, and out beginning,and 377 with gra from) from to-day, or out end) having neither bech. henceforward. ning nor end. 3779 m. pr. f. low. 3FITTFT m. not beginning. BTTT m. 11. f. prou. lower, low. अनावोपेत m. n. f. (अन् not, 377 m. a wickeď action. sa n. straightness, straight 377# ind below, down. forwardness, a past part TAIT . post, power, office, pass. of g with ziq accompani. fitness to perform any cereed) not possessed of straightmony. forwardness, one who is with. अधिज्यधन्वन् m. one whose boy out straightforwardness. 31f9g m. (farure m. restraint), U n. a place. not restraining, want of re- 3r fre m. 11. f. not of a sound or straint. grave mind, little-minded, fac m. wind. impatient. 37faepe adv. frequently, con BEETGT n. a road. stantly, continuously. अध्वर्यु m. a sacrificial priest staquot m. 11. f. not sitting, whose duty it is to prepare reti n. an army. and throw the oblations into अनीकस्थ m. n. f. (FIF 11. the fire. FUT to stand) one in the arbiy 32nd conj.Parasm. to breathe; a soldier with q, to breathe, to live. nyt m.n.f. compassionate is strung.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 203 with ) . 374, 177 m.an attendant, a servant. aura (pres. part. of 9 lth * m. Lumility. copii l'urasm. STIMET M. ne fa uninterrupted. searching HET m. continyar.ce. 279.f. water (used in the plur.) 379HTO1. following in death, or syriafaj. worship dying after, as in the case of 37993 . any unw holesome or widows burning themselves wrong thing. with the dead bodies of their 3794TH », infamy. husbands. 37TT M., 1. j. pol. other, an. TETTT m. love, liking. other. STTET M. n. f., in accordance 37 TT-THEE 3. (FEET 1. a 'thou. with. sand)it thousand of faults. TTCTT 11. an ointment. 3747fara m. (5497 other, i.e., saat in. 11. f. to be followed, Western, und 34 Fara can) to be done accordingly. the western ocean. अनुषक्त (अनु and सक्त #st ress. 379 m. 1. f. unsacrol, sinful. part of #st) accompanied. BTOBER 1. post pruss. part. of 37877 n. doing, executing. with what is desired. et/ot. part. of FATT with अनु, What is to be executed. 37907 m. want of tendo ness. 31784 pot. part. • of 17 with Pfaf 17 111. 16. j. anomendable, 370, to be recited. uncontrollable. 3 m. end, destruction. 379faga m. 1. I. undeckel, Hraugftit J. an inmate of the irresistible. seraglio, a woman. अप्रमत्त m... J. (अ प्रमत्त YET, in. the god of death.' careless) not careless, ideful. SESOTH 1. going to the end. 57927 m. one who lives not STEET: dr. at last. speak or teach. stir no difference. Hafta m. 1. f. separated from. 3th m. year. stau pron. m. n. f. another. अभाजन not i receptacle, STRUT adv. otherwise. something not designet for a strana: ulv. on another day. particular proses अन्वाह (आह and अनु) he recites, fasira past punt. J. of H 1st Te peats. conj. l'ararm. with 37fw, fra past part. pass. off with suilg. अनु, followed, actompanied अभिचैयम् ale. ( from चैद्य m. with, full of. the king of Chedi, u ho was 377 11. a lotus.

·204 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Krislina's enemy) towards To m. the charioteer of the sun. Chaidya. SPEAT . 16. a sgre or wound. fipalloem. violent heat. अर्घ्यसत्कार m. (सत्कार m. lloshiaffte m.n.f.new, fresli, tender tality) hospitality done by farget n, son of Arjuna. means of staf, i. e., the ma. fra m. n. f. facing. terials for worshipping or STTTT m. n. f. of great merit -honouring, a guest. stof 10th conj: Åtm. to bey; or desert. with 9, to request. faeft 11. a particular cere- 37ef . meaning, true sense, mopy performed in the Rajaobject of desire. sûya sacrifice, of the day on which it is performed: अर्थसंशय ४. (संशय m. doubt, danger) danger to wealth. 3ff. promise, determina- BTTTT denom. Puruisin. amil tion. Atm, to explain, अभिहित past part. pass. of धा अर्थिन् m. al suppliant, a beggar, with 37f, spoken to. m. 1. f. perta past part. of Th with plst and 10th conj. to afflict, 37f9 and 34T, come, arrived ; to torment. in. a (inale) guest. अर्धकोटी./. (अर्ध n. half, कोटी !. 377 lst conj. Pazısm. to move. ten millions) five millions. 37Hrarka! f. the thirtieth day 7h7 m. a deity, one of the ocad of the montlı, the day of the forefathers. अर्वन् m. a horse. 37149 . an enemy: अई 1st conj. Parasm, and 1011, Talv. in the next world. conj. to deserve. 399 n. the beverage of gods, it f. bild luck, poverty, Te m. n. f. fruitful, real. 37Cm. 1. 1. dull, lieavy, slou. 37 CT m. loss. BTFITF n. water. Fifft f. lotus plant. 340127 m. contentment, absence of greed. 379 1st conj. Ârm. with to 3754 m. 1. f. little, few'; tarna risc. in. n. f. many, much. 3797 n. iron. अल्पविषया.J. whose range अरण्यवास m. (अरण्य . forest, small, not comprehensive. and are m. dwelling) forest- अवज्ञात past part. pass. of सा residence. eenth sya, despised, disregard. ofteft f. the wife of an enemy. ed, disobeyed. New moon. nectar. is ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 205 with 3T, oreas . waita m. 1. f. beautiful, white, 1 par aile. undoubtedly. pure, meritoripus, virtuous. SHCIETAT : (ha m. n. f. gooul 3FET m. n. f.posun, hinder, pos; HET.F. service) service of a terior, inferior. person who is not good, sor- TCFTHA pres. Avert. Act. of vice done to a bail or Wickod लम् with अव, hanging. TFF 1. Lilood. [person. 99 m. pride. 37 11. 11. f. pot. part. of my 377 37 1. 11. f. being in the power of another, dependent, lielpinsufferable. STATT 1. 11. f. (Fr 1. essence) less. [necessarily. unsulistantial, Talr.certainly, inevitably, umprofitable, useless. 3TETFETTET 2. residence. fulf (TTT.f. edye) tho अवहित (past part 'of चा Prith crgo of a sword. 3) attentive. TITA N. il vou as sev ETT I. 1. f. southern. that ofolying on the edge of a FETT 11. . f. without olostacle. sword. starfram. n. f. imperislahla. ital beatlı, life (in this undergoing notransformation. sense it is used in the plural, A wir, without delay. the vital breaths being five in 37677 M. n. f. immutable. number). | leath. 3731 5th conj. Atm. to get, to TEHF in. destruction of life, enjoy, to pervade; with fa, to 37TTden, to wish ill to, to l. pervadle. mualice to 3737 9th conj. Parasm. to eat. 375777, 111. 9. f. weak, unable. 37F M, sunset. STETT N. cating. 37771.f. lunger. straftft m. the western moun- TETITM. name of a kind of tree. tain, on which the sun, moon, and stars are supposel to sit. 347777 in. a mule. 37Tm. the sacrifice of a liorse. 37ffet n. a bone. 34 TEST n. the secret of manag- TET W. a chy. ing horses. TETE: in every day. अधिन् M. (used in the qualy the stem vulr. day and night. tuin celestial physicians so Hẹn TH . coll. 1 (11/1, duy called. and night. STEEF. m. name of a person, tft m. a snake. Atth conj. vith far, to repeal, SËRTE . day and night. tary ind. alr, instantly, soon, STA 2nd conj. Parasm. to be. speedily. 18 37T 1. blood. to abolish.

·206 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. STT, TET, 177. comtrita past part. pass. of off with 3TT. brought. 31 a particle showing up to. Sa m. n. f. internal. TEATT m. form. 37Ty 5th conj. Parasm. to obtain; आकाशवायु m. the wind in the with to attain. sky. STTEM. n. f. belonging to 3779 m. reproach, slander. ühe latter part of the day. TETT f. name. 37147°5T m. n.of. slightly pale. ATA 11. r. f. coning. 3778 m. a friend, a well-wisher; आङ्गिरस m. a descendant of Tha m. n. f. consecrated by अङ्गिरस्- repeating certain verses called 39fca m. . f. followed, prac- Apri. tised; n. practice, act. 379 in. 11. flesh, Wait. आचार्य a religious teacher TZ m. fragrant smell, per. who invests the stulent with fume. the sacred threadl, and in- 377777 m. 1. f. dependent on, in structs him in the Vedas. the power of. TIF M. f. a fight, a battle. 377afen m. name of a Rishi. 3715TH past part. puss. 371TCFTH M. one wishing to live manded. a long life. आत्त m. n. f. from आ and दत्त past part. pass. of ET to give, TITTTTT f. worship. BITCHCEF m. n. (54647 self, HITTAA M. n. f. pleased, proand GF, destroyer) self-depritiated. SET 2ast part. of stroyer, one who ruins himself. ascended. आत्मघातिन् m.92. f. one who commits suicide. 37 m. n. f troubled, distressed. 3716HCHT 1. self-restraint. आई m. n. f. wet. 37TCHTST m. one possessed of a 3713ff. the sixth lunar mansion. soul, a man. STOETS n. a basin for water TETT 11. 1. f. liked by one. round the root of a tree. self. CTY m. a talk. आत्महित n. (आत्मन् self, and हित आली /. a line or row. good) one's own good. [own. stiffera m. the son of pfafara 31774rT m. ll. t. intimate, one's 37179 past part. pass, of 31157 11. attention, regard. 377, filled, covered. TIeen m. the first cause. 37TT J. hope. STTTT n. the mouth. TUTA f. a blessing. आयुस् n. life. . taken away. with it with ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 207 BTHT n. the mouth. . of आस. इष्टद m. 3TTE m. battle. 3 m, a snake. HESA: adv. to and fro. 37TH 2nd conj. fitm. to sit; with fameuat f. method or the अधि, to simurtle उप, to adore wdy of doing anything. to worship; with सत्रं to hold ,इन्द्रादि (इन्द्र andl आदि heginning, a sacrificial sesion, to per- Indrwat the head') Indra and form a succession of sacrifices, others. on n. vigour (of limbis ). आसनमरण m. naf. (आसन्न m.n. इन्द्रियसौष्ठव 1. (To37 n. lumbor f. near, and TOT 1. death) sense, and get ». . beauty, one whose death is near, about goodness ) handsome mak.., healthy or sound frame. to die. इन्द्रियार्थीपसेवन ।. (अर्थ m.object, 3TH m. n. f. obtainable. STAA N. resorting to, enjoyrra m. naf.sitting, pres. part. imept ) enjoyment of the objects of the senses, seysunl 31F879 n. a hall of audience, an enjoyident assembly roon. इन्दुमती f. the name of a lady 3AFT n. the mouth. इन्ध 7th con). âtm. to kindle. SETE m. taste, tasting. n. f. giving what is desired. rafa f. sacrificial oblation. EAS. tutelar desired) deity. इ: इ 2nd conj. Para sm. to go;with 4th conj. Åtm. with 35, to 377, to go towards; with 375, rise, to rise 11. to know; with 371, to come; car with gia, to see,.to care. with to rise, to floyrish, 2nd conj. Átm and 10th with Farç, to set out; with परि, conj. to praise. to transform oneself, to cir- T7 m. n. f. such. cumambulate ; with fa, to 1st cow. Purasın. und 1011 pass away ; with fa and 377, conj. with 5, to utter, to to separate ; with शरणम् and speak [ of, to rule. 34, to submit; with सम्, CON. Atm. to be master unite, to come together. 1st conj. Parasm. with to St. 1st conj. Âim. to endeavour, rise. [study. J. with The 2nd conj. Âtn. to E m. the progenitor of the a particle. solar race of kings उख 1st conj. Parasm. to go. Te m. n. f. wishing, wisher. 34 m. n. f. raging, severe. eit . to $T 2011 4T m. ruler. [to aim.

·208 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. part. of 37 to rise, Fue al v. mightily, powerfully, | 3TFFT m. name of a tree; n. its formidably. fruit. e: ind. adv. loudly, aloud! 44 m. source, springing up. 359 6th conj. Parasm. to throw. 3gtų in a sacrificial priest whose 369 117. n. a raft, a ca cande. duty it is do sing Sâmas or verses from the Sama Veila. 37TH IN. 2. f. Tast. 377954 m. 1. F. ( 3774 m. 11. f. JETAZ m.m. 4. of a wild dis. good, excellent, Free n. fruit, position, inorklinate, excessive and a suf.) of good fruit or JETCF, M. name of a person). result. 367 m. n. f. haughty. 3977 m. n. t. pron. over, upper, JETA past part. of हन् 20th after, subsequent. u sell as an alv. carelessly, STA: m. plur. name of, a tumultuousty. country beyond the llima- उद्भूतविस्मय m. 10. f. (3919 punt layas probably the original seat of the Âryas). भू with to be produced) one in whom 577 f. daughter of a king wonder or amazement la named Virata. been born. JifPT r. an upper garment. TTT 11. 1. f. one who is in- TITT I.' ll. f. with the back dustrious. downwarıls, lying on the back. Jafa f. loftiness, magnanimity उत्पथास्थित n. n. 1. (उत्पथ m. a. JATE m. joy, bloom. wrong path, 37ffeta past part. 47. n. space near a town on of FOTwith 371), one who village, or its boundary. has taken to a wrong path. TTT m. a benevolent action, 3792 m. 16. 1. boil. doing good to another. 379 1. i lotus flower. 3971fa m. n. f. benevolent JEFF m. lap. उपकृति /. doing good to others Je past part. puss, of it with let 89, discharged. 39777 store, storing, gatheri ing 37. M. 11. f. northern. उपचित Past pass. plit. of चि trith H, collected. 37T 1. dropsy, stomach. उदरंभरि m. n. 1. (उदर n. stomacli stafa past part. puss. of the and to fill ) one wlio fills caresal of जन् with उप, 10. भृ duced. his belly or stomach, selfishly greedy. उपनायन the ceremony • the investiture with SETT m. 11. f. noble, generous. उपनयन the sacred threail. FT 16. water. of 22.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 209 एनम् 11. S TTT m. enjoyment. Wegfara 117. a nane of Indra. 37TT. M. n. to pseul. Tra 1. ng to cleac, deceased, 5. (piser. 4 11. n. L. of one mine. atfe dr. above. RETTET N. (le multe ETTTTA M. N. f. what is above IFTTT 1. 11.4. me, solitry 3T377 11. satisfaction. TTFTTT m. ll. 1 Malable JTE in. n. f. brought. FirmaT m. 1.d.one whose 39777 1. a present. property is certain, of in me ET27 1. n. f. blamealle, devarying virtue. serving reproach. एकान्ततः will mariably. STT pust pass. part. of mariti pon . 11../. one log one, इ vith 57. uited with; possessing. cawl one. mon. both. TRICT m. il. l. of thus kuud. 347 pron. 11. 1. f. belonging to Isotli sirles. .f. Die earth. 11, m. ir descendant of Iksl- THI name of a serpent-dam- Viku. «-, for some time a wife of them 11 f. belonging to Imra. Irjavna. 7 m. son of Ilüsh.i., ETG 11. name of the preceptor 311. of the subs.. 57 lv cos. L'arasm. to burn. औपध ll. aldarlisine. 377.1. the down, the goddess of क. claw. JCW, notly. Fiat. . 100m, in apartment. TFF in the sun. a bracelet. 767T in. warmth, heat. inil, al mat. FUT 11. name of illoshi. 11. f. lofty, excellent, fara a pron. Sroverall. stout. Fich 17. f. erect, pler. FFTT 1. daughter, egil. Pofta m. il. 1. vellowish brown. Ft 1.4 conj. Parcism. to go. F. 10th conj. Átm. to love. #1. n. f. simple, straight, FICUTE 1. whit is to be done, plain. work to be got through, a FUT 17. debt. fram, an elephant. [duty. #TIF 11. a sacrificial priest. FEU M. X. f. dolefnl,lamentable, - FT 12 M. the haii. अजित ॥ F17F, 1. Goll. 7 F970 m. n. head, skull.

·210 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Fica n. wife. TEUTTTT m. n. f. merciful. TETT , a forest, a grove. PETEF, 1. name of a serpqit. Thin. desire. Fof on. proper name. #THGE m. n. f. one fulfilling any कर्मपथ (कर्मन्action, and पथिन्। wish. a way) way of action, i. e., Filtid m. one whose desires are the performance of religious fulfilled. ceremonies, &c., as a way to काय m. body. cternal bliss. FTTT caus. of to cause anything to be done. FICE », il quarrel. [ goosc. | कार्तिक्येकादशी./. (कार्तिकी /. he. FICEF in, a kind, of duck or longing to the inonth of Kar- 1. f. an art. tika, anda tenteft.1. eleventh) FUTT m. a Lurile, a collection. ile ebeventh day of Kartika. Fiferon. the Kali age, i. c., the Foot n. meanness. age in which the 'world at File nl. a low; with fasil. present is, being the last and n. f. one who has his bow the most sinful of the four stiung. ages, the principle of evil. Fra min. 1. f. deserving or fit to for m. name of a country (in be (lone, business, work. the prir.) FITFT m. 17... one who does कल्पान्त m. (कल्प m. duration of some business ( for another). the world and अन्त m. the | कार्यदयाकुल nl. f. distracted end) the end of the duration by having two things to do at of the world, one time. tornya past part. poss, of the Co m. name of certain giants. causal of q, planned, invent- Freon, a poem. ed. FIT m. 11. a kind of white flower. 79 m. name of a person. काटलोष्टसमn.n.f. (काष्ठ १५. wood, farar f. learning, poetry. TE m. and n. a lump of earth, Tie in. n. f. distressed, and FA like) like wood and a FÈ FICT bv. woe! lump of earth. FF with f 1st conj. Parasm. to TITET 1. à sound. blow out as a flower, to open. FFT m. a certain class of demi. काकुत्स्थ n. a male descendant of gods. Kakutstha, Rânia. Forfar what sort of a thing? कात्यायन m. name of a great fona m. a rogue, a dishonest Grammarian. person, a swindler. 4179 f. name of a damsel. Fanya m. 11. f. how much. 722.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 211 to kill PARTO IN. à ray of light. oneself to, to accept; with Pazitli m. a sub (as of a lion). अधि, to to aim at ; अधिकृत्य Para.. fanid... Laviny aimel at, i.e., refer- Firma with TTT (from 10th कृत ring to; with 379 and 371, tore. more, they toorn; truth ronj. to tell ) enumerated. Fait m. name of a giant. fag, to lapo bare, to open; las prefixed to nouns) båd, with 99, to do goodl; inith तिरस्, to decisun, arith नमस्, censurable. to low to, prith , to injure, m. a dog. to wrong, with FA and 377, to Fri n. family. repudiate, to give up, to for- Teh m. 1. a paved floor, a pave. sake; rin afa, to retaliate, to ment; forene 'a pavement resist; with a fl, to conquer. of crystals. (01). Pasin. M. and Atm. FTH 11. a measure of corn, FOTO N. an ear-ornament. +374 1. (30 lei penance, FIOETIT ". name of a city, the and are three) three penances. (+2jutal of the Vidarlılıas or Berais. IT 6th conj. l'urasm. to cut. TIET n. wonder, curiosity. कृत 17. the first and liest or FATTF, M. a young boy. the golilouage of the कृतयुग world. Ti 11. a night lotus. Fil... adopted daughter.) 3.74 1. the frontal globe on the per just of the forehead of fa 1.1.1. one who has accom. an elephant. plished his purposrs, 9001l, virtuous. कुम्भकर्ण in. name of a brother of in d. for, on account of. Fra 7 n, name of a place where int m. 11. 1. whole. the Kurus fought. 740 W. 1. I. mean, miserly, , n. a family. little-minded. BCA m. 1. f. (n. family, ara .. (1.. mercy and from FTT m. store) store Inercy, जन्, «luced ) born in a family, of one very merciful. the race of. TE IN. 11. f. kind. FT M. and 39 11. sons of Râma. IT m. 1. f. weak, thin. 55HUT 11. naine of a town. conj. Porusni. to draw; TOT 16. bank. with fą and q, to make worse, 1. Sth conj. Parasra and Atm. to reduce. to vlo; with 375t, to betake fo.f. liusbandry. Rivana. and to be prolet ·212 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. m. सम्, to E ment, diversion, to m. a PO 1. the eighth incarnation of Vishnu. inountain) a pleasure moun. tain or embankment. ECIT921 M. the dark half of the luar month. 4th conj. Parasm. to be en- क्रुध कृष्णवर्मन् the name of a person. raged; with sufi and ECTATT m. air antelope. De angry wit). RICOTATETET n. help of Krishna. Ist conj, Parusin. with a F 6th conj. Parasın. to strew; to cry out. prith, iq, to scatter. Parasm. to be or become 911 conj. Parasm. and Âum. fatigued, to be exhausted, to be depressed to kill, to destroy 10th conj. to celebrate, to . past part of , fatigued, exhagsted, languashing. praise, to glorify. केयूर n. an ornament fær 1th conj. Parasm. to be or worn above become wet or dam. the elbow. FT 1. a hair. frelst conj. l'arasm. to lament. Ha 11. a lion. fag 9th conj. Purasm. to to?- 19 n. fraud, deceit. tute, to give pain to. fa f. a crore. ta m. 12. neuter, impotent. 14 m. anger, resentment. Fet 1st conj. Parasm. with 3; to boil. ETTTTT n. a store house, a trcasure-house. TT, PETUT Sth conj. Parasm. to Art. n. boyhood. TOTEZAT m. 1. f. m. a mo- Firen past part. (used as ment, afect perishing) ishsubstantire) n. a cry. ing in a moment. TFF 1st conj. Parasm. & 4th Tird n. momentariness. conj. I'arasm. to walk, to step; 77 past part. pass. of tot, wounded. Átm. to operate, to have effect; rith fa, to step or go beyond, T 4th conj. Parasm. to forgive. to part fron, to cross, to Ga m. n. f. patient, forbearing. transgress; with 371, to apym.destruction, ruin, decrease. proach, to step or tread upon, farfa f. the earth, the ground. to rise, rise up farsfest m. (farfa f. the earth ) 9th conj. I'arasm. and Åtm. lord of the earth, a king. १vitle निम्, to buy off, क्षीर 2. milk. to redeem, to ransom ; with Tith conj. Parasm. and Âtm. fa, Atm. to sell. to pound to reduce to powder क्रीडाशैल m. (क्रीडा f. amuseor dust. { wound. (U buy;

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 213 3 m. n. f. small, mean. Tolst conj. Parasm. to speak. 27 9th conj. Pspasm. to agitate. f. a mace. क्षेत्रदेवता . (नn. a field, देवता गन्तुकाम m. n... desirous to yo. f. a deity) the deity of a field. 711 f. tlie daughter of a 1st conj. Paraspr. to phe or Gandharva. waste away. stifiT m. 11. 1. deep, grave'. गम् mith अभि,to attack; it प्रति and E n. the cavities of the human E, to advance towards. TFT m. an eagle, the liril of body, as moutlı, nose, &c. that species useel log: l'islinu ARE m. 11. f. ( 195 m. a sword) as his car. one who has drawn out his TIFT. 1. order or command of sword. HTTFF m."(cm, a villain, , Garuđa, the enemy of the serpent-race. 15 m. a serpent) a serpent in the form of a villain. TH m. fistus, ombryo. inl. verily. THIE# 11. 11. f. (of m. (Once iar m. n. f. of a tree named tion, aul 37%eighth) cighth खदिर. from conception fear ith conj. Âim, and 4th conj. Te 1st conj. Parasm.and 10th Átm., and 6th conj. Parasm. conj. tu think manly of, to to be distressed, to be dis- TS 1, the throat. [spurn. pleased or offended. of a post part of tas, cropped. Ich ru conso Parasm. to tell. TEA m. n 1. impassable, imprego nable; 11. il wooul, a thicket. OJTUETT 1. the name of Arjuna's TOTTAET ". n. (JTIT 1. the sky, bow'. HET IN. 16. the middle ) the Ja n. liini), body. midille of the sky. TITTF ». (OT7". 11. f. slınllow, JTVETETTA N. (TET.I. an array, and JFF. N. water) shallow a host, TT n. a hundred) a Water. hundred arrays or hosts of elephants. o . a particular form of THE M. the best of elephants. marriage in which the only गण्डकी./.name of u river;गण्डकी- thing essential is the mutual pre n. a bank of the Gandaki. consent of the bridegroom and the bride. TOGFTC n. temples of an elephant. TIET IN. a sacred fire kept pier. Taitaa m. n. f. dead. petually by a householder, plats.walk,gait, l'esource, refuge. household duties. .: J.

·214 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. to think fit f. speech. CET M, a stone. Tot m. efficacy, advantage. 1st conj. Parasm. to beconie TC 1st. conj. Parasm. to pabtect. : exhausted. Vi f. secrecy, protection. rent m. the moon. geht f. greatness, grandeur, majesty. afoz 1. f. a smell bell. jat fem. of Te, great, bulky. TH m. heat yetyle, m. (TcH m, a fort) pro- F m. n. f. (From m. heat) protector or keeper of a fort. duced or caused by heat. JE 1st conj. Parasm. aid Âtm. TÆ 1st conj. Parasm. to eat. to conceal. ETT m. n. f. horrible. IT 4th conj. Parasm. to be 2T 1st conj.o l'arasm. with 34, gree.ly for, to covet. smell. TE 1st conj. Atm. to meanly of, to spurp. TEEAT f. family deity. ETH 2nd conj.Purasm, to shine गृहमेधिन् m. the householder | चक्रवदति m. n. f. (चक्रवत् likea who performs domestic rites. wheel) one whose movement ग 6th conj. Parasm. to swallow; is like that of a wheel, ererwith FR Âtin. to promise. revolving 9th conj. l'arcsm. with , चक्ष 2nd conj. Atm. to speak , with 377, to tell ; with û and TTT m. a bull; f. a cow, speech, 391, to explain. the earth. 7547 n. moving. hrat m. reach, scope. चण्डकौशिक m. name of a sage TTHÍT f. name of a river. cart: numer. nom. plur. four. ITTH to a bright yellow pig. Et m. n. sandal wood. [ together. | AHHT F. (9997 m. a san- Try 9th conj. Parasm. to put dal tree, fr f. a blossom å ufret m. a knot. Hower-stalk, (2) 9th conj. Parasm, and som, (c., of the sandal tree. Âtn. to take; with , to re- FEUH in. naine of a king. ceive in a friendly manner, to Frizem. name of a prince. favour; with ja, to curl; with चम् 1st conj. Parasm. to lick up, a, to be at war with; with to drink; with 37T, to take in FF, to store. a little water into the month Or oft m. the leader or headman and drink it as a of a village. ceremony. E E to speak. ment. a sprout), i blosreligious ·22. . 2 Hindu yrar. SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT, 215 चम्पकपुष्परेणु m. (चम्पक m. a faa 10th conj. Âtm. to have life kind of trees with fragrant or motion. flowers, to ur. pollen) the polare No name of a forest. len in the flowers of champa- F11619 m. (feqdiversified, and kus. 37TCT 11. conversation) con- चम्पकवन n. a collection or groves versation on diserse subjects. of champaka trees. fafara 12. variegate, adorned. 1st conj. P'amarsm. to go, to चर् stalk abroad. ETTET h. 1. f. having long been in practice. TUTTTT 11. dyeing the feet, the ve after a long time. dye of the feet. m. lungo tree; 11. its TH in. n. f. last. flower. afta past part. pass. of a zo mº n dust, powder ; maa practised or done. like dust, to dust. arga past part. pass, of a ind. if. besme.red. A1.theheart, intellect, mm. चर्मचक्षुस् n. (चर्मन् n. hide, skin, at m. the first month of the and TÆ n. the eye), the plıysical eye TITAT wl. the country or region चर with d und वि, to remove, of the Gandharvals. mole aside. OTTE M. 1. a pleasing discourse. 10th conj. with q, to conceal TFT m., náme of a person. anything alih, mama pariah, an outcast. चारणस्तुत m. n. f. (चारण m. a bard) praised by bards. 3174 1. corering 77 m. name of a person. fase 10th conj. and 7th conj l'u चारसर्वाङ्गी /. (चारु yeautiful, rasm and Áti.. tu out, to ent at all limbs) having all limbs beautiful. ज. are non f. a beautiful woman, a belle, 21111. conj. l'urals011. to eat. FTT Faith conj. l'arasm.and Atm. to collect; with 99, to grow 2ruth , to determine, to the world. conclude ; with fat, to search, to seek, to look forv; with FF the universe, 3. 7H n a metre. on fraud. off, tu divide. जगदात्मन् ॥ (जगत् ॥. the world, an 377477 m soul) Soul of fat; FTTETT m. HITN tlır universe, and TTT m. lord) the Lord of to hoard.

·216 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. ह FTTETTYF. m. (HTTa n. the uni. GIAT f. wife, woman. verse, 7147 m. the lord ) the saf. the Gapiges. Lord of the universe. ओवन 2. livelihooda जघना 2. (जघन n. the hip, the. जीवनाशा.. (जीवन n. living, life, hinder part of anything, and Tret 1. hope, desire) desire & half) tik latter or hinder for living. part. hot m. the world of living FET.. tlie thigh. beings, this yorlu. FET 1. Matted liair. जीवित n. life. Sfee m. 1. f. besmearėd with, sienos m. 18. f. disgraced mixed with. or degraded by life or by con, HT m. 1. f. inanimate. tinuing to live. 77 rith #,,to je born, io Trill #y, and 77 1st conj. flourish. Átm., to endeavour, to alt- Tühm. the name ofthe son of tempt, to accomplishi. Parikshit, grandson of Arjuna. 57 1st, 1th, and 9th conj. Parusm जनय causal of जन्। to cause, to and 10th conj. to grow old, to bring alhout ; जनयितुम् ॥1 wyste away, to wear out. जनार्दन m. a name of Krislıņa. 9 m. follower of Jina, a person HET M. l. Creature. belonging to the Jaina sect. 4417 m. 1. f.one who is born; TT (T) Ith conj. Parasin. and Åtm. to know; with 35, to जन्मान्तर १. (अन्यज्जन्म जन्मा permit; with syfy, to recor- FT) another birth. nize. JT lst (09. P'unesm pro- Frhr. (719 1. Mowledge, nounce in a low voice, to imut. HTS m. a way ) the knowledge ter (as muayers) [ shasa. of God as it way to eternal जम्बुमालिन् ॥ name of a Rák- Bliss. F7 m. victory, triumpli. Jaz 1st conj. Parasm. to blaze, to bun, to beardent, to glow. ATITEW.N.I. that which brings victory. [asahe. ATT ?n conj. I'erus m. to be T lot wild. I'arum. to paie, to STTEC 11. dullness. with सम्, to cut to JIH ", a collection. pieces. to wound, to hurt ly 1741 birth-ceremony. words. जातवेदस् m. fire. TE M. ». f. bank, margin. Friarg m. son of Janamtapa. Ta n. a ton name for any re- JTE , the knee. lative ( a child or father' ). 912. alian. to a. chop;

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 217 manner. a ITÄTT 11. 12. f. one who knows MECHICHT Mr. for so long a time. the truth ordeal philosophy: arag «dr. during that time, in aeta m. n. I belonging to hin?. the meanwhile, na adv. like that, in the same praram," 1. austez', serere. FATOT.I. it day of the morith. algp, m. n. f. concerning Jiu falatt 11. n. darkness, dirk. तन् Sth conj. Päragm. and Åbn fara m. a louer animal, m. H. to stretch; to spread, as 1. horizontal, sideways. sacrifice, i.e., to perform it; nutari:11. (chef ». a lvly thing, with q, to spread. such as a river, and 377, n. TT 1. a son, watei ) loly water. ne-a7 f. body. TIT1, violent, tumultuous. dre m. a tluead.. ator on a house. arat f. a musical instrument, OTTFE 17. it Nume of ludis. lute. quale quickly. tort den. or nom. verb (from TMT737N (TTTTH M.a palm- Trat f. laziness or stupior) trer ) a fruit of the palm-tree. to be lazy. IT Ith conj. I'm asm. to be gra- 177 1st conj. Parasm. to perform tified or siltistie. rcligious austerities. TT 1th conj. I'aruvitu fred NIT 1th conj. Åt 14. with FF. to thirsty. ( ness. be pained or afflicted. TUOTT.I. thirst, grecul, coretuus ATT IN. an appressor. Tith conj. l'ausm. to kill, to ATTTT m. one whose peniten klestroy. triul virtues are his riches, Wafaa m. 1. jo brilliant, spolenall ascetic. did, briglit, spiritel. 7 4th conj. Parasm. to be dis- ÄTT 1. vatr. tressed. FITTIT I. giving alms, chanty. aft f. ir boat. 77 N. a collection of three. part 1st conj. L'arasın. and 10th FA 1st anil 1th, ronj Posam. conj. Atm. to threaten, to meto tiemble, to be afraid, weil reprove. 972, to be afraid. MTZT m. n. J. like that, in that TIT" protection. haile. thuice. Ty in, leat, Fatast m. collection of three, viz. APL 1st conj. Åm. to spread. Dharina or religious merit, art n. a slrill sound; m. n. f. Jithu or wealth, and hamu shrill. desires, or fulfilment of desires, -19 nace, to manner.

·218 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. ness. त्रिविष्टपास्थान n. (त्रिविष्टप 2. fa 2nd conj. Parasm. to be heaven आस्थान n. assembly) poor. the heavenly assembly, ( the m. pride. [to tear. assembly of the gods. a Ist conj. Parasm. to burst, त्रुट 4th and 6th conj. Perasm. 79 m a tooth to break, to snap. FITH m. 17. f. tenth. Fanf. the second or silver age ** f. state, condition. of the world. * 1st conj. Parasm. to burn, COTFT n. the three worlds. T 3rd conj. Puiasm. and Åtm. 30FF M. iin epithet of ;Rudra, to give. S'iva. a 2nd conj. Parasm. to cut. Fay f. light, splendorr, bright. The m. a demon. Te n. a nyule child, son. . na m. a'forest conflagration, a forest. 1st conj. Parasm. did 10th TTTT m. son of Das'aratha. conj. Âtm. to bite, tu sting. aut f. a jaw, a fang. Fatam. the end of the quarters, countries in all directions. fea m. an animal having sharjahat m. (FEET f. quarter, Êteeth, a snake. 77 m. conquest ) conquest of TOT m. n. f. Pron. southern. the quarters, or of all regions. afbroty m. 11. f. lleserving of A M. n. f. desirous of seeing. dukshinas faca dr. every day, day by a m. a tooth. day. pat absol. of 77' to give,'hav- at f. a day, heaven. ing given, fear ind. adv. Ly day. helst conj. Âim. to give. at m. 11. f. celestial, beautiful. a pres. part. of T, to give. FESTAAT 1. (faca, आश्रमपद af n. curdled milk. hermitage) beautiful heritage. 16. in. a snake. unt.f. name of a woman, the far J. direction, quarter. दिह 2d com). Parcasmand Ất at. wife of Nala. to besnear. For mo du. wife and husband. FH m. hypocrisy. fie Ist conj. Åtm. to consecrate y 1st conj. Atm. to have comand thus fit oneself for pci. passion. forming a sacrifice. Prera n. kindness. fra m. n. f. ppor, needy, afflicted, दरिद m. 1. f. poor. helpless. 0 11. 7 m. a tooth.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 219 how frary m.(fra, may m. brother) aittit m. dui. FITTA brother of those that are poor. and भीमसेन (comp.) stare m. abparticular coin (Rh.AT m. . f. vainly proud of man). one's learning. fr 4th conj. Åti. to shine. दुविनीत m. 9. j. rude. 9 11. n. f. that which lighus un n. a wickell decu, wickedup. ness, sin. af f. splendoar. Tem. 1. f. wicked: An adv. for a long time, long, tre m. 1. f. difficult to be surdeeply. mouhted, insurmountable. 2'ul conj. Parusm. anul Atm. 5th conj. Parasm.to give pain to milk.' to, to tease, to afflict. Jana M. n. f. afflicted with 4th conj. Aty to be pained. pain. 6th conj. Atm. th 38, to HTT m. 11. f..one who suffers pay espect to, to regard. pain, unhappy. , n. f. firin, strong. 4th conj.Turism. to be proui. दुःखसंतापm. (दु.ख,संताप m.heat) | हुए heat of pain,sorrow, af affliction. EST. f. siglt, an eye. afera m. 11. f. afflicted. 9th com. l'anasm. to tear. a m. n. f. shining Tetra m. 1. f. wlose end is difliah J. motlxr of Krislina. cult to be reached, infinite. Ta n. the land of the gols. a 1. a deity: 7779 m. ^... difficult to obtain. Tithi 1. dient proper words, words arft.. bitch of the gods. not well spoken. et m. 11. 1. worshipper of gods. दुर्ग n. a place beset with diffi- . country. culties and inaccessible. are m. lie w hohasa boly, man; ua m. n. S. distressed, miser m.12. f emboclied, having bly. alie. 1st conj. Purasm. urith 375, 9 m. 11. f. difficult to be conto purify, to cleanse. trolled or put down. a 1th conj. I'rrurem. with 371, m. 11. F. inaccessible, unto cut, to (ut off. approachable. at m. censure or calumny: gran an evilor imprudent act. 1997 m... an arm, दुर्बुद्ध m. n. f. difficult to be under-1677 n. (En n milking, stood, obscure. FT, m. time) time of wilkiny. a m. 1. f. one who has a bad at n. weakness. mouth, one who speaks evil. HEST n. bac or evil counsel. n. inilk. 1 ·220 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. composes for f. complexion. धर्मषष्ठांशभाग m. one-sixth part of religious merit as a share, चुन्न n. wealth. धर्मसूत्रकार m. (धर्म-law, सूत्र । f. heaven. afor n. wealth, money. aphorisms) one who con n. u thing aphérisms pon law, a writer 1st conj. Par.sm. to run. on law, T m. proper name. TTo3rd conj. Parasm.and Åtw. to hold, to put; the safe or foto at n. a collection of two. f. two-fold. shut; with 370, to attenıl; with A to place, to keep; with 7:59 m. 16. f. door keeper. GITT m. the third age of the परि,to wcar;with पुरस्to make | world. one a family priest; with fa, to cieçute, to do, to command STT n. door. Statem. a porter, a doorkeeper. (as in religious works); with द्विगुण in. n. f. two-fold, FH, to make peace with, to put or lay on, to fix on. द्विजन्मन् m. (द्वि two, जन्मन् n. birth) one who has two births, Eftf. a nurse. one belonging to any of the THI, n. lustre, glory. first threc castes, a Brahmana. EITT f. continuous flow as of द्रिजित m. (जिहा.. tongue) one water, edge. who has two tongues, a ser for 6th conj. Parasm. with pent. to make peace with, द्विजोत्तम n. one who is best fire ind. fie upon! among Brâhmaņas [to hate. oft f. intellect. fay 2nd conj. Parasm. and Atm. At m. a fisherman. GT m. an enemy. Tormy 5th conj. Parasm, and ध Atm. to shake. TETT F. desire for wealth. IT f. a yoke. aut f. (Falf. the string [ of ist & 9th conj. Parasm. and a bow ]) the string of a bow. Atm. and 6th conj. Purasın. har f. a pipe. to shake, to set in motion, to Tefta m. (ETTI f. the eartlı, 37 agitate. raq m. a lord) lord of the [4] 10th conj. with fa, to earth, a king shake, ftat f. tho earth. IT 1st conj. Parasm. to heat. ago 17. 12. f. one who con- TT m. incense. taminates or violates what is a m. a rogue. right, EJRT . n. f. dirty, dust-coloured.

·SECOND DOOK OF SANSKRIT. 221 7 cona. with 37, 10th conj. or causal, for.f.a lotus plant. to know exactly, to resolver FTS. ninth day of the fort with 57, to draw out, to save. night. T 5th conj. Parasm. dare, tefta m. n. f. new. 7.1 with f, to perish. to drave. 4T . .. f. perishable. 1st conj. Parasm. to suck, to Tf. the nose. drink. Ta m. 1. J. (9. courage, TE 4th conj. Darasın. and Åtin. fortitude) one whose wealth is with , to prepare oneself, lo fortitude. make oneself ready. 27T 1st conj. Parasm. to blow. Afar in different, many: Ist conj. Perasm.. to FITI 14. name of a Risli. template or meditate upon; HITTITT 1. il name of Vishnı. with 377, to contemplate, to fq. 777 pcs. part. of "(2nd meditate. conj. Atm. T'cerc) rith FA, a aulv. certainly. sharpening T!st conj. Parasm. to sound. ja:Iti m. 1. f. powerless. STT 11. final beatitude. fs :3,1 conj. Piliasiind 7. n. a crocodile. Åon. to purify; erith, to tite n. the lord of mountains, 11:25h. the mountain Himalaya. H 11. 1. l. one's own (re- नद् 1st conj. "Parasm. to sound, lations). to l'omoto thunder. Q5 F Prul course ítmı. with 7, to to with T#, to hail, to wel wash. FATI. greatly, ("kcessively. form. name of a royal race, an fart m. 11. 8. (trznal, constant. individual of it. 11. n. f. humble. 274", varly religious per FTF. m. hell. formance. Ti . a king. FATIT .. the lut season, summer. 741 . name of a river. f77 1. death, destruction. नलतुल्याकृति m. १४. J. (नल m., तुल्य निन्दित /qat zoto 1. PM९N. of निन्द, fare n. sound, nonse. m. 1. j. like, and a f. form) having the form of Nala. censuie, crayunabile, m. n. f. (TC, निपद्यमान ! Ant. of पद witle form, and no assuming)one Fa, lying clown. who has assumed the forni fafars m. 1. ). without interstices, dense come. नलरूपधारिन् N. of Nala.

·222 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. a or guess. Sonie. FAUGH adv. verily. mony of the investiture of the farfa f. destiny. sacred thread fairym, one wha binds oifties. #am. n. f. mean,o low, in low position. faitfore . a minister, an officer. farem. f. useless, ain. frant irr. n. foppesorting to a low man, possessed by a humble face area adv. tithout interval, man ; flowing down a sloping closely. ground. fatfahrt'm. n. f. having the highest excellence" (Prof. : adv. down, below. Benfey ), where there is no नीतिनिपुण m. n. J. (नीति J. policontempt, respectful. tics or prudence, fagor m.n.f. FITT m. hell. proficient) proficient in polifarra past part, pass. of tics, or very, prudent. अस् do throw with fart, dispersed. 2nd conj. I'arasm. to praise. faTIET m. 11. f. not having eaten, ind. a particle showing (loulst fasting. fear f. cruelty. 77,indo certainly, verily. ffat i. 11. f. tenantless, lone- TTT 2. an ornament worn on the ankle, an anklet. Fafe . a' god. 1467 . 12. f. living among men, fixed to one place. fat m. 1. f. wicked. 19.f. the circumference of a Farest m. n. f. ten days old (a wheel. child). agot n. skill. faisa mn. n. f. without wealthi, 99 m. king of a conuitory named poor. fauft m. 11. f. filled with, full of. Nishudha, Nala. faci ha f. truth, reality. न्यायप्रदत्त M. 1.1. (न्याय m..jus. free n. desisting, abstaining, tice, uprightness, 7271 past abstinence, with q to proceed). हत् fait f. night. one whose conduct is just or upright. funt m. lord or king of a न्यायवादिन् n. 2. J. (न्याय m. what country named Nishadha. fargary m. n. f. (Frer f. fixity, is right) one who speaks what शून्य 11. f. void) void of fixity, unsteady. FEJ in. 1. f. just, right, proper. face cat f. fruitlessness. fara m. nature. ft with 39, to perform the cere 9 f. a line, a row. part, of is right.

·the Univ.se, SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 223 T numer. nom. and acc. plur. TE n. a lotus that blooms by five. [to read. TL 1st conj. to praise. [ulay. पट 1 st conj. Parasm. to repeak, qoft br. the sun, a protector. 93-1417 (pres. pass. part. of ore pron. m. n. 1. other, belongto recite or read what is being ing to another or the other recited. party. पण 1st conj. to praise, to betoor TT 1. lho the highest thing, God. stake at play, to gamble TITT f. a line, i l'81, i succesa with 37, to jump towards; sion. with q & 37, to fly, to fly into. THE Cvij. but. 77sca alr. like moths. TTT m. tr. Supreme ruler of TATT m. name of the author se. God. of a great grammatical work tirea mn. the God Bralma. called the Mahâbhâshya. TTTTÖTT object of attention on 777 17. falling, falling from vir. devotion. tue, depravation, ruin. TTIÜTZT.M. f.one who lnings a m. master, husband. about the good of others. Traa . n. f. sinful, apostate. Tre mk... dead. 74: (allative sing. of a m. परिक्षित् m son of अभिमन्यु and load) from the way. gramson of 377. पथिन् m. a path, al way. qrafif service', attendance on, 797 n. what is wholesome or worship. salutary, TTTTF m. iln attendant. परिजन ॥ an attement, il sol 4th conto Âtm. to drop, to be dislocated, to fall; with gia, gfiora..! old, zulanceol. to know or understand, to accept, to do, to practise, to Tiro /">t pait purse of it prith of, abandoni. attain; with सम्, to become, to amount to; causal with gra qitA[F41.16. 1. pot. part. Og to think, to consider, to set Finth aft, desor's ing to be forth, to prore, to make over, abandoned. to give; with Ah, to strike a परिपन्थिन् bargain. in the way or obstructs, Try. frafruft/ standing in its way. T7 n. the foot. 71. a footstep. परिपाक . becoming maturr, eft f. a road, a way. maturity. Tre n. a thing, an object. frage past part of a richaft, Tefa f. a way, a mode. vant. mi f.one who stands scorched, burnt.

·1 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. S011 । . यनिकृत भ्रष्ट past part of अंशrith परि, पारयिष्णुतम .. .. .. able in the leprived of, fallen, diepgavel. highest tlegrat. to accomplish विर्तन .. change. ling. anything. रेवर्तिन् m... turming. chang. पारिकित M. Son of Irikshit. वारं . .tinue. पार्थ ॥ uf प्रथा. htine of the रेट n a master, ( oner. P.indain रेवेष्ट m. om 1 distribute पावक n. filt. found at the talk पावन ॥ ... Tutifying. Ire, रेवान m. arrelus... hols. रेप्पङ्ग m (m. पाश ॥ ॥ 11,ashant रेममाप्ति..it ..' 11111 :.t. : रिझर ॥ ..! lion identier. रेताप ॥ } . . .. ... पिण्डद ... on whatsa रोपकार ॥ 11:11. !! diurned oilixxl. जन्य rin पिण्डालतक... a liye'. पिनाकिन् . m. bf. fle has be !! Cl. ! पिशुन ...... mishchims. (2}: 11111111. EEP. !! रियनता.! htttt. iti Nangita .... पिप it Inte. in. tagrini. तिम fulls. t !.. पीडाकर 1. I. I. that whithali Jull वन the not ... पीयूष . tar. लायमान (11. . . .f अय 1.1 म 1111 पग. पुण्डरीक - Thallite, . th Title : 1 tutnel. thing. पुण्यटन (पुण्य ॥.net लाश A 10. lhi कृ. पुण्यरुप m. Tony / . t(१.५ १. गत m. falling, t..il. पुनरनभृत... पुनरत.kiatani गानित utstant }" tition, and भून Incom, like urintition. पात्र .. a fit ultant charit. पुनर्भ... i. nilon currial. पान्थ m a traveller पुर..ntown. पापकृत m... 1. 'पाप " Sin, utt पुगंध m. htmt of a drity. कृत • who has tolit) Gil TOT H. the gall of a city. who loita committed sin. पुरम्तान it. Ifore, in front. पापहर m ॥ . On that takes: पुगंधम् in t. family priest. sil. Tim. family priest, chaplain. am.dl. Mausit of पत्। 1111.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. with 7. of 225 17!h conj. l'arusu to nourish. 972 1. 11. f. magnificent, great. 15 m. ll prour name, TEE IN.n f. hot, fierce, violent. Thef. nourisht. Tofta m. name of a hing. प्रचार m. progress, prevalence. पुष्पम्रा . (पुष्प "म्र /. अच्युत Post Port. of च्गु to fall qurlaul): galaid of Besser's, foron Shaving How?s, fruitful. TH17 m. thr göd Brahmî. rom). I'm ani din. प्रजापशुकाम (प्रजाf grogeny, पशु to purify. in catedry and Fit in. wish) the past part. press of q. Il-cd, oue wshing for progeny and catile full. पूर्णपात्र THEFT 21. n. f. (TATS. sul. a firat !! 10 glese to ET n. oppression, anıl jis til Bilvania dlarlotte 37 foon of arising), arising Ocasions. from the oppression of , the pr. f. prosit, en stell. amat purt. pues. ईगर m. पूर्व, गति.. prith gind , placell ; AFZnicht, the portion :::.*?? #IFTIER woll-disposed, wellof the mythe, Conzollel. पूर्वाड on the fra? part of the Fatrafa (7989 m.beat) store day. of heat. qorqirilma TRAETT 11. help against an Talsi Tileng. Bosrizsiet und TFT devel, a remedy. afafafaew.n. f. inveterate, irmith , 2017 ***9774 1vatni, Bemeritable, self-willed, uistitu ansecinte. W. Itse. 4.1. an army. प्रतिपक्ष Wigill enemy. TUIT 1. a los que :'\",1151**?! प्रतिविम्ब fullus 74N, 1.1.1.1762, 26t. JATT potpunut. piss. of FT ''them). L'ap.2.994, til. irriform. Wh. Ole who real word explains the l'unimas Freyr mantinus, prowess. moratet /. the day of the full प्रति elery, अहन् । That S. sulijet, le minis terial officers, disposatini. . & conj. À!... 1. ill image reflected as in a wron. the afa, fiz bidulen, prohibit. $ AFETÔT.. a female door-keeper. प्रत्यग्र ।' it. 1. or aut. lllcnt, fish. Trys n. 1. Western. प्रत्यहम् quel shou) esery clay. 1001).

·226 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. प्राणाघान m. dettruction of th प्रादुम adr. or ܐܝܝܐ प्रत्यजीवन n. restoring to lift. प्राण ॥. (plural) life. main, revival. प्रत्युत्पन्नमनि प्रत्युत्पत्र Post 14 (usel : 11 of with प्रति उद) m) visible. manifest Tends - winted, quick, blhary प्रान्त ॥ border. प्रत्यय M Nawn, des.reak. प्रापितवत् past.tart. act. of th.. प्रदीप्त ANTIIt. of दीप to shine came. ofआप "iths. haran, t) a. 11111lity made to get; having sinin प्रदेश m. in region प्राप्तकाल ॥ n. (प्राप्त ?tant. प्रपत्र ... the coul of love. of आप "th a got.in काल. प्रधी॥ Im, intertential ... time that wlos uma boa 1. 1. (2mTHIN. of arrisd.suited to the oth witha), on) 1. sahit प्रायम muisthy, Mi uiosi (28 tortt did 11. 11 ellerally. प्रभपिन .. प्रार्थना.. seeking प्रभात (1) of भा। प्रियदर्शन .f. One with .. 21....!!.. 1.- look. 11:1" } | ..., দ্বিয়াৰ ... ofa bishnant प्रियमंवाम ॥ संवाम..!!". प्रभास 1HE toomme the welling toothu. प्रमति .... 1. It also... th con.!... !! ofMALI tied Isolus. प्रमाद . mistake प्री l'artinand प्रयाण ... ... ..] iulionetu polease? प्रयुन । पीन, 11ग्री, 1 । प्रवामिन् .... प्रवंगम ' . . inoke.. प्रहरपलसिध प्रनि in ! 1. 11 उपलबिय .. ::: Pra, प Hum. प्मा - Turus todesoul प्रत्रजिन .ukdutdu. प्रमन्त्र untuk मा.प्र. फग ! - its to... pletel.... - Pu.. प्रसव ... Althans iha! ispiti (10mned with sun.to' alueel, fronus, fiul is goriva irunt फलग्रहि ... (ht who gather- मागल्भ्य ॥ ... thirunter Klletiterat. प्राचा." taster:! rtain court प्रमद्रग। , प्र. dut ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. PAS a. HIR वाच ॥ titular mans. फलमूलादि ॥ ... (मूल root) बोध m awak.nilny. finits, roots, gud others. ब्रह्मन् ... the Dism carrse and सत्कार .. Soupimg. Ice of the ummerst; man Sacrificial priest whoseklut it is to read online apmeralples. a lioy. internet Introl thanrforml 7 mod paruule jmplying sur- Jurist, Sorrow, ifc. ब्रह्मवर्चसिन् it. I. ... illumind try वन्य 1.mast. to tueb.t) thie verbetespossessing the fasten. pour confined long the बन्धन • I straint. imprisonment. of the ele rites. an alm.. अनादि ॥ जयन् All आदि बाहिरपाधि ॥ (उपाधि an attii. In thin cord Bralina anul tuti. a paulaiity. in. ath 11 It; outward attributes, 1. form.of admuties, or anvironment. 111 || am Bill वहिम ।ir out. a longbely, much. त्र Purnitut बहुविध । ! of 11 - 01 15 10 opath वाणजाल। (जाल htion भ ...ma mulutull of भक्तिमार्ग भनि। 10th tot], anl मार्ग toon चाणरथ । पथिन् 19. One of normun. t) ! }o{ { Ot tidnya way to याण1ि5 18. !' <!.., 1 1111111... भग 11. him ht, luth, चालानप". 11}.in: Sun -::. 1111" !!! वालिया.! girl. भना । भः बाप्प'. । • 1, . 11, 1ull बाहुक it the malltut Saladis. :"ured as a charitter. lirizine 1 Alni, विभीषण name of a troche rot tu tuches, tu l'Il tu, with fa. today. Truck .ind वि.0 Rivana an ally of kuma. minit ku u shall, Veston बुद्धिलक्षण .. बुद्धि ! talent, लक्षण upon a sign a sign of talent बुभुक्षित ॥ .... hungry. भग l'arilyn बृहस्थ . uatule of a king of ' Mayudha, father of Jas disain22 m a sulibier. dha. भण् 1-1 only. In ast. to speak. . 11 ورزز: \\ ،، -- 18.. a tar. i. to d... So, wbreak.

·228 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. . भयाक्रान्त आकान्त । yari firs. of क्रम् ॥itle आ, is ertain aviercin) Parex- Comme year. भव ॥ Thorld, Hyri: ८५१०१ - भवन । ans. भवितव्यता.. fate, the sy. भा..... ...) 11.1. 1.) 5.11. to 11. 16. भाग. a dius भागधय . lot भाग्ययोग {{ht he: titu, योग। ॥ ... 11the ... 10! (11. P. 1111- भुजंगम-भुजग .. a. cohra, a st. pent. L f. the earth. rithe star to overcome. re'l पगि, to lespise', to threat toil telaptuously. भूनममागम".coming together or 11111of animals or beings. भूरि 1. much. भूप्णु ॥ ॥ .. about to Income भृ।। (J. Pun m. and it to. UPMut, to htu. भृश ... antonighet. भक fion. भागकरी/xluringtonjansinnit. भागतृष्णा भाग .. uorldli ki Hit , तृष्णा | thist, this: 1. woleli joyment. भंश ! 1 / it and tiny... 11.0l. चम | tte aory. m..., " 111,100. भान July मम 1. वि. to 10. to: 11 ... it... thul... torch. भाज!.11 th tashme. भाश 1 1 ( . .intoshine. in ! it to shine. . - टाश । भानु भानुमती W1lk Purniii .. the !! 101 1.1.! भार्गव ofm. भाव Lama 1 भाष At : ' प्रति ) भाष्यकृत Bh.i-lha O! ! puri ko! i. (11.11.11. भाम्बर# the sun. भिर्ति ।... mall. भिड 1 y. Furtha,, ....! i: toht भिन littirit. भी ... । । to ful. भीषण .. ! dri भुति..! MNMasion, intent भुज. Iasti'. to 0 ......net, to... . . मघवन् hane of India Relate', porujerityislar is holy, anything fortuale or inspirious मङ्गल i. anl काल tion) an auspicious ulcisiun. मालपदीप an auspicious launp. मज'. ... ... Asivable, sweet.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 2:19 of heoints, मण्डन ॥ decoration or ornament. मरुतm a gorl. 9059 n. a tendiary hell etet मरुत्त m. hint of a king cd on festireoccasions, a shet, मरमत u. the son of tin. \\ and, an enclosure. M.irluti, muonhey soldier मण्डल n. an orh, atircle. de.sot.ma.. मन. (opinion, lice. coulist.: मर्यादा ind, amit. मधिन् m. a thurminshnile. q+ n tl ( 1' ( 11?. sll , मदर्थे ... for no. to mmsd. मच ॥. a smitunas hun. मम्तक । ॥ 11th al मधुपर्क m..litill 1115 महत्". Justra Hitness curile dinh, tr, tu il Wind महत्या (111Aal. महाज. मधुरम् .. !!. माजा॥'.. पहन, . मधुलिह . . . . जय . -"!! Hat. मध्यम .. महानुभावा ॥ ofmulu मध्याह । (मध्य !!!!, अहन् १. dai !!! . lity / 1 महाभिरक॥ महत् .... मन् । अब, .:. . . . अभिपकः ॥ rinking मनम्विन् ......... !: 11. ..'2:1. lot thing मनुज ...!! ।।।।।।...) मनुजन्मन् ॥. मनु ।। 1111 111, !! महागन । .:.1, TH 0 min 111 महाह at) . 111, a महाई शयनाचिन ...। 'महाह, शयन ti...1, उचित महाना otti... महोत्र, उशन hully tat मनारथ m. wish hain. मन्त्र Crisults, th-t मन्वाक्षर ॥ .. hilat othos 11 Til मन्थ 11/j. THAN ( 11. मन्दना.. dullints, Mither !!- clition. मन्दभाग्यना... (मन्द lull. भाग्य fortun, मन्दभाग्य one who ! - unfortuliatey misfortune. मय m. malnt of an architect. मम्बmaray. मराली... a format: swari. :20 महार ht in all. महापकाग्नि mn 11t10- .'• Ir मा.id Atm. to masure, मान M.". १,५elf 1:kict,pride, arroganc..

·230 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. भृग 101 "" मानव m man. smell) the fragrance of the मानवगधम m. an oril spirit in breath of the mouth. ther form of a man. मुग्धाकृति m.n f. of lovely film मानुप्यक. n. the whole Ice of or hape. 111e'n, man hindi name of an enemy of मानोत्रनि । 'मान m. rospert) lofti- Vishnu or Krishna 1664 of Met, rat silf. मुष th conj.larian. .. ....! Inct. प्र 10 i.int. मामक n. ft. मूकभाव m. dumbus.. माया | Juwary, let itful arke मई 1st tity Initi.mi. i..113 माकन Wund मुर्धन् m the head. मारनात्मज m. the son of-ut. मुल, ot. hasis of amid, Virgitt मृपक ॥ mmit. 'मुपकगज मालाकार hun of me मालिन्य ॥ dark it. . मान्यवन ॥ 1.01.1 100। matual Edit: मृगणिका । . Rin मगया । ।hat. Lty माम ॥ मृगानुमाग्नि it... 11 मांम् ॥ }}}- an into lo]" 1111111.. मृज 11 2.11 .11 10 मिथ ।/1.html]!, Nith coll i. to him, to ma" off. t" other. to. 11 chau (Utth Ti... oi मिथुन th मम्, to AWEIT मिथ्या ।। inth 1.1. !! मृणाला ... the stalfilORI- मीtin t. Lt.in to destroy मृट Prithun.l, मुकुटज्योत्स्वाजल 11 to attains 11' 12th मृपा formu; of the listen lommer og मरला. in..rndi. waist मध्य M.... titm instantu । मुक्तकशी' 1. !!! the that ite:! Insacritici drred or dishes.ld मेनका .. 11.1111 01 Celestial dauns-l. मौतिक anal fra i princess of Juinlä, मुखरता.! Arulty. मुखोपडासगन्ध उछास मोह m. fenoishness, inittuation. breathing. गन्ध •n. Perfume. मौन 11. Silence 1... माम ॥ -- 14 .. । . . " । 1. प ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 231 to fra n. folly. * 1st conj. Palasm. to repeat over in themind, to repeat; rith anal repeat, to repeat ly tryitivn, to prescril., to rule. og init haben inn. ist cons. I'ors. to GION weary, to become faint on languil. य. 2. conj. Parasm. to; rith वि and निस्, to go away, to pass itway. sera allas long as life endures. TET, W. for which while', while, as long its गु con l'ines... join. TT 1. il.prir, it couple, TTATTOT 11. forrit of clothes. T : Wishes पुमान्तर, (TTT ni period, TOT then itnother age or personel. TF1 lei). Prenem. iind 10th to unites with fat, tu appoint. Inith cing. I'm reatud tem.to Jollmuth , to put it ques. tion trith to reasonir, to 1.1, rith fa. to ppoint. पुन Gilum. wurbone's TITA N. i sacrificir. TN. . Sacritic. TIT. M. a portion of it suria ficial ceremony. 14054 m. endosure proprezent fui a sottritice 1976 m. il proqmi nam. TPTT 1. j. preturning tu sotialsilke, ty? गप ॥ यत् AT, 1, N11191 Trad. for los #lom hata chemichelin graft will incremena to time rules lundiluun in umeme work-yrolikling to the saint precepto. TUCH wir cordones torney, tu bel's wontent, chouses. यम् lacin. I'urion. tople'siball ya miliegend oriuili, che cost! presiung vite dhe u li TOIT.. lame of a river. poft in, it will TA (un. l'arrestante. to endeavour, with g. THWith Fall on the l'unt , tu be Spice post from T.!. il liceele. f.!. pen lucky tomalle गुवन ॥ il yuth, it in 1.. ierina.opstinwhich the inalis will Tirira !!!! quru11 ing to the (01.trri of Europe. iftar present. c. of the TA!, hulig juined. याधममाज ॥ 'oro n. a Warrior, mulutult, a mul titude of warriom, ili urmy. यौवन vs. south.

·332 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 1d arasm. SO.. 11m.to ।। 1 वि, 11. . । र गष्ट n. a kingdom, a nation. प्रिक्य . ] roperty, wealth. रन... Hindi fraith conj. Parasm.and al. the plate { where any gitat. thiix th, stay.. to wacuale (on. Cara to make मागत .. me to the stayn . noise, to chymloud. ग्य rith वि. thuminge', to affeet, 1.harsh. to piforni. मचिकर ॥ .F. palatalıle. राज.. रण n n hottle, it.1.1.1. मचिर ॥ ni. agreeable, hani गति... Int. Tatt into lhunt. मदd onJ. Putrit sm. to wept.. भिम 1 hath , live hinyl, ta lament for. गम् । रप, स्टm the yonilsina 15/1 IM rth Partism. and in wa uult, in pelent, ग्म्य me... asttit. रश्मिमत टिम सर. in the milt of a min. 11) 11. Bl. रप ।' . अधि... 4 (11td. 1. time. सप.. film. रेणु ॥ Must. रहित ॥ " 1. a. !! . . . . . . wealth. गंग od tistiese, sickness, ग' Thti'. गदमी। ... The Mith राघव ... ... chalit of Rahu गेधन 1. hum.. गहिन int othes 1. वि. to shait. !!!.handi. गज 111111. राजक॥. muti trail the ans. र मी ! ... like of Mali राजकुल ॥ (गजन् । ..! lenkot.i. glor: a hone, atti' !... रगड : A . stati राजमय ॥ Atul i hall. kuniga गुला रार प्रा ! ! title . Puys.. रामभाया.! it will illa. रामादि राम !! !! Hathi anti .!: आदि ... ....hi (thers. Maths, to । Ima ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 283 Inc. 011 (Int, tO . लाभ ". han . sprak, to prattle; with fâ. to लोक 12th अव 1-1 ! lament. took at. to 7 to get op dersion a cetain s. animal as a rikim to • लोकत्रयानि (वय (ollection (rinced. ot thre' पनि ...loit ihr lorid लम् "ith अब. 1st comj Atm to of the chosen worlals, w, lle: depend on. 11'll, Earthi, imel bir लम् ]tainml 4tiny. IPurasn.t) desires, reth fy to destres लोकवादः of pimple लोकान्तरम् . अन्योलोक टोका. UTP condo l'armem to give or न्तग्म) allother hot लोकापवाद trint peoples, :quisiti, hlm. illurilite Dulu..20., imalin.. लोचन लोमन लावण्य · tants, l. !: !!!}. - , लाम'. 11 htiht otulshi लिए / ni.JI... लाल, ... 1110\me. insteils. 11 -11, ti) momt. दाह वन्य 'लाह 1. iion, बन्ध लिह2 11 as annot acint, . . , . fitter ली 1th ( Áll. to an 15 hist... ..halisonintl. 'व. t. I... dil !, th.. htly of लीhini T...! to ht, t.) .it. !! 11211. Link. वच् । आशियम, ११ : ... 11. वि, to rlt. च ।' प्रति, t... '' तीन tt ofली, 11tal 1, mint. चन्च 1. At to10]] On th.. वटा । Jultant und वहयानन्द ॥ that he dt.) PLI tohed. । 11s at the toot of the yen. tattoto d53!!"r ! 1 वणिग्जन वगिना. como Puries nil channe, 11•2 chales totk..wal. वत्मनरी '.. ... perder, to ili priv f. वन्मा! 1 a toimal child. मुख्यक a lunirt, i fun, वरम" the preness or manner टू thy Purust aman. of killing. t.) (ur lon of . वयम्तम्भ .. वध killing, and लेखा.. a line. म्तम्भ .. ht) allows. 11. ܐ ܙܙܐ ܨܙ -,'u ܕܝܐ ܝܙܐ ܂ܐܢ ܙܐܐܙܫܨܐܢ ܝܚܐ L तुर 11 a. " ·234 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. bring. - । वर i LORL. Imfull . बन् Bih Atm. to bog. Ti l«t conj. L'aram. ani Alvido वन्दितव्य nt. part. of वन्द, fit to ith आ, to • banty. वाह in. fire. वन्य .. .. pirocluced or sist वाdoonj. kirusn. to blow. ang ili Enrose. वाच्यता J. Prasurableness, liati. वर l'argum. ad Á JHA tr) onsuys. to sher, to cont, th sol , utth वापंय. । ॥१॥५ वा, "ith निर, to निर, tooti.richtion] furl.t) Itinguish. porront वाग्वारम् l often. वाम the body. वाग्दि Albud. वम् 1st orij. Item, th anit वालिपुत्र the son of Tili, to ( house monkey chief. वरुण m the. girl.of water the वाल्मीकि ॥ naime of it sayo वामर a lal. वर्मन यामव ।। the shorel Indra वर्षण वामिष्ट descendant of वर्षाभ Vaastha वर 1.1 Atm tom. विक। ilon ont, opened. वन्मीक 10 विक्रान्त ... Curious वश ...... to us. • Powess. विचार्यमाण (Pre part with वषार in the 1. वीपट ..t th. tog, time of manmohition ... वि my thought or coninto the Ure.. 11111 (onaler and coda dost विचित्र Honmitriul, वस् । iy lrs.co. (1th नि . विच्छ Filment, to date to Approach वसन .. (loth. gunt. विज 1 and itik वसन्ननाघातक 1. ( वसन्तसेना. Purash arth उद. to mammotam .. घातक fremdeles, to fear, tu le disgusto Tietrores) murderer si d. वसन्तसेना. विज id... Purasm and Am. वसा int, mauran separate, w disinguish; वस्था . the earth. t.वि. वस्तुमात. (वम्नु विरम् 10th conj. to distort, to a collutORamling of make nilicalous to mak. विनवन ... inathy. ।" 11. " 41 - tog HT and जान .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 335 17 " 1 HI10. . वितृष्ण . 21... (वि droil of, विलमित॥a wanton pastime. and TCT desir) free from fast post part of any desire deltroveri. faz ? conj. Pard. to know •विवाहनिधि विवाह m marriage fer: 7!he con. Atm. to reason aul विधि •mmons) the upon, to discuss. (Trimony ot marriage विद् caus. with नि,ito oft.r, to विविध "! of eneral kinds. pesent, to inform. विश मम and आ. . .nter 'विदर्भ in the pur.) the m, yme in Ilmni of a country, the mo. farzt in the the order or caste dein Lemars along the linus ; i sub. विदेशगमन (विदेश a foreign Janta }"opoli. going to a foreign विशसिन् it sughterrr. মিয় Ifons'. विदह 11m of t tunts (... विशिष्ट | portable (per. विद्ध 1111111५. 1 व्यय, विश्रत " ! HEss of 11tml. statk, nound श्र, वि, fimons, famed as. विद्या। urming, lore विश्वन । ullisections विद्रम" mt of विद.. . !:0", विश्वनाथ Mill of the trittiye, Gorl. विदिप Unn.my विश्वपा thi.. Piotratos of all, thi i Tratur, विनष्ट ist नश ॥11. वि, विश्ववाह the Protector or Sup. ciestrowie ' | the it विपाश "" honda... .. विश्वमनीयना..... its to inspire विपिन । a forest. alth.in विप्र । । Brinam. विभामज the entert, Bhimi. विध विश्वावस.. th. Hamrota Gan- विभाग ..! destruction 1.11. विभाण्डक 1 of anti. विध देवा lur all the girls. विभूति mealth. Firit. विरI. Put ki tarl Am. Wor or ratnts.. विमतिता.. wunt of inthyout. विषय 100,jors giving sensual विमुत्व " ! with the fat.. Titure turned away from. विषाण a horn. विहिन m. II.f reparated. विष्टपहाग्न्ि ".. le who pleases विरोध Opposition अविगया. luasanly 1. in 4, l'ishnu. विष्णुशर्मन् 1. a profrr lalne. JNI विधान hanimuny.

·236 FECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. बनात. विम्लग्न. lr inditail. वृत्तान्त .. account, occurrence, विम्नार ॥ Extent. [nent. history. विम्मय adhiita1011, 1:/t: वृत्तान्त श्रवण ।. (वृनीन्त श्रवण . 1. f. torruitml heaping uring of 111011 विहाय हा.aluandon arith or account वि humbudant. far lubogi, maintenan. i. विहिन stirty of दृत्रहन ॥ killer of जुत्र, था Imelin. prith fa, furosemaluat, les tres IUT de un vaisi, 11•lessly srompturen विहीन detitute of वृद्धि | Posirity. 10 h. 11m 1. वृश्चिक ।।। । (.mpion. वृप (.) • Purns 1. 10 rin,th वीरगम Harming o}.' sh.la 1 clour, to Murti'.. of the moti untiments. Sund, it simnes illi चीग्वाधिनी। 'वधिनी । ...m:) 111111111111... दृष्टि वर्ग " stoms of s. व Purash and.11. " i. ol. 1. टपट ॥ 1.IN -- . १ ₹ 101 . . . वेग SL 1, 1, 1). 1 अप आ वणिवणी.. anthal. op!, misle T Trond Am, to वणु binlisa (11.11. वि. ( Amal. ..। वदना । \ . 11. मम. ) -hut वेश। hti नि, 10 ...', वष । totration व: naploitune. वैकाव्य 01. Atiliction मूल at the roato... वैदग्ध्य hall. वैदिक हम IAthar.. ... ......। 1. ! to ॥ V and. tushum वैधम of Tulhan वैयाकरण Rumariall. जिन वैषम्य .. till ults, calamity. हत् ।। अति. ..Ray / आ. to turn round, t turn अङ्ग lach. lali, manist घ्यनिक atlusen or al-ence, tremure, I bring into partic स्यचिन part of व्यय, attletest. इस What has taken place, R11 व्यथ iticine Partn. to pierce, to wound. व्यक्त वि, .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 237 व्यास ॥ . . সুস্থ a ut. घ्यय m. expenditure. शब्द m. roices, a word. व्याकरण n. grammar. शम् mt. happiness, Welfile व्याधित . 1. sick. शरणार्थिन् ॥ ... onu sex ucking ध्याल m. a uniley.hant refingt. the reputed authon of शरमण्डप bi uprar slied the Mahabhirata, it lishi. mailo of प्रतरुचि ॥ om who hura शगव m. a kind of prot likus for fasts and other ile शरीग्न् ि। ॥... (ht hang votional vows. m. a human Ring, a Puun... to cut. tumor, to tear. शर्वर्ग शर्वरी.. th night: जीरा -ha nut. the lordisthitght, th. IHOOL. *श Arabintit hate. श. शशाङ्क m thh in शंम , th आ ly im शश्चत् - ram tual!! hour.. शम ] । Puram 10 कि. शक 11. Purism total tu hill, to dietroy. भकट m समविद्या 'शत्र विद्या , unt of भकन् Mallium कृन्नला! mamt (oi: Itds, with सम्पमपात मन्त्र. मंपात otu kalayl... Purnsaanti itdruhe of it will ! ""-11 शस्त्रास्त्र n. talk, if all kit 1 hrynt of art. गजिनाth...!!!!.1.1 गाए ॥ -alr. !! I21th sit गावक . the ling of mist- ..... गाम : nurinam to you, 1}। ।। I'... , tilat 11.I शह 10th anity le: !! . .) गाम आ, • trand 10 मचीपनि m th. 10.1 0 शची मात्र प्रतिपय . 'गान्त्र । htture, • ঘনিখ ministon) मनाम ॥ 1. living t! . hun iith.al Tolitan Terdstars शिम्मिन् गबुनम it from a • !! गिरम ॥ the .:.1. प्रद !!1-1, .tit! गिरीप । शन ........... .....:: গিন্যমান Collectivity of शप II to cur". सप्त्वा iii to dis. -- माध्मा ॥ . 4 शिith uitm.

·238 SECOXD BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 11. }" myful tinguish; with fa, to particu to resort to; with Fry, to resort larise. to, to rest on, to depend upon. * 3nd conj. Atm. to lie dokin, to 9th conj. Param. and Árm. sleep; rth fa. to surpass. to cook, witamin: P. cold. f. wealth goddess of wealth. भीतत्राण protection from श्रीहरि . the name of the you cold. J'ishnu. n.. cool. (ET) 5th conj. Prirusm. to hear. fe n. good disposition, श्रुतिमनोहर m. 11. f. ( yra f. cai fol. an oystershell. and FT1T11, n. f. charming) शुचि min. f pure. charming to the car. 19T11. a proper name stro-off 1. line. Tasty . nt proper name, 797 . splentour: गुनोलाहल M. Popier name'. TE 11. car. 7. m n. the money given to ST757 n. ir pair of ears. thie junts of a bude, origin hot Farh 1. tomorrow's duty or uilly :44 : poterhase price 4757 M. a dog. [work: gap. servirem, atrudiana on Am conj. Purus m. to brcathr, finn. wrath fa, to respoire ; vruch für 11!.I wacant,"mitvi to believe', to confide, with AH fot.. having no liveliness ind 371, to calm one-self, tu on the face, prile fixed, of it ile decleil countenance. TTM. a beast of yiey, it least शालिन् W. a name of Siva स. F 11.a hon. Harith f, to faile fits pann) संख्यातीत॥ m.f. FTOHT.S. mum. ber, stara in. 1 j. yune lice 9 m. in. remande, WI vleis onlinnumerable. शैम्य . nanie of. king HITTA prest prevrt. of TT. FETT 111.91.1 overcome with united. FUTA ni. it battle. . W. duk green Haul. proper name. WTH ' fatigue Fige perso poort of Ty with #q Tn ny. Ponism. 10 cooh. pleased, satistied, gratititel. Afrona piast post of the futiquel. m. doubt. WETU .. in tifth montis of the PIEZT.' twilight (ut the quonins and evening twilights and 11: falser. Persone who don. the novu graders are offered srith , tu ilmy to, 10 50 tu, by Brühmaņas). take courage. with सम्, SOLO Hindu pedir ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 339 HOW . Vintuous संनाह m. armour. मकाश m. nearness, proximity. संपर्क m. covtact. सकोष m.../. angry. मंपादन 1. actionplishing. FIA W it frasil, it compunion. ATEIT n. a custom. travltional AF ". attachment to worldly observance. things, antiret. मंभव . possibility prohalility. मभरणत्रत ॥. प्रत। it low) the buth, source. Ot1 Conduct संभावित past pm. pirt of cons. ni y roth a thought ot,' Alvering Incasm. toi cling, thought possibile. to aadhe tothवि अति मंभ्रमविधि hospitality, thustt.. यनिषon toothier. Om count of thermal of a मोति. gist. ममोहन .. mofa.11lone मक्रिया । 1. ht! wrapon मंयम प. Ist.int मन नुम्प मयमिन् ॥ a aur uhto httIlr...! Join Orities. his passions, llista. मन्यरूप मंवत्मर m. uirl. संवन । the list of mint. भृमि ... !!! of thritt .. संवर्नक m a spinition of submitr. मत्मंगनि । ....!!! . " " - । मट मीट 11 toor) . to 11' ... 11 आ. . .pich, to !!!!! मम भा, ty obtain, ti) In With, to मंबाम ॥ •.mms, myt. e.theath. HATE the woning of CURIOR HATT world. •संसारमुख n. (संमार .. worldly Elist.Inc., मुम्ब n. happiness, Hijo Int, njoyment of a worldly waistener. संमृनिगा (मंति. this world, woridly. Nabalik ,गा./ Alt) the putut this sturhl ur worldly existence, संम्मतव्य m. ni to le reutlim beled. सकल m.n.i. entirr, wholti, all. मा 1 प्र 11 th coatial) to lust, to prinitiati मदमन् ॥ and iral. मदाचार 'मन ॥ Urmi,and आचार ॥ flutyl con. inct, m. ".. 01. Whus (ron. luct 17 yinml. .... listantly at print. सनाथ m. u. fixrupital, filled with, Protectirl.

·340 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. .. सपत्नी f. a fellow.wife. सर्वतः adv. in every direction. a meniber of an as सर्वभूतानि . Nom. & Acc. Pur. सभासद् m. sembly or court. all existing things. m. n. l. one who knows समक्रिय m... J. (सम equal, and, सर्वविद् क्रियाNoing) doing equally, everything elenhanded. सर्वस्व २. (सर्व all and स्व .) all wealth ozossession. ममन्तम् adv. round about. ममन्तात् alr: round about. सर्वाभिप्रेतहेतु m.(अभिप्रेत pat समन्त्रकम् air. by mantras, i.e., part. pass. of with अभिAnd . hoy repeating mantras. 9, desired, aimed at) the cause of [the attainment of] all ममम्त ... fall. desired objects. समाकुल m. n. f. occupicsl witl, full of सलिल M. water. HAITH m. company, ilssociation. Aą m. the sun. समान ॥. n. f. Chill. सविस्मय .. n. f. with wondey , समागपित Mst art. ?(१९५. of the wondering enthe सशोकm n. f. (स vith, शोक m मम् und आ. lauret. Son) afilicted with surrou ममिध !. small Mis of a sit- ससैनिक ४.f. accompuried by cred crie, such as indumbani. tular thrown into the Sikili - सस्ज 6th conj. Trism. the or There one really ममीहिन ॥ ॥... What is desired सह "th उद्, to the alle, to "" n uttisincil opyret. allengedte, to lie tot • to ful समुपम । equil to समुपारुद ॥ ॥ . सहस्र ॥ . thousand. (Tiarell. महनधा। 1 to a thousand parts समपाहत (1 MIN Part महस्रश iit I thousands. आ महाय ॥ 1. 1.!'. I LOlitinull. सम्यक nir. correct. H. सहिष्ट ... ightist सम्यच .... मांम्ख्य ..anirutam ot सम्राज .. grea: Kiliy. elit. prron. सांनाहुक m. ... oil Wengal सराण णी ! ath, dispositor Arrangement of things. माशात th Presence ot, सरमा ... name of the atth of in sight of. सागर m. thurran. सरस्वती... name of n river. साचिय्य n. counselorshit. soldiers. fica 1171'. iser 2.1 सम्.उप. 1 11 । arlour. .

·SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 241 HRT ith cowi. PTT nur, well. 27 (out, and HTRUE m. naine of a priest. conj. Parasm. cith pro arasm. to ac duce. complish. ( ns groeiend 70 rors.) good, ATTITT IN. 11. f. ordinary.. well, Futa m. name of a mimby chict HTYJE 7 M. 11. 1. (FTY 11. 1. j. amil ally of Riui. yool, and an comrluct)wed. Tuga the day on which conducted. Soma juice is drank in the FT To m. 1. f. ordinary, com Soma sacrifice. mon to one with others. मुधाम्यन्दिन m. " . ( F.1. € faft.1. al vei se repeatedat the ta) 10 ang netur time of himling the sacred fire. 972., 11. of Arjuna. AT7 ind. in the trening, afarrol. iz magice et fourl. ATT !! prouer, pith. मुभि m.. .!. figrant ATTERT n. the soil of Surami, i no (FT 1. a gol, spring doc. m. a piece of boile.) the boile aria ini. with (used with the of the souls, heaven. instrumental). Tutora n. (ami n. it golelen ANTHRA 1. n. f. universal (sove. nahlreil) : rrign). luunerii cons of goxl. ATTITA MM. N to all 377* fra m. n. . molest. 1. attention, attentive. मुहदयनम m. "... intimatr, Affi funt holy mantra diarist. 1 suoride Turvrdla, leally q?n cui sont to A birth called Gayatri, au repeutel to, mith q. to produce. by all Diamanlits til pirry day. Ą 4th money it. tha, to শাখায় 114. 01. Puh. cum of porlue. wonderful conduct. Ą Och conj. l'arusn. to impel, RITERT 1. frizuship, lielp to push forum FIETH. lateraturi, cumpsition मुक्ति ।म Mulरनि. I. amech) HEAT f. bud. crowd words of li, correct Afgf. accomplishmere. *** ption. for lst conj. Purusm. to rryll. liikunj, to norte. lat", tu turn out well on auspi. 89 91 urotren. riously. R77 n. 1. agorable, plea. Xith cen. Puure81, and Âm. to extract Smaquic'. m. the family of the sun, 1st conj. Parasm. and 2nd che solar race. 21 ON siunt. मर्यवंश ·DELUND BUUR OF SANSKRIT. समू, with सम्. E म ist conj. Parasm. to run. FAFF 9th conj. Parasm. to sto to become stiff oprigid, to b & (caus.) with faç, to drive come haughty: away; to expel. with to bring in contacte | FHFH in. a post, a column. withy +R unite with; with F, 2nd conjo Parasm. and Âm to abandono to praise; with 37fy, to praise manfaa y M. the camp of an 5th conj. Parusm. and Åtm army. to cover, to spead, to stren सेन्द्र m. ». f. with India. TT 1. serving, resorting to, F 9th conj. Parasm. and Åtm practising to cover; with 3TT, to corer, to HET.). service. spread. FT 4th conj. l'ayasm. to bring to a S. woman, 'wife an end, to tuishi, to destroy; F&T with 37a, to stay, to abide, With qfr and E, to end in, with 39, to go to. to result in, with fỆ and 37, स्थावरजङ्गमm.n.J. (स्थावर m... to determine, to resolve, to f.immoveable and for m.it endeavour, to strive. f. Moveable) immoveable and सोच्छास m. n Belgring breath. moveable. FTT 1. stairs, steps. feta past part. of FIT, abiding, सोमवंशविभूषण m... J. (सोम m. being, existing. the moun) one who adorns cat m. the name of a sage. the lunar race, an ornament | 2nd conj. Paraan. to bathe. of the lunar race (of kings). EITT f. a muscle. ATT 1. 11. 1. gentle. FATE 4th conj. Parnsm. to bear igafa ul. son of Suyavas. affection to. ATTTFTTH. Jood goveriment. 2nd conj. Parasm. to flow, to सौवर्ण 1.1.1. golden. drop, to ooze. ferir porexpart. tumbling, m. n. summit. tripping GET F. wish, desire. Relea n. & slip', a mistake. e 6th conj. Parasm. to break, FTS 1st conj. Parasm. to cry, to split asunder. to thunder, [uipple. fedifargi n. an opened atı. FITAT 1. the female breast, the muhta flower. WTF, 1. a bunch. feha n, smile. FIFTlst conj. Atm. and 5th conj. x with €, to forget ; for it l'arasm, to become fixed or forgotten. rigid. to becowe laughty. PT m, a chariot.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 243 स्वकर्तव्य n. one's duty. हनुमत् m. name of a moukey स्वजनवियोग. separation froyn devotee of Rima. one's own muen or relations. il introj. expressing won Fra m. noise, mar!! der gr sorros. 21 com). Parasm to sleep "... f. a kille. Fam. dream, BT a horse. F2014 (6960.1. Atme to love ling" the word 'isit. dream, to speak in i dem. Efti , pane of Brahmana FET". 16. f. 4ofesistent. fer u. name of a holy place FRÍTTFT, W. (FOT W. Check at the foot of the Ilımilayas. of a husband, am FIT, . Eftr".name of a king. time) time of change å hus EPI". an offering banı. 3,111 ( M. Pu! to abandon. Fly ind. in person, of humself. ET Fm, a sound. te s tepkills, toonase end, FTTH m. 1. f. une longeng सम्, tu, le sitting after heaven. afiz hl.n. I dyed yellow with feat. one's own gooil. turmen FI 1, a lmar mansio11, 11.10 हाम्य ॥ 5, laughits. of a constellation. हाम्यकार्य i lulusart. Erw. taste, titfting. fe och con Runnism ter , with f. suert, palatable. fé A ly as ithe, mij' l'ararın faculeowner. und 10ch moj to kill, to FIRTT WI. 1. I. dependent on centras oneself. FER Ib. f. mund-10114, marni. F 1st conj. Purasm. to soum. म्वेद in. Sweat, perspiration. हिमपात w. frost, os, a particle or dop of perspiration. हिमाचल like the lwilayas FETOTT. 1 nun!.. of a moume. sta 16. j destitute of. Fanexpletive used in nanations हीरकमणि a diamond Bril IT odr, by violence, l'ir11871 to murrifice. Et priest puit, pass. of 69, struck. ritk 79 and ST 1x conj. 2nd l'arusm. and Åtn. to bring, to Pura81. to kill, cond with 3 or 377, bo strik, irith take. fa, to kill, to destroy, tu ruinfos W. 11. f. (5 n. 7, u sellel I. ib. 1 arou ho (01) हन् ·211 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. the heart, मर्मन् 16. the vital pirts, and festo cut,) piercing the vital parts of tlie heart Bindi. a locativ putide, O' Ili u Canist. होतृ 1. a sacriſkie priest whose duty it is to repeat the mantras. 2nd conj. Åtm. to conceal Prith अप ?rith नि. 1. n. f. short. 1,37d comida I'arusm. to blushi to t aslitus) ·II.-GENFRAL GLOSSARY OF ENGLISH WORDS OCCURRING IN THE BOOK. .1.1 पर ...tinu'. '! अतिमुक्तलता '. • Anulo आम्पद ॥. आवाम ॥. .111111 विलोभित ! Alisus अगुत्न. past ||1. अनुप- :: ... ( !!us of लभ । वि 97 past part. 10mlingly तथा च नथा-इत्यम् B. lequire the strong. I'm DIMI...1 भ्रुवाहन and ]0+h conj. (711 उप Arythin the Panda. Title traitor द्रुह Eul 1.1 प्रतिकुल ॥ ... l'orarsal. Titl. - . . रणभूमि/- ining मंनिहित/"" !' 111.11. .. ( 1 1 यन ।। हि..... धाth मम् नि B. अमर ॥ 1cto..! आत 1-1 |' अर्दित :13.!!!! 12 13 मिन.. आदि "'. It Iss. E ... श्रहा। विधाम 1. 1itual huy}".. .. 10, कृषि PIL' नामित NITY. . हता , कृपिकर्मणे ।।। नम्ः रामण गनुपि ... अज..... !" Jim नामित Risit hting ..' 1'बीवन्ती ...pint ।। of जीवं, मजीवा. जीव ॥ ht BHIL Lument भृग and म मह 11. With:) liichi. Re: मंधि 11. मम्म्य. शि. प्रा. Dloud i: nul. ht 1.1..', प्रमुक्तकण्ठम्, ॥ ...। Ancestual पितृपैतामह Agoda अङ्गद .... आशिम | अन्य Aiga अङ्गा । B... गागिन ॥ people or ot.! . . .:. P.htm ननु । वाम् ॥ Apho! 1-31] मत्र । आकति Aastance मादाग्य । By.... बामणगज ॥ Avilay उत्पथम् Er.in... ! 'irll अग्रहत्या/. Avina आश्विन ॥ Bracl शावा. month. Bria वधम् . , hamrit. a ار، دمه .1 ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. m. . mm. 246 Conceited अवलिम past part. Bright half शुक्रपक्ष m. of the Conclave समाज. पषिद् सभा.. lunar month. Bring up वर्धय. causal of Conduct properly सदाचारं प्रति- Prith सम्, पोषणं or भरणं कृ. पद्, सदाचारेण वृत. Broad विशॉल m. n... Confined passfora past part. Brute पशु . pass. निबढ़ psst part. pass. Build 77 3rd gonj. Atm. vith faç. Criqueror विजिगीषु Bs hundreds शतश' id. Constantly अनिशम adr. C. Construct मा with निर्. (पार . Convince with a crus., Call वत्म . JAN. प्रतीतिं कृ. Call चा l अभि, अभिहित call- Cooking utensil स्थाली.. Cullina forma pores. part. of Costly HET m. n. f. थाith अभि. Cotton तूल . पिचु m. Canal कुल्या.. Counsellor मन्त्रिन् ॥धीसचिव (auto सर्ग m. Crad प्रेक्षा (apital राजधानी Croale Te Ist conj. Parasm. with ('ptuneil a rust purt. pass. आ. ग्रह Cruel नृशंस m. n. f. Carpet कुथ m. (elestial damst: अप्मरम् .. सुरा- Cry रु 2nd conj, Parasm. क्रन्द Ist conj. Purasm. Curious विलक्षण M... .f. Chandraketu चन्द्रकेत् ॥. name Cutting छेद m. of the soul of Lakshmana, brother of Rima. D. Churung handle मन्धनदण्ड Dark श्याम m. n... (मन्धन n. churming. and दण्ड Death वध . 1. a handle) मन्थान . Deceive धा with अति and सम्, Cobra फणिन् ॥ नाग ॥. लभ् with वि and प्र, व Culunin FTX 1. conj. Atm. Commander चमूपति.सेनापतिm. | Deeposit न्यास m. निक्षेप m. Commentator टीकाकार m. टीका- Deprive of g 1st conj. with अप. Descendant वंश्य m. ..... कुलज Commoi साधारण m. ... सामान्य m..f. m.n... Desire काड्डा.. कान . Communicating (with the river) | Desperately प्रसह्य ind. alr. आत्म- संगत past part. or संगच्छमान निरपेक्षम् . साहसेन insti. res part. used as an adt. . जना... . 10th कृत् m.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 347 १४. परिगणित pret print. pass. . माद . तुम् । LAtInte. . m. u.of. - Timls कुल ॥. Destroy Fiss70% conj. rrith Enumeratedपरिकीर्तित past purt. सन 10tireonj. ritn नि. चो सम् inf निपदगितुम् । Ermal शामत ॥ ॥... 1).stroved ETH je Bart. of Ever प्रति prep. ध्वंस, उच्छिन्न Pust yeat par. Em!! प्रतिसंवत्मरम् air.itut. of छिद् with t. El अनर्थ ॥.पीरा/संकट. Earate Distruction धंस. नाश. अष. वन् Mith. उत् , उस्म्वनि- [of भित. ifient भिन्न ust Ut. IN Eऋने int. iittirent (various) विविध m.ni. भाव ॥. अस्तित्व Tithiculty अमौकर्य Hypont साम. अगतरित " कट" 100 mille Jirghatiins दीनमम्m nine उ उन्मूलयितम् ॥ of a lishu. luonnars (12.11 वादविवाद". अद्भुत [ica.st' व्याधि . F. shonst tamithun, कपटपन Furkulls भनया, निष्ठया (कपट ॥ iitml, anीन .. Ft. I.1 नियमा ... It; umblins). धुरि निल. Joisturl, तुट ::: उपधामदिन।।. उपवास }), tor भिपज :. : 10 दिन Dr.that नाटक ॥ Tit.lun वरः॥ 11. चुद | " l कापुम्प .. 111 अर्ज It ( 1'It Firont of their रणभूमि ) E. सौर्य . Fight, to, पहाय, गुहे. योडम्. Tasti.rn पूर्व पान्य 1. बन्य.......... m. "...J. । T.: शिवा । Eluation विद्या .. अध्ययन ॥. F!... अग 1st (in Attith विनयन ....... पला कृतविच ... " ! मम्मृतचिन .. . . . . . . 1 नामाधन n. ॥ 1. मुविनीत I"...! भूमि ! Eul कार्य ". फल फलावाप्तये अन्ना ditatinati..... ! Aftht Ftr..., दुर्ग fliitml. Tuliपर An it. PM. Iul उदर्क m. अवमान ? परिणाम ममधिगन !tytit. Lxs. m , उद.. in th... 'tol. Frayant मुरभि n n.j. Enragound to be prest part of Thauthstor.t uchetin कपटप्रबन्यm. . M T} मुख 1) 11 धर्म: -- . । .

·248 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 11. M Free of Immortal अमृत past rurt. of मृ मुक्त past pass. part. with अ, अमर m.n... मुक्ता..; to leo free एच 9a88. Furniture' गृहोपस्कर Himportance गुरुत्व... महत्त्व है. a matter of importance गुरु- G. कार्य. Gadhi TTT tlir jame of a 'Irprison कारागृहे निक्षिप. king. In person स्वयम् Ind. Gamble दिव, 1th (ory. दीव्यति Indiscretion Start m. 3rd Pers. eing. ... Indrajit इन्द्रजित् m. the son of Gate TT 1. Râvana. Gently मन्दम् alr. Inexppressible अनिर्वचनीय m.n.f. Ghobt zत ॥ बेताल ग.पिशाच अनिर्णनीय m. n. ...किम् m.n. lio round प्रदक्षिणीकृ. [vc.. .. mrith the asleled. Gool ममीचीन . . .. निपुण Ingrutitude कृतघ्नता . Gourd कमण्डलु m. Inhuman मानवानह m... निरनु. Gram धान्य ॥ क्रोशं कर्म. (ireer TT WI. Instint zafera past part. pass.. Guardhan of a tit दिक्पाल . उद्दीमित past art. pass. H Instructor TEYTT# m. n. f Harules अनधकाग्न् ि।.... Imidle द्र ]st comJ. Parasm. arth Harsh परुप ॥...! Hands पर अभि. पाक्षर... 1. Invisible 377 .f. Haste, in मर्मभ्रमम् alr. J. Haughty gan puust part. Jamadagni जमदग्नि m. name of a Held (us a linecting) मिलित 1st Rishi. art. llelpless अनाथ ॥..... Jurisandha जरासंध m. name of a king of Magadhi. Ilemingada CATH W. the same Juice रस m. of a king Hormit वानप्रस्थ m यति m. .Justधर्मण, न्यायेन. High उन mn 1. K. How many time- कतिकृत्वः ind Kaikry in 1. name of one I of the writes of Diss'aratha. Ikshuikus, the. Wat 'n (useil Kalitigas fest: plur. name of in the plural) name of the & jeople or of their country. Jine of king to which Rina Kirtaviren कार्तवीर्य n. the name belonged. of a king killed by Paras'u- || सग्ण m.... Piuna. ७ .... :

·SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRIT. 249 rith अनु. . . कृष्णा.. 11 11 चम्म ॥ Kausalyan कौसया/. name of one tween the sons of Pandu and of the whyes of Das'aratha, Dhitalishtra. Kacp contenteal, to, #nus. Mahendra महेन्द्र m. name of a mountain and other adljncent country. Keeping canteentet अनुरअन... (ils applied in the subjects of March against thrill wf. a king Market पण्यवाधिका.. आपण m. Kick लत्ता.। . लत्तया प्रहगति in Mathuri मथुरा Jumpt a kil. Killed हन Miss Murs.. मोरी name of aly. Kinsult शानि ॥ बन्धु asti. ! milsidual of it. Krauli h.d aौच. 11.20" Its of Sta उपाय अगुपाय . birds. M.inmal l ओपथि.. Kri-kını, sisted of, Jilhe It' औपय औषधि/t Kultitasahan कुमारमंभव dhund hih. . . . a hi". hun of a !!! Khlil JI. .in ... ... ... वैद्यक ॥. L आपुर्वेद . प्रभा hathiht गता गत्रि. 1.! की Law धर्मशास्त्र Mit आई Mक्षणं. Lary अलम तन्द्रिल Mulfill Lingth आयाम ". Lint व्हा. ( • Itihh!. of an ill. Littlem..लवता. M.int व्यापार . N Lincurt शलभ । Lurl TTU. नग्न ..J. Lov. विद्या... Salt नल, Attit ot.king. Lone 7 Piepolol 1.thi नाम 11. नाना ॥, sing. Lust. t) मिह ith m of नामन. he is lied तम्मिन्निधति. Y... निमर्ग Iove अनुराग m. Vrublar. ETT VI M. जाल.. Magadlia मगधा 1.। न कदा it. नव (l. न कहिनिन् nt. the plur.) naine of . ("Uner! or its people. Nichola निशाद maut f a wild tul, 01 an malas niual of it. Mahalbiratat महाभाग्न of an epic propun celebrating N0w-4days afa uir. iru. Sumber मंल्या/. the quarrel, wlid Mills for " दयनर ... Voth पता In 1. I.IN ·250 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. Post पद.. llani rathi 3 प्रत्यक्षम् ।।. . 0. Pity दया . : दयाई m.h. f. mel Object प्रयोभन n. उद्देश m. [शात्. ted with pity. Occasionalls कालेकाले, प्रसंगाव- Place of refugee आश्रयस्थान ". Occoun अर्णव ॥. • Plunder लोप्त ग. लुण्ठन ॥. Offici• अधिकार Pahtis नीतिशास्त्र Office of the king गजपुरूप ॥. Originally अंग्रे'. any ! अग्र, कुम्भ आदीdut kinnar आदि. Poverty दारिद्रय . दुर्गति .. Octorne. अभिभूत //t. IPouler क्षोद m. चूर्ण lower प्रभाव pain of th अभि. पर्याकुल m . / आकृल m.nl 11ASYaran प्रस्रवण m. (Oम्वीय ॥1 1 mountain. Pratil उद्यत uttart. of यम P. Puid thak प्रत्यर्पित print l'oest IC, 10... ममक्षम् ।। pares of the caus, of प्रति Ph.ful गधाकर ॥ ॥ पीटाकर INUTE !}}=t tath other पर. म्पग्मंघ 11111] P. पाण्ड 1. विवर्ण Pro]] युनः art 1 of 1. पानादी ।... 1111 - 1 उचित the counts of the l'utilimia I're 11: रिक्थ ॥ वित्त ". Tak पत्रक॥ !!!!! उन्मित }+t Prot. उत्मे IPL11111ta]. परंतपm int' of a मिनी । in. 11. प्रताप ॥ पगरम . Pralhad पर्णाद 11" ht. Pu'. ! 1 दग्दशिन् m .... Pal पर्वन् ॥. ri ../ canto. Pulmi-ht!: दण्ड । P...१.१॥ मनोधर्म इन्द्रियत्ति 1. moi of work a thaling vari P.tilm littint! is ....... .. ..lnshines und of nath.!!! - and ituali-t:' Tithittatra पाटलिपुत्र ...ist of An It m lugal... Pink विशुद्धशील Person शरीर. देह Tutor प्रयोजन " कार्य। Phili.or.ht ! तस्वविद दरान्सारिन, उत्सारिन Plots भति.... देवनिष्ठा... Master Scause Piginnr यात्रा .. सु.:. उद 11 पुगग । . ܨܢܐܕ ·SECOND BOOK OF WAXSKRIT. 251 ". Q Prime table family, अभिजनवत् Quater (देशीयो भाग), (of the ...कुडीन .. ias or ught) याम m. Responsibility of governing R गग्यधुरा. Raghuvansa रघुवंश m Reston दाप्रति. of a pot.iml Klidisa Rethi कृत् (n.itm नि. Teजीर "th Raging प्रवल. '.. बलायम Ruhikn चीक m m ... 1. Rains diploma (Virla. kaise' नम् ।।। . th उद Righrrin ऋग्वेद of॥ Jangraular प्रधानगजद्रोहिन M. Rijigrill: गजगृह • of a Pालय। आन्दोलय dn. city in Well 10 दिम् पद limo, *1. R..!! प्रत्यागम. Rutline. अविनय ॥ Rifiulin...: देदीप्यमान ।। int. Pulmi रुक्मिणी i. wif of विधाजमान !"t. KIshan. Region In tum अन्तर । 1.1 रिक्षण liuth. निर्पण :11. Relation ॥ बन्धुजन s ज्ञानि मगर ". Maint of a king. Re... S..ket माकन notatown. 14. सामवेद Rohit.. दगांमि!ur. Teda Re!!! it. In धर्मग्रन्ध Samtliga .संध्यावन्दा. Renal!.' पुनद्राह .ali शमी / a kind of the Re nuaryका... ..ith of Jamme in मर . dist! Elli:of Put: 1:1hyi. 1.maa Sury nihaniमन्यभामा J. maintil Reat पर at it tihi with of KILM. Repront भर्ती 11 du ...it... मीपणन ॥. arth निरः दिश 6th any. 11/ of a hing प्रति । आ. वचन ॥ उति. Tiptd अभिमन idol at 2.11. 11.:: : स्वाभिमान . प्रमिह 1st art , कर्तृत्व S... अर्थ नाभिमनी ut...! .. athly Syn चिहा. Sun!. ऋजु m n. f. आर्जवत. Reio tab विशिष्ट ॥.. सरल m.n.f. मुक्तः ।। १ '' LIAN 1 a Hitme 111. 1. of a ·SECOND BOOR OF SANSKRIT. shilful चतुर Titli ऋत ॥. 11. 252 Simpal: कवलम् adr. Thought संकल्प बुनि. Sinful पाप... ..... Thoughtlessly | adr:. रभसात्, '.. कुशल .. मोहात्. Slustry दाम्य .. Tour lipg लग,m. n. f. Smit Jith अप ।। Towards of overning an ac- नि, पीर 10th conj. ८.111) अभि-prry. Suntsched itna आक्षिप्त 10t. 're वणिज-n. Pars शिर th आ. Tramml वन्धन । निगड ... Somethiin' : कदाचिन् Tiaras land Ith conj. Tarusm. ulth आ. Sughtप्रार्थित /yort intof True Col, thu मत्यम्वरूप 1. ॥ अर्थ ॥१॥ प्र. 1,60 परमात्मन् ॥. Sournt मन्व॥ Saritual admi उपाध्याय U गुगहित ॥. Sra कण ॥ गीकर ॥ Tutatholi...] अगाध ...J. Sta स्था... धिन [111111111 अमर्पण ॥ Stem बन्धन". । 1.16 01.1 निर्मूल m. n.. Staram सोनम. Inty . अक्षित utst Print. Street सध्यम 1. Sultant विषय (11 min dl अविरतम् . Subtle 11. तन्मात्र'. । iill. प्रायेण । air. प्राय Sultan महमा ।।1. 11. '. Sulk a मुदेव . V. Sumit IIT साम्राज्य. पार. ........। वारणावती | me मष्टय ople'. Su.! भूमापक ... I भृशम् ॥ int च्यापर्ण and11- Nitin विदुर । .'. Ponr hamt. dual of the श्यापर्ण fails. . ... ... which at a furt's tarin -- विगट 1.1 of a kng. Stem विधि॥ पहाति भागम । T. V-1............ ." विश्रामग्रासाद ॥. Tiken, th..!!", गृहीत्वा, ..... ..'! Army of Indra. Hity of ग्रह. W. Tilinाली! a kind othe. Thunt पालम्भ .. Wait is l Au. rith 'Tenanth. निर्जन Territory विषय Wash, t... निरूपयितुम . of Thick स्थल in 1. विपुल गए , thनि. "" 1: प्रचण्ड . N: आगमन .. Vत्र Wal: मध्य.

·SECOND BOOK OF S.INSKRIT. 253 Well-behifed afta 1. n. f. Well-lisposed the past prut. What sort of E 11. 16. f. Whenever यदा यदा-तटा ना Whirlwind चक्रवात . झञ्झावात III. 11. TWork परिश्रमं कृ 8th conj. Parasm and song Y. Yahadatta यज्ञदत्त... a proper [Vedu. Vinjurveda name of a Human। यवन m. a foreigner, a Maboglan, it Greech in an- (Itnt Im) 1.। अथापि ..... - कनिष्ठ .. Your Wicked (persons) झूठ .. खला. दृगत्मन् ॥ W! पक्ष . Without wealth धनहीन " Women of Tu जानना .. tum.pun. Wild वच. वचन - ममानोऽयं ग्रन्थः । शुभं भृयादध्येतरध्यापकम्य च । BOMBAY: PRISTED AT THE. VIRALA SA...' Press.

·No text on this page.

·ERRATA,
Page 10), l. fr hand columu, l 10 reud y
Page 16, ught and collhn I !Jorna?
Page 31 jo, totala ww Toftia.
Page H. righe blu codem l. 1. -101 Mar ...
Pagi ijt ! i ling av rewridge.
! :D Your gi pol sti.
Page 37,1 t for at malari.
Panama 82,1 tfiom luttom for the
Pag, so I. 1 taon bontom 1 EIRO. 12.
Dung 10: I. 11 fiol button for it2011) ott
Hinn 110 l. t, po Train rand TTT
Pag. 156. I. 7 hou bottom, forte nel
Page 1 lite lemn colonn li for 11.11. pored by
Page 28 night land colum,
Iture threat rich pei
Page 255, lett based celian, I 15 five attendanne remont :
tindi.